Statistics Archives - The Tech Report https://techreport.com/category/statistics/ Tech Explored Sun, 04 Feb 2024 23:08:13 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.2 https://techreport.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/cropped-techreport-logo-1-32x32.png Statistics Archives - The Tech Report https://techreport.com/category/statistics/ 32 32 30+ Data Breach Statistics (2024 Data and Trends) https://techreport.com/statistics/data-breach-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/data-breach-statistics/#respond Sun, 04 Feb 2024 23:07:16 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536365 Data Breach Statistics

In This Guide Key Data Breach Statistics Major Data Breach Statistics 1. Malware Attacks Have Risen More Than Ever Before in 2023. 2. Taking Note of a Breach Can Take...

The post 30+ Data Breach Statistics (2024 Data and Trends) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Data Breach Statistics

Though cybersecurity awareness grows, study after study indicates escalating data breach activities against individuals and enterprises—2022 saw this sinister trend continue its upward climb globally at a record scale.

Data breach statistics show that the average cost increased by 2.6% to $4.35 million in 2022 from $4.24 million in 2021. In critical infrastructure organizations, however, the average cost of a data breach is $4.82 million. As society progresses firmly into the digital age, safely navigating its benefits and risks proves paramount.

This piece offers readers insight by examining the latest data breach statistics for 2024 and beyond. Learn crucial details surrounding prominent breach events, from root causes to victim impact spanning multiple industries. Additionally, discover expert predictions around emerging cyber threats on the horizon, along with proactive security controls organizations and private citizens can employ right now to help turn the tide against the rising data breach epidemic. Let’s dive in.

Data Breach Statistics

Key Data Breach Statistics

  1. Breaches that result from phishing take as long as 295 days to get resolved.
  2. Phishing attacks account for almost 22% of all cases of data breaches that happen today. 
  3. Cloud-based Data breaches take up a large chunk of 45% of cases.
  4.  Hospitals are not left out of the loop, as 30% of all data breaches occur there.
  5.  A whole lot of accounting records, up to 42 million, got into the hands of strangers from March to February 2022.
  6. Yahoo experienced its share of data breaches when an identity thief crept into its database, carting away information affecting 1 million persons. 
  7.  Quarter one of 2022 won’t be quickly forgotten as it recorded 817 breaches in the United States. 
  8. Up to 19% of planned data breaches were successful because the bad players got help from an insider
  9. Studies show that 77% of businesses do not have the skills to help them resolve data breaches. 
  10. Most of Facebook’s breach issues in 2019 resulted from data leakage.

Major Data Breach Statistics

Data Breach Statistics

1. Malware Attacks Have Risen More Than Ever Before in 2023.

There has been a rise in malware attacks today more than ever before. This is true as data shows a 2% rise in malware attacks year after year. Many experts think this trend is due to the rise of crypto-jacking and the activities related to the Internet of Things. 

2. Taking Note of a Breach Can Take As Long As 287 Days.

Spotting a data breach took an average of 287 days back in 2021. The delay was because of the lack of security expertise and how complex IT has grownThe complexity at which cyberattacks have grown is also one of the reasons for the lengthy time. 

3. Healthcare Bears 30% Brunt of Cyberattacks.

Hospitals, which ought to be a place of relief for many, are not in any way spared from the risk of data theft. Healthcare in 2021 suffered a heavy blow when a data breach hit 51% of hospitals. As large as 337 breaches took place in the first half of that same year. This caused a major setback for 19,992,810 people and brought the need to tighten cybersecurity in the sector. 

4. A Large Percentage of Malware Comes in Through Email.

Verizon’s findings show that most of the cybersecurity issues we have seen in the past were 94% from Email. These findings stemmed from real-life situations of 41,686 incidents and data breaches, reaching 2,013 over the same period. 

5. Our Errors As Humans Rear Up 88% of Data Breaches.

As humans, we are not above mistakes. Many may forget to log out from their devices, mistakenly disclose their password, or absent-mindedly click on bad links. In one way or another, these errors open a window for bad actors to infiltrate the system and steal one’s data. A study made by Stanford University shows that human errors are what causes 88% of the data breaches we experience today. 

6. Ransomware Victims Doubled Between April 2022 and the End of March 2023.

Bad people often inject malware to lock an individual or organization’s system, hindering access unless they pay a ransom. Records show that the number of times bad people use this antic has doubled, especially between April 2022 and March 2023

7. Picus Security Sent Out a Message to the United Kingdom FCA on Cybercrime.

Freedom of information (FOI) was sent to the financial conduct authority of the United Kingdom, requesting the agency to look into the rising cases of cybercrime, which has been pouring in for a couple of months. The FCA had 55 cases of material cyber issues on its desk in the first half of the year 2022Several cases of cybercrime, precisely 25%, that occurred in 2022 were from distributed denial-of-service (DDoS) attacks. This was quite startling as it was just 4% at the close 2021. 

8. Data About 200 Million Voters Was Leaked Out in 2017.

The year 2017 will remain in the minds of many citizens of the United States for a long time. Up to 200 million voter data went viral online, which brought a question mark to the whole process. 

9. eBay Was Not Spared From the Menace, As 145 Million of Its Records Got leaked. 

The 2014 records of eBay got exposed to the public, causing 145 million of its data to be laid bare before hackers.

10. TJX Companies Inc. in 2007 Had a Breach that Carted Away 94 Million of its Records.

TJX, just like many others, witnessed a security breach that affected many records. As many as 94 million of the company’s records went into the hands of hackers in 2007. 

Data Breach Cost Statistics

Cost Stat

11. Solving An Issue of Ransomware Can Cost An Average of $5.13 Million.

Times are changing, and so has the cost of fixing data breaches, which has risen in no small way. Getting off a ransomware attack cost an average of $5.13 million in 2023. This is 13% more than what it had cost last year. 

12. It Now Costs $165 Per Capita to Resolve a Single Case of Data Breach.

The average cost per capita in handling one case of breach is now a dollar higher than in 2022.

13. The Cost of Taking off Data Breaches From the Necks of Hospitals has Risen to $10.93 Million.

Healthcare has not been the same since 2020, as the cost to settle data breaches reached $10.93 millionFor 13 years and counting, it has taken the spotlight in terms of ridding of data breaches. 

14. It Cost a Huge Amount of $4.95 Million to Completely take Away a Data Breach that Lasted Up to 200 Days.

Casting away a data breach that lasts up to 200 days can swallow up to $4.95 million.

15. Over 50% of the Time Spent Solving a Breach Comes in the Next Year.

Most businesses can get back 51% of the money they had spent on solving a breach of data issue in the next year.

16. 2023 has Much to Bring to Mind As the United States Takes a Large Chunk of Data Breach Cases.

The country, standing at $9.48, has spent the most on clearing off cases of data breaches in just 2023. The Middle East has been following closely with the trend, with $8.07 million as its average cost. 

17. A Jumbo Breach that Hits 60 Million Records Costs As Much As $332 Million.

Mega breaches, which are as high as 60 million records in 2023, cost an average of $332 million. This is low; it was $401 million just two years ago.

18. Hospitals Habitually Spend 64% More Just on Advertising After a Breach Hit.

Most healthcare centers will spend money on adverts after lying low for two years. This they do to gather more clients after the dust of a data breach has settled down.

19. The Costliest Attack Standing on the Web is Phishing, With $4.9 Million.

Phishing is now high in 2023, with costs taking up to $4.9 million to resolve.

20. Companies that Are Carefree on Data Breaches Use Up An Average of %5.05 Million.

Defiance to the rise of breaches does cost a business an average of $5.05 million to attend to an issue. This is way higher, with 12.6% of what companies that are mindful of attacks spend. 

Ways by Which Breaches Happen

Ways by Which Breaches Happen

21. Persons Who Work Within the Scope of An Organization Are the Reason for 83% of Data Breaches.

Most breach cases in businesses are schemes plotted by persons in the system. Up to 83% of breaches in companies worldwide come from an insider.

22. Quite a Large Number of People Started Stealing Data for Quick Money.

Money is the sole reason why 95% of people take the risk of hacking into companies’ records.

23. A Total of 95% of Records that Were Breached Arose From the Retail, Technology, and Government Sectors in 2016.

Like the retail and technology sectors, the government was dealt a huge blow with attacks from data hawks in 2016. These sectors made up 95% of the attacks over that year.

Lifecycle and Average Time of Response

Lifecycle and Average Time

24. Picking Out a Case of Data Breach Takes An Average of 204 days.

Almost all companies around the globe spend an average time of 204 days sorting out cases of data breaches.

25. It is Much Faster to Identify Cases Using Threat Intelligence.

Spotting out cases can never be faster than when you use threat intelligence in our world today.

26. Solving an Issue of Data Breach With a 200 Lifecycle Can Cost An Average of $1.02 Million.

Nothing can be so frustrating as going around the case of a data breach. An organization spends an average of $1.02 million to get a data breach off its back.

27. It Takes An Average of 73 Days to Contain a Case of Data Breach.

Clearing off an issue of a breach in data takes most firms an average of 73 days.

Data Breach and Remote Workers

Data Breach and Remote Workers 

28. Experts Say That Remote Work Has Caused a Rise in the Number of Cyber Attacks.

Cases of cyber-attacks have skyrocketed since the rise of remote work. The remote work trend now has its downside, with 91% of experts stating a rise in cyber attacks.

29. As High as 62% of Businesses Saw a Rise in Cyber Attacks Throughout the Pandemic.

As businesses strove to get over the storm of the pandemic, data thieves heightened their means to make money for themselves. Having a statistic of 62% was indeed a cause for alarm as most saw this as a duel of the fittest. Companies were further put on their toes in securing their database as many hunts to lay hold of it. 

Finance and Data Breach

Finance and Data Breach

30. It Costs An Average of $4.45 Million to Solve a Case of Financial Data Breach.

The finance sector, like others, year in and year out, is hit by this peril called data breach. Clearing off a case costs as much as $4.45 million today.

31. Beanstalk Farms Lost $180 Million in April 2022.

A finance site, Bean Stalk Farms, lost $180 million to a crypto raid.

32. Payments Made by Crypto Players Rose to Hit $449.1 Million During the First Part of 2023.

Attacks by ransomware on crypto were not in any way friendly, resulting in the loss of $449.1 million at the beginning of 2023. 

Conclusion

Data breaches are problems that have caused many companies to lose not just money but also the public’s confidence. It has become a cause of concern to many experts looking for the best ways to curb this menace. Many people have been victimized and left to bear the brute of these attacks. None can be said to have been spared from healthcare, delivery, or social media companies. Almost all facets of life have felt the hard blow from data breaches today. The world will see less of this menace in times to come when all hands are placed on deck.

FAQs

What is the number of reported cases of data breaches?

How much does it cost to clear off a case of a data breach?

What is the highest data breach ever online in 2023?

References

The post 30+ Data Breach Statistics (2024 Data and Trends) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/data-breach-statistics/feed/ 0
Family-Friendly Escapes in Asia: Safest Holiday Destinations in Asia for Your Children https://techreport.com/statistics/family-friendly-holiday-destinations-asia/ https://techreport.com/statistics/family-friendly-holiday-destinations-asia/#respond Fri, 02 Feb 2024 13:54:37 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536933 Family on holiday in Asia

Looking for a family-friendly holiday destination in Asia for a safe and affordable vacation? You’ve come to the right place. We’re delighted to present this guide to the safest vacation...

The post Family-Friendly Escapes in Asia: Safest Holiday Destinations in Asia for Your Children appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Family on holiday in Asia

Looking for a family-friendly holiday destination in Asia for a safe and affordable vacation? You’ve come to the right place.

We’re delighted to present this guide to the safest vacation destinations in Asia for families.We highlight the top family-friendly Asian destinations in terms of safety, value, and things to do.

Let’s dive in.

Top 10 Family-Friendly Asian Escapes

A family-friendly holiday is first and foremost a safe and comfortable destination, and a place where people of all ages can relax and have fun. The ten locations in Asia on our list offer that, and more.

A lot of these countries have seen very little tourism during COVID-19 and are excited to welcome people back.

Bali, Indonesia

Number of foreign tourist arrivals to Bali, 2008 tp 2023
Source: Statista

The peaceful tropical paradise of Bali is rich in relaxing and cultural experiences that would appeal to children and adults alike. If you’re looking to relax as a family, many hotels on the island offer spas, yoga classes, and Bounce Bali that are catered towards both kids and parents.

If you prefer a more active vacation with your kids, you can spend your time exploring temples, going to animal encounters (watch out for the monkeys!), or learning water sports. The well-developed tourism sector, the friendly locals, and the country’s commitment to supporting its nature will ensure a safe and enjoyable vacation for your family.

Indonesia is one of the most affordable countries in Asia, so if you’re a family of digital nomads, you’ll have a great time here. Make sure to keep an eye on the latest travel advice to Bali, and note that it’s illegal to bring certain medications into the country, such as ADHD medication.

Singapore

Number of international visitor arrivals in Singapore from 2013 to 2022
Source: Statista

This Asian country is one of the best in the region in terms of quality of life. Singapore is a country renowned for its cleanliness and safety, and offers plenty of family activities.

A mix of concrete “jungle” and… the actual jungle, the South-East Asian nation offers sights that’d surely capture the attention of kids of all ages. Attractions, such as the Universal Studios theme park, the Singapore Zoo, the S.E.A Aquarium, and many others, would ensure an exciting and safe vacation for an entire family.

To make sure your time in Singapore is hassle-free, we recommend familiarizing yourself with the local laws. For example, don’t pack chewing gum, as it’s illegal in the country, and don’t litter.

Phu Quoc, Vietnam

Number of international tourist arrivals in Vietnam, 2023
Source: Statista

The largest island in Vietnam, Phu Quoc, offers beautiful untouched landscapes of rainforests and sandy white beaches. Whilst it lacks the bustle of Singapore or Tokyo, Phu Quoc is a perfect family vacation destination if you’re looking for some peaceful, relaxing time of lying on a beach, building white sandcastles, or teaching your kids to snorkel.

If you’re looking to introduce your kids to off-the-beaten path destinations and instill a love for traveling, this island is an excellent starting point.

The island is still a somewhat undiscovered destination and its peaceful vibe makes it a safe haven. However, if the kids get bored, you can take them to the Vinvonders amusement park. To make sure your holiday is as safe as possible, always carry some form of photo ID and a copy of your visa if applicable, and respect local customs.

Koh Samui, Thailand

Parents and child at the seaside

This Thai island is a perfect first-time Asian vacation for a family. It has a well-developed tourist infrastructure, offering a plethora of hotels with swimming pools beloved by children and adults alike.

On Koh Samui, you often have a choice between lying by the pool and on the beach – something people of all ages enjoy.

That’s not to say, though, that the island doesn’t offer other activities. There’s plenty to see with your family, from the Big Buddha Temple to the Namuang Waterfalls. Not to mention, the beautiful nature and the colorful markets.

Thai locals love children, and the hospitality staff is always available to help. Just keep an eye out for pickpockets when you’re strolling through the markets, and take care when hiking.

Phuket, Thailand

YoY growth rate of tourism in Thailand, 2019 to 2022
Source: Statista

Another Thailand destination on our list is Phuket. It’s a widely popular and vibrant family vacation destination with a well-developed infrastructure.

Whether you want to spend all your time on the beach or by the pool, or feel like exploring the island, there are plenty of activities on offer. From several water parks to elephant sanctuaries and Old Town walks, there’s something for people of all ages.

Given its developed infrastructure and friendly locals, Phuket is a very safe destination for families. We recommend you avoid the tuk-tuk altogether due to the sheer number of scams and take extra care when doing water sports such as rafting, since many mountain rivers in Phuket can be quite dangerous.

Dubai, UAE

Number of tourist arrivals in Dubai, 2022
Source: Statista

Don’t let the shiny, futuristic architecture intimidate you – Dubai is an excellent family vacation destination. The theme parks like LEGOLAND Dubai and IMG Worlds of Adventure, the water parks and pools, the KidZania, and many other kid-tailored venues make it a paradise for children and adults of all ages.

For adults, there’s plenty of shopping to do: you can visit the largest mall in the world whilst kids have the time of their lives in KidZania.

The hyper-modern destination is clean and safe. However, make sure that you observe the cultural norms of the country, especially when venturing outside the tourist areas, and don’t walk barefoot.

Jeju, South Korea

Most visited tourist attractions in Jeju, South Korea, in 2022
Source: Statista

The volcanic landscape of the South Korean Jeju island is prime for exploring as a family. The unique nature of the national parks, the cool Lava Tube, and the Jeongbang Waterfall flowing directly into the sea are only a few attractions for adventurous families and are great for family bonding.

For those that prefer more traditional kids’ activities, there’s also plenty to do in Jeju, from the Loveland Park and the Aquaplanet Aquarium to all-day exploring of a tangerine farm.

The island’s nature and the well-implemented safety measures make it a safe destination for a family that’s both exciting and tranquil. However, do keep in mind that not many locals speak English, so might be worth learning a little Korean to avoid any misunderstandings.

Tokyo, Japan

Number of inbound tourists to Tokyo, 2013 to 2022
Source: Statista

Unlike many other destinations on our list, the bustling Japanese capital doesn’t offer off-the-beaten path hiking trails and white sandy beaches. However, plenty of families with kids of all ages enjoy visiting it.

With its iconic theme parks like Disneyland, DisneySea, and Yomiuri Land, the Pokemon Center, and the Sanrio Puroland, the kids would surely make a lot of memories. For those who prefer more educational entertainment, Tokyo has plenty of museums and historical sites, as well as cultural experiences.

The capital of Japan has one of the best infrastructures in the world and very clean streets, making it one of the safest cities in the world. However, do keep in mind that any big city has at least some level of crime and stay cautious.

Kyoto, Japan

Monthly number of tourists visiting Kyoto in 2022
Source: Statista

If you love the idea of taking your family to Japan but would prefer to avoid the hustle and bustle of Tokyo, consider Kyoto instead. The culture-rich city offers a plethora of opportunities to introduce your children to the local traditions like tea ceremonies and kimonos.

For a bit of fun, Kyoto also has theme parks and interactive museums, which everyone in the family would enjoy.

Most of all, though, the city of Kyoto is a peaceful and serene place where you can truly bond as a family. It offers plenty of amenities, and is considered very safe. However, be mindful of the crowds as it can get very busy during the tourist season.

The Maldives

One of the top 3 countries in Asia for quality of life, the Maldives is a shining example of a paradise-like family vacation destination. Many resorts on the islands are all-inclusive and offer beach villas tailored towards families with children who’re looking to relax and bond together.

Of course, the beautiful beaches and water activities are the islands’ primary attraction for families. However, there are plenty of clubs and activities on offer in most resorts.

One of the very few drawbacks of the Maldives as a family holiday is the length of the flights: most flights to the Maldives are quite long if you depart from a Western country. That, plus the very hot and humid weather, could make the destination a bit tricky for very young children.

Family in the Maldives

How to Make Your Asian Escape Safer for Your Family

Embarking on an Asian adventure is a dream come true for many families. However, ensuring the safety of your loved ones is always a top consideration on a vacation. Here are some of our tips on how to make your Asian family holiday as safe as possible.

Get Travel Vaccinations

In 2024, most countries don’t require proof of COVID-19 vaccination. However, there are some travel vaccinations you should consider.

Whilst there aren’t any vaccines required for any destinations on our list at present, it doesn’t mean that that’ll always be the case. For instance, many countries recommend getting a yellow fever or a hepatitis A jab when traveling to Indonesia.

Of course, the risk of contracting infection is very low. But, by taking such proactive measures, you can help mitigate such risk even more for your entire family and ensure a holiday free of preventable medical disasters.

Comply With Local Laws & Religious Observance

Some of the countries on our list are religiously conservative and deviation from their observances and customs is frowned upon. Even if tourist areas are generally tolerant, you’d likely venture outside them, where stricter rules may apply.

For instance, in the UAE, modest attire is expected. Additionally, being aware of any religious holidays during your trip can help you plan accordingly and avoid cultural misunderstandings.

It’s also a good idea to have a basic understanding of local laws and inform your young ones about them. For instance, make it clear to them that it’s not allowed to litter in Singapore.

Also, some countries outlaw public displays of affection, so be mindful of that. You might not agree with the customs and laws, but it’s best to navigate them with respect and sensitivity, as you’re a guest in their country.

Mind the Local Tap Water

Many Asian countries don't offer safe tap water
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to https://techreport.com/statistics/family-friendly-holiday-destinations-asia

Your family might be used to routinely drinking tap water back home, but not every Asian country has the luxury of safe tap water. In fact, only four countries on our list offer tap water that’s safe to drink, as you can see from the infographic.

A common cause of travel sickness is drinking water that’s not considered safe for human consumption. Even if tap water is considered safe to drink in this country, your digestive system might not necessarily be used to the way that water is treated, which can be quite unpleasant.

To avoid water-related illnesses on your holiday, make sure to stick to bottled water, and avoid drinks with ice if possible. You can also boil water or use water purification tablets if necessary.

Family-Friendly Holiday Destinations in Asia: Is It Worth the Trip?

A family holiday in Asia will likely be one of the best experiences of your lives. The region has a lot to offer, from beautiful nature to exciting theme parks, inspiring cultural experiences, and much more.

However, traveling as a family can be challenging, especially having to navigate safety concerns when visiting a place you’ve never been to. We hope that this guide has served you well as a starting point in this challenging journey.

Remember to take all necessary precautions. It’s a hassle, but it pays off in the long run and helps you enjoy your holiday anxiety-free!

Sources

Click to expand all sources

The post Family-Friendly Escapes in Asia: Safest Holiday Destinations in Asia for Your Children appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/family-friendly-holiday-destinations-asia/feed/ 0
Light Therapy Market Statistics: Shedding the Lights on Current Trends https://techreport.com/statistics/light-therapy-market-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/light-therapy-market-statistics/#respond Thu, 01 Feb 2024 15:43:43 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3535768

The light therapy market statistics are, first and foremost, a reflection of society’s increased emphasis on healing, care, and innovation. Secondly, they’re part of a large healthcare and health-tech market...

The post Light Therapy Market Statistics: Shedding the Lights on Current Trends appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>

The light therapy market statistics are, first and foremost, a reflection of society’s increased emphasis on healing, care, and innovation. Secondly, they’re part of a large healthcare and health-tech market which has wide-ranging medical and commercial implications.

But what is light therapy?

Light therapy, also known as phototherapy or red light therapy, is exposure to natural or artificial light executed for medical purposes. Its use can be dated back to ancient civilizations that venerated the sun, but it first saw widespread use in the 20th century. Today, light therapy is widely used to treat many physical and mental conditions.

This significance of the light therapy market is a big reason why we put this guide together. In this guide, we’ll share with you the size of the light therapy market, its popularity across the world, and the most common types and applications. We’ll also introduce you to the key market players. Let’s dive in.

Key Light Therapy Market Statistics

  1. By 2032, the light therapy market will grow to exceed $1.5 billion at a CAGR of 6.3%.
  2. In 2022, the North American region accounted for over a third of the overall light therapy market, or $346 million, making it the largest market overall.
  3. By 2027, the global market value of conventional phototherapy devices is forecast to surpass $250 million.
  4. The light therapy skin condition treatment market is expected to grow to $495.1 million by 2027 (up from $367.1 million in 2020).
  5. Bright light therapy can reduce PTSD scores in veterans by about 33%.
  6. 61% of SAD patients can have their symptoms disappear within 4 weeks of light therapy treatment.
  7. The global infant phototherapy market is projected to reach $140 million by 2030.

Light Therapy Market Size & Revenue

Light Therapy Market Share Size
Source: Global Market Insights

Reports by Grand View Research and Global Market Insights stipulate that the value of the light therapy market was $1 billion in 2022. It’s forecast that by 2032, the market will grow to exceed $1.5 billion at a CAGR of 6.3%.

Some of the big reasons for such accelerated growth are:

  • Increases in seasonal affective disorder (SAD) and other mental health conditions
  • Popularity of non-invasive procedures
  • Ease of using light therapy devices, such as lamps.

Light Therapy Market Statistics by Region

Light therapy is popular all around the world, but some markets are bigger than others. In this section, we’ll take a look at the different regions’ light therapy market statistics.

North America

light therapy market
Source: Grand View Research

In 2022, the North American region accounted for over a third of the overall light therapy market, or $346 million, making it the largest market overall. As you’ll see later in this guide, many key players in the market are based in the US, so the large slice is no surprise.

Europe

Value of light therapy market in Europe, 2020-2027
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/light-therapy-market-statistics

In terms of growth of the European light therapy market, the forecast CAGR is 4.6% – lower than the global average. As you can see from the infographic above, in 2020, Germany was the leader in the European region in terms of the light therapy market value, which was $55.8 million. The country is also forecast to be the frontrunner in 2027 when the value of its light therapy market is expected to reach $80.7 million.

The Eastern European region is estimated to be a close second to Germany in 2027, with a $56.3 million market by 2027. The smallest market is Spain – in 2020, the market was less than $17 million, and is forecast to reach $24 million by 2027.

APAC

North America might be the largest light therapy market in the world, but the Asia-Pacific market is the fastest-growing one. Its projected CAGR for 2023-2030 is 5.6%. The main reasons for this accelerated growth are the increased investment in telemedicine and higher awareness of light therapy, as well as increased sleep disorders.

Light Therapy Statistics by Type

Monosnap-Phototherapy-market-worldwide
Source: Statista

When it comes to light therapy, there are multiple different types of equipment on offer, all of which are meant for different use cases. Some of these types include LED light therapy equipment, fiber optic equipment, and conventional light therapy equipment (or compact fluorescent equipment). We’ll go over each of them in this section.

Conventional Phototherapy

By 2027, the global market value of conventional phototherapy devices is expected to surpass $250 million. Conventional phototherapy uses halogen or compact fluorescent lamps. It’s commonly used for treating conditions like hyperbilirubinemia and jaundice in newborns (more on that later), as well as for several other medical cases.

A 2011 study from India surmised that conventional halogen phototherapy used to treat hyperbilirubinemia in infants was just as effective as LED phototherapy. However, another Indian study published eight years later questions this.

According to its findings, the conventional phototherapy treatment led to a smaller decrease in serum bilirubin than the LED treatment. Those findings imply that LED therapy treatments could be more effective than conventional phototherapy. Let’s look at them in more detail.

LED Phototherapy

The predicted 2027 value of the LED phototherapy devices market isn’t too far behind conventional phototherapy – $209.4 million, to be precise. Originally intended for growing plants in space, today, LED is a popular treatment for skin conditions and wound healing. It’s also known as “red therapy.”

A study published back in 2001 stipulates that LED can shrink a wound by up to 36%. Moreover, it even improved musculoskeletal training injuries of Navy SEALs by over 40%.

Modern studies seem to support this. However, researchers also stipulate that while LED therapy can be effective for the conditions described above, further evidence is needed to confirm its effectiveness for cancer and weight loss treatments.

Fiberoptic Phototherapy

While not as well-known as its above light therapy counterparts, fiberoptic phototherapy is nonetheless a popular form of treatment. Like conventional phototherapy, it’s also commonly used to treat neonatal jaundice and hyperbilirubinemia. In fact, its market value is predicted to surpass LED phototherapy in 2027 and reach $222.1 million.

A 2021 African study examined the effectiveness of fiberoptic phototherapy vs. conventional therapy in treating hyperbilirubinemia. The conclusion was that fiberoptic phototherapy was equally effective as blue light conventional phototherapy but considerably more effective than white light phototherapy. Moreover, the study proposed the possibility of using fiber optic equipment to treat any conventional therapy side effects.

Light Therapy Statistics by Application

Light therapy applications of largest value, 2027 forecast
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/light-therapy-market-statistics

Now that you’ve grasped the size of the light therapy market, we’d like to take you through its key applications. This section will feature the main use cases of light therapy, and we’ll explore how effective it’s been in treating them.

 

Skin Conditions & Melanoma

Estimated number of new melanoma cancer cases in the US, by state, 2023
Source: Statista

One of the biggest clinical applications of light therapy is skin condition treatment. That market is expected to grow to $495.1 million by 2027 (up from $367.1 million in 2020).

A big reason for such growth is the effectiveness of light therapy against skin diseases and abnormalities. According to a 2018 report by the Ablon Skin Institute and Research Center, LED light therapy can heal post-surgery wounds and treat acne, psoriasis, and even certain carcinomas. The study examined a specific device, and here are its key findings:

  • LED acne treatments with peak wavelengths of 409nm to 419nm showed a significant impact at weeks 5, 8, and 12, reaching a 60% reduction at week 12
  • Post-surgery wound treatments with a 633 nm LED allowed the wounds to heal less than 14 days after the surgery, compared to the 26.8 days it took non-LED-treated patients to heal.
  • Psoriasis LED treatments of 830nm and 633 nm over 4-5 weeks resulted in a 60-100% remission rate.
  • Photodynamic therapy was used to treat Bowen’s disease, resulting in clearing 100% of lesions after 2 treatments.

Therefore, as you can see, light therapy has a lot of merit when it comes to skin conditions. There’s also evidence that light therapy, or photodynamic therapy, is effective against melanoma. With almost 100,000 new melanoma cases emerging in 2023 in the US alone, it’s vital to pay attention to the effectiveness of the non-invasive treatment.

Light Therapy and Cancer

A 2022 American-German study suggests that red light (RL) phototherapy can decrease the growth of cancer cells and tumors. A Japanese study from the same year proposes the usage of light therapy delivered via microneedles and shows that there’s potential for it to work with blue light.

However, both studies agree that there’s still a lot of work to be done in relation to phototherapy cancer treatments, as it’s not a perfect method and hasn’t been researched enough.

Sleep & Mental Health Disorders

Light therapy has long been used to treat sleep disorders and mental health disorders, such as depression, anxiety, SAD, and PTSD. For example, a 2005 study shared in the American Journal of Psychiatry confirms that bright light therapy treatment’s impact on depressed people was comparable to that of SSRI drugs.

According to the study referenced above, treating a depressed patient with a 10,000 lux device for 3 hours per day yields the desired results – a significant reduction in symptoms of nonseasonal depression.

Other studies also stipulate that light therapy has a positive impact on post-traumatic stress disorder victims. For instance, a 2022 study published in the Military Medicine Journal suggests that bright light therapy can reduce PTSD scores in veterans by about 33%. However, it doesn’t bring about PTSD remission by itself.

That’s not to say, though, that light therapy should be the end-all-be-all solution for mental health issues. For example, its impact on schizophrenia is still questioned by psychiatrists, although there have been some studies by Science Direct suggesting its somewhat positive impacts.

In terms of sleep disorder treatment, light therapy treatments also offer some benefits. A study by UNC-Chapel Hill researchers confirms the positive effect of light therapy on sleep disorders in older persons. However, the same study, as well as others, admit that the research is inconclusive and the impacts of light therapy are small to medium.

SAD

Efficacy of Light Therapy
Source: American Journal of Psychiatry

SAD, or seasonal affective disorder, affects a huge number of people, especially those living in the Northern regions of the planet. It manifests in low moods, concentration issues, and other symptoms of depression, particularly during the winter months when days are shorter.

It’s very common to treat SAD with a form of light therapy by exposing patients to bright lights. This is usually done through special bright lamps with more than 10,000 lux. The light therapy treatment has proven effective over the years. For instance, one study stipulates that 61% of SAD patients had their symptoms disappear within 4 weeks of treatment.

Another study shared in the American Journal of Psychiatry, published in 2005, confirms the light therapy’s effect on SAD. It further stipulates that an adequate dose of light therapy for SAD is a minimum of 4 days of at least 3,000 lux-hours.

“A significant reduction in depression symptom severity was associated with bright light treatment.”

American Journal of Psychiatry, Volume 162, Issue 4.

Jaundice

Neonatal jaundice has long been treated with phototherapy. This market is forecast to reach $201.8 million by 2027. That’s not surprising, considering that about 50% of full-term babies and 80% of premature newborns can develop jaundice. Furthermore, the global infant phototherapy market size (including jaundice) is projected to reach $140 million by 2030.

The light therapy method for treating jaundice is used in most countries, with the most common methods being blue light and blue-green light. UV therapy is rarely used on newborns due to the risk of gene mutation.

Key Players of Light Therapy Market

Now that you know about the market size of light therapy and its most important use cases, it’s time to consider who’s making it all possible. In this section, we’ll go over the key players in the light therapy industry.

Verilux Inc.

Vermont-based Verilux Inc. is one of the oldest active light therapy equipment providers. Founded in 1956 and acquired by Bear Down Brands in 2020, the company offers therapy lamps known as HappyLight and SmartLight.

The privately held company doesn’t disclose its financial information. Many of its products are below $100, making them an accessible choice for light therapy. The New York Times and CNN both recommend Verilux HappyLight lamps for light therapy in 2024.

Philips

The Dutch giant Koninklijke Philips N.V. is a well-known manufacturer of domestic appliances, including light therapy. First created in 1891, the company can trace its roots in the light industry to that very year when it was a lightbulb seller.

Today, Philips’ primary focus is healthtech, such as light therapy. The latter products are primary for consumers, and their price point is much higher than Verilux’s. Although Philips shares their revenue information, it doesn’t disclose which portion of it is attributed to light therapy solutions.

Northern Light Technologies

This manufacturer of light therapy products is younger than the industry veterans listed above. Founded in 1989, NY-based Northern Light Technologies, or NLT, offers US-manufactured light therapy lamps known as BOXelite, LUXOR, and a handful of others.

The company is a founding member of the Circadian Lighting Association trade association – an industry body for SAD light therapy products. It’s been recommended by the American Psychiatric Association.

Like most other private companies, NLT doesn’t disclose its finances. However, the cost of its products is somewhat higher than Philips.

Unfortunately, we don’t have an LED-powered crystal ball. But what we do have is this guide, where we delved into various scientific reports, studies, and statistics on light therapy.

Based on what we learned, we believe that we can make educated guesses as to the future trends impacting the light therapy market.

We’re going to do just that in the final section of this guide. Let’s dive in.

Scientific & Technological Advancements

It goes without saying that light therapy is a scientific and technological innovation. In this guide, we went over several studies of light therapy, many of which admit there’s still a lot of work to do to fully unravel its potential.

When it comes to science, the only way is forward, so it’s very likely that in the next few years, we’ll see more scientific breakthroughs in light therapy. And given the large-scale investments of many governments into health-tech and med-tech, chances are that we’ll be seeing many amazing light therapy gadgets, too.

Wearables Integration

wearables
Source: Statista

The wearable technologies market is growing at an exponential rate, thanks to Apple Watch and similar gadgets. We’re convinced that the portability and accessibility of wearables can take light therapy to new heights.

For instance, LED-equipped wearables, such as glasses and biosensors, can deliver targeted therapy directly to the skin or even through the eyes. Such integrations with wearables would not only be convenient and more efficient, but can also facilitate real-time monitoring and adjustment of light exposure, thus potentially aiding in medical research.

Increased Accessibility

At the moment, many companies are offering home light therapy devices. The increasing prevalence of such devices can make light therapy more accessible and affordable, saving people from having to go to a medical facility.

Since most insurance packages don’t cover light therapy, making more home devices can reduce costs for a lot of people and equip medical researchers with more data than ever.

Is Light Therapy Here to Stay?

The short answer – yes. The long answer – also yes, but it’ll encompass even more medical use cases than it does today.

Light therapy might have originally been created by NASA to grow plants in space, but it has since evolved into a million-dollar industry, making a difference in people’s lives every day. From acne and eczema treatments to psoriasis, wound healing, and even melanomas, phototherapy works as a non-invasive treatment option with few side effects when done right.

We at TechReport are always keen to find out more about innovations for the good of society. For that reason, we’re really excited about seeing more scientific breakthroughs in the field of light therapy and geeking out about the technology making the most of them.

Sources

Click to see all sources
  1. Journal Club with Dr. Peter Attia | Effects of Light & Dark on Mental Health & Treatments for Cancer (YouTube)
  2. HappyLight® Duo 2-in-1 Desk and Floor Light Therapy Lamps | Verilux® (YouTube)
  3. Philips BlueControl user talks about plaque psoriasis and blue light (YouTube)
  4. Winter is inevitable. Winter Blues aren’t (YouTube)
  5. Light Therapy Market – By Product (Light Box, Floor and Desk Lamp, Light Visor, Dawn Simulator), By Application (Psoriasis, Vitiligo, Eczema, Acne Vulgaris, Winter Blues, Sleeping Disorders, Seasonal Affective Disorder), Light Type, End-use & Global Forecast, 2023-2032 (Global Market Insights)
  6. Light Therapy Market Size, Share & Trends Analysis Report By Product (Lightbox, Floor & Desk Lamp), By Application, By Light Type (Blue Light, Red Light), By End-use, By Region, And Segment Forecasts, 2023 – 2030 (Grand View Research)
  7. Bright Light Therapy: Seasonal Affective Disorder and Beyond (National Library of Medicine)
  8. Light as Therapy for Sleep Disorders and Depression in Older Adults (National Library of Medicine)
  9. The effects of light therapy on sleep problems: A systematic review and meta-analysis (National Library of Medicine)
  10. Phototherapy with Light Emitting Diodes (National Library of Medicine)
  11. Red Light Phototherapy Using Light-Emitting Diodes Inhibits Melanoma Proliferation and Alters Tumor Microenvironments (National Library of Medicine)
  12. Localised light delivery on melanoma cells using optical microneedles (National Library of Medicine)
  13. Neonatal jaundice: phototherapy (National Library of Medicine)
  14. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Phototherapy versus Conventional Phototherapy in Neonatal Hyperbilirubinemia: A Single Blinded Randomized Control Trial from Coastal India (National Library of Medicine)
  15. Light‐emitting diode phototherapy for unconjugated hyperbilirubinaemia in neonates (National Library of Medicine)
  16. Effect of NASA light-emitting diode irradiation on wound healing (National Library of Medicine)
  17. Effectiveness of FIBEROPTIC phototherapy compared to conventional phototherapy in treating HYPERBILIRUBINEMIA amongst term neonates: a randomized controlled trial (National Library of Medicine)
  18. Day and night light exposure are associated with psychiatric disorders: an objective light study in >85,000 people (Nature Mental Health)
  19. Light therapy: Not just for seasonal depression? (Harvard Health Publishing)
  20. A pilot study of bright light therapy in schizophrenia (ScienceDirect)
  21. Bright Light Therapy for Negative Symptoms (Psychiatrist.com)
  22. The Efficacy of Light Therapy in the Treatment of Mood Disorders: A Review and Meta-Analysis of the Evidence (American Journal of Psychiatry)
  23. Bright Light Treatment of Combat-related PTSD: A Randomized Controlled Trial (Military Medicine)
  24. Phototherapy market worldwide between 2017 and 2027, by product (Statista)
  25. Phototherapy market in Western Europe between 2017 and 2027, by country (Statista)
  26. Value of phototherapy market in Eastern Europe from 2017 to 2027 (Statista)
  27. Phototherapy market worldwide between 2017 and 2027, by application (Statista)
  28. Estimated number of new cancer cases of melanoma of the skin in the U.S. in 2023, by state (Statista)
  29. Size of the infant phototherapy device market worldwide in 2019 and 2030 (Statista)
  30. Number of connected wearable devices worldwide by region from 2015 to 2022 (Statista)
  31. The Best Light Therapy Lamp (The New York Times)
  32. The best SAD light therapy lamps of 2024, tried and tested (CNN)
  33. Use light to improve mood and energy (Philips)
  34. Find Your Light (Northern Lights)
  35. Circadian Lighting Association (CLA)
  36. Northern Light Technologies (Crunchbase)
  37. Verilux (Crunchbase)
  38. Philips (Crunchbase)
  39. Phototherapy for neonatal jaundice (NHSGGC Paediatrics for Health Professionals)
  40. Red Light Therapy (Cleveland Clinic)

The post Light Therapy Market Statistics: Shedding the Lights on Current Trends appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/light-therapy-market-statistics/feed/ 0
60+ Important SAP Statistics and Facts in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/sap-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/sap-statistics/#respond Wed, 31 Jan 2024 19:47:12 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536356 Key SAP Statistics

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems have existed for several decades, specially developed to increase coordination between manufacturing industries. Later on, ERP made progress in boosting its services by involving many...

The post 60+ Important SAP Statistics and Facts in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key SAP Statistics

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems have existed for several decades, specially developed to increase coordination between manufacturing industries. Later on, ERP made progress in boosting its services by involving many other back-end professionals.

Technological advances have always accompanied the history of ERP and will continue to support business growth. SAP sprouted to improve data quality across enterprises.

SAP, Systems Applications and Products, is a top ERP software vendor and related products. SAP is suitable for all business sizes, especially big brands. Small and medium-sized businesses represent 80% of SAP’s customers.

Every year, ERP trends undergo changes that make it more dynamic. SAP is a multinational German Enterprise Development Software service designed by SAP SE to adopt such developments. These insightful SAP statistics show the wide acceptance of SAP products and services in different sectors and the firm’s worldwide market position. This article also gives insights into interesting statistics on SAP usage, workforce, jobs, products, customer statistics, and additional facts.

Key SAP Statistics

Key SAP Statistics

  1. SAP is headquartered in Waldorf, Germany.
  2. There are over 21,000 SAP partner companies around the globe.
  3. Over 1,226 websites use SAP Commerce Cloud.
  4. SAP has over 200 website users in the UK.
  5. Global transactional revenue goes through the SAP system at 77%.
  6. 29.5% of SAP executives are women.
  7. SAP employees hail from 157 countries in the world.
  8. 42 is the average age for employees at SAP.
  9. SAP has over 24,000 SAP consultants in the US.
  10. The entry-level salary of an SAP employee is $80,000.
  11. SAP consultants in Texas earn an average of $127,443.
  12. Over 7 million salespeople use SAP Sales Cloud.
  13. SAP is a top leader in the enterprise application market.
  14. SAP Business One has over 65,000 customers all over the world.
  15. Between 2010 and 2019, SAP’s income grew by almost twofold.
  16. In 2020, SAP ranked 1st on Forbes’s Best Employers for Diversity list.

General Facts and Statistics of SAP

General Facts and Statistics

1. A Group of Former IBM Employees Founded SAP in 1972.

IBM gave Xerox rights to SDS/SAPE software as compensation for its exit from the computer manufacturing industry in 1971. This enabled Xerox to migrate its business systems to IBM technology. Five ex-IBM engineers together developed software products, left IBM Tech, and established SAP in 1972. The company started as a private partnership under German Civil rule. 

2. SAP has Its Headquarters in Walldorf, Germany.

SAP’s first product launch in 1973 was a guiding light for developing other software module systems. A few years later, SAP moved its headquarters to Walldorf, Baden-Württemberg, Germany. SAP carried out most business decisions and operations from its headquarters for several years

3. SAP has 97 Data Centers in 35 Locations in 15 Countries and Six Regions.

After many decades, SAP spread its tentacles around the world. Recent data shows that the multinational ERP software company has data center locations across six world regions. These regions include North America (33), South America (2), Middle East and Africa (11), Europe (28), Asia (19) and Oceania (4). 

4. Around the World, there Are 21 SAP Laboratories.

Statistical data shows that SAP has around 21 Labs spread across 17 countries. The individual labs are focused on specific applications, technology, and entering the developed IT market. The most prominent SAP labs are in Germany, Israel, Japan, and the US. Interestingly, SAP labs are located in high clusters around the globe to develop and bring improvement to SAP’s major products.

5. There Are More Than 21,000 Partner Companies in SAP.

SAP partners collaborate to provide various software products to support the new-age technology, SAP. These products include database storage systems, hardware, networks, and mobile computing technology. SAP has partnered with 21,000 extension partners to provide functionality compatible with Sap technology. These products are further certified and supported by SAP Company.

Usage Statistics of SAP

Usage Statistics of SAP

6. Over 1,226 Websites Utilize the SAP Commerce Cloud in the US.

Statistics show around 1,229 SAP Commerce Cloud users are in the US. However, there are over 84,675 live websites that make use of this SAP product in total. Some top users of the SAP Commerce Cloud include gamespot.com, gaainger.com, ppboys.com, etc. The SAP Commerce Cloud is a scalable platform that provides users with innovative, adaptive, and insightful commerce experience.

7. Over 799 Websites Utilize SAP Commerce Cloud in Germany.

With strong B2B and B2C capabilities, SAP Commerce Cloud meets the business needs of an innovative e-commerce system. This tool is one of the most effective tools for engaging customers worldwide. SAP Commerce Cloud usage varies across different countries. This platform is used in Germany by over 799 websites. Some websites that use SAP Commerce Cloud in Germany include shop.uat.gea.com, watch-wiki.net, eshop.weidmueller.com, etc.

8. Around 312 Websites in Spain Use SAP Commerce Cloud.

Statistics show over 312 website users of the SAP Cloud services. A few websites that use this SAP platform are public.es, webshop.franke.com, b2b.pepejeans.com, etc. Interestingly, SAP Commerce Cloud is a merchandise of SAP Hybris that helps sustain businesses while running profitable B2B Commerce businesses.

9. There Are Over 200 Websites that Make Use of SAP in the UK.

The SAP Commerce Cloud is utilized by an estimated 243 websites in the United Kingdom. Pearson.com, primark.com, and shop.yell.com are some websites that use the SAP platform in the UK. This platform enables an experience and easy access to several channels for B2B and B2C transactions.

10. Netherlands, France, and Italy Constitute 390 SAP Users.

SAP Commerce Cloud websites in the Netherlands are estimated to be 160. In France, there are 136 websites, and in Italy, 94 website users. It has an enabling design that works with the rest of your business architecture and can increase efficiency and productivity.

SAP Statistics on Transaction Usage

Transaction Usage Stats

11. The SAP System Handles 77% of the World’s Transaction Revenue.

Statistics show that 77% of transactions globally touch the SAP software platform. This is a testament to SAP’s efficiency as one of the leading global ERP services with efficient solutions.

12. In Total, Consumer Purchases Worldwide Amount to $16 Trillion.

Most of the world’s most valued businesses use the SAP software system. SAP manages the world’s largest business network, with over $22 trillion in consumer purchases worldwide. Previously, global transaction revenue generated using the SAP platform was estimated to be $16 trillion and has significantly increased over the years. 

SAP Workforce Statistics

Workforce Statistics

13. The Female SAP Leadership Accounts For 29.5% in 2023.

One of SAP’s core goals is to raise the number of female executives by 25% for gender diversity. Over the years, women have occupied leadership positions even though they need to be improved to meet their targets. Women in management at SAP increased over the years, from 19% in 2011 to 28.3% in 2021 and 29.4% in 2022. As of Q3 2023, SAP hit 29.5% of women in its management team.

14. As a result, Over 75% of SAP’s Employees Are Shareholders.

Interestingly, the software company gives employees, including executives, diverse investment programs that help boost SAP’s success. Statistics show that approximately 75% of SAP employees own the company’s shares in 2023. Other statistical data from 2017 show that approximately 20% and 56% of SAP shares are owned by co-founders and institutional investors, respectively.

15. The Employees of SAP Are From 157 Countries.

SAP has offices spread across different countries of the world. Research data shows that the employees at SAP have 157 nationalities across the globe. SAP helps the world run more smoothly and improves people’s lives through its global network of customers, partners, employees, and leaders.

16. There Are 145 Countries With SAP Employees.

The enterprise platform integrates many functions into the system to ensure the smooth running of businesses. The platform booms with evidence in over 145 countries across the globe. Given the wide use of ERP software worldwide, there is also increased demand for management experts.

17. There Were Over 105,000 SAP Employees in 2023.

Recent data shows that there are currently over 105,000 employees at SAP from over 157 countries worldwide. In 2020, the company recorded approximately 101,450 employees, indicating a significant increase in staff strength.

18. The Employee’s Retention Rate At SAP Stands at 94.8%.

Research data shows the employee retention rate as of the third quarter of 2023 hit 95.6%. Previously, SAP’s employee engagement index hit 95.3% and 92.8% in 2020 and 2021, respectively. The retention rate is the company’s way of measuring the length of time employees work for the organization.

19. The Average Age of An Employee At SAP is 42.

Generally, there is no cut-off age for beginning a career in most business environments, especially in an organization like SAP. SAP is a company that offers opportunities for its employees to find or choose a career or success path. 57% of SAP Consultants are 40+ years old or older, 30% are between 30-40 years old, and 13% are between 20-30 years old. Statistics show that the average age of all employees at SAP is 42.

Job Statistics for SAP

Job Statistics for SAP

20. In the United States, there Are Over 24,000 SAP Consultants.

SAP consultant roles are highly male-populated; this implies more male employees than their counterparts in the US. There are over 24,000 consultants employed at SAP. These SAP consultants are dedicated to finding software that satisfies the needs of organizations. They offer solutions that would help transform their customers’ businesses and help accelerate growth.

21. Houston, TX, and Atlanta, GA, Constitute the Majority of These SAP Consultants.

Atlanta, GA, and Houston, Texas, are blossoming environments for diverse businesses with major brands requiring SAP services. Statistics show that the most common places for SAP consultants are Houston, Texas, and Atlanta, GA. In the transformation of traditional business operations through SAP tools, consultants have an opportunity to make a major impact in Atlanta. With the added benefit of enjoying Houston’s rich, welcoming community, SAP consultants can expect to be immersed in a culture of innovation.

22. SAP Consultants Receive An Average Annual Salary of $151,105.

Statistics reveal that as of October 2023, the annual salary of an SAP consultant in the US, on average, is $151,105. However, the typical salary range typically falls between $126,000 and $218,000. Salary range can vary greatly depending on important factors, such as education, certification, location, other qualifications, and years of experience.

23. The Starting Salary of An Employee At SAP is $80,000.

Note that salaries vary by department and geographic location. The estimated entry-level salary of an SAP employee as of September 2023 is $80,000 per year. After gaining experience, the salaries of the employees change. The most experienced employees’ salaries are higher than those of starters at SAP.

24. The Highest-Paid Consultants Make Over $122,000 a Year.

SAP technical consultants earn the highest salaries on average all over the organization. In addition, the technical consultants at Benjamin Moore are the highest-paid of any company. Statistics show that the best consultants at SAP earn an average of $122,000 yearly. Also, these technical consultants in the utilities industry are the most-paid in the US.

SAP Statistics by State

Statistics by State

Job opportunities vary from state to state, and careers at SAP are no different. It is difficult to decipher which states are the best for SAP consultant jobs, but the statistics compiled here will help. Research data shows that Oklahoma is considered the best state in the country for SAP consultants, whereas North Dakota is the worst.

25. SAP Consultants Working in Washington Earn An Average Salary of $127,443 Annually.

The salary range of a consultant at SAP in Washington falls between $113,065 and $138,294. Interestingly, the average annual salary of an SAP consultant in Washington, DC, is $127,443 as of October 2023.

26. The Average Salary for An SAP Consultant in Vermont is $110,248 Annually.

The salary range of a consultant at SAP in Vermont falls between $97,809 and $119,634. Interestingly, the average annual salary of an SAP consultant in Vermont is around $110,248 as of October 2023.

27. The Average Annual Salary of a SAP Consultant Working in Texas is $127,443

The salary range of a consultant at SAP in Texas falls between $100,907 and $123,423. Interestingly, the average annual salary of an SAP consultant in TX is approximately $127,443 as of October 2023.

28. An Annual Wage of $112,767 is Typical for SAP Consultants Working in Wisconsin.

The salary range of a consultant at SAP in Wisconsin falls between $100,907 and $123,423. Interestingly, the average annual salary of an SAP consultant in Wisconsin is estimated to be $127,443 as of October 2023.

29. The Average Salary of the SAP Consultant in Georgia is $112,445 Per Year.

The salary range of a consultant at SAP in Georgia falls between $99,758 and $122,018. Interestingly, the average annual salary of an SAP consultant in Georgia stood at $127,443 as of October 2023.

SAP Customer Statistics

Customer Statistics

30. Small and Medium-Sized Companies Account for 80% of SAP Customers.

SAP reports that 80% of its customers (small and midsize enterprises) utilize their software for business solutions. SAP cloud solutions combine built-in industry and scalable business best practices to manage new markets, models, languages, and currencies. Although SAP mostly comes in when big brands are mentioned, small and medium-sized businesses utilize SAP’s platform.

31. SAP Customers Account for 98% of the Top 100 Brands in Terms of Value.

In the tech industry, most of the leading brands by value are SAP customers. 98% of the most valued businesses in the world make use of SAP’s software and products. Undoubtedly, SAP is a leading provider of enterprise software applications for major industries worldwide. SAP integrates business processes to implement easy-going financial processes and legal controls.

32. SAP Customers Represent 92% of the Forbes Global 2000 Companies.

Just as the name is, SAP is its ERP product as well. As one of the leaders in the enterprise application market, the company has reflected its efficiency among the most valued companies on Forbes. How are SAP customers ranked on Forbes? According to statistics, a vast majority of leading Forbes Global 2000 companies are users of SAP software. 

33. The SAP Customer Base is 86% of the Fortune 500.

Factually, around 86% of companies on the Forbes 500 list make use of the SAP platform. SAP is the preferred choice of enterprise software for most companies on the Forbes 500 list.

34. The SAP Sales Cloud Has Over 7 Million Sales Agents Using it.

SAP provides sales automation solutions that simplify the selling process, allowing salespeople to establish long-term customer relationships. Research data shows that SAP has over 7 million sales agents utilizing the platform to accelerate sales through guiding sales management.

35. There Are 66 Million SAP Concur Users.

SAP Concur manages, in one system, all expenses, travel, and invoicing spending. SAP Concur user base across the globe is estimated to be 66 million. Concur solutions provide a management approach for end-to-end expenditure, which improves the visibility of transactions, increases efficiency, and simplifies processes for everyone.

36. The Number of Users for SAP SuccessFactors is Over 267 Million.

SAP SuccessFactors is a Human Capital Management (HCM) cloud-based software solution. This SAP product handles talent, analytics, workforce planning, payroll, employee experience, and HR management. Across the globe, there are over 267 million users of the SAP SuccessFactors solutions.

37. There Are Over 150,000 Customers on the SAP Cloud Platform.

For cloud applications, SCP provides a development and runtime environment. This platform is optimized for integrating app development, data analytics automation, and more into a central environment. The efficiency of this platform is reflected in its customer base of over 150,000 customers. 

38. On SAP Ariba, More Than 4.8 Million Businesses Are Active.

SAP Ariba is a cloud-based software whose core purpose is to integrate procurement solutions to reduce disruptions in finance and operations. By applying tools, services, and expertise, workforce and customer needs are met, and supplier risks and market uncertainties are curbed. According to the statistics, SAP Ariba recorded over 25,000 new suppliers to its customer base during the pandemic. There are currently over 4.8 million businesses connected to this platform.

39. As Many As 35 Million People Can Work from Anywhere with SAP Cloud Solutions.

The SAP Sales Cloud solution allows enterprises to deliver unprecedented sales engagements by integrating an all-around view of all customers and interactions. This platform offers automated and streamlined business processes to equip sellers with recommendations and analytics. Quite a significant number of people can utilize the SAP Sales Cloud remotely. Statistics reveal that over 35 million users can access this platform anywhere.

SAP Product Facts and Statistics

Product Facts

40. SAP is Europe’s Largest Software Company.

SAP has a strong appearance in the software market. It is Europe’s leading HR software for small, mid, and large companies. Although there are other leaders in the software market, SAP is the only software company in Europe specifically known for offering ERP solutions. Due to that, the German firm can be considered the largest software company in Europe.

41. SAP is the Number 2 Enterprise Application in the Global Market.

SAP has remained the largest enterprise app in the market for 40 years. However, Salesforce ERP surpassed SAP in 2022, becoming the world’s largest enterprise application, with SAg in second position.

42. SAP is the 3rd Biggest Software Company in the World.

Aside from SAP being the largest software company in Europe, it is the third largest globally. As of 2020, the company’s revenue stood at $30.63 billion to attain this position among other giant software companies.

43. SAP is the World’s Third Most Commonly Used Customer Service application.

The platform enables consistent service experiences for all contact channels by connecting customer contacts from various channels in a single solution. SAP Service Cloud has features to help businesses deliver efficient customer service, making it the third most used customer service app.

44. SAP is Number 6 in the Global Customer Relationship Management Market.

According to 2021 Statistics, SAP ranked sixth among the top 10 CRM systems in the market. The app can track marketing and customer service and manage sales plans and territories, including contracts and billing. Interestingly, more general customer experience-type tools are being migrated to SAP CRM from a sales automation tool.

45. SAP is Indisputably One of the Best, Ranking Third Worldwide in the Software As a Service (SaaS) Market.

SAP rubs shoulders with SaaS sector giants like Microsoft and Salesforce. That’s why SAP is considered the third-leading SaaS company, accounting for 4.5% of the global SaaS companies by market share.

46. SAP is Number One in the Global Supply Chain Management (SCM) Market.

Statistics from 2021 show that SAP led the pack with 11.8% of the SCM market. Oracle came 2nd, and Blue Yonder followed closely. Supply Chain Management applies to purchasing, logistics operations, and resource management.

47. SAP is Number One in the Worldwide Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) Market.

According to the ERP Research report, SAP is the largest ERP vendor in the world. This firm is well known for its numerous products, including ERP, that fit all business sizes. The company’s products include SAP Business Network, SAP Commerce Cloud, SAP SuccessFactors, Supply chain Logistics, etc. 

SAP Business One Statistics

Business One Statistics

48. SAP Business One has Been Designed for Small to Medium-Sized Companies. 

SAP Business One is an app built for all small and mid-business sizes instead of being a simplified version of SAP’s bigger products. The app is an integrated product of the world’s biggest ERP provider, SAP, with its top-tier user interface. With this platform, users can access high flexibility with reasonable control over data displayed on the transactional screen. In addition, users can configure look-up windows, set access security, and do lots more on this platform.

49. SAP Business One is Certified on the AWS Cloud.

SAP HANA is a version of the SAP Business Ons that is accessible and endorsed by AWS Cloud. Some AWS functions for SAP Business One are speed, agility, flexibility, and capacity elasticity. The expertise in design, implementation, migration, and management of SAP workloads for Amazon Web Services is validated by the certification issued.

50. In Total, SAP Business One is Used by Over 65,000 Customers Worldwide.

SAP announced its 65,000 customers during the 10th anniversary of its product SAP HANA in 2020. It is confirmed that around 5,000 customers are added yearly hosted by SAP. Since the launch of SAP Business One product SAP HANA, the app has delivered customer value and satisfaction. This platform can be used to deal with competitors and win deals across the globe.

51. Large Companies Cao Support Their Subsidiary Operations or Pilot Projects in the Mew Markets Using SAP Business One.

This amazing SAP product, SAP Business One, helps small- to medium-sized businesses grow in new markets. The staff strength doesn’t determine the growth of the business, as expansion into new locations is possible via this platform. Large enterprises manage and integrate their subsidiaries’ operations with Business One to drive revenue and penetrate new markets. 

52. More than 550 Industry-Specific Integrations Exist on SAP Business One.

All industry-specific solutions are pre-packaged and fully integrated to enable automated workflows tailored to your company type. SAP Business One has over 550 industry-specific integrations in its name. The application provides end-to-end support for many industries and specific Retail and Engineering services functions. Others include Food & beverage production, Aviation, Life Sciences, and Oil and gas.

53. The SAP Business One App is Available on iOS Devices.

SAP Business One can be accessed from any location and anytime on iOS operating devices like iPhones and iPads. The SAP Business One App is available for iOS-enabled devices on the App Store. It’s easier than ever for businesses to access live data at any point through the powerful capabilities of iOS and SAP Cloud Platform.

SAP Financial Statistics

Financial Stat

54. Between 2010 and 2019, SAP’s Revenue Increased Almost Twice.

According to statistics, SAP’s revenue grew from $16,551 million to $30,859 million between 2010 and 2019. These figures indicated approximately a double increase in the revenue generated. This shows how well SAP has done for itself within the stated period. This revenue was achievable from the numerous and efficient services and products the firm offers its customers.

55. Europe, the Middle East, and Africa accounted for 43% of SAP’s Revenue.

Research data shows that the enterprise application firm generated over 13.1 billion euros in revenue. The Europe, the Middle East, and Africa (EMEA) region made up 43% of SAP’s revenue in the 2022 financial yearAdditionally, Germany contributed about 34% of the total revenue generated in the EMEA region in the same year.

56. America Represents 42% of SAP Revenue.

Statistics reveal that around 42% of SAP’s revenue in 2022 came from the US. In 2022, the company made revenue of 13.3 billion euros in America aloneAdditionally, the total revenue generated by SAP across all regions amounted to 31 billion euros worldwide.

57. Asia Pacific and Japan Constituted 15% of SAP Revenue in 2022.

Statistics reveal that revenue from the company in the Asia Pacific Japan region was 15% of the company’s total revenue in 2022. The full year’s revenue for 2022 from this region hit 4.495 billion euros, indicating a 29% increase on the previous year’s revenue.

Stunning Facts About SAP

Stunning Facts About SAP

58. Instead of Spelling Out the Letters S-A-P, IT Experts Prefer to Pronounce SAP Like the Word “sap.” 

SAP is an initialization and not an acronym. In essence, each letter is pronounced individually as S-A-P. SAP is not pronounced as a word (sap), and contrary to some misconceptions, SAP is pronounced as single letters (S-A-P). Most IT professionals prefer to pronounce SAP as one word rather than by the initials.

59. SAP Changed its Nomenclature in 1976.

SAP originates from the German phrase “Systemanalyse und Programmentwicklung,” which means (System Analysis and Program Development). In 1976, SAP changed to “Systeme, Anwendungen und Produkte in der Datenverarbeitung,” which translates to “Systems, Applications, and Data Processing”. The company is now known as SAP SE (Societas Europaea), reflecting its current position as a European public company.

60. Forbes Ranked SAP As the Number One Best Employer for Diversity in 2020.

SAP came first on the Forbes Best Employers for Diversity ranking in 2020. SAP, the world’s leading enterprise software company, jumped eight spots on 2020’s list from 2019 to top it with an 85.89 score.

61. SAP’s Stock Price For the Past Year Oscillated Between 96.12 Euros and 146.62 Euros.

SAP’s success is also evident in the value of its stocks. Google statistics show that SAP’s stock price was 145.32 euros as of November 30, 2023. For the 2023 year to date, SAP’s stock price ranges from 96.12 euros to 146.62 euros

Wrapping Up 

When businesses think of enterprise-class solutions, SAP always comes to mind. The company has never stopped extending its tentacles to reach more people. The comprehensive data quality features, integration, profiling, and text data processing suite have made SAP’s progress seamless.

Its enduring success since its birth in 1972 shows how reliable its solutions are. As a result, SAP has earned the trust of individuals and organizations who rely on its solutions for effective data management. The platform’s remarkable employee retention rate of 94.8% shows its workers are happy. It also reflects the strength, satisfaction, and commitment of the staff who work tirelessly to bring SAP to where it is today. The above statistics provide insights and trends on the world’s most used and popular enterprise application. 

Frequently Asked Questions

What is SAP?

When was SAP Company established?

What is SAP’s ranking in the ERP market?

References

The post 60+ Important SAP Statistics and Facts in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/sap-statistics/feed/ 0
60+ Eye-opening HP Statistics and Facts for 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/hp-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/hp-statistics/#respond Wed, 31 Jan 2024 19:33:06 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536308 Impressive HP Statistics and Facts

Hewlett-Packard, or HP, holds strong as a titan in the computer industry, capturing roughly 20% of the total market share. This American tech powerhouse emerged in 2015 following the split...

The post 60+ Eye-opening HP Statistics and Facts for 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Impressive HP Statistics and Facts

Hewlett-Packard, or HP, holds strong as a titan in the computer industry, capturing roughly 20% of the total market share. This American tech powerhouse emerged in 2015 following the split of the Hewlett-Packard company. Today, HP competes neck-and-neck alongside Lenovo, Dell, and other leaders.

Yet HP’s origins stem back to 1935 in a humble garage, thanks to its founders William Hewlett and David Packard. What started as an electronic testing tool business eventually gained steam in the budding PC space. HP’s innovations extend beyond personal computing and into servers, storage devices, networking equipment, and more.

Now, HP offers products and services spanning individual consumers to major enterprise corporations. HP’s diverse technological capabilities cement its Silicon Valley staple. This gives HP a competitive edge over endless innovations emerging from old and new tech giants. The forthcoming explores some eye-opening HP statistics and lesser-known history behind one of tech’s most prolific trailblazers – HP. Let’s dive deeper.

Impressive HP Statistics and Facts

Must Know HP Statistics 2024

1. Hewlett-Packard started as an idea conceived in 1939 by two ambitious individuals, Bill and David. They started the now-giant tech company in a tiny garage in Palo Alto, California. 

2. Their first big break came when they scored a contract to create tech gear for Disney’s Fantasia movie. With this, HP is a serious player in creating IT hardware.

3. Fast forward to November 2015. HP made a big move by splitting into two entities, Hewlett Packard Enterprise and HP Inc.

4. One of the entities was to focus on storage, servers, and tech services. At the same time, the other entity keeps on creating top-notch and top hardware and software. Despite this split, both branches have stayed incredibly successful, remaining multi-billion-dollar giants. Surprisingly, both companies grew!

5. By 2019, HP had launched 104 other companies, incorporating them into its impressive legacy. Within its 100-year journey, this company has grown from a one-car garage platform to a true heavyweight in tech.

6. According to Volza’s Global Import data, the world brought in a staggering 451.4K shipments of HP laptops. These were brought in by 7,718 importers from 6,433 suppliers.

7. Most HP laptops were imported from China, the United States, and Singapore. The country that imports the highest number of HP laptops is India, bringing in 390,108 shipments. Closely tailing behind India is Peru, with 15,849. Vietnam comes third with 10,298 loads.

8. The top three product categories for HP products imports have the HSN codes 84713010, 8471300000, & 84713020.

These figures were last updated on November 9, 2023, based on Volza’s comprehensive global import-export data from 70 countries.

HP Statistics About Market Share

HP Market Share Statistics

9. Unarguably, HP is a giant among PC producers. It earned the world’s best PC creator title in 2007. But it relinquished the title to Lenovo, another PC king.

10. By committing to producing high-class products, Lenovo outshined HP in 2013. It didn’t end there, as Lenovo also won the best PC manufacturer in the world.

11. Not long after Lenovo‘s remarkable success, Dell came into the picture and started competing with HP and Lenovo. HP and DELL also became prime rivals in 2022.

12. HP’s kingship remains incontestable Regarding hardcopy equipment, such as the printing machines market. Users have attested that HP produces the best printers. It even ranked no.1 in 2021.

13. HP successfully claimed about 18.8% share of the personal computer market worldwide in 2022.

14. Without a break, the tech firm has continued to increase its market share since 2012.

15. The best PC manufacturers, including Dell, HP, and Lenovo, totaled 60% of the global PC market share in 2022.

16. Hewlett-Packard (HP) is the highest PC supplier in the United States. It delivers up to 22.7% of personal computers to individuals and organizations. This highlights HP’s stronghold in the American computer market.

17. Hewlett-Packard is a web hosting provider; however, it’s 0.1% less than other websites.

18. Surprisingly, the company renders services to websites with heavy traffic compared to other big hosts like Shopify and Amazon.

19. When it comes to gadgets, PCs, smartphones, tablets, etc., people expect to spend more than $810 billion on them in 2022. That’s a serious chunk of change flying into the tech world!

HP Statistics – Employees

Employees Stats

20. In 2014, before splitting into two founders did the big slit on the companies, HP had a staggering 300,000 people working for them worldwide.

21. Last year, HP PC company had roughly 51,000 employees all across the globe.

22. more than 66% of the team in an HP office are men, while only 34% are women.

23. Regarding diversity, over 55% of HP’s team is White, with smaller percentages (17% and 13%) of Latinx and Asian workers, respectively.

24. An HP employee has worked at HP for about 6.6 years.

25. A typical HP worker also takes home an annual paycheck of around $78,427.

26. In 2017, the company held the spot as the 12th largest employer in the US. That’s a considerable number of folks working together to keep things running!

27. The garage where Bill Hewlett and David Packard first started HP is now an official California Landmark. 

28. It’s known as the ‘Birthplace of Silicon Valley.’ However, in 2014, HP faced legal issues, being found guilty of three separate instances of bribery involving top government officials in Poland, Mexico, and Russia. 

29. These payments were aimed at securing significant contracts. On a different note, 2007 Hewlett-Packard achieved a milestone by surpassing $100 billion in sales revenue for a financial year, becoming the first technology company to reach this mark.”

HP Statistics – Products

Products Stats

30. As a company, HP keeps making more money with the continual decrease in computer parts. The company profits are at the top of the tech radar, and it doesn’t look like they’ll decline soon.

31. In 2021, HP invested significantly in its future by channeling over $1.9 billion into research and development.

32. The computer hardware category of HP Ground generates a large amount of revenue every year.

33. HP printers are one of the top revenue generators in the hardware category. The printers are usually reliable and have established a firm relationship with the business community.

34. In 2017, 3D printing and virtual reality were presented as new additions to HP, boosting the ego of its users.

35. The HP group publicly announced that large quantities of PCs were sold per quarter at a summit in 2022.

36. HP’s eco-friendliness was clearly shown in 2020 after the company refined and recycled millions of plastics into other products. This move boosted HP’s presence in the market and attracted more followers and, subsequently, investors.

37. Over the years, HP has made no less than 60 billion dollars, showing a significant and consistent rise in its annual revenues.

38. It branched into different units that bring in revenue. One part oversees personal computer and printer sales, while another oversees enterprise software, servers, and storage. Both units make billions of dollars from massive product sales every year.

39. HP accommodates 58,000 employees from around the world under its umbrella. This massive workforce consists of creative minds and people with diverse talents. They all work tirelessly to maintain HP’s giant position in the tech industry.

HP Statistics – Earnings

HP Earnings Statistics

40. The tech giant has had its fair share of ups and downs. This often translates into its income, which increases or decreases depending on market conditions. No wonder HP got 3.2 billion dollars as its annual income in 2022, less than in 2021.

41. HP had approximately $64 billion as its total earnings in 2021, showing an increasingly favorable market for the brand.

42. The Personal Systems section in the HP group accrued over $43 billion in income in 2021.

43. In the same year, 2021, HP printing machines made outstanding progress, raising over $20 billion in sales profit. This massive number tells us that printing machines occupy a significant market position.

44. Supply and allocation as a sector under the HP group had their gross income close at $13.5 million as of August 2022. The sector is still moving forward and may even outpace this level in years to come.

45. HP amassed a revenue of over $20 between 2016 and 2021, as confirmed by the company’s official website.

46. HP doesn’t joke with advertising. It makes it a top priority to ensure that people in every region and walks of life know about its product. Unsurprisingly, HP spent over $829 million in 2021 to attract more customers.

47. HP’s share prices went downhill last year, dropping by nearly 50% from $41.47 in 2021 to $26.11 in 2022. Although this is a major blow, things could eventually shape up once market conditions improve.

48. The group attained an earning lineup of 9.61% in 2022; to date, they still have up to 9.71% return on assets (ROA).

Additional HP Statistics

HP Company Statistics

49. HP Boasts an Extensive Collection of Products.

Interestingly, HP produces everything from personal computers to printers and other accessories. They offer various top-notch products perfect for individuals and business utility. HP always provides something to its users every year, irrespective of their budget.

50. HP Focuses Solely on Sustainability.

The firm is very serious about its corporate responsibility, aiming to decrease its ecological trail. HP cuts down conservatory gas emissions. They encourage recycling efforts and produce energy-efficient products as part of their creativities.

51. HP Products Help Educate Their Users.

The company knows that education is essential for improving invention and improvement. For this reason, they put more effort and investment into providing tech solutions. Most of the tech solutions are intended for schools and educational institutes. Also, HP’s products and services support the needs of modern learning settings.

52. HP Provides its Users With Extensive Support.

Customers needing help can contact HP’s comprehensive customer support via their official website, call centers, and approved service providers. It is also straightforward for users to find troubleshooting guides, drivers, and software updates. HP ensures that its help services are hassle-free and reliable.

53. HP Ranks High as One of the Companies that Produces Durable and Long-lasting Products.

Users celebrate HP products for their quality and durability. HP thoroughly tests and ensures that its products are top-notch before distributing them. And this has earned them a loyal consumer base across the globe.

54. The PC Company HP Focuses on Security.

Due to the evolving cyber threats in today’s tech world, HP prioritized Security. They offer their users numerous advanced security features, which include encryption, secure boot, and biometric authentication. These fantastic features help safeguard their users’ data and confidentiality. 

55. HP has Various Team Members.

The HP company solely values diversity and inclusion among its employees. They believe that with diverse team members, different perspectives and fresh ideas will be obtained. Novel thoughts turn to fuels of inventions and creativity. The company also promotes equal chances and strives to create a helpful and inclusive work environment for everybody.

56. HP Contributes Energetically to the Social and Environmental Causes.

HP company strives to create a positive effect on society. With many benevolent activities, the firm has supported the community. These activities include supporting education, relieving the world from disaster, and running environmental conservation projects. These initiatives show that HP is strongly devoted to giving back to the community.

57. HP Stands Out Among All Companies That Offer Printing Technology.

The PC company has a rich history in printing and continues to innovate in this area. They supply printers, including everyday inkjet and heavy-duty ones built for commercial use. HP printing solutions are famous for delivering exclusive results and dependability.

58. HP is Actively Helping the Business World.

The HP company offers excellent solutions to businesses all over the world (whether big or small). With their top-tier servers and networking tools to software and services, HP provides companies with comprehensive solutions to improve their productivity and effectiveness.

59. HP Solely Invests in the Invention.

Hewlett-Packard devoted a vital part of its revenues to research and development. The company joined forces with top universities and research institutions to improve artificial intelligence, 3D printing, cybersecurity, and more.

60. Hewlett-Packard has Gotten a Heavenly Status.

The company recently earned a reputation because it delivers trustworthy and top-quality products. They are also actively committed to invention, Sustainability, Security, and customer satisfaction. This has gotten them prevalent acknowledgment and trust among customers and organizations.

61. HP Means Hewlett-Packard.

HP, or Hewlett-Packard, is an American multinational information technology firm. Its headquarters is located in Palo Alto, California. The firm was launched in 1939 by Bill Hewlett and Dave Packard. The founders merged their surnames to form the company’s name. Within the past years, Hewlett-Packard has become one of the best suppliers of personal computers (PCs), printers, and numerous tech-related products and services.

62. HP has an Outstanding Innovation Record.

The company was devoted to research and development. This has caused them to become one of the front liners in technological progress over the years. HP has developed various exclusive products and technologies, which include the first desktop laser printer, the initial handheld scientific calculator, and the pioneering thermal inkjet printer.

63. HP has Made a Vital Mark as One of the World’s Largest Technology Companies.

The company has reached people globally with its vast collection of products and services. With this, they have firmly established a vital mark as one of the key players in the tech industry. HP extends its tentacles to over 170 countries, with thousands of employees worldwide.

Conclusion

HP, or Hewlett-Packard, is one of the leading technology giants. It’s recognized for its innovative products and services. Across its wide-ranging history spanning many decades, HP has become a rampant name in the tech world. The company has become the people’s choice with its high-performance and reliable laptops, desktops, and printers, unceasingly producing cutting-edge tech that attends to developing customers’ and business needs.

Despite its excellent hardware products, HP still emphasizes Sustainability and social responsibility. The company stays loyal and devoted to ecological creativities and community engagement. They strongly aim to have a positive effect on society. With a remarkable track record of technological advancements and a dedicated focus on customer satisfaction, HP maintains its position at the forefront of the industry. Whether you’re an avid tech enthusiast or a business professional, HP offers diverse products and services to elevate your digital experience.

FAQs

How reliable are HP products?

Are HP inventions eco-friendly?

What is HP’s highest-selling product?

Where is the majority of HP income generated?

How much does HP make annually?

Is HP printing tech compatible with other products?

References

The post 60+ Eye-opening HP Statistics and Facts for 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/hp-statistics/feed/ 0
70+ Airbnb Statistics and Facts [2024 Updated Data] https://techreport.com/statistics/airbnb-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/airbnb-statistics/#respond Tue, 30 Jan 2024 23:17:46 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536274 Major Airbnb Statistics and Facts

Housing has been one of man’s most sought-after needs from times past. People don’t need just any kind of accommodation. For most, it has to be cosy, welcoming, and comfortable,...

The post 70+ Airbnb Statistics and Facts [2024 Updated Data] appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Major Airbnb Statistics and Facts

Housing has been one of man’s most sought-after needs from times past. People don’t need just any kind of accommodation. For most, it has to be cosy, welcoming, and comfortable, and that’s what Airbnb provides. Airbnb has, over the years, redefined what lodging truly means. People who are always on the move for business or pleasure do not have an ounce of worry with Airbnb on board. It is estimated that Airbnb has over 150 million users, with over 45 million of them in the United States.

Its accommodation and housing solutions provide the warmth you need while away from home. Its mode of operation has reshaped the hospitality industry. The ease of use and security of payment options have drawn many patronizers from all over the globe. Airbnb has become a household name offering lodging solutions to people from all walks of life. While exploring the following Airbnb statistics, we will show you how much the company has grown over the years and a sneak peek of the future.

Major Airbnb Statistics and Facts

Major Airbnb Statistics and Facts

  1. Brian Chesky and Joe Gebbia conceived the idea of an alternative hotel lodging in 2007. They got inspired after hosting three guests in their home in San Francisco.
  2. Airbnb went public in 2020 when its IPO rose
  3. Airbnb is the abbreviation for the accommodation service company ‘Air Bed and Breakfast.’ 
  4. The firm’s valuation reached $86.5 billion in 2020.
  5. The company’s market value rose to over $93 billion in 2023. It saw an 8.4% drop in its value since January this year.
  6. It sold $146 for each share on the Initial Public Offering (IPO) grand opening day.
  7. The company makes at least six guest check-ins every second of the day. 
  8.  During the COVID pandemic, Airbnb’s unique rentals, like cabins and smaller homes, saw more searches than traditional homes.
  9. The company’s headquarters is at 888 Brannan Street, San Francisco, California.

What is Airbnb?

What is Airbnb

Airbnb is the abbreviation of its full name, AirBedandBreakfast.com. Airbnb brings a different experience to its guests by redefining its approach in the lodging and hospitality industry. It’s an online marketplace that links people who put out their homes for rent and those in need of a lodge.

It is a great alternative to short-term and long-term stays or housing rentals for guests in different parts of the world. The overall concept of Airbnb is quite simple. It links people with spare rooms or complete homes to rent to travellers who visit the areaHosts use the platform to advertise their rentals to the public and place the payment process in the hands of Airbnb. The guests enjoy a homey place to lodge, which often comes at a lower price than hotel accommodations.

Airbnb History

Airbnb History

1. In 2007, two roommates, Brian Chesky and Joe Gebbia, came up with the idea to provide alternative lodging for a few people with hotel accommodations issues. They decided to lease out their air mattress on the living room floor in San Francisco to three guests as hotels around their area were fully booked.

2, Nathan Blecharczyk joined the duo in 2008, becoming the third co-founder of their idea, which they tagged Airbed and Breakfast. They created a website to provide short-term lodging homes and breakfast for guestsThrough their services, people who couldn’t book a hotel accommodation have alternative places to lodge. On August 11, 2008, the founders officially launched AirBedandBreakfast.com.

3. During the Democratic National Convention 2008, the founders generated up to $30,000 through cereal sales to guests. The breakfast cereal was named after Barack Obama and John McCain, US presidential candidates in the 2008 election.

4. In January 2009, the founders got an invitation from Paul Graham, a computer programmer. The latter trained them during his startup incubator called Y Combinator.

5. Graham went further to give $20,000 to Airbnb, which got him a 6% stake in the firm. The investment from Y Combinator served as an aid for founders to expand their business and include West Coast investors onboard.

6. The firm rebranded its name to Airbnb.com in March 2009 to avoid misrepresentation with air mattresses. In 2009, the company had amassed over 10,000 users and 2,500 listings, including complete rooms and properties.

Airbnb Outstanding Acquisitions

Outstanding Acquisitions stats

With its focus on setting a milestone in the lodging and hospitality industry, Airbnb has acquired several companies since its launch. Here are some of the acquisitions that helped to boost Airbnb’s market value over the years:

7. Airbnb acquired Accoleo, a stiff German competitor, in May 2011. This aided its aggressive move into Europe.

8. In March 2012, Airbnb acquired CrashPadder, a prominent London-based online marketplace for rental and accommodation listing. 

9. The acquisition positioned Airbnb as the largest lodging and rental website in the United Kingdom. Also, by taking over CrashPadder, Airbnb added 6,000 international listings to its portfolio.

10. The company took over Localmind in December 2012, a platform focusing on location-related questions and answers.

11. Airbnb purchased Trip4real, an online marketplace for travel activities.

12. In February 2017, the firm took ownership of Tilt.com, a social payment option.

13. The company moved into the  AI sector after acquiring GamePlanner.AI, an AI startup.

14. While Airbnb’s booking rate dropped drastically in some cities during the COVID-19 pandemic, many rural regions saw a rise. 

15. The firm introduced its official logo in 2014 as it reviewed the design of its mobile app and site. Airbnb’s logo is tagged “Bélo” and has a symbol representing “belonging.”

16. Bélo comprises four concepts or elements: people, places, love, and Airbnb. The symbol resembles a rounded letter ‘A’ with a drop-shaped loop at the center, like a location icon signifying places. Also, the loop stands for a person’s head, representing the accommodation process.

Airbnb Industry Stats

Industry Stats

7. Airbnb won the ‘app’ award during the South by Southwest conference in March 2011. It launched a travel guide of 23 different cities called “Neighborhoods” in November 2012. The guide offers suitable stays in the neighborhood that travelers can choose from while moving.

8. Nightstands on Airbnb take an average of up to 4.3.

9. Its major competitors include Booking.com, TripAdvisor Rentals, and Vrbo.

10. Europe records the highest demand for Airbnb, seconded by the Asia Pacific.

11. The company’s average occupancy rate in the United States is 48%.

12. People using the Airbnb app spend an average of 691 seconds (11 minutes, 31 seconds) daily.

13. The firm has more than 728,000 followers on Twitter alone

14. The website recorded 91 million visits at the end of January 2020.

15. Airbnb got 50% of its website traffic from mobile device users in the first month of 2020.

16. The letter ‘A’ is designed as an inverted shape of the heart. This represents the company’s name, attention, warmth, and love for customers.

17. Today, Brian Chesky is the CEO, and Nathan Blecharczyk is the CSO of Airbnb. Brian Chesky has the highest percentage of ownership, holding at 12%. Joe Gebbia and Nathan Blecharczyk own 8% and 10% of the company.

Airbnb Users and Demographics Statistics

Users and Demographics Statistics

18. The most popular Airbnb cities worldwide include Paris, New York City, London, Tokyo, and Osaka.

19. Millennials represent up to 60% of Airbnb’s customer base.

20. Airbnb has an all-time 1.5 billion guest arrivals as of June 30, 2023.

21. About 70% (two-thirds) of Airbnb guests are 25 – 34.

22. Airbnb’s guests aged 55 years and above make up 13% of its total customer base.

23. About 95% of surveyed Airbnb guests prefer the rental marketplace due to the ease of use and security of payment options.

24. Up to 55% of Airbnb’s long-term guests always work or study during their stay.

25. As many as 77%  of Airbnb users said their desire to live like locals made them choose Airbnb.

26. Airbnb’s hosts are mainly older or seniors.

27. The average occupancy rate across all Airbnb listings was 17.4% in 2020.

28. Airbnb’s most popular bookings, also known as nearby stays, were within 300 miles at the close of 2020.

29. Airbnb is operational in more than 100,000 different cities worldwide.

30. Over 220 regions and countries have Airbnb listings for users.

Airbnb Booking Statistics

Booking Stats

31. Airbnb had up to 356.9 million night bookings in 2021.

32. Airbnb had an Average Daily Rate (ADR) of $137 per night across all its listings in 2021.

33. Southern Maine and Cape May were the most popular Airbnb stop-over points in the United States in the spring and summer of 2021.

34. One of Airbnb’s major competitors is Booking.com. Over 1.5 million travelers from 220 countries use the Booking.com app to plan and book their journeys. Its website records an average of 100 million online visits every month.

35. Airbnb’s guests reached over 9 million by October 2013 since its launch date. Also, the number of users increased by almost 250,000 during the period.

36. The customer base rose to 150 million in 2018.

37. It has more than 7 million active listings across the world.

38. There is no Airbnb listing in some countries like North Korea, Syria, Iran, and Sudan.

39. Airbnb provides about $1 million of coverage for each listing.

40. Users made reservations in over 94,000 places during the COVID-19 pandemic.

Airbnb Host Stats

Host Stats

41. Airbnb has more than 4 million listings from individuals and companies wanting to rent their properties.

42. It has up to 250,000 listed homes, which are very suitable for families.

43. About 399,000 super hosts were available in the US in December 2019. 

44. A host makes at least $9,600 yearly.

45. Listings on the platform raised about $1 billion during the pandemic.

46. The 2023 (TTM) financial report shows Airbnb’s earnings grew to $2.84 billion. Moreover, hosts saw a 43.8% increase in their incomes as of 2021. Here’s a view of the company’s income in a few years.

Year Total Earnings Change
2023 $2.84 billion 41.39%
2022 $2.01 billion 1,365.04%

47. Hosts bear a 3% payment processing fee for every rental.

48. Two years ago, the company charged an average commission of 14% on hosts.

Airbnb Statistics on Growth and Revenue

Stats on Growth and Revenue

49. The firm opened its doors to the public in 2020, with its IPO becoming the largest.

50. Airbnb’s market value rose to $35 billion at the end of 2019. Four years its valuation skyrocketed to more than $93 billion. 

51. Following its impressive growth pattern, the firm’s revenue reached over $9.6 billion in 2023 (TTM). The firm saw about a 14.31% YoY (year-on-year) increase for the year. The table below gives more details on the company’s revenue over a given period:

Year Cumulative Revenue Change
2023 (TTM) $9.60 billion 14.31%
2022 $8.39 billion 40.18%
2021 $5.99 billion 77.37%
2020 $3.37 billion

52. The firm’s largest earnings come from America.   

53. Airbnb lost a total of $352 million in 2021. The value showed a huge improvement compared to the total loss of $4.5 billion in 2020. 

54. The company’s balance sheet showed total assets worth $21.43 billion as of September 2023. These include the sum of all the firm’s current and non-current assets, like cash and cash equivalents, properties, inventories, and equipment. Below is a representation of Airbnb’s total assets over the past few years:

Year Total Assets Percentage Change
2022-12-31 $16.03 billion 16.99%
2021-12-31 $13.70 billion 30.66%
2020-12-31 $10.49 billion 26.25%
2019-12-31 $8.31 billion 25.66%
2018-12-31 $6.61 billion

55. In the United States, some of Airbnb’s most popular destinations during the Summer of 2020 included Big Bear Lake, California. Others were Panama City and Miramar Beach, both in Florida.

56. Airbnb’s top global searches include the Baltic Sea Coast in Germany, Var in France, Sardinia in Italy, and Jeju in Korea in 2021 summer. 

57. One of Airbnb’s fastest-growing sectors is multiple property listings.

58. Long-term stays, according to trip length, are among the most listed classes on Airbnb.

Other Intriguing Facts about Airbnb

Other Intriguing Facts

59. More than 700,000 businesses worldwide use Airbnb for working purposes.

60. Up to 10% of Airbnb’s guests include an experience while booking a home.

61. Airbnb recorded a 94% increase in unique home searches when 2021 came to a close.

62. Airbnb came into being in 2007 through two roommates renting their air mattresses on their living room floor in San Francisco.

63. Lodging guests have reached over 1 billion guests after its launch.

64. The CEO and co-founder of Airbnb, Brian Chesky, listed the original Airbnb apartment till 2015. He charged the listing price of $50 per night just for the couch.

65. Airbnb was chosen as the Olympics’s official alternative accommodation partner in 2016.

66. Airbnb guests spent over $35 billion on local cafes and restaurants in 2018.

67. Airbnb listings comprise 300 lighthouses, 140 igloos, and over 1,600 private islands.

68. The Airbnb host and guest community gave almost $117 billion in direct economic impact across 30 countries in 2019.

69. Airbnb opened its first international office in London in October 2011.

70. Due to the pandemic, the firm had to sack about 1,900 staff members, representing 25% of its employees in America, Asia, and Europe. 

71. Airbnb permanently banned its platform for parties and events on rented homes in June 2022. The ban got the full support of hosts and neighbors amid their complaints of some disturbances at some Airbnb rented homes. Before then, the company had temporarily banned parties in rented homes due to the pandemic in August 2020.

Airbnb For Guests

Airbnb For Guests

72. People from different regions worldwide could turn into Airbnb guests. The company’s website lists various property types for short-term and long-term stays.

73. Guests can rent apartments and rooms from homeowners through online interactions. Travelers can search and choose any Airbnb property that matches their choices through the website.

74. The site contains a property description, including amenities, photos, and availability. Also, guests could access house rules, check-in and check-out times, host information, prices and fees, and other details. Additionally, reviews of Airbnb’s past guests are available for incoming ones to form their decisions. 

Steps to Using Airbnb for Lodging and Accommodation

Follow the steps given below:

  1. Visit the Airbnb official website to log in.
  2. If you don’t have an account with Airbnb, do so by clicking on the sign-up button. The account creation could take some time, as the company needs to verify your phone number. Moreover, you will have to upload other required forms of identification.
  3. Once logged in, provide the location and date (or period) of your desired lodging. 
  4. The company will display available listings for you to review. While searching, you can use the site’s filters for easy and unique customization.
  5. When you see the accommodation that meets your preference, you should book it for reservation.
  6. Make your payment for the accommodation, after which you’ll get a notification from Airbnb for your booking. 
  7. Where the lodging is for long periods, Airbnb offers guests a payment plan that allows initial deposits and subsequent installments to cover the costs.

Airbnb for Hosts

Airbnb for Hosts

75. Individuals and companies could become Airbnb hosts. The hosts offer spare rooms, apartments, or an entire home for renting from guests under Airbnb.

76. Also, hosts that provide suitable grounds and halls for special experiences such as concerts, tours, classes, and other programs within their locality.

77. Hosts can set and control some conditions attached to Airbnb rental listings, such as special features and amenities. They could offer a ride to the guests to and from airports.

78. Also, hosts could set accommodation prices, refunds, security deposits, check-in and check-out times, and other conditions.

Steps to Renting Property as an Airbnb Host

Follow the steps given below:

  1. Verify if there are restrictions or fees on rentals within the places where your property is located. Notably, some cities have certain rules regarding the number of days a host could rent out their homes or other property, as the case may be. Also, some could specify if the hosts will still live in the house during the guest’s stay. 
  2. Please familiarize yourself with Airbnb’s set requirements and standards for hosts on its platform.
  3. Sign up for an online Airbnb account by visiting the firm’s official website.
  4. Go to Airbnb Setup region and develop a suitable and attractive listing for your property. You can gain guests’ attention by adding attractive photos of the property that cover all unique amenities and features.
  5. You can get the assistance of a “Superhost Ambassador” from the Airbnb site that covers your region to handle any challenge while creating your listing.
  6. Proceed to set your listing price. The site includes suitable tools in its Help Center that help hosts make necessary inputs and adjustments in their pricing.
  7. You can publish the property listings once you’re done with the setup.
  8. Moreover, you can have the option to update changes or add new items like house rules and other general settings on your published listings.

Conclusion

This article offers relevant statistics and facts about the Airbnb online lodging company. Though the idea for the company began in 2007, Airbnb officially entered the hospitality industry in 2008. The company provides connections to hosts and guests in more than 220 countries and regions across the world. Following its past achievements, Airbnb has more potential for greater impact in the future.

FAQs

How do Airbnb hosts make their earnings?

Does Airbnb have a refund policy?

How many Airbnb hosts have become Superhosts?

References

The post 70+ Airbnb Statistics and Facts [2024 Updated Data] appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/airbnb-statistics/feed/ 0
Telemedicine Statistics – The Latest Telehealth Statistics in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics/#respond Tue, 30 Jan 2024 10:37:38 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536304

In this guide, we cover the main regional telemedicine markets, the most important telehealth use cases, and the key current and future trends in the field. Telemedicine statistics give us...

The post Telemedicine Statistics – The Latest Telehealth Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>

In this guide, we cover the main regional telemedicine markets, the most important telehealth use cases, and the key current and future trends in the field.

Telemedicine statistics give us information about providing support and healthcare through electronic communication channels, like telephones and the internet. It’s part of the digital transformation of healthcare and has been on the rise for the last few decades.

It was COVID-19, however, that really pushed telemedicine and remote clinical services into the spotlight. Around the world, medical professionals and patients relied on telehealth and virtual care to mitigate the risks of infection and optimize the resources of healthcare systems.

After the pandemic, many facilities continued to offer remote healthcare services, and the market has been growing ever since.

Given these advancements and the considerable potential impact of telemedicine on healthcare, it’s important to pay attention to telemedicine statistics and trends. Let’s dive in.

Key Telemedicine Statistics

  • The telemedicine market was valued at almost $115 billion in 2023 and is forecast to reach $286.22 billion by 2030.
  • As of 2021, telehealth appointments accounted for 10% to 49% of all appointments for 44% of American medical professionals.
  • North America is the largest telemedicine market in the world, with a share of 33.5%.
  • The EU’s largest telemedicine market is Spain. Spain’s telemedicine revenue was $270.2 million in 2022 and is projected to grow to $351.5 million by 2027.
  • In the US, the percentage of adults using telemedicine in 2021 was 37%, with slightly more females (42%) using telemedicine than males (31.7%).
  • In the US, Gen Z are the least frequent telemedicine users (17.6%), and baby boomers the most frequent (24.6%).
  • As of 2021, 88% of Americans preferred to use telemedicine after COVID-19.
  • The most common reason people in the US used telemedicine in 2023 was follow-up appointments, which made up 47% of all telehealth appointments.

Telemedicine Market Size & Forecast

According to Grand View Research, the telemedicine market was valued at almost $115 billion in 2023. The report forecasts it to grow at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 17.96% between 2023 and 2030. Fortune Business Insights concurs with that assessment, predicting that the telemedicine market will reach $286.22 billion by 2030.

The COVID-19 pandemic significantly contributed to the growth of the telemedicine market and the popularity of digital health solutions. Social distancing measures and the overwhelming impact on medical personnel meant that many routine appointments were canceled. Here’s a quick overview of COVID-19’s impact on telemedicine.

Telemedicine and Covid-19

Telehealth claims (as a percentage of all claims) in the United States from 2019 to 2021
Source: National Library of Medicine

A 2022 study by Kaiser Permanente tells us that before the start of the pandemic, telemedicine integration in the US was rudimentary, although 76% of American hospital systems did have some form of telehealth. However, in the first three months of the pandemic, telehealth insurance claims grew by 766%, and over 20% of all US medical appointments in 2020 were remote.

Moreover, before COVID-19, 65% of American medical professionals had never used telemedicine, and 23% used it rarely.

During the pandemic’s peak, more than 97% of healthcare experts were using telemedicine. For 43%, half of their appointments were telehealth appointments. In terms of outlook, 44% of US doctors predict that between 10% and 49% of their future appointments will be through telehealth.

Telemedicine Statistics by Region

Number of physicians that saw at least 75% of their patients via telemedicine by country
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics in your post

As with most emerging technologies, regions use and develop telemedicine at different rates. In this section, we look at key telemedicine statistics in different parts of the world, including popularity and uptake, number of users, and consumer attitudes.

North America

biggest telemed markets
Source: Grand View Research

North America is the largest telemedicine market in the world, with a share of 33.5%. That’s hardly surprising since many telehealth companies have a presence in the region. Moreover, as of 2022, 22% of global telemedicine companies were looking to expand to Canada and 17% to the US.

In 2023, Canada’s telehealth market revenue (including digital treatment and digital wellbeing) reached $2.42 billion, roughly ~$100 million more than the year before. That revenue is forecast to hit $3.58 billion by 2028, as the significant growth is largely due to Canada’s high telehealth literacy.

As of 2021, over 80% of physicians in the country had the expertise to provide virtual care, and 78% were satisfied by the level of patient support they could provide through this channel.

In the US, the telemedicine market was valued at $38.04 billion in 2022 and is projected to grow at a CAGR of 15.1% until 2030. In 2023, 44% of physicians used it at least weekly and 40% daily. For 65% of American physicians, 25% of all their appointments in 2022 were telehealth appointments.

Europe

Number of people with telemedicine appointments during covid-19 in Europe
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics in your post

The European telemedicine market is almost on par with North America in terms of development and growth. As of 2022, 77% of European countries frequently used telemedicine, with COVID-19 contributing to its use. As our infographic shows, the Spanish telemedicine market had a significant boost during COVID-19.

Spain is the largest telemedicine market in the EU. Almost 72% of Spanish residents had a telemedicine appointment during the pandemic. The market revenue was $270.2 million in 2022 and is projected to grow to $351.5 million by 2027.

Given that the number of telemedicine users in the country increased from 1.18 million in 2020 to 1.32 million in 2021 and is forecast to reach 1.41 million in 2027, such exponential growth isn’t surprising. The average revenue per user (ARPU) in telemedicine is also forecast to grow from $209.5 in 2022 to $250 by 2027.

The UK isn’t far behind. For instance, over 80% of patients in the UK  had a telephone (22%) or a video consultation (59%) with their doctor during COVID-19. And in 2022, 28% of physicians saw at least 75% of their patients via telemedicine. In comparison, this was 2% in Germany and Sweden, and 1% in France.

In 2022, the British telehealth market was valued at $1.58 billion and is forecast to reach $16.2 billion by 2030. The main reasons are the ongoing healthcare crisis in the UK and the government’s digitization efforts.

Latin America

ARPU of Telemedicine consultations in LATAM
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics in your post

In Latin America (LATAM), Brazil has the largest telehealth market, which is not surprising, considering it’s one of the most populated countries in the world. In 2020, there were around 2.46 million users of online medical consultations.

The number grew to 3.49 million in 2023 and is forecast to reach 4.25 million by 2028. The ARPU has been growing steadily since 2021 and is predicted to reach $292.81 in 2028.

Other LATAM countries have somewhat smaller telemedicine markets. Here’s a breakdown of the region’s 2023 telemedicine market revenue and its forecast growth.

Country Revenue, 2023 (USD) Forecast Revenue, 2028 (USD)
Brazil 0.81 billion 1.24 billion
Argentina 853.16 million 1.23 billion
Mexico 370.55 million 509.13 million
Chile 35.28 million 44.19 million

Asia-Pacific

Attitudes of patients in South Korea towards telemedicine

The Asia-Pacific (APAC) telemedicine market is experiencing significant growth. Before the pandemic, the region’s telemedicine adoption rate was low: 5% in Australia, 29% in India, and non-existent in Malaysia. However, in 2024, the adoption rate is predicted to grow exponentially: 70% in Malaysia, 76% in China, and 56% in Australia.

APAC’s telemedicine market size was approximately $16.8 billion in 2020, and it’s forecast to more than double by 2025 ($37.1 billion). Japan is expected to see some of the largest growth, from $5.1 billion in 2023 to $7.1 billion in 2028.

Telemedicine Statistics by Audience

Now, let’s look at two user groups in these global telemedicine markets: the patients and the medical professionals.

Who Uses Telemedicine?

 Percentage of adults aged 18 and over who used telemedicine in the past 12 months, by sex and age: United States, 2021
Source: CDC

According to 2021 research conducted by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) in the US, 37% of adults used telemedicine, with slightly more females using it (42%) than males (31.7%). Regarding age, patients aged 65 and over used telemedicine the most (43.3%) and Gen Z (18–25-year-olds) the least (29.4%) in 2021 .

An ASPE (a division of the US Department of Health and Human Services) study conducted a year later shed more light on telemedicine users in 2022. It shows that 22.5% of adults and 18.1% of children in the US used telemedicine that year.

Like the CDC study, the ASPE report found that Gen Z use telemedicine the least (17.6%) and baby boomers (those aged 65+) the most (24.6%). In terms of income split, the highest percentage of telemedicine users in 2022 had an annual income of less than $25,000 (26.4%).

But what about other countries?

In Spain more women used telemedicine (63.2%) than men (47.4%) in 2022, like the US. Again, similar to the US, Gen Z had the lowest rate of telemedicine use (49.1%). However, it was the millennials (aged 26–40) who used telemedicine most frequently (58%). For baby boomers, the rate was 54.1%.

Attitudes Towards Telemedicine

As with all innovations, people have varying opinions about telemedicine. In this section, we look at the statistics related to the opinions and attitudes of medical professionals and patients towards telemedicine.

Healthcare Professionals

Share of primary care physicians who used telehealth and said they were “very satisfied” or “somewhat satisfied” with practicing telehealth in selected countries in 2022
Source: Statista

As the above graph shows, Australia had the highest percentage of physicians worldwide who were satisfied with telehealth in 2022. The potential for time saved using telemedicine was also highest in Australia in 2023 – up to six hours each year.

In fact, many physicians worldwide consider telemedicine a convenient solution. Almost 70% of American healthcare professionals perceived telemedicine as ‘convenient’ in 2021, and 35% as ‘efficient.’ Moreover, the lion’s share of these physicians believe that ease of use is the key to ensuring patients’ access to telemedicine.

Convenience is also the prevalent factor among physicians in other countries. For instance, in Canada, 70% of healthcare professionals found providing video appointments very convenient, and 77% had the same opinion about telephone appointments. And 84% of physicians confirmed that telehealth made it easier for patients to access their care.

Patients

Distribution of impact of virtual healthcare on patient satisfaction in the United States of 2023
Source: Statista

Patients’ attitudes towards telemedicine is moving in a positive direction. Before COVID-19, 66% of adults in the US had concerns about the quality of telemedicine. However, this changed after the pandemic, and as of 2021, 88% preferred to use telemedicine.

Moreover, studies tell us that during COVID-19, patients’ experiences with telehealth appointments were just as positive as or more positive than face-to-face healthcare appointments in the US.

Of these appointments, patients tended to prefer video calls to telephone appointments. One study found that women preferred telehealth appointments for certain reproductive health issues.

Patients in Mexico seem to concur. According to statistics from 2021, almost 80% of telemedicine users said telehealth appointments were just as good as in-person appointments. About one-third of people (27%) in Great Britain were skeptical of telemedicine before trying it.

Top Telemedicine Use Case Statistics

Number of USA patients who used telehealth in 2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics in your post

Now, let’s take a closer look at why people use telemedicine. In this section, we’ll delve into the most common use cases for telehealth appointments.

Diagnostics & Follow-up Appointments

Clinicians' perception of office visits versus telehealth
Source: ResearchGate

The most common reason people in the US used telemedicine in 2023 was follow-up appointments, which made up around 47% of all US telehealth appointments. It seems to be the convenience that people find attractive.

Indeed, in a paper published in The American Journal of Managed Care, researchers stipulate that 52.5% of follow-up patients found telemedicine appointments more efficient.

Mental Health Support

Another common purpose of telehealth appointments is mental health support, used by over one-third of American telemedicine users between 2021 and 2023. These telemental health services improve access to mental healthcare for certain groups of people, but it’s not a one-size-fits-all solution, as it requires some technological literacy.

Chronic Conditions Support

Potential time saved for chronic patients per year through using telemedicine in selected countries worldwide as of 2023
Source: Statista

Telemedicine has been a game-changer for patients with chronic conditions. During COVID-19, telehealth was used by almost 50% of Europeans living with such conditions. In the US, physicians reported that 72% of their telehealth appointments were related to chronic care in 2021.

In addition to improving patients’ quality of life, telemedicine is a significant time-saver for people with chronic illnesses. For instance, Italians with chronic pain could save up to 9.5 hours per year with telemedicine, more than in any other country. Germans and Australians with chronic conditions could save up to 7.4 hours.

Future Telemedicine Trends

What is the future of telemedicine? Given that it’s already making a huge difference to millions of people’s lives, it’s no surprise that the only way for telehealth is up.

But what are the trends shaping its development?

Integration With AI

The applications of AI in healthcare are boundless, and telemedicine is no exception. AI-powered apps can analyze huge amounts of patient data to help identify patterns and offer invaluable insights.

Chatbots and virtual assistants can enhance patient engagement by providing real-time responses to queries, helping schedule appointments, and setting reminders to take medication. Also, the diagnostics applications of AI can help save time and optimize physicians’ workload.

Augmented Reality & Virtual Reality

Telemedicine doesn’t just support patients, it can transform the day-to-day work of medical professionals. AR and VR can help professionals, especially those being trained, to engage in realistic medical simulations, such as surgeries and procedures.

These simulations can provide a valuable learning experience, boosting physicians’ competence.

Remote Patient Monitoring

Remote patient monitoring (RPM) is a big deal in telemedicine, especially for patients with chronic illnesses. For example, integrating RPM with wearable technologies allows healthcare providers to monitor patients remotely and access up-to-date data, enabling them to provide the best patient care. It also allows real-time responses to help prevent complications.

Closing Thoughts

Like any other medtech innovation, telehealth’s primary goal is to help people. During COVID-19, we were shown how well telemedicine can work on an unprecedented scale, leading to accelerated digital transformation in medical technologies. As of 2023, that market was worth more than $100 billion, and it continues to grow.

In this guide, we reviewed the key telemedicine markets, how they are growing, how patients and medical professionals perceive telemedicine, and the most common use cases.

We feel optimistic about the future of telemedicine, telehealth, and other medtech advancements. However, we also know that there’s no one-size-fits-all solution, and we look forward to seeing how innovators will bridge the gap that restricts access to telemedicine and other healthcare to various population groups.

Sources

Click to see all sources
  1. The State of Telehealth Before and After the COVID-19 Pandemic (National Library of Medicine)
  2. Patient Experience with In-Person and Telehealth Visits Before and During the COVID-19 Pandemic at a Large Integrated Health System in the United States (National Library of Medicine)
  3. Telemedicine for healthcare: Capabilities, features, barriers, and applications (National Library of Medicine)
  4. Patient satisfaction with telehealth versus in-person visits during COVID-19 at a large, public healthcare system (National Library of Medicine)
  5. Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Telehealth Chronic Disease Management System: Systematic Review and Meta-analysis (National Library of Medicine)
  6. “I totally didn’t need to be there in person”: New York women’s preferences for telehealth consultations for sexual and reproductive healthcare in primary care (National Library of Medicine)
  7. The Telehealth Era Is Just Beginning (Harvard Business Review)
  8. Extent to which respondents agree with the following statements regarding telehealth services in Great Britain as of 2021 (Statista)
  9. Digital health in Canada – Statistics & Facts (Statista)
  10. Number of telehealth visits in the U.S. from 2013 to 2022 (Statista)
  11. Share of telemedicine users in Spain in 2021 and 2022 (Statista)
  12. Projected global telemedicine market between 2019 and 2030 (Statista)
  13. Share of people who received a telemedicine consultation from their doctor in Europe between April 2020 and March 2021, by country (Statista)
  14. Share of telemedicine users in Spain in 2022, by gender (Statista)
  15. Share of telemedicine users in Spain in 2022, by age (Statista)
  16. Share of telemedicine users in Spain in 2022, by service used (Statista)
  17. Number of users of online doctor consultations in Brazil 2018-2028 (Statista)
  18. Revenue per user of the online doctor consultations market in Chile from 2019 to 2028 (Statista)
  19. Revenue of the online doctor consultations market in Chile from 2019 to 2028 (Statista)
  20. Revenue per user of the online doctor consultations market in Mexico from 2019 to 2028 (Statista)
  21. Revenue of online doctor consultations in Mexico from 2019 to 2028 (Statista)
  22. Revenue in the digital health market in Argentina from 2018 to 2028 (Argentina)
  23. Average revenue per user of the online doctors’ consultations market in Spain from 2017 to 2027 (Statista)
  24. Revenue of the online doctors’ consultations market in Spain from 2017 to 2027 (Statista)
  25. Revenue per user of online doctor consultations in Brazil 2018-2028 (Statista)
  26. Revenue of the online doctor consultations industry in Brazil 2018-2028 (Statista)
  27. Share of people who were satisfied with the benefits of virtual care in Canada in 2020, by type of users (Statista)
  28. Share of physicians who agreed with the following statements regarding their use of virtual care in Canada as of 2021 (Statista)
  29. Share of physicians who agreed with the following statements regarding virtual care in Canada as of 2021, by type (Statista)
  30. Share of satisfaction with digital health tools in the United States as 2021, by type of activity (Statista)
  31. Perception of remote healthcare services in South Korea in 2021 (Statista)
  32. Distribution of patient visits conducted via telehealth by primary physicians in a typical work week in selected countries in 2022 (Statista)
  33. Distribution of impact of virtual healthcare on patient satisfaction in the United States of 2023 (Statista)
  34. Share of patients who have received the following healthcare services virtually in the United States in 2023 (Statista)
  35. Distribution of frequency of telemedicine utilization by physicians in the United States as of 2023 (Statista)
  36. Potential time saved for chronic patients per year through using telemedicine in selected countries worldwide as of 2023 (Statista)
  37. Potential time saved per year for medical appointments through using telemedicine in selected countries worldwide as of 2023 (Statista)
  38. Share of global telemedicine companies who indicated they wanted to expand in the following regions in the next few years as of 2022 (Statista)
  39. Annual revenue of the digital health market in Canada from 2019 to 2028, by segment (Statista)
  40. Share of countries that reported utilizing the following uses of telehealth and policies in Europe as of 2022 (Statista)
  41. Since COVID-19 and related restrictions began, have you ever consulted with your physician using one of these methods? (Statista)
  42. Telehealth adoption rate in the Asia-Pacific region in 2019 and 2021, with a forecast for 2024, by selected country (Statista)
  43. Revenue of the digital health market in Japan from 2019 to 2028 (Statista)
  44. Market size of the digital health industry in Asia in 2020 with a forecast for 2025, by product segment (Statista)
  45. Share of changes in peoples attitudes towards telehealth before and during the pandemic U.S. in 2020/21 (Statista)
  46. Distribution of telehealth use among physicians before, during, and after the COVID-19 pandemic in the United States as of 2021 (Statista)

The post Telemedicine Statistics – The Latest Telehealth Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/telemedicine-statistics/feed/ 0
50+ Wish Inc. Statistics and Facts for 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/wish-inc-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/wish-inc-statistics/#respond Sun, 28 Jan 2024 16:34:47 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536167 Vital Wish Statistics

Online buying and selling goods and services has progressed significantly over the years. It makes trading and logistics very easy for people. Many people now see the need to buy...

The post 50+ Wish Inc. Statistics and Facts for 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Vital Wish Statistics

Online buying and selling goods and services has progressed significantly over the years. It makes trading and logistics very easy for people. Many people now see the need to buy online instead of traveling to the mall or brick-and-mortar stores to purchase. As a result, many e-commerce-related businesses have sprouted, and Wish Incorporated is one of them. A 20.7% drop in revenue was recorded by Wish in 2021 compared with the year prior.

Wish was born in 2010, and since then, it has been working to keep the e-commerce podium on for Americans and other nations. The firm makes buying and selling cheaper and easier, and the U.S. citizens think it is the best way to trade. Now, 100-plus states use Wish in their routine commerce. The company keeps growing, not minding the ongoing stiff competition in the e-commerce industry. This write-up will examine Wish Inc. statistics and show how big the company has become. Tag along and explore.

Vital Wish Statistics

Vital Wish Statistics in 2024

1. 300 Million Products Are Available to Users on the Wish Store. 

Wish gives users access to 300 unique products to make shopping a day and provide practical solutions. 

2. The Firm Wish was Launched in 2010.

Wish was formed on June 25th, 2010, and has operated for over ten (10) years as one of the most popular e-commerce sites. 

3. The CEO, Piotr Szulczewski, Believes the Inc. can Become The Second or Third Trillion-Dollar-A-Year Marketplace.

The firm enjoys massive backing from its growing consumer base. Piotr believes its market value will eventually increase to a trillion-dollar-a-year. 

4. Danny Zhang was a Co-Founder, and the Firm Has 1,100 Employees.

The former Google engineer Piotr Szulczewski gave it the name ContextLogic. Also, in May 2011, Szulczewski called on his college friend Danny Zhang to help relaunch the company as well. The application enables shoppers to create a wish list of desired products. 

5. The Employees Reside in the United States.

Wish runs its operations in the United States, and its workforce is made up of U.S. residents.

Wish Inc. Market Share Vital Statistics in 2024

Wish Inc. Market Share

6. The Organization is the Fourth Largest United States Marketplace Based on Online Sales Volume.

Wish is behind e-commerce giants such as Amazon and eBay. The platform enjoys a healthy share of the marketplace based on sales volume.

7. Three Million Items Are Sold on Wish Each Day.

That is an impressive amount, confirming that it enjoys the trust and confidence of buyers with a large sales volume recorded daily.

8. Wish Enjoys a Market Share of 0.02% From the Global E-Commerce Market.

Although it looks small on paper, this market share converts to billions of dollars. However, the Wish team hopes to expand this market share globally as soon as possible! 

9. Wish has a Market Share of $0.08% of the U.S. E-Commerce Market.

It has a stronghold in the United States, although the top e-commerce sites still control the market.

10. The Market Share of Amazon in 2021 was 37%.

Compared to Wish, Amazon is far ahead with a 40% market share in 2021. The proportion implies that Amazon is still the preferred e-commerce site for most users.

Wish Inc Users Statistics according to Demographics

Wish Inc Users Statistics

11. The United States Takes the Third Place As Users of this Platform.

The United States remains the most important to Wish Inc. Remarkably, one-third of the orders placed on the Wish marketplace come from the U.S. It is the most lucrative region for the company globally.

12. Young People in Their Middle Use Its Services.

Wish seems to apply more to middle-aged and younger people. Research states it has risen in popularity in recent years. The Adult population might still prefer a traditional walk-in store for shopping needs.

13. Roughly 600 Million Users on Wish.

Also, Wish has over half a billion users with massive interest from the online shopping account community on the website. The users account for the daily transaction volume that Wish enjoys.

14. The Firm has Customers in 100 Countries.

The firm has a global reach with customers scattered abroad in 100 countries. It plans to translate to further expansion in the future.

15. 60.39% of Wish Users Are Male.

Males are the bedrock of Wish’s thriving customer base, but there’s no particular why this is so.  According to reports, 60.39% of its users are male.

16. 24.76% of Wish Users Are Between the Age Range of 25 to 34.

Once again, these statistics confirm that younger users dominate the marketplace. Access to mobile devices makes it easy for them to interact and transact on this marketplace.

17. Other Use Ranges Are 35 to 44 Years.

Users in this age bracket also find practical applications for the Wish marketplace. However, clients between 25 and 34 years old use it more. 

18. Only 9.40% of the Total Wish Users Are Above 65.

The older generation doesn’t usually use online marketplaces due to trust issues. So, only 9.40% of the total Wish user base is above age 65These senior citizens will likely spend less time on their mobile devices.

Wish Inc. Usage Statistics in 2024

Usage Stats

19. 80% of First-Time Wish Users Will Return For a Second Purchase.

80% of first-time customers are often satisfied with their services. Thus, they will always come to use the marketplace again.

20. The Site Has a Bounce Rate of 44.09%.

Wish is still struggling to retain users’ interest via a bounce rate of 44.09%. It keeps over 50% of website visitors and still enjoys modest success and conversion rates. 

21. 22.59% of Wish’s Website Visitors Are From the United States.

The U.S. is the top customer base for the Wish marketplace.22.59% of the total visitors to the website are from the United States, making it the most lucrative region for the e-commerce company. 

22. 60% of Wish Website Visitors Come Directly to the Website.

Most of the time, people visit the site through Ads from other pages. Approximately 60% of the total traffic on Wish comes from direct website visitors. The website is quite popular and attractive. 

23. 32.15% of Website Visitors Come From Search Engines.

Popular search engines like Google and Bing direct about 32.15% of visitors to the site. 

24. 100 Million People Use Wish Worldwide Every Month.

Wish records massive monthly activity with over 100 million users. That means many users rely on its marketplace for their daily transactions. These users are responsible for the massive traffic on the website that translates to sales and profit for Wish Inc.

25. Over 26 Million Users Shop On the Wish Platform Monthly.

The group has a success rate of 26 million monthly shoppers using it. This figure is a confirmation of how its customer base is rising.

26. More Than 600,000 Merchants Traded on Wish.

Wish has become a merchant hub with over 600,000 active merchants on the platform. With such a large user base, the firm boasts of a large volume of transactions each day.

27. Wish Recorded Its Highest Monthly Usage in Q1 2020, with 120 Million Users.

It is not a coincidence that Wish recorded its highest monthly usage in the Covid period 120 million users engaged with the platform due to its ease and reliability during the pandemic. 

28. Wish Recorded One of the Lowest Usage Stats in Q1 of 2022, with Just 26 Million Users.

While 26 million might be a remarkable target for smaller e-commerce platforms, Wish Inc. recorded it as a low figure in 2022. Although the reason for this is unknown, competitors could likely be behind this decline.

29. The Group Was the Most Downloaded Shopping App in 2019.

Wish gained massive popularity in 2019, ranking as number one among the most downloaded shopping apps. These downloads show increased user interest in the app based on features such as speed and convenience.

30. 7.66% of Wish Website Visitors Are from Canada, Its Second-Largest User Base.

Canadian residents account for 7.66% of the total visitors on the Wish website.

31. The Average Session on Wish’s Website Includes 8.36 Views.

These statistics proved that 8.36 people engaged with the Wish website per session. Hopefully, these figures will increase as Wish expands its reach globally.

32. The Average Session Length on the Website is 4 Minutes and 32 Seconds.

Wish Inc.’s users run an average session slightly below five minutes. Although the time seems short, it is sufficient for determined buyers to get access to goods or assemble their wish lists.

Health is vital to our everyday lives, so it is no surprise that it topped the search category on Wish. The other high-interest categories are birthday items, gadgets, essentials, and cleaning products.

34. Wish is the Most Successful Keyword in the Online Store Category.

The name Wish generates much traffic on the internet and is the most successful keyword for online stores. 

Wish Revenue Vital Statistics in 2024

Wish Revenue Vital Statistics

35. The Firm Earned Over $2 Billion As Revenue in 2020.

It received a boost during the lockdown since most people relied on them for goods and services. The organization got $2 billion and more in 2020.

36. The Company Ran Into a Loss of 20.7% in 2021.

However, it couldn’t make much gain in 2021. The group lost by 20.7% because of rivalry and unforeseen situations.

37. Wish Inc. Got Only 25% of the Figure in Q4 2020.

Wish’s revenue reduced in Q1 2021 compared to what it got in Q4 of 2020. The company got 25% off the revenue realized in 2020 in Q1 of 2021.

38. $129 Million Was the Loss After Accounts in 2019.

Economic uncertainties are inevitable since most firms can’t do much to prevent certain global issues, like pandemics. Wish got its fair share of the 2019 pandemic, which cost the company $129 million in losses.

39. The Business Lost $361 Million in 2021, Half of Its Loss In 2020 ($745 million),

E-commerce boomed during COVID-19 because of the increased demand for online purchases and door-door delivery at the time. Although Wish realized a sizeable profit, it also recorded a huge loss. Wish lost $745 million in 2020, and in 2021, the value was reduced by half, with the company losing $361 million.

40. 40.23% of the Gain Came From North America.

North Americans are regulars at Wish, and their visit brings in most of the company’s income, about 40.23%.  

41. 71% of the Group’s Income Comes From Their Root Marketplace.

The marketplace helps to promote interaction between Wish users. Through Root Marketplace, Wish gets most of its revenue.

42. Wish Earned $200 Million For Product Boost in 2019, Where Merchants Pay to Advertise Their Products.

Advertisements continue to generate revenue over the years. In 2020, Wish earned $200 million from this product boost service. Although such figure is less than the gain in 2019, it still stayed above the $200 million mark.

43. In 2019, It Earned $291 Million After a Product Boost to Merchants. However, This Revenue Stream Decreased by 31.2% Between 2019 and 2020.

The product boost merchants were chief contributors to its earnings in 2019. However, by 2020, this revenue source dropped by 31.2%.

44. Wish Logistics Arm Raked in $514 Million in 2020, Which Increased by 375% From 2019 ($137 Million).

Wish Logistics helps to move goods to various locations for customers’ comfort and ease of access. Impressively, in 2020, its revenue from this service rose by 375% from 2019 to $514 million. These stats highlight the importance of logistics in the lockdown era.

45. Wish Earned Just $6 Million From Its Logistics Revenue in 2018.

In 2018, the logistics concept was still new in some regions. Many people didn’t see the need to buy anything online and have it delivered to them. At the time, Wish got $6 million from logistics in the entire year. This income was modest compared to the revenue yielded through logistics in 2019 and 2020.

46. In 2020, South America Accounted For $90 Million in Revenue, a 55% Increase From the 2018 Revenue From this Region.

In two years, South American countries warmed up to the Wish platform to spike the revenues by 55%. The total revenues for 2020 from South America stood at $90 million, impressive!

Other Important Wish Inc. Statistics

Other Important Stats

47. Wish Removed Several Merchants From Their Marketplace in 2019 Due to Fake or Deceptive Products.

The company always strives to preserve the quality of its site and the trust of its customer base. So, in 2019, deceptive merchants were cut off to maintain site integrity.

48. Wish Was $11.2 Billion in 2019.

Wish Inc. is a billion-dollar company with a valuation of $11.2 billion in 2019. After its birth in 2010, it continued attracting global customers.

49. Wish Valuation Dropped to $0.9 Billion in 2022.

The organization reduced its worth to $0.9 billion in 2022 at its third valuation of $3 billion in 2023. The figure showed a sharp drop from the $11.2 billion valuation in 2019.

As a way of giving back to the people, Wish sponsored the Los Angeles Lakers basketball team. The activity took between $38 million to $42 million each year. However, it also serves as an effective marketing strategy for Wish since the club is quite successful.

51. The Inc. Holds $1.07 Billion As Cash-At-Hand.

Wish has many assets and holds $1.07 billion in cash.

52. The Company Has $142 Million Stored in Valuable Assets.

Also, Wish has valuable assets worth $142 million that preserve its long-term value.

53. Sales and Marketing Gave 76.76% of the Operating Costs In 2020 and 2021.

Sales and marketing are vital sectors, accounting for almost 80% of the company’s operational costs between 2020 and 2021.

54. 10% of the Operating Costs Are For Product Development.

Wish holds product development in high esteem. So, it pumps about 10% of the operating costs into product development.

55. Administrative and General Expenses Attracted Operational Costs of $295 Million in 2020.

At Wish, administration and general expenses take up a sizeable amount of money. About $295 million in 2020 went into administrative and other overhead costs.

56. YouTube is the Company’s Most Successful Social Media Outlet.

It looks like YouTube is Wish’s secret formula for generating traffic. The e-commerce company gets over 39.89% of its social media traffic from YouTube.    

57. Facebook is the Second Most Successful Social Media Outlet For Wish.

Facebook is another goldmine for Wish. Regarding social media traffic, the social media platform (Facebook) is behind YouTube. It brings in about 33.53% of Wish’s online traffic.

Conclusion

Wish has faced the highs and lows in the e-commerce industry. But has stayed on course as it strives for better days. The firm records profits and losses, but modifications will make the future brighter! It continues to add more value and remove things that make customers uncomfortable. Some of the notable improvements on Wish include the removal of deceptive sellers that scammed clients in 2019 and 2020. Reputation is sought after, for trust’s sake! To wrap it up, Wish is on the right path and could enter the top three e-commerce sites any day!  

FAQs

How much profit does Wish realize in a day?

How many orders do users place on Wish each day?

How much does an average customer spend on Wish?

Did the wrong Merchants Damage Wish?

References

The post 50+ Wish Inc. Statistics and Facts for 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/wish-inc-statistics/feed/ 0
80+ Rackspace Statistics and Facts [Latest Trends 2024] https://techreport.com/statistics/rackspace-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/rackspace-statistics/#respond Fri, 26 Jan 2024 18:21:35 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536130 Key Rackspace Statistics

In an era where safeguarding and managing data is critical, numerous IT enterprises turn to cloud services for assistance. One appealing option is Rackspace, a cloud computing provider primarily offering...

The post 80+ Rackspace Statistics and Facts [Latest Trends 2024] appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Rackspace Statistics

In an era where safeguarding and managing data is critical, numerous IT enterprises turn to cloud services for assistance. One appealing option is Rackspace, a cloud computing provider primarily offering Managed Hosting.

However, Rackspace also furnishes cloud storage, analytics, and database solutions. With these offerings, companies need not worry about storing, analyzing or organizing expansive data volumes. Additionally, the services empower operations to scale as needs evolve. In 2022, Rackspace generated over $2.57 billion USD in revenue from its multi-cloud solutions, which accounted for around 80% of the total intake.

Interestingly, Rackspace introduced its Cloud Files product to users in 2008, integrating with OpenStack for object storage capabilities. This tool has proven valuable by enabling customized data utilization through desktop clients or an online platform. But there are more fascinating facets to explore around this tech leader. Let’s uncover supplementary illuminating Rackspace details in the following statistics.

Key Rackspace Statistics

Key Rackspace Statistics

  1. There are about 7,200 active employees in Rackspace.
  2. Rackspace emerges 6th among the top 100,000 hosting websites in the United States.
  3. Rackspace’s total income dropped by 1489.61% to $612 million in the first quarter of this year.
  4. Approximately 50% of Rackspace’s clients live in the United States, while 7% dwell in the United Kingdom.
  5. Rackspace’s Performance Cloud offers powerful virtual machines supporting up to 32 vCPUs and 120 GB of RAM.

General Facts and Statistics on Rackspace

Facts and Statistics

1. Rackspace operates via global locations, including TX, Blacksburg, VA, and Austin. Besides these locations, it has an international presence in Australia, the U.K., Dubai, Switzerland, India, the Netherlands, Hong Kong, Mexico, Singapore, Canada, and Germany.

2. Founded in October 1998 by Richard Yoo, Rackspace has headquarters in Windcrest, TX, maintaining its roots since its inception.

3. In November 2016, Rackspace underwent a significant change in ownership when Apollo Global Management acquired the company for $4.3 billion. Following this transaction, Rackspace ceased trading on the New York Stock Exchange.

4. Rackspace currently boasts a workforce of 7,200 employees, contributing to the company’s global operations and success.

Statistics on Rackspace Market Share

Rackspace Market Share

Exploring its position in the market involves a deep dive into its market share data, shedding light on its competitiveness and impact in cloud computing.

5. Rackspace is the favored choice for businesses with a staff size ranging from 1 to 10 employees, with annual revenue falling between 1 million and 10 million dollars.

6. A scrutiny of Rackspace’s clientele across industries reveals the Retail sector (6%) as the predominant segment.

7. Geographically, half of Rackspace’s clients stay in the United States, with an additional 7% in the United Kingdom.

8. Rackspace commands a market share of approximately 5.4% in the Cloud Platforms & Services sector.

9. The firm has 604,208 companies using its services.

10. In 2023, 0.3% of all websites opted for Rackspace as the number one web hosting provider.

11. Rackspace is the DNS server provider for 0.2% of all websites.

12. Previously, 2,240,994 websites have availed themselves of Rackspace’s services.

13. Currently, 406,771 websites are active Rackspace DNS Cloud Customers.

14. It has 133,779 websites using the DNS Cloud.

15. An additional 272,992 websites have a history of using Rackspace DNS Cloud.

16. Notably, 94,757 American websites rely on Rackspace DNS Cloud.

17. Rackspace takes pride in its team of over 3,000 Cloud Engineers specializing in Linux, Windows, and VMware.

18. The experts have 7,500 plus certifications in AWS, Microsoft, Google Cloud Platform, and VMware.

19. Rackspace Technology commands a market share of 0.96%.

20. Among hosting sites in the top 100,000 US-listed websites, Rackspace secures the 6th position in popularity.

21. In the ‘Dedicated Hosting’ category, Rackspace holds 4th among the top 1 million listed sites.

User Statistics on Rackspace

User Statistics on Rackspace

22. Rackspace secures the 6th position among hosting sites within the top 100,000 listed in the United States.

23. Within ‘Dedicated Hosting,’ Rackspace emerges as the 4th most favored company among the top 1 million listed sites.

24. The firm is a data center provider for 0.4% of all websites.

25. Among the notable users of Rackspace, Office365.com stands out as one of the largest and most popular sites.

Statistics on Rackspace Performance

Rackspace Performance

Delving into Rackspace’s operational effectiveness and growth trajectory, we delve into key performance metrics that highlight the company’s standing in the industry.

26. The organization backs up a 100% Network Uptime Guarantee as specified in its Service Level Agreement.

27. Customers can rely on Rackspace’s assurance of a 1-hour hardware replacement guarantee.

28. The company’s dedication extends to ensuring 100% uptime for its data center infrastructure, encompassing power and cooling systems.

29. Rackspace’s network infrastructure is meticulously designed for high-speed connectivity, featuring a robust network capacity exceeding 300 Gbps.

30. The Performance Cloud Servers from Rackspace demonstrate impressive capabilities, delivering up to 120,000 IOPS for disk-intensive applications.

31. Rackspace’s Performance Cloud offers powerful virtual machines supporting up to 32 vCPUs and 120 GB of RAM.

32. Results from a recent survey conducted by Rackspace Technology involving 1,420 international IT professionals highlight that cybersecurity is a primary concern for global IT leaders (59%). The outcome showed worries about inflation (51%), talent retention and recruitment (45%), and supply chain/logistics management (45%).

33. A significant majority, with 93% of Education IT Managers and 97% of Research IT Managers’ consider adopting AI and ML in their workflows.

34. Rackspace Technology consistently earns recognition from Fortune magazine as one of the top workplaces, featured on its prestigious “100 Best Companies to Work For” list.

35. According to a survey, 78% of IT managers in the research sector and 74% of IT managers in the education sector agree that AI and ML have transformative impacts on their respective fields.

36. Rackspace’s support service rates are at 65%.

37. Rackspace’s pricing structure received a rating of 70%.

38. Rackspace gathered 96% from its various activities.

39. Highlighting its expertise, Rackspace Technology boasts over 1,800 AWS certificates and exceeds 5,000 cloud certifications.

Rackspace Income Analysis

Rackspace Income Analysis

Rackspace’s ability to manipulate data shows continuous progress and profit margin. Let’s show you a sneak peek into Rackspace’s incredible success since it came into existence. 

40. Rackspace analyzes the ups and downs in various industries and offers professional advice to investors who experienced an unstable economic situation in Q1 2023.

41. It spent $630 million when it started activities in 2023, proportionally 6.47% above the normal expenditure per section.

42. As a newbie, the firm lost 2.17%, a deviation from $758.7 million towards the year’s end.

43. Between January and March 2023, the loss was 612 million, unlike the $39 million in 2022.

44. Its general spending in 2023 increased by 2.27%, $166.6 million.

45. workers receive $111,405 yearly in the development section, and marketers get $104,807 annually.

46. In San Francisco, CA, employees get $121,692; in Seattle, WA, they get $112,590.

47. The company cut down its liabilities by 0.33%, which is $3.7134 billion in 2023.

48. Cash inflow came down by nearly $5.9 million (90.63%).

49. Rackspace’s stats on the mean yearly salary was $94,817, meaning that they pay workers $45.59 per hour.

Rackspace User Contentment Stats

User Contentment Stats

Since user contentment is vital, Rackspace’s user approval data shows its connectedness to the customers. The firm scales very high in terms of user feedback. Check out what consumers think about Rackspace’s functionalities.

50. Fanatical Support® is Rackspace’s technique devoted to supporting customers to the scope of 250,000 + monthly support tickets, delivering quick aids, and settling cases that arise.

51. The firm works with 300 techs that settle issues and offer various solutions.

52. Its Rackers support team has 2,500 or more technical certs, boosting its technological know-how.

53. In control of 200,000 or more databases, the organization works tirelessly to safeguard data. The organization ensures proficient control for its numerous clients.

54. The firm is number one in maintaining users’ needs to 90%. Rackspace pays more attention to offering specialized services and aid.

55. The user support sector controls 15,000 + support chats and 40,000 phone calls. It provides all-round help to its clients worldwide.

56. In control of users with 500,000+ virtual machines-VMs, the firm provides accessible and proficient cloud-based set-up ideas.

57. The firm has 150,000 plus cloud-based mailboxes under it, so the email services are quick for its clientele

Furthermore, its professional services sector has accomplished 10,000 or more passages, helping users with their apps and information in the cloud.

Rackspace Workforce Facts and Stats

Workforce stats

In the human resources landscape of Rackspace, there are vital insights into the company’s personnel development, emphasizing its workforce scale, diversity spectrum, and global presence. The following points unveil Rackspace’s commitment to its employees and the pivotal role they play in the company’s triumph:

58. Rackspace boasts a workforce of 7,200 individuals.

59. Gender distribution at Rackspace leans towards 26% female and 74% male representation.

60. The company’s employee base reflects diversity, with staff originating from more than 80 countries, fostering a vibrant and inclusive workplace culture.

61. Rackspace employees exhibit multilingual proficiency, with competence in over 35 languages, cultivating a diverse and globally connected work environment.

62. A significant 67% of Rackspace’s workforce holds at least a bachelor’s degree.

63. The Information Technology Information Library Foundations certification is preferred among Rackspace employees.

64. Situated in San Antonio, Texas, the Rackspace corporate office spans over 1.2 million square feet, establishing it as one of Texas’s largest office spaces.

65. Computer science emerges as the predominant field of study among Rackspace employees, with 19% holding degrees in this domain.

66. The age group of 30-40 years constitutes the top demographic, encompassing 39% of the employee population.

67. Rackspace does not employ individuals below the age of 18.

68. The typical tenure at Rackspace spans 1-2 years, with 30% of employees falling within this duration.

69. A modest 9% of Rackspace employees stay with the company for 8-10 years.

70. An overwhelming 97% of roles at Rackspace are remote positions.

71. Currently, Rackspace advertises 349 remote positions compared to 12 traditional roles.

More Rackspace Statistics

More Stats

72. Sixteen percent of Rackspace employees hold the IT Information Library Foundations certification.

73. Most Rackspace employees receive salaries ranging from $60k to $100k, encompassing 46% of the workforce.

74. The least common salary bracket is below $25k, representing just 1% of the employee base.

75. In 2000, the company secured crucial funding from investors Norwest Venture Partners and Sequoia Capital.

76. Fortune recognized Rackspace as the 32nd ‘Best Company to Work For’ in 2008.

77. Rackspace earned a spot on Fortune’s “Top 100 Best Companies to Work For” list in 2011 and 2013.

78. The company conducts regular ‘open book’ meetings, where management discloses detailed financial information to all employees.

79. The 7,200 employees in the firm are 26% women and 74% men.

80. Breaking down the demographics, 46% of Rackspace employees identify as white, 25% as ethnically Latinx, and 14% as Asian.

81. On average, employees stay with Rackspace for 4.5 years.

82. The typical salary for a Rackspace employee averages $92,615 annually.

Conclusion

Our analysis in this piece shows that Rackspace stands out in cloud activities. Think of it as the towering cumulonimbus in the expansive sky of cloud computing, showering businesses globally with inventive solutions. The data indicates a growth trajectory as remarkable as a tech enthusiast’s caffeine intake, accompanied by a customer base expanding at a pace that rivals your email spam folder.

FAQs

Is Rackspace experiencing an increase or decrease in its market share over time?

For what purpose is Rackspace utilized?

How many businesses rely on Rackspace?

Sources

The post 80+ Rackspace Statistics and Facts [Latest Trends 2024] appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/rackspace-statistics/feed/ 0
60 Fascinating Intel Statistics [2024 Updated Figures] https://techreport.com/statistics/intel-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/intel-statistics/#respond Fri, 26 Jan 2024 17:41:53 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3536048 Major Intel Statistics

Intel is a well-known semiconductor industry name. The company knows the importance of high-quality chips at a reasonable price. Intel always assures consumers. The tech giant is relentlessly committed to...

The post 60 Fascinating Intel Statistics [2024 Updated Figures] appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Major Intel Statistics

Intel is a well-known semiconductor industry name. The company knows the importance of high-quality chips at a reasonable price. Intel always assures consumers. The tech giant is relentlessly committed to advancing technology. Their vision and hard work brought in a staggering $63 billion in revenue in 2022. Reaching such heights is remarkable. This is especially so with rivals like AMD competing for market share, which currently has 31% of the segment.

But here are the facts. Intel is still the semiconductor leader. The company stays dominant in the industry through smart marketing. It also dedicates itself to improving iconic computer chips. They engineer pioneering processors. Many know that. Processors do more than just operate devices. They undoubtedly propel innovation across the globe.

Many people are curious about the elements that drive Intel’s lasting success. A wealth of clear data is ready for review. One can study the key breakthroughs. Having calculated their moves, they left the stumbles behind. They shaped Intel’s story. This elevates them to an enduring player that withstands time. This Intel statistics and facts write-up unpacks the narrative behind this worldwide semiconductor force and promises valuable insights. So, get yourself your favorite snack. Let’s unravel the key factors that put Intel at the top of chip engineering.

Major Intel Statistics

Major Intel Statistics

  1. Intel’s journey began with two young men, Robert Noyce, and his cofounder Gordon Moore, in 1968. 
  2. Intel has its headquarters in the city of Santa Clara, California.
  3. The company was once called NM Electronics before it was changed to Intel 
  4. Moore Noyse came to mind while thinking of a suitable name, but this was soon put aside as it sounded more like saying Moor Noise.
  5. The name NM Electronics was pushed aside for Intel just a few days after it was put to use. 
  6. Robert Swan serves as the CEO of Intel.
  7. Intel paid $15,000 to get its name. 
  8. Printing a single transistor costs far less than a single printed newspaper character. 
  9. Intel has been able to get to the status of the 14th most valued trademark worldwide. 
  10. It is one of the businesses that will be taking part in funding the 2024 Olympic Games.

Market Share Statistics

Market Share Statistics

1. Intel has Quite a Great Market Share, Up to 78.3%, Compared to AMD.

Intel is making more waves in the single-core processors market than any other company. It is way better than AMD when it comes to multi-core CPU systems

2. Samsung had All Course to Celebrate When it Sold Out Far More Semiconductors Between 2017 and the End of 2018.

Samsung led the semiconductor market in first place with a revenue of $61,158 million and, after that, had $73,649 million at the end of 2018. Intel was a bit down in revenue in 2017, with a total of $58,725 million, and closed with $66,290 million the next year

3. Intel Fared Far Better Than Samsung in Semiconductor Sales at the Close of 2020.

The year 2020 was different for Intel regarding the number of semiconductor sales, as it sold more chips than Samsung. This success could be tied to the large volume of memory chips sent to the market. Sales ended with $76,240 million for Intel at the close of 2020. This was not the case for the former industry leader, Samsung, which ended the year in second place with 56,912.

4. Intel Yields Far More Revenue Than AMD or the Tech Firm Nvidia.

There is a clear difference between Intel’s revenue and AMD’s and Nvidia’s tech firms. Only 17% of the industry market share is held by AMD, as Intel has claimed 82%. Intel is doing way better with $54 billion in LTM revenue, leaving Nvidia at $26 billion.

5. Over the Years, Intel has Gathered Around 77% of the Consumer Computing Market.

It’s not wrong to say that Intel controls the consumer computing sector since it has about a 77% stake in the market.

Intel Diversity and Employee Statistics

Diversity and Employee Stat

6. Workers Totaling 132,000 are on Intel Company’s Payroll.

Having workers to cover its vast customers has never been an issue for the tech giant. In 2022, the company decided to employ more hands to ensure the smooth running of its affairs. It had 132,000 workers on its monthly payroll at the year’s close. This means the number of people working in Intel rose by 8.92%. 

7. Women Also Have a Spot in the Affairs of Intel and Occupy 27.7% of the Company’s Staff Strength.

Intel embraces people from all races and genders. To its credit, 27.7% of its staff will be females in 2021. This marked a 0.1% drop in the number it had in 2022. These women get an equal chance to work up the career ladder at the corporation

8. Asian Women Got a Working Chance of 36.3% in 2021.

The rate at which Asians were given work opportunities at Intel in 2021 was quite low from the last year by 1.3%. Only 36.3% of the employees at Intel in 2021 were Asians.

9. Native Americans Have a Cut of 0.8% of the Total Intel Workers.

Persons who are Native Americans make up a minor 0.8% of the total workforce of Intel

10. Male Workers Make Up the Largest Chunk of the Workforce in Intel, With 73%.

Most of the workers in Intel are males, accounting for 73% of the workforce. These men take up most of the positions in Intel company, like several others in the industry. It is necessary to state that many of these males are white, accounting for as many as 52% of the total employees at Intel.

11. Setting up an Office With a Cubicle Design Started With Intel.

Intel was the first company to start designing office settings in the form of a nice cubicle. Many other companies are now towing this same part in their office settings today

12. Intel Stopped Designing its Offices With the Booth Style in 2007.

The company in 2007 saw the need to change its style of office design in the year 2007. It always looks for better ways to improve services and products.

13. Costa Rica was Able to Add 4.6% to its GDP Due to the Activities of the Intel Group.

The company has a nice spot in Costa Rica’s economy. The country’s economy is profiting in no small way from Intel’s activities in its territory. As high as 4.9% of the total GDP that came within the shores of Costa Rica was from Intel

14. Most of the Intel Staff Favor the Democrats.

Quite a large number of Intel staff said they are of the democratic party. Staff like Curtis Engelhard have given the democratic party large sums of money, up to $111,700. Employees who take sides with the democratic party are as high as 75%. This shouldn’t surprise you; most people will go with the tide any day. Those who do not favor the democratic party are just a slice of 23.9% of workers at Intel. 

15. You Can Earn an Average of $99,300 and Even More as an Employee of Intel.

Most of the workers at Intel love their jobs. Employees working at Intel are placed on an average salary scale of about $99,300. A cleaner at Intel takes home between $44,720 and just around $57,819 for an entire year. As many as 73% of employees at Intel are pleased to a large degree with the work conditions. 

16. Up to 47% of Intel Employees are From a Minority Race.

Intel is doing all it can to build a work environment that takes in talented persons from any race or tongue. This new move is why it has included 47% of minority races on its payroll

17. Most of the Employees at Intel Can Speak Spanish Very Well.

Itel has hired quite a good number of people from different regions. A large number of workers in Intel fluently speak Spanish

18. Chinese is the Means of Communication for 10% of People.

Communicating with the Chinese language is a daily routine for 10% of people who work at Intel. This shows that language is not a reason not to apply for a job at Intel

19. Over 50% of Intel Employees Must Have a Bachelor’s Degree.

Higher education got more than half of Intel employees their jobs at the company. A bachelor’s degree is held by 60% of people who are working in Intel

20. Persons Between the Ages of 20 to 30 Years Make Up 39% of Intel’s Workforce.

Up to 39% of young people between 20 and 30 are part of the workforce that drives Intel. From the statistics, one may infer that Intel believes young ones can contribute immensely to its progress. This age group has the largest number among all the employees at Intel

21. Individuals Above 40 Make up Just 20% of Employees.

Persons who are over 40 years of age make up just a low 20% of Intel staff strength. 

22. As Low as 2% of Intel Workers Fall on 18 Years and Below.

Only 2% of the staff at Intel are 18 years of age and below.

23. It is One of the Most Common Courses, With 29% of Intel Workers in Electrical Engineering.

Persons with electrical engineering degrees comprise just 29% of Intel’s staff strength. Many people who work at Intel hold a degree in electrical engineering.

24. Up to 14% of Persons Working at Intel Group Schooled at the University of Arizona.

Quite a sizeable number of Intel staff, up to 14%, once studied at the University of Arizona. 

25. A Master’s Degree is Tied to the Names of 16% of Intel Employees.

Intel strives for excellence and seeks the best hands for the job. Little wonder that 16% of its employees have master’s degrees in their chosen field of study. 

26. One in Every Five Employees is More Than 40 Years of Age in Intel.

Taking note of talents and retaining them has brought Intel into its present state of success in the industry. People 40 years and above are just a fifth of the total staff on its payroll

27. One Out of Every 50 Intel Employees is 18 or Below.

People 18 make up just a small portion of Intel’s staff strength. You can only find one person who is 18 years or less in a row in a call of 50 Intel employees. 

28. Only 9% of Intel Workers Work Outside the Office. 

Working from home or any desired location is the dream of so many, but this chance is given to just 9% of Intel staff.

Intel User Statistics

Intel User Statistics

29. You Cannot Deal Directly With Intel Company Alone as a User.

Intel is not in the habit of conducting business dealings openly with the users. 

30. Some Firms in the Technology Industry Have Partnership Deals with Intel.

Intel has to its credit great firms moving the technology industry as its partners. Examples of these firms are Dell, HP, and Lenovo.

31. In the Hardware Gaming Market, Over 75% of its Systems are Serviced by Intel.

Intel has risen to become a household name in the world of hardware gaming. It services more than 75% of hard wares in the gaming market with its processing units

32. Intel Ensures it Sets Aside $15 Billion for Research Work Annually.

Research work is very dear to Intel as a corporation. Every year, it puts aside up to $15 billion for research and product development.

33. It Got the MobileEye With a Tidy Sum of $15.3 Million.

Intel spent a whole $15.3 million in acquiring the MobileEye. 

34. Products That Intel Makes are Used for Both Personal and Corporate Uses.

Intel is well known for offering services that can also serve personal and corporate uses.

Intel Sales Statistics

Sales Statistics

35. Intel’s Largest Sales Market has Been China From as Far Back as 2016.

The spot of highest sales market has been taken by China year after year since 2016. This has put the country in the spotlight of revenue for Intel. Intel got $17.125 billion from just China out of its $63.054 billion revenue in 2022.

36. The United States Stands as the Third-biggest Intel Sales Market.

Intel’s sales have been faring well in the United States market for a while. 

37. Intel Landed With an Earning of Just $2,672 in its First Trading Year.

The first trading year was quite eventful for Intel, ending at $2,672. This amount was valued at $51,000 at the close of 2022.

38. Trades From Consumer Products Comprise 52% of Intel’s Grand Sales.

Consumer products make up over 50% of the entire sales record of the famous Intel company. 

39. Up to 42% of the Profit Made by Intel Comes From the Countries of Taiwan and China.

Taiwan and China bring in nearly 50% (42%) of the company’s profit. This is not far from the truth, as the Asian continent has a large market for Intel to soar.

Intel Revenue Statistics

Intel Revenue Statistics 

40. Intel Gathered $52.86 Billion for Itself in September 2023.

Revenue from last year September to that of 2023 was not in any way great. The company experienced a drop in revenue of 23.98% from what it had in the past. In September, which marked Q3 2023, Intel got a revenue of $14.16 billion. This was not a good note for the company as it marked a fall of 7.69%. 

41. The Year 2021 Decorated Intel’s Purse With Revenue Totaling $79.02 Billion.

Intel closed on a good note in 2021, recording a revenue of $79.02 billion. This was a great report for the company as its growth rose 1.49%

42. 2020 Was no Different as Intel Soared Higher, Recording a Revenue Increase of 8.20%.

Expectations were high, and the company tried to deliver a rise in revenue of 8.20% from the previous year. As a result, Intel ended 2020 with a revenue of $77.87 billion.

43. Intel Got $71.97 Billion in Revenue When the 2019 Curtain Ended.

The year 2019 was a great year for Intel, as it did not bow to a loss in revenue. Instead, the company revenue rose to $71.97 billion, a growth of 1.58% when the year ended.

Statistics on Intel Stock Price

Stock Price Stats

44. The Stock Market Opened its Arms for All to Trade on the Last Day of November, With Intel Stock Selling at 44.65 USD.

The last day of November 2023 was eventful, as Intel had a market cap of 188.56 billion. The market opened that same day with a stock price of $44.65 to be brought to a close at $44.70.

45. Intel Stocks Rose by Just 6% All Through the Entire Year 2019.

Stocks did not do so well; they grew by just 6% at the end of 2019. This was not the same with AMD, which had up to 86% increase in its stock the same year.

More Intel Statistics

More Stats

46. The company started up Intel Capital in 1991 and began its journey of investing $11.8 billion in newbie businesses. 

47. More than 1,400 startup firms have benefited from Intel Capital after it was launched.

48. Up to 57 countries so far have gained from the goodwill of Intel Capital over these years.

49. About 50% of business funding by Intel Capital goes to firms outside the United States

50. A third of Intel’s budget in 2020 was spent on adverts for its products and services, just like in 2005.

51. Intel went all out to get McAfee for a tidy sum of $7.68 billion in 2010. 

52. Intel’s energy usage has risen by 50% for up to five years.

53. Discharges of greenhouse gases have risen in no small way, as they stood at 34% for five years

54. A maker of watches was bought out in 1972, but this did not last for long, as the business was sold in 1978.

55. Intel has a fully stocked museum where you can pay visits any time of leisure

56. More than 90,000 people flock to the Intel museum yearly. 

57. The company has taken into its fold 27 firms since it started operating. 

58. Intel paid $1.25 billion to stop a lawsuit filed against it by AMD in 2009. 

59. One thing that anyone can easily recognize is the Intel sound. 

60. European courts made Intel pay a large amount of money, summing to $1.3 billion, for a case on antitrust.

Conclusion 

Refining talents is one strong point that makes the Intel corporation a great place to work for anyone. There are a whole lot of reports from past and present staff that attest to this fact. Intel’s name is written in the sands of time for its impact on the semiconductor chips industry. It has risen over the years to take a large spot in the computing community. The facts are clear with the records that Intel always seeks ways to keep customers returning. Taking charge of the market can be linked to the research it puts in every year.

This chip giant has to its belt of success some companies that partner with it at the passing of each year. Countries like Costa Rica have every reason to thank Intel for the good turnout of its GDP in recent years. Revenue keeps growing for Intel year after year, with its tentacles spreading in several countries. More and more companies are getting funds to continue through Intel Capital, which may not end soon.

FAQs

How well have Intel sales been faring?

What makes Intel stand out in the market?

What clients bring in the largest of Intel revenue?

Sources

The post 60 Fascinating Intel Statistics [2024 Updated Figures] appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/intel-statistics/feed/ 0
15+ Cybercrime Statistics You Must Know in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/cybercrime-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/cybercrime-statistics/#respond Thu, 25 Jan 2024 16:41:23 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3535908 Eye Opening Cybercrime Statistics

Cybercrime is spreading like wildfire, and the digital economy is fueling these hackers more than ever before. As per the latest estimates, expert projections estimate cyberattack damages will grow 15%...

The post 15+ Cybercrime Statistics You Must Know in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Eye Opening Cybercrime Statistics

Cybercrime is spreading like wildfire, and the digital economy is fueling these hackers more than ever before. As per the latest estimates, expert projections estimate cyberattack damages will grow 15% over the next three years.

Companies are panicking and spending insane amounts of money to protect themselves. They put over $150 billion towards security just a couple of years ago! Unchecked, attacks and losses continue to increase. Honestly, the full scale of this issue is scary, and the numbers likely underplay it. We need to talk about the cybercriminal explosion threatening everything we do online. Staying silent won’t help.

So consider this an invitation to get informed! We’ve assembled 2024’s latest cybercrime statistics and facts so you can finally understand these threats. Together, we’ll break down the most dangerous hacking techniques, map out high-risk scenarios, and unlock simple tips to protect yourself better.

Stick with me to avoid becoming their next victim. Let’s shed light on this creeping cybercrime wave before damage is done.

Eye Opening Cybercrime Statistics

What Actions or Activities Fall into the Category of Cybercrime

Like a Cameleon, cybercrime can take different forms. The bad players come camouflaged in different ways and actions to confuse people and steal their funds. But here, we’ll look at the main kinds so you understand what they truly are. In simple terms, cybercrime is illegal digital activities that compromise online security. The most common examples are hacking into private systems, sharing computer viruses, or scamming innocent people online.

Even harassing someone online is also considered a cybercrime. We know it now, but it seems like the list is neverending. However, focusing on typical cases makes it less overwhelming. In all, cybercriminals take advantage of technology to cause harm or make money from innocent folks. Some other examples of cybercrime you need to be aware of:

  • Hacking sensitive or important accounts to take people’s info. This happens mostly to large companies, where hackers try to steal important information from the enterprise.
  • The next common type of cyberattack is through malware. This software is developed specifically to disrupt, destroy, or gain access to a victim’s company.
  • Identity theft or impersonation is another huge one. This works when the scammers pretend to be real companies or someone to trick and steal your cash.
  • There’s also another kind of cybercrime that involves crypto-jacking, crypto mining, etc.

The primary thing to do to avoid these online scams is to stay alert against shady online activity and guard your accounts, devices, and information.

Important Cybercrime Statistics

Important Cybercrime Statistics

  1. Ninety-five percent (90%) of online attacks happen because of natural human mistakes. These mistakes are things like weak passwords/pins or clicking suspicious links you don’t know about.
  2. In 2016, nearly all the stolen records came directly from three sectors. These sectors are government, technology industries, and retail. So, if you’re in any of these fields, you must apply extra security measures.
  3. Spies carry out ten percent (10%) of breaches, but 86% want money. This means that cybercrime pays crooks more than some other sectors do.
  4. Since the Coronavirus pandemic, the FBI says that complaints concerning online crimes have tripled. According to the FBI, the cybercrime reports increased from one thousand to four thousand. Remember, this happens daily.
  5. By 2025, according to Cybersecurity Ventures, cybercriminals will go home with over $10 trillion annually. The damages caused by cybercrime will be higher than the ones inflicted by natural disasters. Also, by then, online crime will be more profitable than the sales of illegal drugs globally.
  6. Out of all companies’ files, only five percent are protected properly. No wonder data breaches spread faster like wildfire within the organization. Many of these enterprises fail to keep up with top security measures.
  7. Nearly two-thirds of Americans don’t care about checking their devices to know if it’s being hacked. That’s a very risky move, as your devices are exposed to attacks.
  8. The worst malware, virus, or worms is when a hacker attaches an executable file to emails. A victim can get this virus by clicking the link attached to an email message. Sometimes, when you open the mail, your computer system will get infected with these viruses.
  9. Almost half of malicious email attachments disguise themselves as Microsoft Office files. This is the perfect Trojan Horse.

Stats About Online Crimes and Personal Information Leakage

Online Crimes and Personal Information

As mentioned earlier, tons of cybercrime exists in today’s digital world. But, among all these crimes, data breaches are the most common. When we hear the word “data breaches,” what comes to mind is big companies sharing how hackers stole users’ information. But that’s not the case. Data breaches can affect any business. Whether hospitals, small entities, or even schools, they all have tasted a pound of flesh from online criminals. To understand the extent of this problem, let’s show you some important numbers on data breaches.

1. Over 500 Million Online Gamers Have Had Their Data Stolen in the Last Five Years.

As the gaming industry keeps expanding, hackers are creating more methods to milk victims. Also, with time, the industry will likely turn to hackers’ perfect playground to attack innocent gamers. Unfortunately, these hackers can steal anything, be it users’ credit cards or passwords. They do anything they can to get their hands on the target.

And the worst part is they even get away with these acts, which makes it too bad for gamers. But this is just a quarter of the gaming breaches that have happened before. So, how massive has this issue affected the industry? Ultimately, the gaming industry has become an easy target for hackers because of the amount of money entering nowadays. And the security method can keep up.

2. In 2019, Companies Spent Over $5 Million for Just One Data Breach Incident.

The amount is far bigger than the amount spent in 2018. Many organizations flush millions of dollars yearly to clean the mess caused by hackers. The average breach expense hit $8.64 million in 2020. This is almost double compared to 2019.

You might think the tech sector is the most affected, but no, it’s the banking and manufacturing that suffer badly. One out of five industries have had their data breached three years ago. Meanwhile, some users might worry about why this huge amount was spent on online crime damages. Well, the amount goes to legal fees, & IT security upgrades. But don’t forget the days that the affected businesses or companies have to go offline for clean-up.

3. Over 56% of Americans Don’t Know What to do When Their Data Gets Breached, to be Exact, 56%.

To those in the IT industry, this might seem surprising to them. But common, many of us in the real world ain’t trained on cyberattack protocols. We just hope not to become victims of these attackers. Meanwhile, some individuals inside America (about 44%) have taken it upon themselves to research what to do after being hacked. But that’s still under half of the country’s population. Spending at least 30 minutes Googling how to respond to data breaches will help protect your laptop. Making our devices or accounts free from hacking should be the #1 job for everyone within or outside an organization.

4. Uber Tried Keeping its Massive 2016 Data Breach Secret.

It’s among the 5 percent of companies that tried to hide their data breach from the public. That isn’t good for a company of such capacity. We’re discussing how cyber thieves swiped 57 million rider and driver records. This is a gold mine for identity theft. Instead of Uber admitting its security failure and giving its customers some assurance, it chose to pay off the crooks to keep quiet. It thought it could sweep the act under the rug, but it was quite unfortunate for them. The breach still surfaced online, and Uber’s stock and reputation dropped.

Uber spent millions out of its pocket to save its face, yet it looked worse. This shows that honesty is the best policy for keeping your customers and staff. Data breaches can hit pretty much any company out there, both the big and upcoming. This is not the company’s end if they could come out boldly to address the issue.

Comprehensive Cybercrime Reports Statistics

Cybercrime Reports Statistics

This section covers information on different cybercrimes and the affected industries or sectors. Also, we will provide in-depth facts on cybercrime, which everyone is supposed to know:

5. 95% of Cyberattacks Only Succeed Due to Normal Human Errors.

You must understand that hackers are the bad guys and that most company workers aren’t tech experts. So they target this everyday employee who doesn’t know ways to safeguard themselves from being hacked. These hackers are looking for someone who will accidentally click a bad link or file.

That one mistake alone will give them full access to steal your private data. Companies spend huge amounts on IT teams and fancy firewalls to fight attacks. But hackers still find their way through because of careless staff who don’t know better. And it only requires just one click from the employee. Boom! The next thing you know, major data is stolen and held for ransom. Therefore, companies shouldn’t train just the IT squad alone. All staff are expected to have a basic knowledge of cyber safety. That is the best defense against hackers trying to speak into systems.

6. Hacker Launches Cyberattacks Every 39 Seconds.

A recent study from the University of Maryland validates this fact. This means that hackers are so committed to stealing and attacking people that they take no time to rest. Out of three Americans, these attacks affect one each year. One of the key reasons these hackers keep getting access is how simple some people’s passwords are. A simple password makes things very easy for these bad actors. The research from Maryland highlights that stronger authentication practices can curb this rampant hacking. Any internet user must take its safety very seriously. 

7. Small Businesses Suffer the Most From Cybercrimes – Specifically, 43% of All Attacks Target Small Companies.

It’s too bad for small businesses that these attacks come from all angles. A recent report unveils that 64 percent have battled attacks over the web, with hackers forcing their way into networks and servers. In addition, 62% of these small businesses fell victim to crafty phishing scams and social engineering ploys. Meanwhile, malware and botnet attacks impacted almost six out of ten organizations.

These stats have made it clear that companies need to strengthen online defenses and educate employees to recognize the warning signs of cyber assaults. These hackers may disguise themselves as legitimate emails, links, and attachments, and employees without knowledge will fall victim. By upgrading barriers and protocols across devices and networks, enterprises can fight against cyber crimes.

8. Nearly Four Million Records Get Swiped Through Data Breaches Every Day.

Do you think your data is safe online? Take some time to think again. According to Cybersecurity Ventures, this act has been going on since 2013. Breaking this gigantic figure down, you’ll find that over 150,000 records are missing every hour. Also, if it’s in minutes, about 2,600 records are gone. Surprisingly, for every second that passes, we lose 44 records. Now, are your data safe online? Cyber insecurity has impacted people globally while we go about business as usual. This is because you don’t know that your information is being auctioned to the highest bidder on some dude in the dark web marketplace.

9. Cyberattack Damages Will Hit a Head-spinning $10.5 Trillion in the Next Two Years.

Some folks think cybercrime is already out of control. But, unfortunately, this is just the start of the bigger game. Analysts at Cybersecurity Ventures, closely examined the major uptick in hacking attacks year after year to land on these scary projections. This means that things are expected to get even messier by this time. Companies and individuals must prepare desperately to fight, as things will not get easy. Organizations can see through the smoke by training employees against phishing tricks, upgrading software, and more.

10. Cybersecurity Jobs are on the Rise – Right Now, Over 11,000 Jobs in Cybersecurity are Open in Georgia.

Based on how the cyberattack is going, companies desperately need skilled talent to protect their data. These organizations need all hands on deck to prevent hacking or data breaches, which could make the headlines. And that isn’t good for their reputation. Impressively, the unemployment rate in the cybersecurity field is zero percent. Individuals interested in this sector can fly in now and make good money. But know that work can be complex most times.

11. 75% of the Healthcare Industry Fell Victim to Malicious Malware Last Year.

A comprehensive study conducted by SecurityScorecard delved into the cybersecurity of 700 healthcare entities. This alarming revelation shows the need for cybersecurity measures within the healthcare sectorCybersecurity isn’t just an IT concern; it’s a matter of public health. As we enter into an era where our medical records are digitized, the need for cybersecurity becomes paramount.

Types of Cyber Mischief

Types of Cyber Mischief

We’ve already said a lot about how to notice and prevent cyberattacks. But this section will show you the different types of cybercrime you should know. Some of the more prevalent cybercrimes you’ll likely encounter nowadays are ransomware, spear-phishing, crypto mining, viruses, malware, and more:

12. In 2019, the Average Amount Spent by Companies to Clean up the Aftermath of Ransomware Attacks was About $133,000.

Unlike what most people think, little businesses often suffer the most from the aftermath of cyberattacks. According to research, these smaller companies pay an average of $713,000 after ransomware hits. Zooming to the global stage in 2021, the collective price tag for ransomware attacks is $20 billion.

That’s not just a number. It shows how ransomware has affected businesses globally. The average ransomware payment climbed dangerously in 2020, reaching $233,817. Now, that’s enough to put most organizations in serious financial issues. Thankfully, companies lowered the average payout to $154,108 during the last quarter. But don’t smile yet. Sure, it shows that companies are improving the measures used in fighting ransomware.

13. 48 Percent of Malicious Emails Came as Word, Excel, and PowerPoint Files in 2020.

It seems cybercrooks have their eyes on Microsoft Office users. These common formats enable hackers to put dangerous files right into systems. Many phishing attacks targeting companies use weaponized Microsoft Office documents to trick people. This is likely no confidence since we use Microsoft Office almost every day. Notably, the kind of files that these hackers usually use in phishing attacks are compressed .zip and .jar extensions. The bottom line is that before using any unexpected Office files, carefully inspect them.

14. 69% of Companies Doubt Their Antivirus Software Blocks the Threats They Face.

Nearly 7 out of 10 businesses believe their so-called protection gets outmatched regularly. If the majority doubts these security tools work as advertised, business leaders should take notice. We think it’s high time businesses bring in experts to evaluate if their defenses protect against hacking attempts. Businesses should go above and beyond to shield clients proactively.

15. One Out of Every 13 Website Requests Results in Malware.

This is a concerning threat that can quickly escalate with time. New harmful websites can last for about a week. This will allow attackers to harm people who visit during that time. So, while browser settings help you block suspicious sites, many malicious domains still get registered as seemingly legitimate. This means that users should be very vigilant instead of depending on some companies. Individuals can be less vulnerable if they can spend more on training, firewalls, network monitoring, or updated antivirus software. This applies to both companies.

16. 1 Out of Every 36 Smartphones Contain a High-risk App.

These apps are usually disguised as generic utility or gaming apps, evading detection. Even if Apple and Google usually check apps, some sneaky ones with regular names still manage to get the green light. So, users must be careful because harmful stuff might hide behind normal features. For example, around September 2021, Android users had no choice but to delete 16 harmful apps manually. This highlights the need for ongoing vigilance, even in official stores. The main issues come from apps that hide bad things by pretending to be simple. Users are advised to use security tools, read app reviews, and check permission carefully. Also, do yourselves the good to update your devices regularly.

17. Over 90 Percent of Tricky Remote Code Execution Attacks Nowadays Tie Back to Crypto Mining Schemes.

Hackers love using this web-based tactic to hijack servers to mine cryptocurrency. This works when the hacker injects the harmful code. Once these codes are in, they gain free access to raid data, spread to another system, or have bots mine cryptocurrency undetected. With how many employees love to access the company’s servers from home, these attacks pose a serious threat. Just one dumb mistake from a worker clicking a phishing link, the hacker will have the keys to informationThe best way to safeguard the company is by applying multi-factor authentication, VPNs, endpoint detection tools, etc.

18. Based on the 2020 Figures, Around 19 DDoS Attacks Occur Every Minute.

DDoS stops people from accessing networks and devices legitimately by overloading systems. China initiates the most DDoS assaults, while the US is the second. In 2019, more than half of companies had trouble with DDoS attacks. These attacks made their services stop working properly. This is because their internet has been crowded. Besides traditional systems, Internet of Things (IoT) devices now draw frequent hacking.

As smart gadgets with network connections are getting more popular, they attract attention. This made them to become potential targets. On average, cyber attackers targeted IoT products two years ago, with over 5,200 monthly attacks. The primary issue is that hackers get more leverage as more devices connect online. But to solve these problems, users or companies can use firewalls, monitor internet traffic, and block threats. Proxies can also help by absorbing attacks. However, it’s crucial for companies that make devices to focus on security from the beginning when creating their products. This will help in fighting against these problems.

Conclusion

Cybercrime threats show no signs of slowing down in 2024 despite the damages they have caused already. Meanwhile, hacking attacks are expected to inflict over $10 trillion yearly global damages by 2025. According to a report, the majority of these attacks come from China. And as more gadgets are created, the hacking rate will likely increase. The situation remains serious, but we can beat it if we address the issues faster. Cybercrime thrives on weak defenses, so closing doors to hackers greatly matters.

FAQs

Which Country Records the Most Cyberattacks?

What Are the Latest Cybercrime Trends and Threats?

Is Cyber Harassment Considered a Type of Cybercrime?

Sources

The post 15+ Cybercrime Statistics You Must Know in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/cybercrime-statistics/feed/ 0
The Must-know Social Media Scamming Statistics 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/social-media-scamming-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/social-media-scamming-statistics/#respond Thu, 25 Jan 2024 16:21:03 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3535872 Social Media Scamming Statistics

Social media scams have been seriously out of control lately. As per the data, over $2.7 billion dollars was lost to social media fraud in the US between 2021 and...

The post The Must-know Social Media Scamming Statistics 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Social Media Scamming Statistics

Social media scams have been seriously out of control lately. As per the data, over $2.7 billion dollars was lost to social media fraud in the US between 2021 and mid-2023. According to the FTC, that surpasses losses from regular web scams and email phishing COMBINED. Wild, right?

These crooks keep honing in new tactics to sucker us in and steal our cash. One nasty trick is targeted ads built off our personal info, buying habits, age – anything that gets us to click. Teens and young adults especially got slammed, with FTC reports skyrocketing every year. As online safety guru David McClellan says, our social addiction makes us vulnerable. However, we uncovered some eye-opening facts about how these scams operate. If knowledge is power, it’s time to tackle this issue head-on!

Join us on a hard-hitting dive into current social media scamming statistics. Together, we’ll unpack the psychology behind these dodgy attacks, break down the latest cunning techniques, and arm you with tools to outsmart the scammers. Stick with me – your bank account will thank you later.

Social Media Scamming Statistics

Basic Social Media Scamming Statistics

  1. Roughly 90% of data breaches are caused by Phishing scams.
  2. 30% of respondents in a survey reported falling victim to job scams on social media.
  3. Also, 12% of folks reported clicking on phishing URLs on social media platforms. 
  4. Of teenagers and young adults, about 85% fell prey to shopping scams.
  5. Victims of inheritance scams lost more than $200,000 in 2022.
  6. Roughly 16% of social media victims fall for imposter scams (account cloning).
  7. Lottery scams are also common among older people (aged 50 and above), as 75% of victims belonged to the age group.
  8. Many investment scams (up to 50%) happen via social media platforms like Instagram, telegram, and Facebook.
  9. Civil Society UK indicated more than 44% was lost to charity scams in 2022, higher than the previous year.
  10. Romance scams (25%) are a popular method scammers utilize on social media.
  11. According to organization reports, $1.5 billion was lost due to influencer scams.

Types of Social Media Scams and How They Ask for Money or Important Data

Types of Social Media Scams

1. In a Good-firms Survey, 30% of People Reported Falling Prey to Online Job Scams Via Social Media.

Individuals looking for employment are at high risk, as they’re every scammer’s target—especially those willing to get the job by any means. The scammers exploit vulnerable job seekers by deceiving them into paying for sham employment opportunities. Sometimes, they ask them to pay under the guise of helping with job searches. They come with many illusive tactics to steal money, which include application fees, purported security deposits, and payment for non-existent high positions.

Also, these fraudsters can use fake email addresses that mimic legal communication from employment agencies. This adds a layer of deceit to their schemes. They pose as employers or recruiters, aiming to extract money and personal information from their victims. Later, they will use the information they acquired for fraudulent activities, such as applying for credit cards or securing loans in the candidate’s name. Furthermore, the high demand rate for the work-from-home trend following the COVID-19 outbreak has provided scammers more opportunities to exploit job seekers. Using this trend, they disseminate fake job postings, worsening the risks naive employment seekers face.

2. 12% of Victims Clicked on Phishing URLs on Social Media.

In social media, scammers arrange phishing scams, enticing unsuspecting individuals to click on suspicious links that either steal their information or infect their devices with harmful viruses. These deceptive links redirect users to external websites or webpages, designed to closely resemble legitimate sites with subtle visual alterations, thereby tricking the visitor. While social media serves as just one avenue for phishing attacks among several others, it accounts for approximately 12% of instances where victims fall prey to phishing URLs

They target those who are unaware of using URLs. This happens most times via text messages, emails, etc. Scammers use these phishing schemes to dupe customers and trick them into revealing sensitive data like usernames and passwords. As a result, the scammers can access the customers’ personal or financial credentials. By employing keyword-based marketing strategies, numerous phishing scams strategically heighten the likelihood of visitors clicking on malicious links, thereby escalating the risk to individuals encountering such schemes.

3. Victims Lost Over $200,000 to an Inheritance Scam in 2022.

Numerous social media posts entice users with grand promises of inheritance, and 98% of these posts are scams. Scammers often pose as lawyers or attorneys, claiming to be representatives of wealthy foreigners who died without willing their wealth to their families.

According to the purported lawyer, the estate’s executor must share the same last name as the deceased. After formally transferring property ownership to the victim’s name, the scammer demands a hefty portion of the supposed inheritance. In reality, there is no inheritance or valuable property. They pressure their victims into paying upfront legal fees (their intention) for the promised funds.

With this, numerous folks will contribute money, hoping to claim this alleged estate, which causes them to fall into the scammer’s set trap. Operating under the guise of inheriting substantial wealth, including valuable items like gold or money, the con artists coerce victims into covering purported legal expenses to access these assets. By maintaining contact via phone calls, emails, and social media, the scammers continue communicating with the victims until the funds are transferred. Once the victim sends the agreed-upon money, the scammers vanish. Reported incidents in 2022 indicated that victims collectively lost over $200,000 due to these fraudulent schemes.

4. About 16% of Victims Also Reported Falling Prey to Imposter Scams on Social Media.

Social media scams frequently involve imposters posing as trusted entities like government agencies, friends, or businesses. With this, the scammers deceive individuals into revealing their bank details/ personal details or sending money to them. This scamming tactic is commonly called account cloning or impersonation. Afterward, the scammers will imitate their victim’s identity, utilizing their name, profile picture, (passport) and personal data to create a social media account (fake account). With these cloned accounts, they will send friend requests to the victim’s network of friends, family, and acquaintances.

Once accepted, the scammers will start a conversation, pretending to be the victim. These scammers plan to borrow money under the victim’s name or learn sensitive information they might utilize for wary financial activities. Many Celebrities usually fall victim to imposter scams.

Scammers create cloned accounts using handles like @official or @fanpage, mimicking the official profiles. A reliable precautionary measure involves checking for verification badges (such as the blue tick on Facebook or Twitter) to confirm the account’s legitimacy and prevent interactions with imposters. Currently, Imposter scamming is increasingly prevalent. Government impersonators, false acquaintances posing as family or friends, and business-related scams constitute a significant portion of these scams. Collectively, it contributes to around 16% of social media scams.

5. Over 84% of Young Adults are More Liable to Fall Prey to Shopping Scams Than Older Folks.

Scammers are taking advantage of the surging popularity of social commerce to exploit people, especially teenagers and young adults. They use discounts or cost savings on purchase promises to win their victim over. Also, the fraudsters pose as a reputable business with an online store to reach social media users. They deceive folks by accepting only’ payments before delivery’ without fulfilling the orders. Essentially, swindling customers rather than conducting legitimate sales transactions.

As per the Federal Trade Commission (FTC), teenagers and young adults face an 85% higher likelihood of falling victim to these scams than older demographics. Furthermore, the creation of social commerce and the development of trust in online shopping platforms indirectly give online shopping scams more grounds. Therefore, it’s important to note that numerous fraudulent websites and sophisticated techniques exist online. Consequently, consumers find it challenging to discern between genuine and fraudulent sales. 

6. 75% of Lottery Scams Were Reported by Older People (50 and Above).

Lottery scams are another popular scam on social media. It’s a different type of social media deception. This scam involves scammers luring people with promises of prizes or lottery winningsMaking them mistakenly disclose their details to them or probably pay a fee to collect the prize. The main concept here revolves around convincing individuals to purchase fake lottery tickets, purportedly offering huge cash rewards.

Once the money gets into the scammer’s pocket, it vanishes, leaving the purchasers with empty/fake promises. Also, the fraudsters can show the victim counterfeit lottery tickets that resemble an authentic scheme. They deceive such a person into believing they’ve won huge money. Moreover, these fraudsters are very smart; they add numbers or barcodes to tickets to enhance the authenticity of their deception. Compared to younger folks, various older folks have become prey to this scam. The FTC report stated that roughly one-third of scams reported by people over 50 were related to lotteries or sweepstakes.

7. Over 50% of Investment Scams Often Occur Via Social Media Platforms via Direct Message Alternatives.

Frequently, investment scams exploit social media direct messaging platforms, especially when the targets are susceptible people with pitches that boast doubtful claims. Social media platforms such as Facebook, Instagram, and Telegram are gateways to investment scams (according to 50% of victims). The scammer lures victims by showing a “get-rich-quick” set-up, especially by promising unusually high investment returns.

Ponzi schemes, one of the most widespread investment frauds, cunningly masquerades as legitimate investment prospects. They mainly target new investors searching for speedy and substantial profits. They also target folks aiming to grow their retirement or savings. The scammers showcase promises of extensive rewards or remarkably high returns, but they’ll vanish once they receive the victim’s deposit. They remove all traces or links to their social media accounts, making them utterly inaccessible and leaving the victims confused and devastated.

8. The UK’s Civil Society Said There Was a 44% Increase in Money Lost to Charity Scams in 2022 Compared to the Previous Year.

The charity scam antics performed by scammers on social media don’t target only legitimate companies trying to make a good impression. They also trick folks who want to contribute to a good cause. Fraudsters perpetrating these scams often act as agents of respected charities on social platforms.

They convince people to donate for noble purposes. However, the money ends up in their own pockets. In 2022, over $2 million was lost to charity scams. This figure marked a 44% increase from the prior year, as disclosed by the Civil Society, UK. The scammers employ various dubious tactics to mimic genuine charity homes. Some of their methods include utilizing visually appealing designs and logos and acquiring tax exemption certificates that make them appear more legal.

They rapidly circulate across social media, which exposes them to various potential victims. Moreover, these charity scams have tarnished the image of legitimate organizations that rely on public trust and support to fulfill their missions. You might be wary of all charities if you’ve fallen victim to such a scam. Also, genuine assemblies couldn’t raise the funds for their crucial work. For safety purposes against social media charity fraud, individuals should research and verify a charity’s legitimacy before donating. Also, highlight the well-known, reputable organizations and exercise caution, especially when they start demanding instant donations.

Type of Indirect Scams on Social Media

Type of Indirect Scams on Social Media

9. Over 25% of Scams on Social Media are Romance Scams.

Romance scams are getting popular on social media platforms. In this scam, fraudsters target folks desperately searching for love and commitment. The scammers use their desire for affection to steal from them.

With a fictitious profile on popular social media platforms like Facebook and Instagram, the scammers captivate gullible people into relationships. Once the victim falls in love with them, the scammer will convince the victim to send them gifts or money as a sign of commitment. According to a report, 25% of victims preyed on romance scams. Some respondents in a survey said that the scammer posed as an affluent woman on social media and initiated contact with them. She claimed inheritance from departed guardians and needed money to go abroad for safety

Other respondents said the scammer wanted to settle down with a sympathetic folk outside their home country. They came with reasons like war, an abusive spouse, or threats to their safety. Additionally, romance scammers primarily target lonely or divorced men. They lure their victims into paying fees for transferring money between banks, insisting that the charges must be in the destination country’s currency. They utilize psychological tactics, like building emotional connections before cunning stealing significant sums from the victims. Typically, romance scams link with religion and passion. Scammers present themselves as earnest people, portraying religious beliefs so victims believe they’re trustworthy.

10. Globally, Organizations Fell Prey to Influencer Scams in 2022 and Lost $1.5 Billion.

Influencer scam is very unanticipated. Many individuals and companies fall prey to this type of scam. The self-declared influencers (scammers) on social media draw victims’ attention through many methods. They usually disguise themselves by living a fake/stylish lifestyle.

The scammers also buy likes, comments, and fake followers to deceive people. They ask their victims to purchase products using a personalized URL, enticing them with massive discounts. Also, followers can misguidedly purchase counterfeit or replica products via a URL redirection to fickle product sites

This social media scam can affect individuals, genuine influencers, and companies. In 2022, companies universally lost nearly $1.5 billion to influencer scams. This encircles losses to fake ad traffic, scam influencers, and phony leads. Nowadays, it’s very easy to buy fake followers on social media. It makes it easy for scammers to magnify their surface popularity. On the other hand, scammers with many fake followers have made it challenging for victims to detect their genuineness.

Additional Social Media Scams Statistics and Facts

Additional Stats

11. Young demographics, like teens and adolescents, are more prone to job and get-rich-quick scams. 

12. Equally, technology-supported scams usually aim at older folks, manipulating their susceptibilities.

13. A dominant form of treachery includes scammers posing as social media influencers, defrauding or stealing from numerous people yearly. 

14. Furthermore, inheritance scams lure people into paying entrée fees to access a made-up inheritance.

15. A recent Federal Trade Commission (FTC) report discloses that social media scams aggregate an overwhelming cost of roughly $117 million in 2020. 

16. Moreover, the average financial loss per person due to these scams reached $200, with the most extensive single loss surpassing $1 million that year.

Conclusion

Given these statistics on social media scams, it’s crucial to note that this distressing trend is causing financial and psychological harm to individuals and organizations. Scammers utilize social media platforms as leverage to defraud folks (both old and young). They fool people into donating money to fictional worthy causes by assuming fake identities. As social media grows in popularity, it provides scammers with sufficient prospects to function and harass gullible people.

FAQs

How Predominant Are Social Media Scams?

Who Falls Prey to Social Media Scams?

What are the Methods Fraudsters Use on Social Media?

Sources

The post The Must-know Social Media Scamming Statistics 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/social-media-scamming-statistics/feed/ 0
30+ Shocking Coffee Statistics ( 2024 Consumption Trends) https://techreport.com/statistics/coffee-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/coffee-statistics/#respond Wed, 24 Jan 2024 14:38:32 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3535164 Key Coffee Statistics

People often consider coffee the refreshing beverage they need to kick off a great day. Its cool, refreshing aroma has served many for decades past. The downward trend in other...

The post 30+ Shocking Coffee Statistics ( 2024 Consumption Trends) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Coffee Statistics

People often consider coffee the refreshing beverage they need to kick off a great day. Its cool, refreshing aroma has served many for decades past. The downward trend in other industries hasn’t affected the coffee industry. Many apparently still believe having coffee first thing in the morning will stir them up for the day’s tasks.

For most Americans, coffee gives the drive to go about the day’s activities. The average American can gulp up to 3 cups of coffee daily. Seventy-three percent of Americans drink coffee every day, according to recent research. 95 million cups of coffee are consumed daily in the UK alone.

Brands such as Folgers, Starbucks, and Nestle have made quite a good imprint in the hearts of coffee lovers. But a good percentage of coffee is still brewed in the comfort of many homes. One very great thing is its ability to make you stay awake while studying. The number of students who consume coffee has, in no small way, helped boost the coffee industry’s revenue. Caffeine has quite a few health benefits, and in this article, we’ll be looking at the top coffee statistics the sector has fared all through the years. Let’s get in.

Key Coffee Statistics

Key Coffee Statistics

  1. Just 62% of men drink a cup of coffee daily compared to 66% of females.
  2. As much as 64% of grownups in America take coffee daily.  
  3. Americans gulp up to 400 million caffeine every day of their lives.
  4. Every single year, Americans drink up to 146 million coffee cups.
  5. Up to 79% of Americans prefer making their coffee in their home.
  6. 45% of United States coffee drinkers always use Drop Coffee to prepare their coffee.
  7.  Drinking with neither sugar nor cream is done by 35% of coffee lovers. 
  8. About 120 million coffee bags come from various coffee-producing countries.
  9. Arabica coffee beans have more caffeine in them than Robusta beans.
  10. Each person in Finland drinks as much as 12 kilograms of coffee within a year.

Coffee Statistics in the United States

Coffee Statistics in the United States

1. Americans Gulp up to 400 Million Caffeine Every Day of Their Lives.

One question that rings through the minds of many is ‘How much coffee do Americans take daily? Americans are well known for their love of coffee. It ranks highest on the chart of beverages taken by these folks with 59%. This comes right above bottled water (58%), with nonalcoholic drinks standing at 53% and tea at the third place with a value of 47%. Americans are one of the highest consumers of coffee, with a daily dose of 400 million coffee cups.

2. As Much as 64% of Grownups in America Take Coffee Daily.

NCA went all out to study the level at which coffee is consumed. It learned that the rate at which people drink coffee has greatly increased since 2012. The studies opened the eyes, showing that 64% of American grownups take coffee daily. This explains why some say they cannot start their day without coffee. 

3. Daily Drinking 3 Cups or More of Coffee is a Lifestyle for the Typical American.

Drinking coffee is a normal wake-up call for an average American. Most will start the day with at least three filled mugs of their favorite brand. The FDA advises people not to drink more than 400 mg of coffee daily. This is the same as you taking 4 cups of your beloved coffee. We can now see that though Americans drink a lot of coffee, they still need to keep it within limits.

4. A Cup of Coffee Should Measure an Average of 9 Ounces.

Countries have devised ways to limit the amount of coffee people take at a time. The standard cup that is used to drink a cup of coffee is 6.7 ounces in Japan. Canada is a bit higher in cup size at 7.6 ounces or 227 milliliters. It isn’t very pleasant to those who think that 8 ounces is the average amount of coffee a person should take. Coffee lovers are allowed to drink up to 9 ounces in America.

5. Every Year, Americans Drink up to 146 Million Coffee Cups.

The large number of coffee drinkers in the United States makes it appear that people cannot stay away from coffee for even a day. The number of coffee mugs in homes and places doesn’t produce 146 billion coffee cups, which is a big deal. The high statistics show that coffee is an everyday lifestyle for the average American. 

6. Coffee Accounts for 75% of Americans’ Total Caffeine.

Americans get up to 75% of caffeine from just sipping coffee. Products that can also give your body caffeine are chocolate, energy drinks, and soft drinks. Chocolate bars give our body up to 50mg of caffeine. One very important thing you should know is that the antioxidant in coffee is what produces caffeine

7. Skipping a Cup of Coffee for a Bath is Not an Option for 50% of People Who Take Coffee.

Skipping a bath for freshly brewed coffee isn’t something to consider for 50% of coffee drinkers. Another 49% can leave the house without a cell phone for most of the month rather than skip their coffee. Do you love coffee? How much can you give up for a steaming cup of coffee? These are questions that need truthful answers.

Coffee Demographics Statistics

Coffee Demographics Statistics

8. People Who Earn so Much Take the Largest Chunk of Coffee Takers.

This statistic goes against the idea of the commoner in the street that money has nothing to do with the amount of coffee a person takes. The records show that people earning up to $30,000 or more make up 66% of coffee drinkers. Against this backdrop are 58% of persons who do not earn up to $30,000. These people do not have enough money to pay for more than one simple cup of coffee.  

9. Americans Who are 55 or Older Make up 75% of People Who Drink at Least a Cup of Coffee Daily.

There seems to be a relation between the number of cups a person takes and the age. Americans aged 55 years and above enjoy taking at least one cup of freshly brewed coffee. This age generation makes up as high as 75% of coffee lovers in the United States aloneThe records show senior citizens in the United States enjoy coffee more than millennials. One age group that takes the least coffee is those between 18 and 34.

10. Just 62% of Men Drink a Cup of Coffee Daily Compared to 66% of Females.

The data presented before us only shows that we’ve got more female coffee lovers than men in the United States. The difference between both genders is quite close by a space of 4%. Women drink an average of 2.9 coffee cups a day, while for women, an average of 2.6 cups is enough for the day. Thinking that there is a close tide in the number of cups both genders take in a day won’t be wrong.

Habit Statistics of Coffee Consumers in 2023

Habit Stats of Consumers

11. Up to 79% of Americans Prefer Making Coffee at Home.

The National Coffee Association showed the world that 79% of people in the United States make coffee at home. This group prefers having a cup of coffee produced in their home rather than visiting a coffee store down the street. Just 36% of those who participated in the survey said they often pay coffee shops for a drink.

12. Drinking Coffee While Having Breakfast is Done by 65% of Grownups in the United States.

As much as 65% of coffee in the United States is with a breakfast meal. 30% of coffee drank is taken in between meals of the day. It’s best served for 5% of coffee lovers at certain meal times. Some studies tell us that having coffee between 10 am and 12 am is great. Not to forget, an afternoon sip of freshly brewed coffee between 2 pm and 5 pm is equally great. 

13. An Espresso Machine is the Choice of 13% of Persons Who Enjoy Coffee in the United States.

Drinking coffee without an espresso machine is a no for 13% of Americans who take coffee. Millennial coffee drinkers are the biggest fans of espresso blends. Young people also flair for specialty coffee and prefer it over bland standard coffee

14. Coffee is Enjoyed by About 35% of People Without Using Either Sugar or Cream.

Having 35% of people taking bland coffee leaves a full 65% as those who drink coffee with either a sweetener or cream. Enjoying your favorite blend of coffee with or without cream is a matter of choice, dear reader

15. Most Women Like to Have Coffee to Relax Their Nerves.

Coffee comes in handy to men when they need to perform better at a task, but this is not so with the opposite gender. Most women drink coffee when they feel like relaxing or relieving moments. This shows that there’s a little difference in the way both genders take coffee

16. Up to 48% of Millennials Drink Gourmet Coffee Over Other Brands.

The young generation enjoys drinking specialty coffee alongside gourmet blends more than any other coffee brand. On the other hand, millennials like taking gourmet blends more than Generation X and Baby BoomersUp to 36% of the millennials like taking cappuccinos and lattes rather than just sticking to regular coffee. An espresso comes to mind for 22% of millennials in the United States. 

17. The Drip Coffee Machine is the Choice of 45% of Coffee Drinkers in the United States.

As many as 45% of people surveyed by the National Coffee Association said that they use drop coffee in making their coffee. This didn’t in any way push aside single-cup brewing as it’s the popular second choice.  

18. About 29% of People Who Take Coffee in the United States do so to Relax.

Women and men enjoy taking freshly brewed cups of coffee when they want to relax. We see from the report of the NCA that one-third of people take coffee when they like to take off stress. 

19. Ordering Coffee Using an App is Done by Just 9% of Coffee Lovers.

Using an app to order your favorite coffee is slowly becoming a trend today. Ordering a cup of coffee with an app comes to mind for 9% of American coffee drinkers. The answer to this low patronage of coffee from an app is plausible, as most people make their coffee at home.

Coffee Plants and Their Differences

Plants and Their Differences

20. About 5 Pounds of Green Coffee Bean Plants Equals One Year of Harvest of Ripe Coffee Plants.

About 4 to 5 pounds of coffee beans produce just one pound of coffee beans after they have passed through heat. Brazil made a nice total of 2.5 metric tons of coffee beans in 2016 alone. 

21. Robusta Coffee has More Caffeine in it Than Arabica Coffee Beans.

Robusta coffee is used to make a standard brew of coffee blends. One great thing about the Robusta is that it’s way stronger than an espresso brand. An expresso has just a third of the caffeine in the regular Robusta coffee cup.  

22. Coffee Plants Can Last as Long as 100 Years.

Caring for a coffee plant makes it last longer for 40, 50 years, and more. Some coffee plants can even stay up to 100 years, bearing fruits. A coffee plant is at its highest bearing stage from ten to 15 years old.

23. Arabica Columbia Coffee Drew up Above all Others in 2017.

Arabica, as the costliest coffee bean in 2017, was not a great surprise as it’s one of the most popular alongside Robusta beans.  

24. With Just $3.28, You Can Get a Cup of Coffee in America.

The average American spends $3.28 daily on just a cup of coffee. This doesn’t end there; some take more than a cup every day. It shows that Americans consume a good amount of money every day. 

25. Brazil can Export Coffee to the Tune of 5.7 Billion Pounds Yearly.

Brazil holds the spot as the highest exporter of coffee. In the 1920s, it produced about 80% of the total volume of coffee on earthRight now, brazil has a grasp of a third of the world’s coffee. 

26. Retail Sales in the Coffee Industry in America Have Risen Over the Years to Reach a High of $5.2 Billion.

This high level of sales proves to onlookers that the market has good prospects for anyone.

27. South America had a Field Day When it Produced 81.5 Million Stacks of Coffee in 2018.

A weight of 60 kg per bag means that more than 5 million tons were produced in South America in 2018.

Statistics of Coffee Shop

Statistics of Coffee Shop

28. Monaco has 52 Coffee Stands Everywhere, Hosting One Million People.

Statistics show that Monaco has the largest coffee shops in a given place. Second to the number is the United States, with many coffee shops. 

29. We Have Close to 24,000 Shops Selling Coffee in America.

This is a huge number, and more will continue to be added as the years go byWashington has the highest number of coffee shops for every 100,000 occupants within the city. 

30. Coffee Shop Owners Sell an Average of 230 Cups in One Day.

The records are clear on the daily and yearly sales volume coffee shops get. As many as 84,000 cups are sold by coffee shops every day. Shops solely owned by one person make up $12 billion in sales that come into the coffee market every year

31. Coffee Shops are Growing at an Amazing Rate of 7% on Average.

The number of daily sales made by coffee shops has made it climb to an enviable position in the restaurant business. Coffee shops are spread across cities, showing that it’s a nice venture for money-making.

32. The World Makes Bags of Coffee up to 110 to 120 Million Yearly.

Brazil is the country that produces the largest number of coffee beans. South America comes first as the continent making the most coffee, with Brazil at the forefront. For over 150 years, Brazil has held its position in the coffee industry

33. Each Person in Finland Drinks up to 12 Kilograms of Coffee Within Twelve Months.

Coffee statistics show that the people of Finland take coffee daily as a must-have. They’re the largest drinkers of coffee, with each person bringing 12kg of coffee in a year. Closely after Finland is Norway, secondly is Iceland, and in third place is Denmark, which ranks among the highest coffee drinkersOn the list of countries is the United States, which ranks 26th in the world ranking.

Conclusion

Coffee is a drink favored in almost all parts of the world. The people of Finland are the highest drinkers of this drink. It can be enjoyed with either a cream or any sweetener of your choice. Many nations, including Brazil, export coffee. It’s accepted on the shores with open arms by many residents. This large acceptance prompts the opening of so many scattered coffee shops in places like Monaco.

You can buy a freshly brewed cup of coffee from just around any corner of the street. You can get coffee brewed in your home at the start of any day or anytime you feel down. The Robusta and Expresso come in very handy when you want to rewind, either in the morning or just at the noon hours of your day. Having a cup of coffee steaming right on your dining table while eating breakfast is fun. Coffee has a refreshing taste, be it the regular or somewhat classy type, but be mindful of how much you take in a day.

Frequently Asked Questions

How far has the coffee industry risen in the United States?

Which of the countries has the largest coffee industry?

How much is a kilogram of coffee in the United States?

Sources

The post 30+ Shocking Coffee Statistics ( 2024 Consumption Trends) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/coffee-statistics/feed/ 0
Spam Text Statistics (Growth and Severity of Fraud in 2024) https://techreport.com/statistics/spam-text-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/spam-text-statistics/#respond Mon, 22 Jan 2024 19:53:45 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3535103 Key Spam Text Statistics

Cybercrime is a growing headache for society and families worldwide. Sadly, advancements in the internet have handed more power to bad elements, enabling them to steal from internet users. As technology...

The post Spam Text Statistics (Growth and Severity of Fraud in 2024) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Spam Text Statistics

Cybercrime is a growing headache for society and families worldwide. Sadly, advancements in the internet have handed more power to bad elements, enabling them to steal from internet users. As technology improves, fraudsters craft new strategies for their criminal activities.

So, it is no longer easy for victims to escape the grip of these dark actors. Spam SMS is one of the vehicles most fraudsters rely on. These messages are rising in number and usage. Sadly, it has resulted in several people losing money to fraud. 39.3% of spam recipients in 2021 were female, while 59.4% were male. The first half of 2023 saw Americans receive 78 billion automated spam texts alone.

Are you looking for a way to avoid spam messages? Do you want to know how much damage they have caused? This article will reveal eye-opening spam text statistics and figures. Also, you’ll find a technique below that could effectively control these spam SMS. Keep reading.

Key Spam Text Statistics

Key Spam Text Statistics

  1. Deliveries sector records the most victims from spam texts.
  2. Spam text jumped to 58% in 2022.
  3. 1 in 3 Americans has received a spam text.
  4. The spam text rate dropped during the COVID-19 pandemic.
  5. California tops the chart in America for the most scammy texts.
  6. 59.4% of victims ever recorded were male.
  7. Interestingly, young people are more likely to fall victim to bad players using scam texts.
  8. China tops the chart among the regions with severe incidents of these messages.
  9. 16% of people have patronized a scammer’s text to purchase service.
  10. An estimated 1 million spam texts are sent every minute globally.
  11. An estimated 180 billion malicious texts will be sent by the end of 2023.

What is Spam Text?

What is Spam Text

Spam Text is simply an SMS message that appears legitimate but has nefarious intentions. Users receive this message without soliciting or asking for it. Notably, it could convey different things, but the sender is usually after personal and sensitive data.

Fraudsters often employ various tactics to collect these details from a user. These tactics include clicking on a link to receive a reward, which is quite popular. Alternatively, they could approach the victim from a banking issue angle, claiming a problem exists. In such cases, they often prompt users to contact them using an attached link. After clicking this link, the user can fill in personal details to access the desired information.

This setup is a scam; the story is just a hook or clickbait to attract the user. Unfortunately, some unsuspecting users supply these details, exposing themselves to great risks. Armed with these personal details, the scammers can access the victim’s account and steal their money or identity. Also, they could blackmail the victims or damage their reputations. What started quite harmlessly could lead to serious problems and drive victims into depression or suicide. Spam texts often originate from an email address and do not provide a reply path to users.

Top Spam Text Statistics in 2023

Stats in 2023

1. Spam Texts Moved up by 58% in 2022.

These texts continue to be a pain since the creation of mobile devices. The average American resident received 16.9 spam SMS within April 2021. A survey in April of the next year revealed that these residents got 41 texts

2. One Out of Three Americans has Fallen Prey to Scam Texts.

1 out of every 3 resident in the country has communicated with fraudsters through spam texts. Victims are often devastated after such losses, feeling that they should have spotted it earlier. However, statistics reveal it is quite a common occurrence, as one target out of every three has fallen victim to these fraudsters in America. Also, 65% of these victims do not realize they were scammed until later. So, the severity of the attack depends on what information the scammers gain access to.

3. The COVID-19 Pandemic Forced a Decline in Spam Calls.

The global pandemic took the world by storm, altering regular modes of work and interaction. So, remote work took center stage, with people applying more caution while communicating with each other and applying personal space restrictions. Also, as the world adopted the pandemic’s demand on society, scammers altered their mode of operation.

Before the pandemic, scam calls were quite popular and common among fraudsters. However, by mid-2020, the spam call rate had declined by 50% and has not risen since. Notably, 2020 marked the rise of spam texts to exceed spam calls. Since 2020, criminals preferred text messages, placing them at a higher level than other tools. So, in 2022, around 87 billion malicious texts were recorded, showing a scary increase.

4. California is the Area Most Affected by Spam Texts in the United States.

Did you know scammers always improve their tricks with different tactics? So many times, these bad actors focus on places where they had more success in the past. In the US, California tops the scam text hit list. A July 2022 survey disclosed that about 945 million malicious texts were sent there. Texas follows closely with 926M menacing messages documented. Georgia takes third spot with nearly 800M in the same period. 

5. Deliveries are The Top Category Used by Text Spammers.

Spam texts vary in format based on the fraudster’s preference and target victims. However, the goal is to convince a victim to provide sensitive information quickly. Unfortunately, deliveries are one of the most popular methods of these texts. This is because most people order products and services. So, sometimes, the message claims that an order has an issue, thereby requesting sensitive details.

It is also important to know that these messages rose suddenly during the COVID-19 pandemic. The lockdown period was the ideal opportunity for fraudsters since the movement of people and goods was limited. Also, in 2021, 6.5% of spam texts recorded were based on Covid-related content. So, deliveries are the most preferred category used by cybercriminals. 

6. 59.4% of Text Spam Victims Were Male.

Men are often more targeted in text scams than women, probably because they dominate the work environment. A 2021 survey revealed that 59.4% of these texts were sent to males. Also, it showed that 38.3% were shipped to females. Meanwhile, the spam text rate differs based on age bracket. So, women between 18 and 34 are often soft targets. On the other hand, men between 35 and 44 usually fall victim to text scams. This does not mean that different age ranges do not experience such issues. On the contrary! They encounter fewer issues.

7. Younger People are Easy Prey for Text Scams.

The common assumption is that older people are more prone to be victims of fraud. This belief stems from the fact that they might be easily manipulated or are more generous. However, this assumption is a misconception, as young people who are more tech-savvy are more likely to fall for scams. The fact that younger people rely on more digital concepts and technologies makes them more vulnerable. Older generations have a harder time trusting these technologies than younger people, who might not thoroughly question the process.

Statistics reveal that people aged between 20-29 are more likely to lose money 41% of the time. In comparison, those above 80 only lost money to fraud in 17% of the total cases. However, it does not negate that older people are more generous. Statistics reveal that young people, on average, lose $500 to text scams. On the other hand, older people are more likely to forfeit $1,500 to a single text scam. Generally, the amount lost to these text scams is increasing significantly. In 2020, the average loss was $351; however, this average will rise to $502 by 2021. These figures confirm the losses to scammers are increasing over the years. 

8. 16% of Individuals Have Purchased Something From a Spam Texter.

Text scams are increasing worldwide, and anyone can fall victim to these fraudsters. Sadly, scammers constantly refine their texts and methods to bait their victims. This makes it possible for previous victims to slip into these scams again, even if they have been scammed. For instance, statistics reveal that the same scammer has previously targeted victims targeted by scammers. An estimated 16% of individuals scammed previously are often targeted by the same scammer. Despite repeated attempts to curb scam messages, it seems impossible to prevent these scams from occurring.

9. China Struggles With the Biggest Spamming Problem in the World.

The United States struggles with text scams, with many individuals falling victim. However, even the United States is surpassed by China. Scams are increasing fast there. So, it is difficult to get the actual number of scam texts sent out and the number of victims. The country ranks number one among nations that struggle to beat the malicious text menace with incredible numbers. Remarkably, on February 6, 2023, it noted over 17,500 spam cases. Meanwhile, the US faced 9,000 similar cases in the same timeframe.

10. Over One Million Spam Texts are Sent Every Minute.

Cybercriminals use a numbers game. They send multiple messages, hoping to catch a few victims out of hundreds. Also, modern tools like chatbots make it easy for messages to be sent out in shorter periods. So, fraudsters rely on these tools. A survey in November 2022 revealed that over 1.57 billion spam texts were sent daily. This is the scary reality facing law enforcement agents.

11. Spam Texts Will Likely Exceed 180 Billion in 2023.

Malicious messages are a pain to most nations and users worldwide, especially former victims. Experts estimate that robot-created texts will likely rise above 180 billion in 2023, growing at 10% annually. Also, scammers will likely realize over $15 billion 2023 through text spam. This confirms how deeply this menace has eaten into society.

How to Quickly Identify a Spam Text

How to Quickly Identify a Spam Text

Learning to decode and identify ill-intention texts quickly is vital to escape fraudsters’ tricks. Also, these methods will help a user protect themselves and their details. Some common traits of these texts are listed below:

1. Urgency

Scammers execute their plans in the shortest possible time to prevent their victims from thinking rationally. So, spam texts and all types of scams seek to provoke a reaction from the target so they can provide the required information. Note that a genuine business rarely needs an instant response from a receiver. So, any text that urges the recipient to respond urgently with a deadline attached is likely a spam message.

2. Strange Timing

Since most of these messages are sent using software, they can be transmitted at odd hours or night. However, spammers often prefer to send their messages at night when the network is quieter. Also, they could target the morning hours to create stress and force a rash decision to benefit them. So, whenever a text comes in, it is quite helpful to look at when it was sent. Also, businesses requiring urgent action seldom send messages late at night. If an individual receives such suspicious messages, proceeding cautiously is best.

It helps to be wary of opening links from untrusted sources as they may instantly compromise your device accessing sensitive data. Even if the link is from a trusted source, proceed with caution. But, if the link originates from an unknown source, it is probably a scam. Also, look closely at the link. It is likely a scam link if it is short or does not look like a normal URL. So, for your safety, avoid clicking links embedded in texts.

4. Phone Number With Abnormal Length 

Also, closely examining the phone number that sent the message will reveal more vital details. Spammers do not want their targets to know where their text messages originated. So, the number will most likely be fake and one digit longer than usual in most cases. Also, it may have an unusual dial code that is uncommon with your local area code. Therefore, if the details call for concern, it is best to assume that it is spam text. The next line of action is to block it and report it to the network provider. Using a mobile device is easy and might limit similar activities from the same scammer.

How to Protect Yourself From Spam Texts

How to Protect Yourself

The best way to protect yourself is to study and understand how these scammers operate. The more you learn about these spam messages, the easier it will be to overcome these scams. Here are some steps that could be quite helpful:

1. Register a Profile With Do Not Call

Do-not-call services help to prevent or reduce the number of spam calls a number receives. Also, adding your number to a Do-Not-Call list will greatly limit the spam texts users receive. So, your number will be blocked from intrusive calls within reasonable limits, making it difficult for scammers to find it or send a message. However, this list will not create a user immune to receiving spam texts or calls but could block a significant number.

2. Block Numbers to Safeguard Your Phone

Utilize the blocking option on your phone to reduce the rate of spam messages. However, you cannot block a number until you have received a text message. If you obtain an unsolicited text message, refer to the phone settings and click the block option. Blocking a number will list it under spam. So, the phone will stop all messages and calls from the recorded number, and you won’t even hear the phone ring. Also, a user can block all unidentified numbers calling their phone directly from the phone settings.

3. Consider How Urgent the Message Is

Consider the message before reacting or responding to a message, especially from an unknown sender. Note that spam messages create a sense of urgency as the scammer hopes for a quick reaction from the recipient without giving it thought. Often, they attach a time limit to a special offer or claim something bad could happen if the victim does not react quickly. For instance, they could insinuate that your bank account could be compromised if you do not provide details. Also, they will claim that these details must be delivered in a few minutes to prevent loss of funds or some other negative event. Therefore, it is important to proceed cautiously and avoid a knee-jerk reaction. Anyone trying to rush you into making a quick decision is probably a scammer.

4. Weigh Your Options Carefully Before Responding

The most effective way of outsmarting these scammers is to pause and consider the message received. If the message is unexpected or pitches an offer that is too good to be true, these are often the hallmarks of a scam. Sometimes, a slight pause for consideration could spare you the pain of falling victim to a scam. Carefully consider the offer and get clarity if it is genuine or not. Take your time. Don’t be in a hurry to comply with what you know little or nothing about. Also, remember, no matter how juicy an offer looks, there is always a catch. It is probably a scam if you cannot find the attached terms and conditions.

Be wary of text messages or emails with links unless you are certain of their source. Preferably, type the address into the internet and then confirm the information. However, do not copy and paste the link into your browser. For instance, if the message is related to your bank, do not click on the link. Rather, access your bank account directly from your app or the internet and confirm if there is an issue. Also, the same rule applies to delivery services; rather than clicking on the link, type the delivery service to research it on the internet. Additionally, look up the company online to confirm whether it is genuine and if such a message exists.

6. Use a Spam-blocking App

Thankfully, technology has also provided a measure to reduce the exposure to spam messages and calls. You can use a spam-blocking app like Verizon’s Call Filter or T-Mobile’s Scam Shield. Also, clicking on Spam Protection from the app settings menu on your mobile device could do the trick. There are also premium spam blocking apps such as SMS Spam Stopper 9 $2.99) and Truecaller, which has free and paid options. Following the precautions listed above will safeguard users from spam messages and fraudsters.

Conclusion 

The numbers speak for themselves – scam texts and emails are flooding more inboxes by the day, their claims growing craftier and more convincing to the undiscerning eye. Behind the data lies a disconcerting reality about our fast-paced, tech-driven times.

Armed with sophisticated tools like AI, fraudsters now mimic corporations and contacts with frightening authenticity. Meanwhile, in our hurry to push through overflowing inboxes, it becomes dangerously easy to skim right past the red flags. That simmering sense of urgency they instill leaves hardly any room for questioning as our thumbs tap and data transfers before we can blink.

But whether hastily clicking or cautiously considering, preventative measures bear repeating – never trust unsolicited links or attachments, no matter how credible the design appears. Verify suspicious claims manually on official sites. Keep device protections and filters updated. And, of course, flag rather than forward any message aiming to scam.

By taking a breath and proactively safeguarding our communication channels, we deny scammers the power to infiltrate and exploit them for their gain. We are responsible for locking down those pathways and keeping data thieves at bay. Together, we can reverse these troubling statistics and secure the channels that connect our lives.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is a phishing text message?

Can your device get hacked by replying to a text message?

Can you be scammed by opening or reading a spam text?

How can I tell if my phone or device is hacked?

Sources

Click to expand sources

The post Spam Text Statistics (Growth and Severity of Fraud in 2024) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/spam-text-statistics/feed/ 0
30 Outstanding JD.com Statistics (2024 Facts and Figures) https://techreport.com/statistics/jd-com-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/jd-com-statistics/#respond Mon, 22 Jan 2024 16:12:05 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3535032 JD.com statistics

JD.com has come a long way since its inception. The company does not joke about customer satisfaction and has given its numerous users the best in retail trading. It has...

The post 30 Outstanding JD.com Statistics (2024 Facts and Figures) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
JD.com statistics

JD.com has come a long way since its inception. The company does not joke about customer satisfaction and has given its numerous users the best in retail trading. It has also made a name for itself in e-commerce and logistics services. The firm and its staff took many steps to bring it to where it is now. JD.com is always pushing to gain more success from progress made in the past. JD.com was predicted to reach 400 billion US dollars in net sales in 2022. By 2027, this number is expected to reach 736.8 billion dollars, preserving the company’s position as a global retailer leader.

Known for selling electronics and general products, JD.com has spelled out its theme to give users value for their time and money. Its quarterly and yearly reports over the years are proof of this fact. Not only the Chinese but nationals of other countries see JD.com as an answer to shopping for quality products at the lowest prices. Having great customer service is one of the reasons why many customers keep coming back again and again. Keep reading to discover the most important JD.com statistics of 2024.

Key JD.com Statistics

JD.com statistics

  1. Jdlaser .com, commonly called JD.com, was birthed 1998 as a retail online site. 
  2. Trading online kicked off in all gear in 2004.
  3. Jd.com was once known in time past as 360buy.com.
  4. The company changed its name in 2007 to JD.com to focus on general supply.
  5. It kicked off building a logistics system after the name change.
  6. JD.com’s revenue has become the biggest retailer in China and among the biggest worldwide.
  7. Liu Qianqdong, founder of JD.com, served as its CEO till July 2022.
  8. Beijing, China, is the headquarters from which JD touches the world. 
  9. The number 87 is the authority name for JD.com on the net.
  10. Weibo, a social media site, brought in the highest traffic, with 60.58% at the close of October 2023. 
  11. Up to 68% of people who worked at JD.com say that Liu Qianqdong is a great CEO
  12. Its delivery service runs on a complex process that the average person may not understand. 
  13. Drones came in handy in carrying medical supplies during the pandemic. 
  14. Liu Qiangdong, Walmart, and Tencent have the highest ownership of JD.com.
  15. Buying the Jade Palace Hotel cost JD.com as much as $400 million.
  16. It was able to launch its credit card with the help of Ping Bank back in 2019. 
  17. JD.com entered the United Kingdom and France soil in the first month of 2018.

JD Statistics – Workforce

JD Statistics - Workerforce

1. The Number of Active Users of JD.com Rose to as Many as 569 Million in 2021.

E-commerce activities went uphill all through the whole coronavirus period. Online buying became the norm as it was the only means by which people could buy products. As a result, the Chinese online retail giant recorded a high turnout of about 567.7 million users in just a year.

2. Active Users on Jindong Rose to Over 441 Million at the Close of 2020.

The year 2020 ended on quite a great note for JD.com. The company had over 441 million active users on its site at the year’s close. 

3. Active Dealers on the Jindong Site Rose to a Height of Over 250,000.

JD.com openly said in 2020 that it would be cutting down on the number of merchants it had. It also planned to cut down some of its running costs as well. China merchants in Hubei got waivers with a month of free operation during the pandemic. 

4. JD.com Workers Rose to 362,171 at the End of 2022.

The number of workers at JD at the close of 2022 was 21.24% higher than last year. Through the years, there has been a rise in the number of hires made in the company. 

5. Home Appliances and Electronics are the Items That Sell Most on the JD Site.

Home appliances and electronics have stood out over the years as the best selling points for JD. com. The company’s name is well sounded regarding getting large chains of electronic stores in China. It has shown that it gives attention to the offline market by opening 10,000 retail stores. JD has crossed over the boundary of China to reach over 80 countries on earth. It is suitable to state that JD.com is the smart online shop method. 

6. An Average Visitor on JD.com Looks Over Eight Pages in a Single Session.

The average user looks at over eight pages at a session on JD.com. This shows that more and more people are interested in what JD offers

7. It Takes an Average of 5 Minutes and a Second to Complete a Session on JD.com.

Completing a session is no big task as it takes an average of just 5 minutes one second.

8. 53.3% of All JD Visitors Come From Chinese People.

China is the home base of JD.com, so it is no wonder that it has the largest chunk of site visitors. There has been a massive turnout of visitors from China to the site after its launch in 2007.

9. The United States Takes the Third Place With Just 8.15% of Traffic.

In a recent report, the United States ranked third in the ranking of countries based on the percentage of visitors. It came right after Taiwan, which had 18.22% in the same period. 

10. JD.com is Gaining From the Trend of Women Spending More of Themselves Than in the Past.

Chinese women now spend far less on buying household items than the men. In 2021, 54% of women shopped for personal items. Women who use JD.com have steadily climbed up over the years with no sign of slowing down.

11. Less Than 50% of JD Users are Between 25 and 34 Years Old.

The young generation makes up about half of the total number of users on the site, with 42.03%. Most of its users in this generation are between 25 and 34 years old

12. Persons Who are 18 to 24 Years Old make up Just 23.12% of Users on JD.

The younger generation, or millennials, make up just 23.12% of the total number of people who use the website. 

13. Just 2.12% of JD.com Users are Above 65 Years Old.

Those who are advanced in age take up just a small fraction of the visits. As little as 2.12% makes up the total percentage of those 65 years and above on JD.

14. JD.com Stands at 3.5 Out of an Industry 5-point Rating.

In a recent rating, Glassdoor stated that JD stands at 3.5 due to good working conditions. 

15. Sales Assistants Receive an Average Salary of $19,000 on JD.com.

The average sales assistant earns just about $19,000 working at JD.com.

16. Most Past Workers of JD Whined About Balancing Work With Their Daily Lives.

Finding a balance between work and family life was a problem for many who once worked at JD company.

17. JD Company Tries to Ensure All its Workers Enjoy a Good Work Setting.

People give their best when the setting of their workplace is friendly. JD.com has come a long way in providing its workers with a nice and calm setting to strive daily. Little wonder its past workers have something good to say about their work experience. 

18. Over 50% of People Who Worked at JD.com Will Refer a Friend.

Up to 62% of persons who have once worked at JD.com will freely ask a jobless friend to try it.

JD.com Statistics – Users

JD.com Statistics - Users

19. Up to 88 Million People Use JD.com Services Every Day of the Week.

JD.com has attracted quite a large number of people to its services. It has a total of 88 million users each day of the week.

20. As Many as 80% of Buying Orders Come From Mobile Devices.

A large percentage of JD.com orders are done using a mobile phone. Up to 80% of total orders come in from users who have a phone.

21. JD had About 567.7 Million Active Users Close to 2021.

This is no small feat, as China’s retail giant had just 471.9 million users in 2020. The increase in the number of users recorded by JD in just twelve months shows how far it has spread around China. 

22. The Site Has 179 Million Visits Monthly From People Trooping in to Make Purchases.

JD gets up to 179 million visits to its website every single month. This large number of monthly visits is unsurprising since the site is one of the most used Chinese e-commerce and logistics sites.

23. China is at the Forefront of JD’s Site Traffic, Contributing 93.58% of the Website Visits.

As the home base of JD.com, over 90% of traffic comes from China. The country brought in as much as 93.58% of traffic in October 2023. The remaining share is divided among Taiwan, Hong Kong, and the United States. Taiwan came in second place with a total of 2.05%, and then Hong Kong had 1.51%. The United States, on the other hand, accounted for 0.68% of traffic on the website in that same month. 

24. The Number of Women Using JD.com has Also Increased, Contributing up to 28.42% of the Traffic on the Site.

In October 2023, 28.42% of JD.com traffic came from female visits, while males took a greater percentage. The site recorded about 71.58% of monthly visits from men in October.

25. More Than 57.93% of Visitors to the JD.com Site First Visit the Website.

Traffic that came straight to the website was as high as 57.93% in October 2023, while that from organic search amounted to 23.94%. 

26. Search Engines Also Contribute to the Total Number of Visits on JD, as They Raised 11.8% in Traffic.

JD.com saw traffic entries from search engines up to 11.8%, showing that quite a few people gain entry to JD services through search engines.

JD.com Statistics – Revenue

Revenue

27. It Had a Nice Landing of $147.73 Billion at the Close of September 2023.

Within twelve months, JD.com made a total of $147.73 billion. This marks a remarkable increase from what the firm recorded in the past year, with a rise of 3.60%. But it’s too early to stamp the outcome since 2023 is still in session, and more revenue will likely come in before the year ends. 

28. The Year 2022 Closed on a Good Note With a Revenue of $150.11 Billion.

The year 2022 was remarkable for the JD Group as it made a revenue of $150.11 billion, a 0.95% increase in its total revenue

29. Revenue in 2021 Was Not Different From Other Years, With a Nice Sum of $148.69 Billion.

The year 2021 ended on a good note with a high $148.69 billion. This was a hike of 30.38%  from what it had in the past year.

30. JD.com Stock Ended at $28.16 Towards the End of November 2023.

Stocks in November had quite a good ending with $28.16.

Conclusion 

JD.com has done well for itself from the time it came into view. Over the years, it has become a force to reckon with in China’s online retail world. With years came the need to spread out to other countries. Countries like the United States, Taiwan, Hong Kong, and the United Kingdom enjoy JD.com. If you need the best service delivery at short notice, JD.com is the right place. JD.com has you in heart, from electronics to home appliances and a whole lot more. You can get its services using a phone, search engine, paid search, and more. Online retailing has never been this great without JD.com in China and worldwide. JD.com has you at its heart, with stores scattered everywhere to make shopping convenient for customers. Making use of JD.com is the best thing ever.

FAQs

How large are the daily orders of JD.com?

What is the number of people that use JD.com every single month?

Where does JD.com stand on the global stage?

Sources

 

The post 30 Outstanding JD.com Statistics (2024 Facts and Figures) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/jd-com-statistics/feed/ 0
35+ Eye-opening Dropbox Statistics 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/dropbox-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/dropbox-statistics/#respond Mon, 22 Jan 2024 15:21:20 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3534606 Key Dropbox Statistics 

Are you having trouble storing your documents? Dropbox is here to do the job for you. Dropbox is fast becoming a means for businesses to save and share documents without...

The post 35+ Eye-opening Dropbox Statistics 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Dropbox Statistics 

Are you having trouble storing your documents? Dropbox is here to do the job for you. Dropbox is fast becoming a means for businesses to save and share documents without stress. The number of workers bidding for remote work has made Dropbox a need in business. Its number of users has grown in no small way as its fame rises.

As its worth rises yearly, so does the number of content on Dropbox. More than 700 million people in over 180 countries use Dropbox to store and collaborate on files.  People now need to spread the word about their business to other countries. It has been able to cover several countries in its period of survival. More success is likely to happen because of how Dropbox is faring today. There are many interesting Dropbox statistics and facts, which we will be looking at here. Let’s dive in.

Key Dropbox Statistics 

Key Dropbox Statistics 

  1. The idea of Drobox came to two MIT students named Arash Ferdowsi and Drew Houston in 2007.
  2. Dropbox was formed to give users cloud storage, software, and personal cloud, not in any way putting aside file managing.
  3. Dropbox could be boosted by having 100 million users in just four years. 
  4. Dropbox has the fourth spot in the world of cloud storage.
  5. Expenses on operation costs are as high as $1.38 billion on Dropbox. 
  6. Content items have risen to 550 billion on the Dropbox site. 
  7. Users now have a better experience with Dropbox in 20 languages.
  8. Dropbox assets were priced at $2.852 billion in 2022. 
  9. Research and development take up to $727.5 million yearly in Dropbox. 
  10. $442.8 million that enters the purse of Dropbox comes from promotion and sales.
  11. The cost of running Dropbox takes as much as $227.9 million from Dropbox’s pocket.
  12. The value of Dropbox at the end of 2020 shot up by 25% to reach $10 billion.
  13. Dropbox CEO remains the same old co-founder, Drew Houston.

Dropbox Industry Statistics

Dropbox Industry Statistics

1. The Dropbox File-Storing Market in 2020 was Priced At $371.4 Billion.

The market in 2020 was great, ending with a total of $371.4 billion. Its CAGR had an all-time high of 17.5% in that same year.

2. The Market will Most Likely Climb to Hit $832.1 Billion At the End of 2025.

The global market is not showing any sign of slowing down anytime soon. The market will likely get to $832 in the year 2025.

3. Cloud Computing is the Way to Business For 94% of Companies.

Businesses are fast coming to see why cloud computing should be used. 94% of companies worldwide are embracing the idea of cloud computing. This whole idea in 2023 is a rise of 14% from what it was in 2020. You will save time and money when you switch over to cloud computing.

Dropbox Demographics

Dropbox Demographics

4. Registered Users on Dropbox have Reached Over 700 Million.

Dropbox has more than 700 million users covering over 180 countries. It has taken its mission to make work life easier to a whole new level today.

5. A Premium Account is the Choice of Over 15 Million People Using Dropbox.

There is a steady rise in the number of paying users in Dropbox. It had a total of 17.77 million users in just 2022. This was a rise in paying users of about a million from the record in 2021. Dropbox’s paying users have kept rising for six years in a row.

6. Over 9 Million Companies Make Use of Dropbox Sites Today.

The number of businesses using Dropbox is on a steady rise. Though not famous with folks, it is making a name for itself in business. Companies’ move to the cloud has brought Dropbox to the limelight in no small way. Companies that use Dropbox for cloud storage rose to 9 million in 2017. Its encrypted algorithm is pulling in more and more companies every year.

7. File Sharing with the Cloud will Likely Hold Over 180 ZB of Data By the End of 2025.

The future is bright as many companies come under the umbrella of Dropbox. In the coming years, we will see a rise in cloud computing. Data created and used in 2020 was as high as 64.2 zettabytes. The demand for data has risen in no small way since the COVID-19 pandemic. This will not slow down since the sheets show it can hit more than 180 ZB by the end of 2025. 

8. Up to 60% More People Used Dropbox With a Desktop During the Pandemic.

There was a rise in people who used a desktop to get into the Dropbox site. Dropbox, like every other business, had its fair share of users. Macompaniesses saw the need to keep their data safe, for which Dropbox comes to mind

Dropbox User Statistics

Dropbox User Statistics 

9. Spending $134.51 Annually Comes Naturally to the Average Dropbox User.

It was $110.54 in 2016 and has continued increasing until now. The steady rise in the amount of average revenue from each user only goes to show how wide the market is. From $110.54, it rose to $111.91 in 2017. It did not stop there; it rose to 117.64 and 123.07 in 2018 and 2019, respectively. Average revenue from each user turned out to be $134.51 at the end of 2022. Dropbox has put in place its best to have a rise of 16.25% in average user revenue from 2016.

10. The Average User will Spend Up to 13% More on Dropbox Than in 2015.

This does not come as a surprise, as more businesses see the value that Dropbox gives its clients.

11. Only 18% of Dropbox Users Use it for Personal Purposes.

A small fraction of Dropbox users were found to use the site for personal purposes. Just 18% of citizens in the United States use Dropbox for their cause. The combined users, both in business and private, have taken it to an exalted 4th position in cloud storage. Dropbox comes right after Google Drive with 40%, next is Apple iCloud with 33%, and in third place is Microsoft OneDrive with 20%.

12. Premium Users Have Risen in No Small Way Since 2015 in Dropbox.

Paid users stood at 6.5 million and have since grown over the years. The number of paying users in Dropbox totaled 17.7 million in just 2022. It had 1.17 million users at the end of 2020. This was a rise of 8.8% from what it was in 2019.

13. API Calls on Dropbox Have Climbed to Reach 60 Billion Monthly.

Developers on Dropbox can easily unite their apps with the Dropbox system. The company had more than 50 billion calls from the application programming interface, also called API, in 2019. The last is not yet heard, as more developers are coming in. Dropbox had 60 billion APIs by the end of 2020.

14. Zoom and Dropbox Were on the High Side During the Pandemic.

One great news you should know is that Zoom meetings can instantly be saved on Dropbox. This only happens when you turn on Zoom at the App Center on your Dropbox account. After Zoom is clicked on your account, kindly copy Zoom recordings to your Dropbox and click on update. Atapesngs will go directly to the Zoom folder when you record a Zoom meeting. 

Dropbox Workforce Statistics

Workforce Stats

15. The Number of Workers in Dropbox Summed Up to 3,118 At the End of 2022.

Dropbox could boast of having 3,118 workers on its payroll on the last day of 2022. This was the largest that it has ever had since 2015.

16. Workers in Dropbox Totaled 2,667 in the Year 2021.

The year 2021 was quite a one to remember as Dropbox had a downhill. Employees were asked to go home, bringing it down from 2,760 in 2020 to 2,667 at the close of 2021.

17. 85% of Dropbox Staff Live in the United States.

The number of Dropbox workers in the United States is quite high at 85%. What this means is that just 15% are living outside America.

18. The Average Staff of Dropbox in 2020 Earned Up to $144,664.

Staff working at Dropbox took home an average pay of $144,664 all through 2020.

19. Women Make Up to 40% of Dropbox’s Total Workforce.

Women have a good spot in the employment area at Dropbox. They occupy up to 40% of the positions in the company. This is quite a good sign that shows ladies have a say in Dropbox affairs.

20. Women Took Up 41% of Leaders’ Posts in Dropbox in 2020.

It is no surprise that women are taking up top positions in Dropbox. The percentage of ladies working in the company shows its stance on women in the tech industry. Women are getting more attention than the male folks. Ladies have gained the upper hand in promotion for five years. This is in a bid to meet up with its mantra of climbing over all forms of injustice in the workplace.

Dropbox Business Statistics

Business Stats

21. Paying Businesses Have Been on the Rise in Dropbox, Ending At 8.18%.

The rate at which businesses use Dropbox rose by 8.18% in just 24 months. Between 2019 and the end of 2020, companies trooped into Dropbox by 8.18%.

22. Business Teams Across the Globe Love to Share Documents Using Dropbox.

As many as 500 business teams used Dropbox to share important documents in 2020. This is very much expected, as Dropbox is known for providing great services in cloud computing. Its focus on serving businesses with file recovery, security, and boundless storage is well embraced.

23. The Call for Dropbox was High, Especially in France During the Pandemic.

Many people turned to Dropbox as an answer to many budding business needs due to how things were during the pandemic. Daily business team trials rose in March 2020 to 40%. This feat of success went with more schedules and joint activities as well. Personal plans were not in any way left out, as they rose by over 25% within the same time. Countries like France, Italy, and Spain were very involved during the COVID-19 pandemic. There was also a rise in basic mobile and web signups.

24. A Great Deal of Companies that Use Dropbox Are in the United States.

Dropbox has come a long way in terms of service delivery. Most companies in the United States that use Dropbox center on IT. Most of the time, these businesses have between 10 and 50 staff and earn an average of $1 to $10 million as revenueThe United States has as much as 68% of Dropbox’s client base. The United Kingdom, Canada, and Australia are other countries that top the list.

25. Businesses Centered on Computer Software Can Easily Turn to Dropbox.

Dropbox is quickly taking the lead in cloud storage and file management. It has climbed up the feat of setting the standard for storing files in the cloud. Dropbox ranked fourth among the top 100 companies in the software industry in 2021. This shows that Dropbox has created a name for itself in the industry.

26. Most Companies that Use Dropbox Have a Staff Strength of 10 to 50.

Businesses that use Dropbox services most often fall between 10 and 50 workers. These companies in need of seamless cloud storage turn to Dropbox.

27. Businesses Using Dropbox Get An Average of $1 to $10 Million in Revenue.

These companies with staff strength below 50 make just between $1 and $10 million as revenue annually. 

Comparing Google Drive to Dropbox Statistics

Comparing Google Drive to Dropbox

28. Only 18% of Clients in the United States Use Dropbox to Store Documents.

Up to 40% of consumers in the United States use Google Drive to store documents. This is quite high when compared to the 18% that use Dropbox.

29. Dropbox Gives Free Data 2GB to Each of Its Users Spread Over the World.

You can receive 15GB of data storage at no cost on Google Drive as a client. Dropbox is far off as you can only get 2GB of free data storage using Dropbox.

30. Customers Get 18GB of Data Storage by Simply Giving Out Referrals.

Sending out referrals gets a due reward when you use Dropbox. All you need to do is simply refer a friend to get a storage space of 500 MB. Notably, this comes with the Basic account pack. Those on Dropbox Plus and professional accounts are not left behind, as you get 1GB when you refer someone. The last and in no way the least is the Dropbox Basic, which gets 16GB for referrals. This is a great way of earning more storage space for yourself and your business. 

31. Clients on the Dropbox Basic Account Can Use Three Devices Simultaneously.

The number of devices a person is allowed to log into is based on the plan that person is on. Clients on the basic strategy cannot log into more than three accounts. Log into as many devices as possible on the Dropbox Plus and Professional accounts.

Dropbox Revenue Statistics

 Revenue Stats

32. Revenue was High, With $2.158 At the Close of 2021.

The year 2021 was great as Dropbox and its team went all out to meet clients’ needs. It ended the year on a good note with $2.158 billion. This was an increase of 12.7% from the past year.

33. Dropbox 2020 was Successful, With An End Revenue of Over $1.91 Billion.

It was a great year for Dropbox, like when $1.91 billion was made as revenue in 2020. This shows that it made 15.06% more than it had in 2019.

34. The Earnings of Dropbox From Just Users in the United States Stood At $999.3 Million.

This should not be surprising, as the United States raises over 50% of the revenue that comes into Dropbox each year. Revenue in Dropbox has been faring well since 2015, which landed at $999.3 million in 2020.

35. Sales in the International Scene of Dropbox is Valued At $941 Million.

Dropbox is growing in value at the world level every single year. It is little wonder why it took fourth place in the top 100 software companies in 2021.

36. Revenue for Dropbox Took a Hike By More Than 15%.

The year 2019 to the end of 2020 was indeed one that saw a rise in revenue by 15% for Dropbox.

37. International Revenue has Risen by Over 33% for the Dropbox Company.

Dropbox’s revenue for five years has risen by over 33%. This is allowed because more and more companies need to get on board. 

Facts On Dropbox Security

Facts On Dropbox Security

  • Dropbox uses a 256-bit Advanced Encryption standard to protect all its clients’ files. 
  • Data moving from the apps to servers use the Secure Sockets Layer as protection. 
  • Applications are always kept in check to ensure they are far from harm’s way.
  • A two-step proof exercise is carried out whenever you want to log in.
  • Users can get a text message or a TOTP for security codes.
  • Public files can only be viewed by those with the link to them. 

Conclusion

Dropbox has come a long way in securing its clients’ data worldwide. The best teams have been put in place to ensure clients are satisfied. The security of files in Dropbox is not an issue, as steps are taken regarding this. You only need to take the two-step proof exercise to keep your data intact. 

One striking thing about Dropbox is that no one can access your files except you. Just a few staff can look into the data saved on Dropbox. At Dropbox, satisfying clients in every way is the watchword daily. This view has taken Dropbox company to the height that it is right now. 

FAQs

How many users are actively using Dropbox?

How much is Dropbox worth in revenue?

Which country has the largest store of data in Dropbox?

Sources 

The post 35+ Eye-opening Dropbox Statistics 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/dropbox-statistics/feed/ 0
U.S. Electric Vehicle Statistics – Key Players & Opportunities in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/ https://techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/#respond Mon, 22 Jan 2024 14:10:10 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3534809 Electric car made in the US, ai-generated image

When we look at the most recent US electric vehicle statistics, we see a fascinating picture. The popularity of electric cars is on the rise worldwide, and the US looks...

The post U.S. Electric Vehicle Statistics – Key Players & Opportunities in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Electric car made in the US, ai-generated image

When we look at the most recent US electric vehicle statistics, we see a fascinating picture. The popularity of electric cars is on the rise worldwide, and the US looks to be one of the largest markets for EVs.

For that reason, it’s important for marketers to have a clear view of the global EV market, which means answering the following questions:

  • How big is the global electric vehicle market?
  • Who are the key players in EV sales?
  • What are the big opportunities and challenges for EVs?
  • And what does the future hold for the US electric vehicle market?

We put together this comprehensive guide to answer these very questions – and more. We hope that you find the latest US electric vehicle statistics as electrifying as we have.

Let’s dive in.

Key US Electric Vehicle Statistics

  • In 2023, the market share of electric vehicles in the US was 7.6%, 1.7% larger than in 2022.
  • The EV market in the United States is forecast to reach $82.8 billion in 2024.
  • As of H1 2023, the US had 287.6 million cars and light-duty trucks on the road, and 1% of all US cars (2.88 million) were electric
  • By 2028, the sales of electric vehicles in the United States will reach 2.46 million units.
  • Tesla is the leader in the US EV market, with a market share of 55.1%
  • In FY 2022, Tesla’s US revenue amounted to $40.55 billion, which was nearly 50% of the company’s global revenue ($81.46 billion).
  • Ford’s electric car, Mustang Mach-E, was the third-best selling EV in the US in 2022, and the company sold almost 40,000 units in the same year.

US EV Market Size Statistics

As of 2022, the global market share of electric vehicles is 14%, up 5.3% from the year before. It’s certainly come a long way from 2010, when the EV market share was only 0.01%.

In this section, we take a look at the market share of electric vehicles in the United States of America and estimate how many cars in the US are actually electric.

US EV Market Share & Size

Electric vehicle market size by country, 2024
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/

Kelley Blue Book estimates that, in 2023, the market share of electric vehicles in the US was 7.6% – an increase of 1.7% from 2022. In terms of quarters, Q4 of 2023 saw the highest market share of EVs, namely 8.1%. That’s slightly higher than Q3, when EVs’ market share was 7.9%.

In terms of market size, statistics tell us that the United States EV market is forecast to reach $82.8 billion in 2024. As you can see from our infographic, that would make the US one of the top five EV markets in the world, preceded only by China.

How Many Vehicles in the US Are Electric?

Number of electric vehicles in the US
Source: Experian

According to Experian, as of H1 of 2023, there were a total of 287.6 million cars and light-duty trucks on the road in the US. Electric vehicles made up around 1% of these vehicles. Although that doesn’t seem like a lot, it actually amounts to approximately 2.88 million electric cars.

On top of that, the first half of 2023 saw 11.2 million new retail vehicle registrations in the US. 7.5% of the 11.2 million newly registered cars were electric vehicle registrations. That’s a solid 840,000 registrations!

US EV Sales Statistics

Estimated plug-in electric vehicle sales in the US from 2016 to 2022
Source: Statista

2022 was an excellent year for EV sales in the US, as the country saw almost 1 million units sold (918,460). A significant share of these units was sold by Tesla, nearly 522,400 units or just over 56%. Ford was the second-biggest seller of EVs in the US, with 61,575 units sold within the country.

As you can see, Tesla is an undisputed EV market leader in the US, with a market share of 55.1% However, as you’ll soon see, other automakers are catching up.

In terms of future developments, the numbers tell us there will be 1.28 million EV units sold in the US by the end of 2024. And, by 2028, the sales of EVs in the United States will reach 2.46 million units, that’s 1.46 million more than in 2022!

In the next section, we go over the statistics of sales and revenue of each major EV market player active in the US.

EV Sales & Market by State

The most prolific adopter of electric vehicles in the US is the State of California. Experian tells us that the sunny state made up 35% of all EV registrations in 2023, with LA and San Francisco accounting for the majority of new EVs (148,000 and 86,000, respectively).

New York City came third with 58,000 EV registrations in 2023.

Indeed, California and the Eastern Seaboard are popular markets for electric vehicles. However, we also saw that other US markets experienced significant growth in EV popularity in the last five years. Here’s a breakdown of locations with the highest average 5-year YoY growth.

City & State Growth, %
Tucson, Arizona 82.3%
Colorado Springs, Colorado 78.2%
Orlando, Florida 76.8%
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 75%
Las Vegas, Nevada 72%
Reno, Nevada 71.5%
Virginia Beach, Virginia 71.5%
Cleveland, Ohio 70%
San Antonio, Texas 68.4%
Greensboro, North Carolina 67.5%

US EV Pricing Statistics

Model Y price graph
Source: Tesla

High prices is one of the most significant concerns for US consumers when it comes to electric vehicles. Indeed, EVs have a much higher price point than fuel-powered cards.

For instance, Tesla’s Model Y starting prices vary from $31,490 to $36,490 around America, according to their Q3 2023 report. And although Model Y was one of the bestselling cars in the US in 2022, it only came fifth overall.

On average, a fully electric vehicle cost $61,448 in 2022, according to Statista. Needless to say, that’s a very significant cost for the majority of US population.

At an average of $32,564, hybrid cars are a lot cheaper. Even so, a buyer would have to pay around 24% more for a hybrid than the an average compact car ($26,282). Therefore, the high price point is likely holding back EV adoption numbers.

Key Players of US EV Market

Best-selling battery electric vehicles in the US in 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/

In this section of our guide, we’ll take a close look at each of the key players of the electric vehicle market in the US. But first, let’s take a look at the market share of top EV providers in the US. Here’s the breakdown, according to a 2023 report by Kelley Blue Book:

EV Provider YTD Market Share, 2023 YTD EV Sales, 2023, in units
Tesla 55.1% 654,888
Ford 6.1% 72,608
GM (Chevrolet) 5.3% 62,988
Hyundai 4.8% 57,561
Rivian 4.2% 50,189

Tesla

US Tesla revenue from 2018 to 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/

As mentioned above, Tesla is the leader in the US EV market with a share of 55.1%. Two of the most popular models of electric vehicles – Model Y and Model 3 – are made by Tesla.

Model Y sold 243,800 units in the US in 2022, and Model 3 sold 200,800 units that same year in the region. The market share of Model Y in 2023 was 33.2%, while Model 3 held a share of 18.9%.

Even though Tesla sold an excellent 522,400 units in 2022, they outdid themselves in 2023, managing to sell nearly 654,900 units in the US in total.

Experian also tells us that Tesla is the leader in the luxury EV segment. As of Q2 of 2023, Tesla models were four of the top five bestselling luxury EVs in the US, including Model Y, Model 3, Model X, and Model S.

From 2018 to 2022, Tesla earned the bulk of its revenue from US sales. In FY 2022, Tesla’s US revenue amounted to $40.55 billion, making up almost 50% of the company’s total global revenue of $81.46 billion. Those $40.55 billion amount to an increase of $16.6 billion from Tesla’s US revenue of FY 2021.

General Motors

Tesla might be the market leader in the US in terms of sales, but General Motors (GM) is also gaining ground. Thanks to their significant R&D investments focused on electric vehicles, they’re growing their presence internationally. Their intention is to sell only zero-emission cars by 2035.

Vehicles such as Chevrolet Bolt and GMC Hummer EV are the brainchildren of GM. The latter was quite popular in the US in 2020.

42% of consumers expressed an interest in the Hummer EV, only 6% less than Tesla’s figure. In 2023, however, the Hummer EV’s market share was a mere 0.3%.

Chevrolet Bolt

Chevrolet EV sales
Source: GM

Although it was supposed to discontinued in 2023, GM’s Chevrolet Bolt showed resounding success in 2023, making GM reverse their plans. That year, the company sold 62,045 units in the US, according to GM’s yearly report. The performance brought Bolt’s EV market share up to 5.2%.

Bolt was also the fourth-bestselling EV in 2022 in the region, after Tesla’s Model Y and 3 and Ford’s Mustang Mach-E. IT sold just over 38,000 units in 2023, with the 4th quarter being the best one at 16,008 units.

Ford

Ford F150 Electric

Another automotive brand gaining ground in the US is Ford. Its electric car Mustang Mach-E was the third-best selling EV in the US in 2022, after the two Tesla models.

The company deployed almost 40,000 Mach-E units in 2022, a few thousand more than Chevrolet Bolt. The Mach-E had a 3.4% share of the EV market in the US in 2023, only 1.8% lower than the Bolt.

Another popular electric vehicle by Ford is the F-150 Lightning. In 2022, the 15,617 F-150’s were sold, making it eleventh-best selling EV in the US. The vehicle is a pick-up truck, and is one of the most popular electric pick-up trucks in the US, beating even Tesla. Its market share in 2023 was 3%,  much more significant than the Hummer EV’s.

Like GM, Ford has ambitious EV goals. It’s keenly investing in R&D development related to EVs, and its goal is to have 50% of its fleet fully electric by 2030.

Rivian

Rivian income and loss 2019 to 2022
Source: Statista

A relatively new player in the EV market, Rivian is nonetheless making waves. Its R1T electric car is eighth-best selling EV in the US market, as of 2022. That year, it sold 20,332 units in America.

The R1T model holds about 1.5% of the EV market share, much smaller than the American providers listed here, but still more significant than many European manufacturers.

Despite its moderate success and unicorn status, Rivian is not a profitable company. It’s been suffering net losses since 2019, having incurred its largest loss in 2022, namely $6.76 billion. However, the company continued investing in R&D much like its competitors.

Key Challenges & Opportunities for the US EV Market

Concerns of US consumers about EVs
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/

By now, you know a lot about the state of the EV market in the US and the key players engaged in it. However, that’s just one piece of the puzzle. To see how the work of these players translates into the market, we need to understand the key opportunities and challenges of that market, and their impacts on consumer preferences.

In this section, we explore these challenges and opportunities.

Fuel Prices

Retail price of gas in the US by month, 2019 to 2023
Source: Statista

The nature of the US landscape and its urbanization requires most people to drive a car, which means spending a lot of money on gasoline. And indeed, one of the big reasons why the uptake of EVs is on the rise in the US is the increasing fuel prices.

Fuel prices in the US have been increasing for most of 2023, and whilst the short-term energy outlook predicts that they’ll drop in 2024, it’s not for certain. Customers don’t want to spend more on a recurring basis, and we predict that should the fuel prices continue to rise, electric cars would become more popular.

However, the fuel prices are just one of the factors impacting the EV market. Let’s take a look at some others now.

Environmental Concerns

Graph with EV emissions
Source: Carbon Counter

The biggest benefit underpinning electric cars is that they’re considered more environmentally friendly than fuel-powered vehicles. The increasing environmental concerns of American society is a significant opportunity for EV manufacturers to capitalize on.

Indeed, switching to EVs can significantly reduce CO2 emissions. As you can see on the infographic produced by an MIT tool, the EVs depicted produce a lot fewer emissions than the depicted gasoline cars.

However, the low emissions don’t mean that EVs are one hundred percent green. As things stand, a full switch to EVs in the US would require three times as much lithium for the batteries as we produce now.

The required increased lithium mining might jeopardize many countries’ environmental targets, unless the current approach to urbanization in the US is re-evaluated.

Therefore, there are two sides to going green by switching to EV, making environmental concerns both a challenge and an opportunity for manufacturers.

Chargers

US network of public and private EV charging locations 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/

To get the most out of electric vehicles, there must be a charging infrastructure in place supporting a large-scale uptake. As of 2023, the United States has a substantial public charger network of 138,111 public chargers in 53,000 locations.

That might seem like a lot, but in order to keep up with the increasing demand for EVs, the network needs to be much larger. The lack of charging infrastructure is a significant concern for 46% of US consumers in relation to EV adoption. S&P Global predicts that the US will need to quadruple the above amount of chargers by the end of 2025 and grow more than eight-fold by 2030.

As a result of this significant growth – and not just in the US but worldwide – Next Move Strategy Consulting predicts that the global EV charging market will reach 12.87 million units by 2030.

High EV & Maintenance Costs

As we mentioned earlier, prohibitive costs of purchasing and maintaining electric vehicles are a significant barrier to its widespread adoption. In fact, 52% of American consumers cite them as their biggest concern when it comes to EVs.

When we’re talking about costs, purchasing an EV is only part of it. 77% of US consumers stated in 2022 that they’d prefer to charge their EV battery at home, but the installation costs for the charging station are quite prohibitive, reaching as high as $2,500.

Tax Credit & Incentives

Average global EV financial subsidies at purchase in selected countries in 2022
Source: Statista

To address the issue of prohibitive cost and meet their climate targets, governments of many countries have introduced financial incentives and tax credits for purchasing electric vehicles. Although Norway leads the way for such incentives, the US is no exception.

If you purchase an EV in the US in 2023 or after, you could be eligible for a federal income tax credit of up to $7,500. To be eligible for that, you have to meet certain income thresholds and the purchased EV must be new and from an authorized manufacturer.

The battery must also meet certain requirements. As of 2024, this tax break can be obtained at the point of sale rather than at the tax return filing point.

Such credits and incentives are a solid starting point for combating the problem of high costs of electric vehicles. However, we believe that in order to meet the needs of the market and keep up with the inflation, such credits should be periodically reviewed.

In this final section, we look at the future trends affecting the electric cars market in the United States. We believe that some of the current trends will carry on having a significant impact, but also that other ones will emerge.

Charging Infrastructure Expansion

Earlier in the guide, we mentioned that the US would need to significantly expand its EV charging infrastructure to meet the increasing demand for electric cars. Indeed, the popularity of EVs is what’s driving this trend, and vice versa – the more accessible the charging infrastructure is, the more likely people are to adopt electric vehicles.

For that reason, we foresee significant investments into expanding the charging network from both public and private sectors. A larger network would make EVs a more viable option for a much larger target audience, creating more opportunities for EV manufacturers.

Battery Technology Advancements

The other side of the sustainability picture painted by EV marketers is the huge amounts of lithium mining required to meet the increasing demands. For that reason, we believe that the battery technology will advance beyond that.

Such advancements would not only have to accommodate sustainability concerns, but also reduce charging times and prolong the battery life. A combination of these features, together with some others, can potentially address the current limitations of EV batteries, making the cars more competitive.

Regulatory Changes

There have already been significant legislative strides in the US in the last few years in relation to EV funding and R&D. Plus, the tax credits we mentioned earlier are a big part of the green strategy.

Unfortunately, many electric vehicles sold in the US will lose their tax credit status in 2024 due to the changes in battery sourcing rules. We’re convinced that, in order to ensure the consumers are still incentivized, the US government will expand the subsidy initiatives to mitigate that challenge.

Manufacturers’ EV Production Targets

We mentioned some manufacturers in this guide that set themselves the green targets of going either fully electric or partially electric within the next decade.

We expect these increasing commitments to electrification to be adopted by more and more automakers, even those who predominantly make fuel-powered cars. As consumers increasingly move towards sustainability, these companies will need to respond to the market demands.

Final Thoughts

In this guide, we dived into the fascinating world of the American electric vehicle market and its key players. We saw that EVs are becoming more and more popular each year, and the manufacturers are responding to that demand.

We also saw that, in order for the US to fully transition to electric vehicles, a lot more needs to be done in terms of costs, charging infrastructure, legislation, and manufacturing, to name a few. The team at The Tech Report will be watching the developments closely, and we’re very excited to see the innovations in the market.

Sources

Click to see all sources
  1. Global market share of electric vehicles within passenger car sales between 2010 and 2022 (Statista)
  2. Estimated plug-in electric light vehicle sales in the United States from 2016 to 2022 (Statista)
  3. Number of Chevrolet Bolt electric vehicle sales in the U.S. between 2017 and 2022 (Statista)
  4. Light vehicle sales in the United States between January and December of 2021 and 2022, by manufacturer (Statista)
  5. Best-selling battery-electric cars in the United States in 2022, based on new registrations (Statista)
  6. Tesla’s revenue in the United States, China, and other markets from FY 2018 to FY 2022 (Statista)
  7. Electric vehicles in the United States – statistics & facts (Statista)
  8. Estimated battery-electric vehicle sales in the United States in 2022, by brand (Statista)
  9. Rivian’s net income/loss between FY 2019 and FY 2022 (Statista)
  10. Monthly retail price of gasoline in the United States from April 2019 to May 2023, by type (Statista)
  11. U.S. consumer’s leading concerns regarding battery-electric vehicles as of October 2022 (Statista)
  12. Volume of public electric vehicle charging stations and chargers in the United States between 2007 and 2022 (Statista)
  13. Volume of private electric vehicle charging stations and chargers in the United States between 2007 and 2022 (Statista)
  14. Number of public electric vehicle charging stations and charging outlets in the U.S. as of May 12, 2023 (Statista)
  15. Average global EV financial subsidies at purchase in selected countries in 2022 (Statista)
  16. Electric Vehicles – United States (Statista)
  17. Electric Vehicles – Norway (Statista)
  18. Electric Vehicles – United Kingdom (Statista)
  19. Electric Vehicles – Norway (Statista)
  20. Electric Vehicles – Germany (Statista)
  21. Electric Vehicles – China (Statista)
  22. Average transaction price for new vehicle sales in the United States in December 2021 and December 2022, by vehicle type (Statista)
  23. The best-selling cars and SUVs in the United States between January and December 2022 (Statista)
  24. GM’s research and development expenditures from FY 2015 to FY 2022 (Statista)
  25. Electric pickup truck brand appeal to U.S. consumers as of December 2020 (Statista)
  26. Battery electric vehicle sales in the United States from Q1 2020 to Q1 2023, by leading model (Statista)
  27. Ford Motor Company – Statistics & Facts (Statista)
  28. Ford’s engineering, research, and development expenditures from FY 2013 to FY 2022 (Statista)
  29. Rivian’s research and development expenses between FY 2019 and FY 2022 (Statista)
  30. Carbon dioxide emissions of new passenger cars sold worldwide in 2017 and 2030 (Statista)
  31. Global electric vehicle charging market size in 2021, with a forecast through 2030 (Statista)
  32. Distribution of the locations people expect to charge their electric vehicles most often as of October 2022, by selected country (Statista)
  33. A Record 1.2 Million EVs Were Sold in the U.S. in 2023, According to Estimates from Kelley Blue Book (Cox Automotive)
  34. Another Quarter, Another Record: EV Sales in the U.S. Surpass 300,000 in Q3, as Tesla Share of EV Segment Tumbles to 50% (Cox Automotive)
  35. ELECTRIC VEHICLE SALES REPORT — Q4 2023 (Kelley Blue Book)
  36. Q3 2023 Automotive Market Trends Report (Experian)
  37. Electric Vehicles 2023 Half-Year in Review (Experian)
  38. Electric Vehicles Continue to Make Headway in Q2 2023 (Experian)
  39. 2023 Q3 Quarterly Update Deck (Tesla)
  40. How many electric cars are in the US? (Hertz)
  41. Why GM is reviving the Bolt, the best-selling EV it almost discontinued (CNBC)
  42. Why the $7,500 electric vehicle tax credit may be easier — and harder — to get in 2024 (CNBC)
  43. GM Delivers Another Year of Firsts (GM)
  44. GM U.S. DELIVERIES FOR QUARTER 4 2023 (GM)
  45. SHORT-TERM ENERGY OUTLOOK (EIA)
  46. Carbon Counter
  47. Revealed: how US transition to electric cars threatens environmental havoc (The Guardian)
  48. EV Chargers: How many do we need? (S&P Global)
  49. How Much Does Installing an EV Charger Cost? (EV Charging Summit)
  50. Federal Tax Credits for Plug-in Electric and Fuel Cell Electric Vehicles Purchased in 2023 or After (US Department of Energy)
  51. Electric Vehicles & Rural Transportation (US Department of Transportation)
  52. More EVs lose US tax credits including Tesla, Nissan, GM vehicles (Reuters)

The post U.S. Electric Vehicle Statistics – Key Players & Opportunities in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/electric-vehicle-statistics-us/feed/ 0
25+ Jaw-dropping Beauty and Health Industry Statistics (2024) https://techreport.com/statistics/beauty-health-industry-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/beauty-health-industry-statistics/#respond Fri, 19 Jan 2024 18:25:37 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3534441 Key Beauty and Health Industry Statistics 

Self-care, beauty, and wellness are taking over our social media feeds and everyday conversations. But beyond face masks and yoga trends, the health and beauty business is booming faster than...

The post 25+ Jaw-dropping Beauty and Health Industry Statistics (2024) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Beauty and Health Industry Statistics 

Self-care, beauty, and wellness are taking over our social media feeds and everyday conversations. But beyond face masks and yoga trends, the health and beauty business is booming faster than ever. The global beauty industry alone is worth a whopping $511 billion—and it’s showing no signs of slowing down.

With innovative products, glamorous influencers, and insta-worthy experiences galore, it’s no wonder this market has grown nearly 10% in just the last few years. That’s why we’ve rounded up the latest juicy stats showcasing some surprising health and beauty industry trends.

Want the inside scoop on everything from how the guys are getting in on grooming to predictions that Gen Zers will be splurging over $7 billion on beauty products in 2024 alone? Then read on for all the numbers you need on this big-money business that clearly knows how to stay healthy, wealthy, and wise.

Key Beauty and Health Industry Statistics 

Key Beauty and Health Industry Statistics

  1. The revenue of the beauty and health market will reach $625.70 billion in 2023.
  2. Personal care has a large chunk of the market value, $274.20 billion in 2023.
  3. The United States has the largest slice of revenue in the beauty industry, with a total of $98 billion in just 2023 alone.
  4. Online sales will account for 17.7% of the health and beauty industry sales 2023.
  5. Revenue for the industry ended well with $564.40 billion in 2022.
  6. Experts think the market will have better days, with a growth of 4.76% between 2022 and the end of 2026.
  7. Organic beauty products will increase to $22 billion globally by 2024.
  8. 1 in every 4 ladies prefers using a product that suits the weather conditions.
  9. It will strike you to know that 96% of beauty products have a social media handle.
  10. Teens are known to spend an average of $44 billion every single year.
  11. Asia Pacific holds quite a large share of about 50% in the beauty and health market.
  12. Ladies are most likely to give themselves a beauty treat of $313 every single month.

General Beauty and Health Industry Statistics

General Beauty and Health Industry Statistics

1. The Health and Beauty Industry is Partitioned Into Several Segments.

These segments in 2021 and 2022 had a fair slice of the entire market revenue.

  • Hair care with 24%.
  • Skincare was 23.7%.
  • Fragrances earned 9.5%.
  • Makeups boasted of 14.6%.
  • Antiperspirants, deodorizers, and female hygiene recorded 8.5%.
  • Oral hygiene owned 5.6%.
  • Additional segments grabbed 14.1%.

2. Personal Care in 2022 Comprised a Large Part of the B and H Industry, Ending With $254 Billion.

Personal care includes oral hygiene, cosmetics, skincare, and many others. This segment earned $254B at the end of 2022. 

3. Offline Sales Bring in a Total of 81% Into the Beauty and Health Industry.

Recent studies show that delivering products physically still provides large sales by 81%. This is not far from the truth. Most people today prefer to get what they want from the store by themselves. This is why drug stores and pharmacies like Walgreens can push in 58% of cosmetics buying. Walmart is not left behind as they drive in customer traffic. Despite many people flocking to the stores, 42% buy online things. Research shows that the number of these people is increasing every year. The United States is not excluded from this new trend, as online shopping has grown to 48% in 2023.

4. Asia Pacific Holds Quite a Large Share of About 50% in the Beauty and Health Market.

The Asia Pacific region has been growing at an amazing fast rate with no sign of slowing down soon. The region is well known for pushing and promoting health and beauty products. Taking the largest share of the beauty market should not come as a surprise to you. This is because beauty is entwined in its rich cultural heritage. The countries on the front line of the cosmetics industry in the Asia-Pacific region are Indonesia, Thailand, and Malaysia. North America falls in second place with a 24% market share. Then, Western Europe is in third place, with a market share of 18%. Africa has quite a small fraction of 3% of the global market share. 

5. Organic Beauty Products Will Most Likely Rise to $22 Billion Globally by the End of 2024.

This should not be a surprise, as 59% of beauty care consumers are not so sure of the safety of most care products. This doesn’t end there, as 92% believe stricter measures should be taken. This ensures that the right amount of ingredients is used to produce products. Statistics show that Organic lovers are growing by the year. The year 2018 proved it, as 72% of customers felt organic products were better to use. As such, experts predict we will see more numbers in the next couple of years. This growth is well expected as organic products do not contain toxins. 

6. There Were Up to $74.15 in Sales Per Person in the United States Market in the First Quarter of 2022.

As stated earlier, North America had a slice of 24% of the global market. Americans were not out in any way as sales per person in that same 2022 was around $74.15 of cosmetics. This sale depended on the brand type, a single product, or more from a shopping spree. 

7. 1 in Every 4 Ladies Prefers Using a Product That Suits Well With the Weather.

 More people are happy using organic products with the passing of each day. Consumers are becoming more aware of the health risks of skincare materials. People are becoming smarter and are now conscious of the brands they use. Ecofriendly is a trend that is fast taking the market by storm. It is not just the packaging but also the manufacturing process. Examples of companies that have made themselves known in this regard are Ursa Major, Naturopathic, True Botanicals, and Matrescence. These and more use techniques that are eco-friendly to wrap their goods. 

8. Revenue From the Health and Beauty Industry Did Well, Ending with $564.40 Billion in 2022.

2022 was successful, with a closing revenue of $564.40 billion for the beauty and health industry. The statistics show great prospects for many thinking of entering the market. Influencers, marketers, and brands all had a field day in 2022. Many people who are involved in one way or another in the health and beauty industry are earning up to 6 figures. They do this through their social media handles and creating content as well. Some popular areas that make waves in the industry are makeup tutorials, new product launches, and skincare reviews. These are areas you can also take advantage of to make some earnings. 

9. Ladies Most Likely Give Themselves a Monthly Beauty Treat of $313.

The average American woman would not mind spending up to $3,756 on beauty products annually. This expense brings ladies’ monthly pay on beauty treats to $313. It also means that an entire $225,360 is spent by one person throughout her lifetime. When compared, men are likely to spend a lower amount, about $175,650, on beauty and health products. This implies that the average American man pays $244 monthly. Regarding cosmetics, men most often opt to buy facial moisturizers. 

10. Teens Spend an Average of About $44 Billion on Beauty Products Annually.

This is not farfetched as, at this stage, a teenager is sensitive to their appearance. They spend an average of just around $44 billion on beauty products. Teens belong to Generation Z and are in the social exploration stage. Also, most teens are now exposed to life on social media. They take notice of trends in social media and go all out to look good. Surprisingly, 90% of female teens wear products that enhance their looks. At the same time, just 70% of boys will tow the same part. Teenagers often feel that social media heightens peer pressure, so they go all out to seek the best beauty product. Also, knowing brands is important to 61% of teenagers. 65% are more concerned with the latest trend, and 62% use makeup to feel better about themselves

11. Makeup Products are Used by About 56% of Men Who Go Out on a Shopping Spree.

The number of men who use makeup products is growing by the year. Most men say that they use a foundation and even a concealer at least one time in a year. This accounts for just 56% of men who do their shopping. Though these men do not use makeup yearly, it adds to the beauty and health sector’s revenue. About 40% of men between 18 and 22 wanted more neutral-gender beauty products. The industry has created many beauty and health products that men can enjoy. Among the list of products men use are shaving creams, skincare, beard care, hair care, and so many others.

Marketing Statistics of Beauty and Health Care on Social Media

Marketing Statistics

12. As Large as 96% of Beauty Brands Use a Social Media Handle.

The number keeps adding until it reaches 96% in 2022. Most beauty brands use social media to showcase their products globally. It was predicted that beauty brands would go all out to spend $7.7 billion on simply advertising in 2022The level of growth in the beauty and health industry can be closely linked to the efforts of influencers on social media. Brands rely increasingly on influencers to take the word of their product to the audience. Tools used in this regard include Facebook, TikTok, and YouTube to get the product out to the waiting world.

13. Just One-third of Beauty and Health Users Buy From Social Media.

Digital marketing has, over the years, broken barriers to reach out to the bubbling beauty audience. There’s an 11.5% email open rate through marketing and an average cost per click of $1.68 for a beauty ad. All this would not have been possible without the advancement we now see in digital marketing. Beauty shoppers between 18 and 54 say that YouTube is their best means to get beauty and health content. The volume of watch times has doubled over these years, and we will still see more of this increase in years to come.

14. 82% of Beauty and Healthcare Consumers are on Instagram Daily.

Instagram has become the most successful social media site influencers use to advertise products. The beauty and health industry has benefited hugely from its vast Instagram page. Instagram has enabled brands and influencers to get the word of their products to a ready audience. Most brands confess that influencer marketing proves to be more efficient than email campaigns.

15. Up to 62% of Teenagers Keep Updating Themselves on Their Favorite Beauty Brands on Social Media.

The large percentage of teens who follow beauty brands should not come as a surprise. This is because many teens today are not novices to using social media. As high as 62% of teens will check out a beauty or health product on social media before deciding to buy. Some teens are content creators in makeup, beauty and health reviews, and other trendy aspects.

16. Kylie Cosmetics had Over 25 Million Instagram Followers in the First Quarter of 2022.

It was an exciting year for Kylie Cosmetics when it gathered 25 million Instagram followers in 2022. The brand has experienced real growth, all thanks to Instagram. Kylie had over 300 million in her account during that same period. So, having large followers on Instagram did not come as a great surprise. Anastasia Beverly Hills followed closely with 20.1 million Instagram followers in 2022. Some others that had a good slice from Instagram in 2022 are Benefit Cosmetics in the United States, Ultra Beauty, NARS Cosmetics, and Bath Body Works.

E-commerce and Tech Statistics of the Beauty and Health Industry

E-commerce and Tech Statistics of the B and H Industry

17. E-commerce Sales in the Beauty and Health Industry are Likely to Grow by 77% From 2021 to 2026.

More consumers today rely on online reviews to decide what product to buy. This recent behavior has entered into the beauty and health industry as well. E-commerce beauty sales can hit as high as $358.4 billion by the end of 2026This expert statistic is a ray of hope for better days in the industry. Marketers, brands, and influencers can use this information to promote their products to a wider audience.  

18. 65% of Beauty and Health Vendors Help Buyers Make Better Choices Using an Interactive Quiz Model.

A virtual interactive session is a great way to provide needed answers to several beauty questions. Consumers in need of a quick recommendation turn to virtual assistants. Many beauty brands are now turning in the direction of interactive quiz technology. Whether in skincare or healthcare, these companies are using this new technology. It is easy to know when a company gives interactive quizzes; you only need to look at the brand’s website. You can get a brand website on social media, social ads, and even shared online content. These interactive quizzes will help you choose, regardless of skin type and color. 

19. Only 6% of Beauty Shoppers Use VR and AR Technology When Picking Cosmetics.

Augmented reality, AR, and virtual reality (VR) were the means to try products during the pandemic. Many had to make do with the VR and AR technology as they could not make it to a physical store. Popular brands like Avon, Sephora, and many others make sales through this means. The augmented reality technology, which ModiFace designed, is in partnership with over 70 beauty and health brands. All the consumers have to do is enable the front camera or webcam on their device to try a couple of cosmetic products. This technology is now available for use for both sunglasses and eyeglasses products. 

20. Up to 74% of Consumers Today Use Reviews From Beauty Websites to Make Purchases.

Do you know that users of beauty products now rely on product reviews to make their purchases? Patrons of beauty products are more likely to buy products that post reviews on their site. This new consumer action also occurs in other industries as well. Customers are most often drawn to products with some form of social proof. It is a win-win for the brands as they now achieve up to 80% loyalty from female folks.

21. Brands That Post User-generated Content on Their Site are the Choice of 62% of Beauty and Health Users.

Brands in the beauty industry, like Le Labo and MAC Cosmetics, have made a name for themselves. Hosting user-generated content on their site has helped in no small way in pulling many consumers. UGC, for short, is a great way for brands to bring products closer to the people. 

22. Demand for Organic Beauty and Health Products is Likely to Rise to $32.3 Billion by the End of 2027.

Products that contain purely natural and organic ingredients are getting better attention from beauty users. Today, shoppers want to know more about the products they want to buy. Most people now read labels on products to know what they containThere has been a growing awareness of using products that are not harmful to the health and body from the time of the pandemic.

23. A Total of $400 Million Was the Sales Volume of the New Concept of Clean Beauty Made in 2021.

The idea of pure beauty has kept on growing for over 30 years now in a row. This is coming as a response to the awareness of toxins spreading everywhere. People are now more aware of the dangers they face when they use products that contain toxinsAs such, the move in the direction of organic products is the trend to follow today. So, in years to come, organic products will rise as the standard for grading products in the beauty industry. 

24. About 70% of Beauty and Health Users Between 18 and 29 Years Old in the United States Buy Organic Products.

The records show that about 70% of persons between 18 and 29 like buying organic products. Persons who are 30 years to 59 are not left out, as 60% like to shop for natural and organic skincare products. This is because more and more people are becoming aware of the goodness in themJust look at the stamp and certification on the pack of a beauty product, and you will know if it is natural or not. 

25. More Than 2 in Every 10 Natural Beauty Products Were Sold in 2018 by a Distributor.

The success of sales in the organic natural beauty market is attracting the attention of beauty companies. Companies that have made a big name are now following the organic path. This is no surprise; everyone wants a slice of the organic market. 

26. The Organic Beauty Market Will Likely Be Worth Over $22 billion at the Close of 2024. 

The global stage of the organic industry will most likely rise more than ever. The signs are all out, with statistics showing that this industry will grow bigger in the coming years. A value of over $22 billion is possible as the industry has been on an 8% to 10% rise for some time now. One of the major parts of the organic market making waves for itself is the skin and hair care section. These sections bring in over 50% of the income that comes into the industry. This is no surprise, as general hair care and coloring have attracted the public’s attention.

Conclusion 

The health and beauty industry is indeed a wonder to behold. Over the years, it has passed through stages under the eyes of the public. The COVID-19 pandemic opened the eyes of many to see how important natural things are to us. This new awakening did not in any way spare the beauty industry. Brands in the beauty and health industry are now rolling out products that will benefit every skin type and color.

You don’t need to be alarmed about what will be good for your skin; you only need to look at the label. The label on each product will give the word out on which product has chemicals or not. Meanwhile, social media has helped a lot in pulling a lot of funds into the hands of beauty brands. Successful sales brands cannot be far from the efforts of influencers. For many years, we will see more of this success in the beauty and health industry.

FAQs

Which country of the world is the highest spender on beauty products?

How large will the beauty and health industry be in 2024?

How bright is the future of the beauty and health industry?

Sources

The post 25+ Jaw-dropping Beauty and Health Industry Statistics (2024) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/beauty-health-industry-statistics/feed/ 0
AI Image Generator Market Statistics – What Will 2024 Bring? https://techreport.com/statistics/ai-image-generator-market-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/ai-image-generator-market-statistics/#respond Fri, 19 Jan 2024 12:54:29 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3533558 Woman sitting at desk generating image using text to AI

The latest AI image generator market statistics paint a very interesting picture. The generative AI phenomenon is gaining traction at an unprecedented speed, and AI image generation is a significant...

The post AI Image Generator Market Statistics – What Will 2024 Bring? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Woman sitting at desk generating image using text to AI

The latest AI image generator market statistics paint a very interesting picture. The generative AI phenomenon is gaining traction at an unprecedented speed, and AI image generation is a significant part of it.

AI image generating companies are becoming significant players in the generative AI market, and their work has the potential to be a big influence across all industries.

For that reason, it’s vital to stay up to date with the latest AI image generator trends and key players. But just how big is that market? Who are these influential generators redefining creativity? And what does the future hold?

In this guide, we’ll try to answer these important questions – and more. Let’s dive in.

Key AI Image Generator Market Statistics

  • By 2030, the value of the image-generating AI market is forecast to be $917.4 million, which would give it a CAGR of 17.4%.
  • As of September 2022, when Dall-E first became publicly available, 2 million AI images were generated per day with its help.
  • Adobe Firefly saw 1 billion AI-generated images created by users as of July 2023.
  • As of August 2023, people have generated almost 15.5 billion AI-generated images, and each day sees approximately 34 million new AI-generated images.
  • 56% of Americans who saw AI art enjoyed it, and 34% are of the opinion that it’s better than human-created art.
  • 48% of American millennials and 42% of Gen Z-ers believe AI-generated art should be considered real art.
  • 25% of US marketers prefer Dall-E, making it the most popular generative AI tool for marketers in 2023.

Image Generative AI Market Size Statistics

Image-generating by AI is part of the bigger segment of Artificial Intelligence, known as “generative AI.” Generative AI represents a huge market, valued at $66.66 billion in 2024, and it’s forecast to reach $207 billion in 2030.

As for the image-generating segment of the generative AI market, its value in 2023 was estimated to be $299.2 million by Fortune Business Insights.

Although it makes up just over 0.44% of the overall generative AI market, its value shows just how rapidly-expanding the phenomenon is. By 2030, the value of the image-generating AI market is forecast to be $917.4 million. If achieve, this would mean a CAGR of 17.4%.

Key AI Image Generator Market Players

AI image generator market share by product
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/ai-image-generator-market-statistics

But who are the major players in the AI image generator market that are driving and disrupting this industry?

While there are a number of generative AI startups thanks to the advancements in the field, the market is very much controlled by few names right now. Let’s see who they are.

Dall-E

OpenAI’s brainchild Dall-E was launched in January 2021. It’s an AI image generator that creates images on the basis of NLP prompts. To date, three versions of the tool have been released, the latest (Dall-E 3) going live in September 2023.

As of May 2022, Dall-E users generated 3 million AI images, and the tool was acquiring 1,000 new users per week. And as of September 2022, when Dall-E first became publicly available, it generated an average of 2 million AI images per day.

Midjourney

Midjourney interest as shown by Google Searches, 2022 to 2023
Source: Statista

The independent generative AI software Midjourney was first released in beta in July 2022. It’s available exclusively via Discord, where users can submit their prompts for AI image generation.

As of December 2023, the Midjourney Discord server is the most popular server on the platform with over 17.5 million members.

Midjourney is making a splash in Google Search as well. Google Trends reveals that its interest hit a peak of 100 in the beginning of February 2023. As for the monthly visitor count, Similarweb reveals that Midjourney’s website was visited almost 18 million times in December 2023 – 15% more than the month before.

NightCafe AI

AI-generated pineapples with NightCafe
Source: NightCafe Press Kit Mockups

The NightCafe AI art generator might not be as well-known as its counterparts we discussed earlier, but it does nonetheless hold almost a quarter of the AI image generator market.

The Australian generator was founded in November 2019, and as of October 2022, it was used to create over 35 million AI-generated artworks.

Similarweb tells us that December 2023 saw 8.2 million visitors to the NightCafe website, a growth of 3.3% compared to the previous month.

Firefly

Adobe’s Firefly image generator might not have as big of a share as other tools, but it’s nonetheless worth paying attention to.

Although it launched the beta version less than a year ago, in March 2023, Firefly saw over 70 million AI-generated images created by users in less than a month since the launch. As of July 2023, the count is close to 1 billion.

Like Midjourney, Firefly has a popular Discord server, with a little over 500,000 members. It’s also part of Google’s Generative AI system, Bard.

AI Image Generation Adoption Statistics

One doesn’t need artificial intelligence to see that these AI image generator statistics paint a clear picture of the tools’ immense popularity and impact. Let’s take a closer look at the numbers and the extent to which people are adopting or looking to adopt these solutions.

AI-Generated Images in Numbers

AI image generation statistics from Adobe
Source: Everypixel

According to Everypixel, as of August 2023, people have generated almost 15.5 billion AI-generated images. That’s enough for every person on Earth to have generated 1.9 AI images. Each day sees approximately 34 million new AI-generated images.

Out of these 15.5 billion, a significant majority of AI images (12.6 million, or 80%) were created using Stable Diffusion models. Given that this technology is open-source and is used by companies like NightCafe, its popularity isn’t surprising.

As for Midjourney, it saw 964 million images created in its first year, July 2022-August 2023. On average, Midjourney creates an image every 30 seconds.

Adobe’s Firefly saw 1 billion AI images generated in the first three months since its launch, likely due to the popularity of its software among designers and visual creators. That figure makes the software the fastest-growing AI image generator on the market.

Opinions About Generative AI for Images

How Americans perceive AI generated art, 2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/ai-image-generator-market-statistics

Our infographic shows that the majority of people (especially in the US) don’t believe that they’ve seen an AI-generated art – only 27% of people do. Out of those who have seen AI art, 56% of them enjoyed it, and 34% are of the opinion that it’s better than human-created art.

Interestingly enough, a study conducted by Yale University in 2023 showed that 54% of people could differentiate between AI-generated art and human-made art. Indeed, at the moment, many AI-generated images still look fairly inauthentic – with some exceptions.

We’ll go into more detail about the opinions and controversies associated with AI image generators, especially their impact on the creative industry. For now, though, we leave you with the following statistics:

  • 13 million people in the UK have used generative AI, as of July 2023
  • 44% of Koreans are very concerned about AI-generated art
  • 48% of American millennials and 42% of Gen Z-ers believe AI-generated art should be considered real art.

AI Image Generator Usage & Use Cases Statistics

But what do people actually use AI image generators for? The short answer is – everything.

The long answer is that generative AI, including AI image generators, is becoming more and more popular, both in the business world and among consumers. In this section, we’ll take a look at the AI image generator use cases for enterprise and personal use.

Generative AI in Enterprise & Marketing

AI image generators are proving popular among marketers. Statistics tell us that in the US, 39% of marketers use Generative AI to create social media images, and 36% of them tap into the power of AI image generators to create website images.

The most popular generative AI tool for marketers is Dall-E, with 25% of US marketers preferring it in 2023. Midjourney, however, is a very close second at 24%.

Overall, marketers see generative AI as a benefit to their work. For example, in the US, over 50% of marketers said that the biggest benefit of using AI was the ability to create custom images faster. For the UK, the figure is 30%.

An excellent example of marketers using AI image generators can be seen in the video above. In 2022, Heinz used Dall-E to generate images of ketchup. The campaign highlighted the fact that the generator knew that the prompt “ketchup” featured Heinz’s branding – a testament to the prevalence of brands in our lives.

Public relations people also use generative AI, albeit they use image generators to a lesser extent. Only 16% of PR experts worldwide used AI to generate images in the course of their activities.

Generative AI for Personal Use

Use cases of generative AI in various countries
Source: Statista

In terms of people using generative AI on a day-to-day basis, most consumers (34%) use it for fun. According to a 2023 paper by Capgemini, however, only 1% of consumers use image generators several times a week or once a day.

But the same paper outlines the statistics of consumers sharing AI-generated content on social media, and they tell a different story. 71% of images shared on social media were AI-generated. For APAC and Canada, the figure was even higher, at 77%.

In the final section of this guide, we take a closer look at the key trends and challenges accompanying the market of generative AI, specifically the AI image generator market. Whilst nobody has crystal ball capable of predicting the future of generative AI, we can make educated forecased based on what we’ve seen so far.

GANs Advancements

Advancements in Generative Adversarial Networks (GANs) are an important trend driving the AI image generator market. GANs are what allows AI image generators to create realistic and high-res images in the first place.

It follows, therefore, that improvements in GAN architectures are enabling better and more efficient training of AI image generators and thus enhancing the generation of images of all types.

However, these advancements aren’t without their challenges. The most significant one is the potential for bias in AI-generated content. A lot needs to be done to overcome this bias and ensure that Generative AI is working equally well for everyone.

Disruption of Creative Industries

In June 2022, Cosmopolitan magazine unveiled the first-ever AI-generated cover. And that’s just one example of AI image generators disrupting creative industries – both in a positive and negative way.

Marketers and graphic designers are increasingly embracing generative AI, as we saw in this guide, and it’s helping them achieve their creative vision and boost their productivity.

Another possible positive aspect stems from the AI and human concept rather than AI vs. human. AI-generated art can be an inspiration for artists and designers by generating diverse design variations and suggesting creative elements.

This could empower them to explore new ideas and push artistic boundaries. In this paradigm, AI acts as a collaborative partner rather than a competition, as it aids artists in generating unique art that they may not have come up with otherwise.

Lawsuits

The negative side of AI image generators has been explored in several lawsuits. For example, the class action lawsuit filed last year against Midjourney, Stability AI, and other generators claimed that AI companies were using the work of several artists to train their AI systems without the creators’ consent.

Although the suit was initially dismissed in October 2023, it was re-filed next month. Such legal uncertainties surrounding the training of generative AI are likely to shape its development and place and society for many months to come.

Bias & Ethics

As we saw in the previous subsection, ethical considerations such as copyright are still an acute issue when it comes to generative AI.

In addition to ethics, issues like bias and inappropriate image generation will continue to be prevalent for some time.

To mitigate potential risks arising from this and ensure responsible AI image generation practices, we believe that it’s imperative to establish ethical guidelines and frameworks to govern the use of AI in image generation.

And to mitigate the bias in AI image generation, we believe it to be vital to train the AI on diverse data and artworks.

Final Observations

By now, it’s hopefully clear that, without exaggeration, generative AI is going to be huge, and AI image generators will have a very important place in that market, if they don’t already.

Although a lot of the market is controlled by several big companies, other AI image generators are emerging, and companies like Adobe are investing in their own solutions, productizing and capitalizing on the increasing need.

Currently, we see marketers in enterprises as the biggest beneficiaries of AI image generators. However, as the market evolves, more guidelines are issued, and the legal framework becomes more certain, there’s no reason why many other audiences cannot benefit from AI image generators.

Sources

Click to see all sources
  1. AI Has Already Created As Many Images As Photographers Have Taken in 150 Years. Statistics for 2023 (Everypixel)
  2. 19 Visual AI Stats: AI-Generated Images in Impressive Numbers (Latest Data) (AI Secrets)
  3. The global AI image generator market size is projected to grow from $299,295 thousand in 2023 to $917,448 thousand by 2030, at a CAGR of 17.4% (Fortune Business Insights)
  4. Adobe Firefly Expands Globally, Supports Prompts in Over 100 Languages (Adobe)
  5. Adobe Creative Visual Report Forecasts Innovative and Inspirational Trends Will Dominate in 2024 (Adobe)
  6. Adobe Firefly Delivers Creator-Focused, Commercially Viable Generative AI to Millions (Adobe)
  7. Exploring 12 Million of the 2.3 Billion Images Used to Train Stable Diffusion’s Image Generator (Waxy)
  8. 15 billion AI images put human-captured numbers to shame (Interesting Engineering)
  9. DALL·E now availabAdobe Creative Visual Report Forecasts Innovative and Inspirational Trends Will Dominate in 2024le without waitlist (OpenAI)
  10. DALL·E 2 research preview update (OpenAI)
  11. About NightCafe Studio (Nightcafe)
  12. Website Performance – Midjourney (Similarweb)
  13. Website Performance – NightCafe (Similarweb)
  14. Adobe Firefly (Discord)
  15. Leading generative artificial intelligence (AI) powered image tools market globally in 2023 (Statista)
  16. Generative AI – Worldwide (Statista)
  17. Generative AI in marketing – statistics & facts (Statista)
  18. Leading Discord servers among users worldwide as of December 2023, by number of members (Statista)
  19. Opinions regarding artwork created by artificial intelligence (AI) in South Korea as of April 2023 (Statista)
  20. Opinions on whether images and videos created by artificial intelligence (AI) should be considered art in the United States as of April 2023, by generation (Statista)
  21. Marketing purposes for which professionals are using generative artificial intelligence (AI) in the United States as of March 2023 (Statista)
  22. Leading ways public relations (PR) professionals used generative artificial intelligence (AI) in their workflow as of December 2023 (Statista)
  23. Benefits of using artificial intelligence (AI) in marketing according to brand marketers in the United Kingdom (UK) as of March 2023 (Statista)
  24. Benefits of using artificial intelligence (AI) in marketing according to brand marketers in the United States as of March 2023 (Statista)
  25. Leading use cases of generative artificial intelligence (AI) in various countries worldwide in 2023 (Statista)
  26. Half of Americans think AI art will be used to spread fake news (YouGov)
  27. What AI art means for society, according to Yale experts (Yale Daily News)
  28. The World’s Smartest Artificial Intelligence Just Made Its First Magazine Cover (Cosmopolitan)
  29. AI-Generated Image Wins Sony Photography Award (Medium)
  30. More than a quarter of UK adults have used generative AI, survey suggests (The Guardian)
  31. WHY CONSUMERS LOVE GENERATIVE AI (Capgemini)
  32. AI Image Generator (Just Think AI)
  33. Stable Diffusion Litigation Lawsuit (Stable Diffusion)
  34. Judge dismisses most of artists’ copyright lawsuit against AI image generators (The Art Newspaper)
  35. Leaked: the names of more than 16,000 non-consenting artists allegedly used to train Midjourney’s AI (The Art Newspaper)

The post AI Image Generator Market Statistics – What Will 2024 Bring? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/ai-image-generator-market-statistics/feed/ 0
20+ Interesting Breakup Statistics 2024 (Must Know Facts) https://techreport.com/statistics/breakup-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/breakup-statistics/#respond Thu, 18 Jan 2024 17:26:54 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3534164 Major Breakup Statistics

Relationships are hard, as well as separations. Sometimes, there may not be a major reason for couples to grow apart. But initiating breakups when the other party isn’t expecting it...

The post 20+ Interesting Breakup Statistics 2024 (Must Know Facts) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Major Breakup Statistics

Relationships are hard, as well as separations. Sometimes, there may not be a major reason for couples to grow apart. But initiating breakups when the other party isn’t expecting it can result in bad feelings like sadness, rejection, depression, mental trauma, etc. Most of the separations happen within the first year of a coming together. To be specific, data shows that approximately 70% of couples break up within the very first year of dating. And a majority of people go through a breakup after a long-term relationship.

Infidelity, personalities, human changes, lack of communication, trust and affection, and toxicity are common reasons for breakups. Unfortunately, such separations can hurt the victims. However, there are diverse resources to aid in some situations. The victim can try speaking to a therapist, reading self-help books, etc. The breakup statistics below provide more insight into some common breakups happening worldwide.

Major Breakup Statistics

Major Breakup Statistics

  1. On average, 70% of breakups occur mostly in the first year of a relationship.
  2. 60% of couples make up after a breakup.
  3. Men heal faster than women after breakups.
  4. Women initiate the majority of divorces in the US at 70%.
  5. Most breakups happen around the Spring and Summer seasons.
  6. Around 57% of people break up in person.
  7. 37% of people believe text breakups are moderately acceptable.
  8. Infidelity is the cause of 60% of couple breakups.
  9. 71% feel 3 months is enough time to heal from breakups.
  10. 71% of breakup victims focus on thinking about their ex too frequently.

General Breakup Statistics

General Breakup Statistics

1. The Average American Experiences 3 Serious Relationship Breakups.

The circumstances of each couple are different, and the emotional impact this change can have on the partners may be significant. Relationships end for various reasons and are now a natural part of life. Statistics show that an average adult in the US has been through three major breakups. According to facts, the healing process for these Americans takes around 18 months.

2. The Average Breakup Rate for the First Year of a Relationship is 70%.

Research data shows that 70% of couples go apart, especially in their first year together. This could be because most are acquainting themselves in the first relationship year. It’s not uncommon for a couple to realize they don’t match up during the early stage. In addition, they may not have found a way around conflict resolution and accepting human differences.

3. 22% of Married People Experience a Breakup in Their First Five Years.

Three major factors powering the early end of marriages are death, separation, and divorce. However, divorce is not common during the first year of marriage. According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report, 22% of marriages end within the first five years. Divorce contributed largely to most marriage breakups within five years, which sometimes begin with a separation and end in a divorce. This survey was conducted among women aged between 15 and 44 around 2011-2015. The data also revealed that the marriages of 53% of these women ended after 20 years around the same time.  

4. According to 2021 Breakup Statistics, 60% of Couples Return Together After a Breakup.

Factually, the reason behind a breakup has a major role in determining if couples will reconcile. The couple’s willingness is another factor that could decide if they would make up after a breakup. Statistics reveal that after relationship breakups, a massive 60% of couples reunite. Conversely, it is hard to come by any specific reason behind the large percentage.

Breakup Demographics Statistics

Breakup Demographics Statistics

5. Women Take Longer to Get Over Breakups Than Men.

It is speculated that men heal faster than women in the long run; women do even better in future relationships than men. Women spend a lot of time feeling deep distress and taking care of themselves after a breakup before moving on. Most women experience emotional hurt right after a breakup, unlike men who hold back theirs until later. Although pains from a breakup are handled differently among individuals, women overcome them gradually, unlike their male counterparts.

6. Men Are More Likely to Hold onto Resentment and Anger than Women After a Breakup.

Both men and women are hurt after a disruption in the relationship. There’s no statistical proof that women hurt more than men after a breakup, as people experience pains differently. Most men refuse to express their emotions immediately until later. It is believed after a breakup; most men say negative emotions like anger due to resentment and possibly complicated feelings. Men have a less likelihood of getting over anger and resentment following a breakup but can move on to new relationships quicker than women. On the other hand, some women tend to act like men after a breakup.

7. 60% of Divorces in America Involve Couples Aged 25 to 39 Years.

According to research data, the average age for first divorce for most couples is 30 years. Conversely, on average, a whopping 60% of all divorces in the US comprise couples between 25 and 39 years. This demographic has the highest record of divorce cases, more than other age groups. Today’s world is so tense that any conflict between a husband and wife can take an emotional toll.

8. In the United States, 70% of All Divorces are Initiated by Women.

There’s a gender stereotype that women are the driving force behind marriage. However, the rate of divorce initiated by women proves this abortive. In most divorce cases previously, women were the ones who filed for 66% of divorce cases, increasing to 75% after some years. A report from the American Sociological Association reveals that women make up 70% of divorces, which is higher among women with a college education. The study also shows that women may likely feel restrained in marriage with tendencies to shoulder more emotional responsibility. Lastly, another reason women are initiators of divorce is that women are less tolerant of bad behavior.

Breakup Timing Statistics

Breakup Timing Statistics

9. Valentine’s Day is the Most Common Time for a Breakup.

Generally, for some, Valentine’s season is a time of roses, chocolate, dates, romantic moments, etc. However, the eve of Valentine’s Day and the day after it have the highest records of breakups than any other time of the year. Relationships are compared to others in this digital age and social media era. According to 2020 data, the Tuesday before Valentine’s Day is nicknamed “Red Tuesday,” a day for breakups.

10. Breakups Generally Tend to Take Place During the Holiday Period.

Apart from Valentine’s Day, holiday seasons, in general, are common times when breakups occur. Summer and spring are major seasons when breakups take place. Additionally, the Christmas season, especially two weeks before, is common when individuals break up with their spouses in relationships.

11. Monday is the Most Common Day of the Week for Breakups.

Most people feel differently about Monday, probably due to the stress or tension it brings. Considering this fact, it is no longer news that Monday has the highest record of breakups. Other statistical data shows that the highest number of divorce reports are made on Divorce Day, usually the first Monday of the New Year.

Different Breakup Techniques

Different Breakup Techniques

12. Breaking Up in Person is the Preferred Choice of 57% of People.

The thought of ending a relationship and how to go about it can be tasking. Most people break by texts, phone calls, ghosting, and in person, which could be a dramatic result of a mess. A report from YouGov suggests that 57% of people consider breaking up in person. Most people think this method to be the most acceptable and polite, even though other methods are also effective. Additional statistical data from Pew Research in 2015 shows that 83% of participants find this method moderately acceptable and considerable.

13. According to 65% of People, the Most and Moderately Acceptable Way to Break Up is by Phone.

For 65% of survey participants, a phone call is the most socially acceptable way to break up. A report from the Pew Research survey confirms this statement to be true. Even though a large majority feel this breakup method is largely acceptable, a smaller percentage feel it is least adequate. About 31% feel breaking up on the Phone is the least acceptable means.

14. 37% of Survey Respondents Revealed That Breaking up Through a Text Message is the Most Undesirable Method.

In a survey, when participants were asked what method of breaking up is acceptable, here’s how they responded. 59% of participants admitted that sending a text message to break up with someone is the least acceptable means of breakup. Additionally, about 12% of respondents consider breaking up by text the most satisfactory method, and 25% feel it is moderately proper.

Rationale Behind Breakup

Rationale Behind Breakup

15. Lack of Commitment is the Cause of an Alarming 75% of Breakups Among Couples.

Divorce, broken marriages, or breakups may result from several factors, such as lack of trust, cheating, jealousy, etc. Marriage is undoubtedly not always easy, and according to statistics, more than half of all marriages end in divorce. Dedication among spouses is required for marriages and relationships to work. It is no longer shocking that a lack of commitment could cause serious marriage issues, resulting in breakups. Statistics show that a leading cause for 75% of marriage breakups is lack of commitment. The rate of breakups as a result of not being dedicated in marriage is higher compared to infidelity.

16. In a Survey, 60% of Couples Said That Infidelity is Why They Broke Up.

Partners not being faithful to each other can cause serious crises in their marriages. Aside from lack of commitment, another relationship and marriage destroyer is infidelity. Couples expect a level of loyalty and trust from their partners. When the trust is broken, it will most likely result in a breakup or divorce. Forgiveness among couples may offer second-chance but will adversely affect the relationship. Conversely, this is not the same in all cases, as 60% of couples divorce due to extra-marital affairs.

17. 58% of Couples Admit That Too Much Arguing and Conflict Led to Their Break Up.

Couples break up for several reasons; arguments and conflicts are among the top reasons for divorce and breakups. A statistical report shows that 58% of couples report arguing and excessive strife, resulting in their breakup. An argument can be considered a healthy form of conflict if it doesn’t engage hostility and fights. However, too many intolerable nuisances in marriages can cause couples to break up.

Consequences of Breakup

Consequences of Breakup

18. 58% of American Adults Believe That Breakups are Unpleasant and Dramatic.

Most people get emotionally committed to their partners, which can be distressing if they have no hint that the relationship won’t work. What could be worse than being served breakfast after all the fantastic and romantic moments shared with your partner? In a poll carried out among US adults in 2018 by YouGov, it was discovered that romantic relationships tend to be messy or dramatic at 58%. Aside from breakups being affected, they are sometimes traumatic and not as pleasant as they appear in movies.

19. Three Months is Enough to Heal After a Breakup, 71% of Survey Respondents Admit.

Breaking up a relationship shouldn’t be a crime or always have a negative experience. Take a space to heal, take some time to explore new things, and move on. People go through rough patches in their relationships, and a breakup is the next thing to consider. People heal differently when faced with breakups; for some, it takes 1 month and some years. However, a study from 2007 shows that 71% of people faced with a breakup feel better after three months. Other statistical data from 2009 shows that it takes around 18 months on average to heal from breakups and divorce. Furthermore, statistics from a 2017 survey show that many people recover from breakups after six months.

20. Even After Breaking Up With Their Partners, 59% of People Maintain Communication on Facebook.

For most partners that may have divorced or separated, Facebook is considered a means of keeping in touch in cases of co-parenting. Meanwhile, some who do not have kids together still use this platform to stay in touch. Statistics show that around 59% of individuals remain friends with their exes on Facebook after a breakup. In addition, about 42% of married folks check the profiles of their exes on Facebook and other social media platforms.

21. A Significant 71% of Persons Who Experience Breakups Think About Their Exes Frequently.

Letting go of memories of someone we’ve once been in a relationship with isn’t that easy. This is why 71% of people faced with breakups still think about their exes too much. Singles who have experienced breakups admit that thoughts of their ex-lovers wouldn’t let them believe straight and forge ahead with finding love again. The negative impact of thinking about exes can interfere with their present marriages. Surprisingly, about 36% admit that they find themselves attached to their exes, which isn’t convenient for their marriages.

Conclusion

Breakups are unarguably very difficult and a part of life that can affect one’s mental, emotional, and even physical health. Trust me, when the pain is over, you become wiser than Solomon and stronger than Samson. Are there ways to get out of this emotional trauma quickly and move on? Of course, yes. Getting involved in therapeutic sessions and being enlightened with self-help books and articles are a few ways to escape the pains caused by breakups.

Seeking help or joining support groups available are good ways to recover from a breakup, as these can make a huge difference. Should you know someone or find yourself in a breakup situation, this article will give comprehensive statistics on breakups and how to go about them.

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does it take to get over a breakup?

What can one do to get over a breakup?

Are there chances of reuniting after a breakup?

Sources

The post 20+ Interesting Breakup Statistics 2024 (Must Know Facts) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/breakup-statistics/feed/ 0
35 Amazing Cisco Systems Statistics [Essential Facts] 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/cisco-systems-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/cisco-systems-statistics/#respond Wed, 17 Jan 2024 17:42:06 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3534110 Key Cisco Statistics

Cisco probably didn’t set out to become a household tech name – it started small, just helping organizations talk to each other. But then their approach clicked. Offering simplified communication...

The post 35 Amazing Cisco Systems Statistics [Essential Facts] 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Cisco Statistics

Cisco probably didn’t set out to become a household tech name – it started small, just helping organizations talk to each other. But then their approach clicked. Offering simplified communication hardware and software that “just worked” at scale, Cisco organically grew as industries realized the power of connecting systems. Fast forward to today, Cisco’s networked solutions power our connected world.

But the hungry upstarts they once were now face fresh disruption. Newbies with flexibility and the latest buzzwords nip at market share. However, as companies examine what underpins their foundations, Cisco solutions continue to excel in security, speed, and reliability.

Last year, the company brought over $50 billion in revenue for the stalwarts. Cisco may not dazzle with glitz, but their systems hum along, ensuring emails are sent, sites load, and transactions happen – the essential backdrop to innovation. Despite the flashy newcomers, Cisco’s capabilities still deliver for enterprises seeking a robust infrastructure. Learning about what Cisco offers and the way it has grown from the cradle is a great way to get on board. These Cisco statistics will help do exactly that. Let’s plunge in.

Key Cisco Statistics

Key Cisco Statistics

  • Cisco Systems pushed out its first product to the market in 1985.
  • The first product had a network interface card built for big firms with digital equipment. 
  • It went all head over with sales within five years after its first product launch. Within these years, the company was able to gather a market cap of $224 million.
  • The company grasped 74th place on the Fortune list of the 500 topmost businesses. 
  • During the start of the 2000s, Cisco rose in strength to be known as the most prized company
  • Within just 12 months from the year 2020 to the end of 2021, the revenue of the Cisco system shot up by 1%.
  • The stock price rose to its peak of $82 by the close of 2000. 
  • The value of shares rose after 2 years to end at about $45 for each Cisco share in the market. 

Cisco Market Share

Cisco Market Share

1. Cisco Systems Became the Most Sought-After Company At the Close of 2000.

The year ended on a fine note for Cisco Systems as it emerged as the most sought-after company globally. It could boost its finances by having a total sum of $500 million in coffers for the entire period.

2. The IT Session was Not At Any Point Left Out of Its Control.

Cisco has wielded a strong presence in the hardware network technology market.

3. Cisco Infrastructure Segment Held 41% of the Sector Market Share At the Close of 2022.

The infrastructure network enterprise market in 2022 was controlled to a large extent by Cisco Systems. The company had a chunk of 41% stakes in the market. Huawei was next in line with a slice of 10% of the world market share

4. Infrastructure Platforms Have Been Going Downhill For the Past 6 Years in a Row.

There has been a bad turnout in the sector in recent times. For 6 years now, the infrastructure sector has fallen by -89%.

5. Cisco Systems Controls Over 50% of the Infrastructure Enterprise Network.

The presence of Cisco Systems is seen as a great deal, with a 55.7% share in the infrastructure enterprise network market.

6. A Whole 49.9% Market Share of Ethernet Switches Was Under the Control of the Cisco System.

Cisco has been able to keep up with the competition in the Ethernet switch market for many years. It took 49.9% market share at the close of the third quarter 2020. Huawei was placed second in the ranking of companies at that period. Hyperscale data centers are one of the most likely areas where growth occurs quickly. Cloud investors like to invest in new technology like Ethernet switches. This is because it is a great part of IT infrastructure, which receives, processes, and sends data from one device to another. 

Cisco System Purchase

Cisco System Purchase

7. The Company has Bought Over 200 Companies Over the Years.

With an average of 6 acquired firms in one year, Cisco Systems has wielded control over the market. Buying out other companies has reduced in no small way the level of rivalry and boosted its customer base.

8. Taking Over Businesses At Its Bleak Comes the Top Place For Cisco Systems.

50% of all the actions taken by Cisco center on taking over businesses. This has helped increase its customers and put Cisco on the global watch.

9. Cisco has Spent Over $70 Billion on Getting New Businesses Over the Years.

These purchases are varied and continue to take a large part of the Cisco ecosystem.

10. Many Companies Taken Over By Cisco Systems Were into LAN switching and Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP).

This shows that Cisco Systems is drawn to areas that will mostly yield good profits after a while.

11. Cernet Corporation is Still the Highest Purchase the Cisco System Made.

At the time, the Cisco team purchased Cernet Corp. for as large as $7 billion. Such a huge amount of money shows how much Cisco values companies with good prospects.

Cisco Employee Statistics

Cisco Employee Statistics

12. Cisco is Home to Over 79,000 Employees.

It has almost 80,000 workers and a total of 200 offices spread across several countries of the world. Cisco has the interest of all customers at heart, so it searches for the best hands to get the job done.

13. Forbes Ranked Cisco Systems as Number 2 On the List of Best Companies to Work For.

This ranking came two years in 2020 and again in 2021. Workers stating their pleasure with the work ethics can only be the reason for this feat of success.

14. Cisco Laid Off About 6% of Its Staff By the Close of 2013.

Up to 6% of Cisco employees were sent home when 2013 came to a close. This did not surprise many as several other large businesses cut down on staff to save costs.

15. Over 15,000 Employees Work in the San Jose Headquarters Office.

This large workforce shows the area’s high demand for Cisco Systems services.

16. The Second Largest Distribution of the Cisco Workforce is in North Carolina.

The North Carolina office has 7,000 full-time employees. Also, this implies that the demand for Cisco Systems service is quite massive in North Carolina.

17. Cisco Offered Its Employees Remote Working Options in 2021.

The COVID-era made many top companies develop better ways to manage their staff and avoid losses. So, Cisco provided remote work options for its employees in 2021, creating a flexible work environment. 

Cisco Systems Products

Cisco Systems Products 

18. Cisco Has Various Focal Points in the Industry, Such As Communication, Security, and Collaboration (VoIP).

These areas are already quite lucrative for the organization. Other areas of interest and investment include data centers, visualization, and infrastructure (routing and switching).

19. Cisco’s VoIP Product Webex Has Skyrocketed in Value and Is Worth More Than $1 Billion.

These statistics show that the Cisco brand continues to rise in value since its products have striking valuations.

20. Cisco Systems Bought Over Scientific Atlantica and Linksys.

These companies offer phone system products for home and office use. Since phone systems are vital, they will likely add more value to the Cisco network.

21. Remarkably, Cisco Operates Network Emergency Response Vehicles (NERVs).

These vehicles are vital in tackling natural disasters and emergencies in different regions. So, Cisco Systems finds relevance in rapid response to emergencies, potentially saving lives and properties.

22. Home Users Enjoy Cisco Cable Modems for Broadband Technologies.

These cable modems are very much known on the global map. They enable home and office users to link their devices easily to the internet. This is important with the rise and growing relevance of smart devices.

23. Agile Networks and Secure Tops the Largest Revenue Base of Cisco Systems.

The company made a whopping sum of 23.8 billion 2022 from its Agile and Secure networks. 

Cisco Revenue Statistics

Revenue Stats

24. Cisco Systems was Said to Have Raised $49.8 Billion At the End of 2021.

Although this might be below their target, it still implies that users rely on Cisco for various services.

25. Cisco Systems Earned Its Biggest Revenue in 2019, with $61.9 Billion.

This massive figure in a year confirms the importance of Cisco to its customers in 2019. Its revenue in 2019 beat the total net worth of some businesses, which is a notable feat.

26. 49.3% of Cisco’s Revenue is From Its Switching Products.

Revenue that comes from routing services made up 27.7% of Cisco’s total revenue. The multiple services it offers have helped to boost utility.

27. Cisco System Has Recorded a Slight Revenue Growth of 0.3% in the Past Five Years.

This means that, for some reason, Cisco is struggling to attract more users and recording minimal growth in its ecosystem.

28. In the Last Ten Years, It has Recorded a Slight Increase From 61% to 64% in Its Gross and Net Profit Margins.

This is quite surprising with the global status of the Cisco Systems business.

29. Market Cap Stood At $196.96 Billion for Cisco Systems in December 2023.

Market capitalization was quite good at $196.96 billion on the first day of December 2023. The enterprise value that same day was at $181.08 billion.

More Facts on Cisco Systems

More Facts

30. The Name Cisco was Coined Out of San Francisco.

The popular American city of San Francisco inspired the naming of this tech giant called Cisco.

31. The Cisco Systems Logo is a Large San Francisco Golden Gate Bridge Graphic Symbol.

This bridge is a notable landmark in the city of San Francisco. It connects San Francisco’s Bay with the Pacific Ocean and is the spur behind the Cisco logo design. 

32. Cisco Bought Out Pure Digital Technologies in 2019.

Remarkably, Pure Digital Technologies is the maker of the Flip Video camera. However, this technology lost its place in the market when smartphones emerged.

33. Leonard Bosack and Sandy Lerner Are the Couple that Founded Cisco.

This married couple founded Cisco before they got divorced. The company is now publicly traded and has grown despite its challenges.

34. Sandy Lerner was Fired After Cisco Went Public in 1990. 

Bosack resigned from the company’s affairs when Lerner lost her job. They chose to sell their shares to cut all ties with the Cisco system.

35. Attending the Cisco Network Academy Does Not Cost a Dime.

This free educational program focuses on topics that are related to technology. Its major goal is to inform students about the importance of the tech industry and what Cisco offers.

Conclusion 

Cisco systems cover large areas of interest, from phone enterprise systems to cable modems and network technologies. It has wielded power in the industry by buying low-performing firms. This move has taken Cisco to greater heights and placed it in market control. 

The tech market is well embedded with the activities of Cisco Systems. The company is all set to embrace new products like the internet in the future, which has raised a neat sum for Cisco. Cutting across all its facets of business, Cisco strives to maintain the top spot in every area in which it places interest. Like several others, the agile network is one of many Cisco projects that keep it in the industry’s top spot.

FAQs 

Which product brings in the highest revenue to Cisco Systems?

What are some of the services that Cisco offers?

Who are Cisco’s biggest rivals?

Sources 

The post 35 Amazing Cisco Systems Statistics [Essential Facts] 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/cisco-systems-statistics/feed/ 0
Fascinating Salesforce Statistics, Facts and Trends (2024) https://techreport.com/statistics/salesforce-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/salesforce-statistics/#respond Tue, 16 Jan 2024 17:00:06 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3533972 Major Salesforce Statistics

Salesforce unequivocally dominates the cloud CRM sphere it trailblazed, now ballooning into a customer experience titan straddling sales, service, marketing, and commerce. But can the juggernaut balance breadth and depth...

The post Fascinating Salesforce Statistics, Facts and Trends (2024) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Major Salesforce Statistics

Salesforce unequivocally dominates the cloud CRM sphere it trailblazed, now ballooning into a customer experience titan straddling sales, service, marketing, and commerce. But can the juggernaut balance breadth and depth across its swelling suite? Reviewing 2024 data, Salesforce topped $30 billion in revenue, with projections of doubling by 2026.

Powered by Work.com and Tableau analytics, along with Mulesoft integration, they boast capabilities to customize a myriad of customer needs. Yet some industry observers question if such expansive scope breeds complications that could slow adaptation. With competitors exploiting potential feature overload, Salesforce aims to enhance not just the product line but also the user experience. The numbers reveal their diverse customer base, but seamless interoperation may determine sustained leadership.

These salesforce statistics provide a more detailed understanding of its trends, the increase in its workforce, market share, job and employee data, revenue, and usage.

Major Salesforce Statistics

Major Salesforce Statistics

  1. Salesforce has over 150,000 customers.
  2. Salesforce grew at a CAGR of 29.04% in the last decade.
  3. Salesforce made up 19.6% of the global market in 2017.
  4. 79,390 employees work at Salesforce.
  5. An entry-level salary for a Salesforce employee is $78,000.
  6. Companies that switch to Salesforce will see a 25% increase in marketing ROI.
  7. Salesforce boosts companies’ revenue growth by 25%.
  8. Over 7% of Salesforce employees are from the LGBTQ+ community.

General Facts and Statistics on Salesforce

General Facts and Statistics on Salesforce

1. Globally, More Than 150,000 Companies Use Salesforce.

Over 150,000 customers depend on Salesforce CRM tools that allow them to achieve service and results. Additionally, Salesforce CRM offers a platform for users to access tools relevant to different businesses and sales. Notably, over 23% of these firms globally use it.

2. Salesforce Earnings Grew to $21.25B in the 2021 Financial Year.

The company made $21.25B in 2021. This shows that it increased by 24.27% over what it got the previous year. From the numbers, the software firm has been growing since it went public in 2004.

3. The CAGR for Salesforce in the Last Decade Has Been 29.04%.

Statistics show that company earnings in the past 20 years have recorded a compound annual growth of 51.22%. However, over the past 10 years, it grew by 29.04%. The data also reveal that the business earned around $31.35 billion as of January 2023 by 18.35%. In 2019, it made about $13.28 billion, $17.1 billion in 2020, and $21.25 Billion the next year. Additional data show that Salesforce became the top CRM provider in the Worldwide Semiannual Software Tracker in 2017. However, this recognition came from the International Data Corporation (IDC), confirming it held it 10 times.

4. One of the best CRM software to use is Salesforce

Salesforce is undoubtedly one of the leading Customer Relationship Management platforms in existence. With its outstanding and instant CRM solutions, Salesforce is trusted by analysts and many organizations for delivering personalized customer-employee relationships across the globe. The Salesforce platform is user-friendly and can secure customer data, interact with customers, and generate leads and sales opportunities. Salesforce is one of the best CRM software for businesses to oversee market campaigns accessed by small and large companies. It is considered one of the best CRM software to use.

Salesforce Market Share Statistics 2024

Market Share Stat

5. Salesforce Occupies 19.6% of Customer Relationship Management Software Market.

Notably, Salesforce dominates 23.8% share of the Customer Relationship Management Software Market. According to an IDC Semiannual Software Tracker report, Salesforce’s global market share as of 2017 was 19.6%. As of 2021, Salesforce had a market share of 23.9%, showing a remarkable margin over other competitors like SAP, Oracle, Microsoft, and Adobe. Salesforce is one major factor driving the CRM market, with approximately one-fifth of the global market share.

6. Salesforce is Leading Among 4 Other Major Companies in the Competition.

Statistics show that Salesforce maintains a top spot in the CRM software market. In the CRM software market and among other CRM software providers like Adobe, Oracle, SAP, and Microsoft, Salesforce remains in 1st position. The market share growth of Salesforce hit 19.6% in 2017, 16.8% in 2018, 18.44% in 2019 and 19.8% in 2020. Additionally, Salesforce’s market share 2022 reached 23% and grew to 23.8% in 2023.

7. Salesforce’s Number of Customers is Estimated to be 150,000 Customers.

Salesforce has shown great potential and dedicated itself to providing excellent CRM software services over the years. Despite the economic situation, Salesforce adapts quickly to meet the needs of its customers by demonstrating an increase of 40% in license revenue. Statistics show over 150,000 companies globally depend on Salesforce for CRM services with ecosystem providers and partners. The US makes up 62% of Salesforce customers, with the UK following next with 16.5%, then France at 4.6%, and the Netherlands at 3.2%.

8. Salesforce Website Users Reach 181,433.

Salesforce undoubtedly represents the leading CRM platform for cloud applications, as its website users hit 181,433. It now sits pretty as the world’s largest CRM platform.

9. Salesforce Number of Employees Reaches 79,390 in 2023.

Salesforce continues to beat its competitors with a growth staff capacity of 49,000 in 2020, indicating a 40% growth from the past year. 2021 brought much goodness for the company, as the number of its workers rose to 56,606, 15.51% higher than the previous figure.

10. 62% of Salesforce Employees Work in the US.

Available data shows that in 2023, 62% of Salesforce workers perform their duties in the U.S. The remaining 38% do so in France, the United Kingdom, and others. Also, 2022 data shows that a vast majority of the company’s labor force, amounting to 58%, were living in the US, and other international countries made up the other part.

11. Statistics Show that Salesforce’s Entry-level Salary Will be $78,000 in 2023.

The annual salary for entry-level employees is $78,000. For starters, salary ranges from $78,000 to $167,000 in the United States. Besides that, the average hourly wage for a US Salesforce starter is $55.17, although this varies with departments and locations.

12. Data Reveals that Salesforce Employees Receive an Average Annual Salary of $114,753.

Statistics show that Salesforce employees in San Francisco and Japan earn the highest. According to the data, the average annual estimate for a Salesforce employee in the US is $114,753. Additionally, the salary for the 10th percentile falls around $78,000. Meanwhile, the 90th percentile holds at $167,000. For instance, the average salary of a Salesforce worker in the development department is around $130,710.

13. Partner is the Highest-paid Job at Salesforce, With a $153,176 Salary.

Statistics show that the job role that pays the most is the role of a Partner at Salesforce, with earnings of around $153,176. The business development Salesforce staff pays the highest by department category at $130,710. The major administrators at Salesforce earn above $118,000. These figures account for the top 10 highest-paid Salesforce administrative roles.

Benefits of Salesforce Statistics in 2024

Benefits of Salesforce

14. Salesforce Helps in the Growth of Companies’ Revenue by 25%.

Some statistics predict a 25% increase in the revenue of businesses through driving improved conversion rates and per sales rep through Salesforce. By so doing, businesses experience reduced sales and marketing spending. Companies that switch to Salesforce are most likely to increase their experience by a 25% growth in their revenue. Salesforce CRM offers services to satisfy customer needs, build customer relationships, and result in productive businesses.

15. Companies That Switch to Salesforce Expect an Increase in Marketing ROI by 25%.

Salesforce ROI statistics show companies that switch to Salesforce experience an average increase of 25% in revenue. This is a selling point for Salesforce as this method attracts companies to switch to Salesforce CRM.

16. Customer Satisfaction Experienced a Boost in Customer Satisfaction by 35%.

Users of Salesforce report a significant 35% increment in the level of customer satisfaction. The Salesforce platform allows companies to discover customers’ needs and proffer business solutions through tools and features that comprehend customer requirements. Salesforce remarkably boosts customer satisfaction via its tools and features more than other Customer Relationship Management platforms. Customer satisfaction is important in every business.

17. Salesforce Customers Using Salesforce as Customer Service Agents Have an Increased Productivity Expectancy of 34%.

The application of Salesforce products by customer service agents enhances productivity. Statistics show that about 35% of customer service employees become more productive when using Salesforce products for customer service. Customer satisfaction and service help retain customers, which is vital in every business. Nuclear Research Study reveals that 14.6% accounts for mobile capabilities and 8% come from social.

18. Salesforce Encounters 3.7 Billion Sent Messages, 6.6 Billion Case Interactions, and 2.4 Billion Slack Actions.

Some years back, Salesforce recorded around 6.6 billion services and case interactions; 3.7 billion messages are sent daily. In addition, actions taken in Slack are estimated to be 2.4 billion daily on Salesforce. Statistics show that the daily interaction in the Salesforce platform has increased. Salesforce records over 4.13 billion messages sent, 6.06 billion service and case interactions, and 2.65 billion Slack actions daily.

19. Salesforce Operates in Over 89 Cities Across the Globe.

As of 2021, Salesforce has spread its operation to 84 cities and had about 95 offices in the same year. Presently, Salesforce has over 110 offices cited in about 89 cities in various locations around the globe.

20. Salesforce has Over 110 Offices Across the Globe.

Wikipedia reveals Salesforce has around 110 offices across the globe, including Tokyo, Hong Kong, Israel, Paris, and London. With about 9 towers in different cities, Salesforce Tower is headquartered in San Francisco, California in the US. There are 6 Salesforce towers located in Atlanta, New York, London, New York, Tokyo, and Indianapolis. Aside from these towers, about 3 towers are being developed in Sydney, Chicago, and Dublin.

21. Over 7% of Salesforce Employees in the US Belong to the LGBTQ+ Community.

The Salesforce LGBTQ+ employees doubled in number compared to the record in 2012, reaching 7%. The LGBTQ+ community faces challenges in being accepted and supported by society even though the reported cases have increased. Some data shows that Salesforce administrators identifying as LGBTQ+ community accounts for 8% of the workforce.

Salesforce Revenue Statistics for 2023

Salesforce Revenue Statistics

22. Revenue for the Subscription and Support Segment in the Last 10 Years.

In the last decade, Salesforce has experienced significant growth in subscriptions, support, and professional and other revenue segments.

Year Revenue
2014 $3.82 billion
2015 $5.01 billion
2016 $6.2 billion
2017 $9.71 billion
2018 $9.71 billion
2019 $12.41 billion
2020 $16.04 billion
2021 $19.98 billion
2022 $25.66 billion
2023 $29.02 billion

23. Revenue for Professional Services and Other Revenue Segment in the Last 10 Years.

Subscription and Support revenue grew from $25.66 billion in 2022 to $29.02 billion in 2023, indicating the ability to provide cloud-based software services. Professional services revenue grew from $1.83 billion to $2.33 billion between 2022 and 2023 to present customized software offerings.

Year Revenue
2014 $246.46 million
2015 $359.82 million
2016 $461.62 million
2017 $635.78 million
2018 $769.47 million
2019 $869 million
2020 $1.05 billion
2021 $1.28 billion
2022 $1.83 billion
2023 $2.33 billion

24. Statistics Show that Salesforce Displayed Impressive, Steady Upward Growth Over the Years.

Salesforce’s leading as the biggest CRM provider in the market could be attributed to the company’s continuous growth in annual revenue. Below is the annual growth in Salesforce revenue for the past 10 years:

Year Annual revenue
2014 $4.07 billion 
2015 $5.37 billion 
2016 $6.67 billion 
2017 $8.44 billion 
2018 $10.54 billion 
2019 $13.28 billion 
2020 $17.1 billion 
2021 $21.25 billion
2022 $26.49 billion
2023 $31.25 billion

25. Salesforce is Split Into 2 Segments: Subscription and Support Revenues and Professional Services and Other Revenues.

The subscription and support revenues segment includes software licenses, cloud services, and other related technical support. The professional services and other revenues segment consists of financial, banking and manufacturing, marketing, customer service, and other cloud-based services. According to Statista, Salesforce realized approximately $29 billion from subscriptions and support revenue. Withal, about $1.84 billion was generated as revenue from professional services and other revenues.

26. Salesforce Revenue by Product and Service Type.

The table below outlines the types of services offered by Salesforce and the revenue generated in the last 5 years:

Product Type/Year Sales Cloud Service Cloud Platform/Tableau/MuleSoft/Others Marketing and Commerce
2019 $4.04 billion $3.62 billion $2.85 billion $1.9 billion
2020 $4.6 billion $4.47 billion $4.47 billion $2.51 billion
2021 $5.19 billion $5.38 billion $6.27 billion $3.13 billion
2022 $5.99 billion $6.47 billion $8.3 billion $3.90 billion
2023 $6.83 billion $7.37 billion $10.31 billion $4.52 billion

According to Statista, the service cloud is Salesforce’s leading revenue-generating service offering in 2023. Sales cloud accounted for most of Salesforce revenue in the previous years, but in 2023, it took third position. Other service offerings also contribute to the overall Salesforce annual revenue.

27. Salesforce Revenue Statistics by Region.

The data below does not represent all regions in which Salesforce operates but indicates a major geographic region of its customers. The US, Europe, and Asia Pacific present Salesforce exposure and success in the CRM market and across other markets. The table below represents Salesforce revenue by region in the last decade:

Region/

Year

US Europe Asia Pacific
2014 $2.9 million $401.2 thousand $317 thousand
2015 $3.9 million $985 thousand $520 thousand
2016 $4.9 million $1.2 million $594 thousand
2017 $6.2 million $1.4 million $793 thousand
2018 $7.6 million $1.9 million $1 million
2019 $9.4 million $2.6 million $1.3 million
2020 $12.1 million $3.4 million $1.6 million
2021 $14.7 million $4.5 million $2.0 million
2022 $17.9 million $6.0 million $2.5 million
2023 $21.3 million $7.2 million $3.0 million

The US is the leading contributor to Salesforce revenue, indicating a steady and consistent growth. Europe’s revenue generation is remarkable but not as compared to the US; following closely is Asia Pacific embracing modern CRM solutions.

Conclusion

The CRM market is greatly dominated by Salesforce, which is one of the leading cloud computing service providers. Many nations worldwide recognize and embrace Salesforce with its versatile service offers. These statistics have shown that Salesforce CRM revenue, workforce, and market share consistently grow year-over-year. This growth could be tied to the company’s adaptability and capacity to proffer innovative cloud software solutions. Based on research statistics and displaying a robust growth strategy, Salesforce expects to climax in the growth of customers, revenue, and the industry. The research points above keep you updated with necessary facts about Salesforce and how to use them to improve business.

Frequently Asked Questions

What kind of software is Salesforce?

Is Salesforce the biggest Customer Relationship Management provider?

How many users does Salesforce have?

Sources

The post Fascinating Salesforce Statistics, Facts and Trends (2024) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/salesforce-statistics/feed/ 0
Global Language Learning Market Statistics in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/#respond Tue, 16 Jan 2024 10:52:23 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531205 Person holding phone learning a new language

Language difficulty — how difficult it is to learn and speak a language — is integral to the language learning market statistics as a whole. Foreign language and translation skills...

The post Global Language Learning Market Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Person holding phone learning a new language

Language difficulty — how difficult it is to learn and speak a language — is integral to the language learning market statistics as a whole. Foreign language and translation skills have permeated every industry as the world became more global and businesses expanded their international operations.

While English might be spoken widely around the world, it’s not ubiquitous. And with the increasing prevalence of non-English entertainment and new emerging markets, the need for language learning solutions has never been higher. Fortunately, the market is responding to that need.

In this guide, we highlight the language learning market value and the leading market players.

We also showcase the key indicators of the market by target audiences and region, the technological developments within the industry, and take a look at the potential future language learning market trends. Let’s dive in. 

Key Language Learning Market Statistics

  • The language learning market was valued at $52.7 billion in 2022 and is forecast to grow to reach $337.2 billion by 2032, with a CAGR of 20.8%.
  • As of September 2023, the leading language learning app by revenue is Duolingo, having made almost $26 million in IAP that month.
  • In Q3 of 2023, Duolingo was downloaded 47.6 million times, with 16.5 million downloads taking place in August.
  • Asian languages like Japanese and Korean are more popular with Gen Z, which is the biggest group of language learners in many countries.
  • European languages like Italian and Spanish are more popular among learners aged 40 and above.
  • Duolingo was downloaded almost 50 million times in the APAC region in 2023, with the majority of downloads (21.01 million) taking place in Q3.
Highest paying foreign languages by number of speakers
Source: Newsdle

English is the most spoken language worldwide, with almost 1.5 billion people speaking it either natively or fluently in 2023. So, it’s no surprise that it’s also the most studied language in the world. Fluency in English can give people a leg up when seeking employment and make international communications easier.

Indeed, in Continental Europe, English is the most commonly studied language, with an estimated 96% of students learning English. It’s also the most common language on the popular language learning app Duolingo, topping the ratings in 122 countries.

Other popular languages to learn are French, Spanish, and Mandarin. For native English speakers in the UK, knowing these languages can mean high-paying jobs. In the US, Spanish is the most common language to learn, as it’s taught to 93% of students at school.

Language Learning Market Value

Language learning global market size
Source: Global Market Insights

In 2022, the language learning market was valued at $52.7 billion, according to Global Market Insights. It’s forecast to grow to reach $337.2 billion by 2032, with a CAGR of 20.8%.

English, Spanish, and Mandarin languages are forecast to be the biggest segments throughout the period, with the Spanish segment growing at a CAGR of 22%.

The largest growth is expected to be in the 18-20 years segment of the market, as more young people get interested in other cultures and foreign languages are increasingly in demand by employers.

EFL Market Statistics

English language learning market value 2016-2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/

Since English is the most popular language to learn worldwide, it’s no surprise that the English-as-a-foreign-language (EFL) market is substantial on its own.

In 2022, EFL’s revenue was $5.6 billion after a significant dip during COVID-19. The pandemic had a significant adverse impact on the market due to the social distancing and travel restrictions, leading the revenue of the EFL market to decrease from $8.86 billion in 2019 to  just $3.3 billion in 2020, and then further to $2.75 billion in 2021.

Leading Language-Learning Providers

Leading language apps by revenue, 2023
Source: Statista

Thanks to technological advancements and increased interest in the subject, language-learning apps are getting more and more popular and becoming large players in the market. 

As of September 2023, the leading language learning app by revenue is Duolingo, having made almost $26 million in IAP that month. It was also the most downloaded language learning app worldwide in September 2023 – it was downloaded a whopping 16.3 million times.

We now take a closer look at Duolingo and other popular language learning apps, like Babbel and Mondly.

Duolingo

Top language learning apps by quarterly downloads 2022-2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/

Given its popularity, it’s no surprise Duolingo is the highest-earning language learning app worldwide. In 2022, it made $369.5 million – almost $120 million more than the year before. 74% Duolingo’s revenue comes from subscriptions, and 12% is generated by advertising.

As our infographic shows, Duolingo is also the most downloaded language-learning app, by far. In Q3 of 2023, it was downloaded 47.6 million times, with August being the peak month (16.5 million downloads). The same quarter also accounted for 24.2 million daily active Duolingo users (DAUs).

According to Duolingo’s 2023 report, English, Spanish, and French were the most popular languages in 2023, taking first place in 122, 34, and 22 countries, respectively. These figures were fairly similar in 2022

Babbel

Average revenue per user for Babel app
Source: Statista

The German language learning service Babbel might not be as popular as Duolingo, but its average revenue per user (ARPU) is nearly twice as high, $17, compared to Duolingo’s $6.76, as of 2022. Its total revenue that year was €247 million ($270 million), which is almost $100 million less than Duolingo’s. 

In terms of DAUs and downloads, Babbel’s January 2022 daily active users amounted to 750,000 across both iOS and Android. The app was downloaded 966,980 times in September 2023.

Of course, compared to Duolingo’s 24.6 million DAUs and 16 million downloads (September 2023), these amounts are quite small. Let’s look at some other language-learning providers.

Mondly

Mondly number of downloads for 2022 - 2023
Source: Statista

The popularity of the Romanian language learning provider Mondly is almost on par with Babbel’s. In January 2023, Mondly had 1.28 million downloads, which was its best month to date.

But in September 2023, it was downloaded 767,740 times, compared to Babbel’s 966,327 and Duolingo’s 16.3 million downloads.

In terms of revenue, Mondly lags behind Duolingo and Babbel. In September 2023, its IAP revenue amounted to $713,325, compared to Babbel’s $4.4 million.

Rosetta Stone

Rosetta stone app number of downloads 2022 to 2023
Source: Statista

The Rosetta Stone brand is one of the most well-known language-learning brands around the world. However, its downloads statistics leave a lot to be desired, compared to Duolingo and even Babbel.

Rosetta Stone’s best month in terms of downloads was December 2022, when it was downloaded 334,169 times. Since then, however, the downloads have gone down, and the resource was only downloaded 224,324 times in September 2023.

Language Learning Market by Generation

Duolingo learners by country
Source: Duolingo

In this section, we take a look at the language-learning market statistics and trends across different generations.

Learning a language is beneficial to people of all ages, and today, all generations have accessible ways of doing so. A report by Duolingo suggests that different generations have different learning habits and are interested in learning different languages.

For example, we know that Gen Z is the biggest group of language learners in many countries, and that they’re most interested in Asian languages like Japanese and Korean. These learning patterns may stem from their interest in pop culture phenomena from these regions, including Otaku culture, K-pop, manga, and anime.

On the other hand, European languages like Italian and Spanish are much more popular among learners aged 40 and above. For them, traveling is a big motivator. And Duolingo “streaks” over 365 days are particularly prevalent among older learners, particularly those aged and above – 30% of them have such streaks, compared to only 7% of teenagers.

Language Learning Market Statistics by Region

Now, let’s take a look at some of the regional statistics and trends in the language learning market.

USA

Leading online education services ranked by brand awareness
Source: Statista

When it comes to foreign language education services brand awareness, Rosetta Stone takes the lead in the US with 63% of the population knowing about it. Babbel is second with 48%, and Duolingo is third with 42%.

However, the American usage statistics of language learning services tell a different story. Duolingo takes the lead, with 23% of US language-learning consumers using it. The well-known Rosetta Stone service shares the second spot with Babbel, with only 8% of consumers using each.

Europe

Market share of language learning apps among 20-34 year old Europeans
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/

As you can see from our infographics, Duolingo is a firm leader in many European countries as of 2021 for the 20 to 30-year-olds cohort. And the EMEA region saw 13.61 million downloads in Q3 of 2023, a significant 3.3 million more than the previous quarter. Its IAP revenue in the region that quarter was 24.53 million – 2.3 million more than in Q2.

Unlike the US, where Duolingo is the third-most-known education service, it takes the lead in Europe. For example, 49% of Internet users in the UK know about Duolingo. By comparison, only 41% and 40%, respectively, know about Rosetta Stone and Babbel, the two the most well-known providers in the US.

APAC

Language learning apps by downloads in the APAC region for 2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/

The Asia-Pacific region language learning market statistics tell us that Duolingo shines here, too. In 2023, it was the most popular language-learning app in Vietnam, The Philippines, Japan, and Indonesia. Other popular tools are ELSA, Cake, and EWA. 

In terms of the total amount of downloads, Duolingo was downloaded almost 50 million times in the APAC region in 2023, with the majority of downloads (21.01 million) taking place in Q3. Its APAC IAP revenue that year amounted to $23.95 million.

Travelling for Learning Languages Statistics

Distribution of English language learning revenue in 2022, by country
Source: Statista

In addition to app- and web-based learning, many providers offer classroom-based learning in a country where the learner is surrounded by native speakers. English-speaking countries offer many opportunities like that, with the UK, the US, and Australia making the most revenue from such services. 

Our world is more connected than ever, we’re fostering connections at a speed that was hard to imagine even a couple of decades ago. Communication is pivotal in this world, which is why the market for language learning solutions is growing at an exponential rate, and more and more people are learning foreign languages. 

And like any market, the language learning market is impacted by current trends. Let’s take a closer look at some of them.

Tech Advancements

Integrating technology into education has been a mainstay for many years, but it’s been significantly accelerated during the COVID-19 pandemic. We saw in this guide how popular the language learning apps are across the world, not least because of their democratization of foreign language learning.

Some of them, such as Duolingo, are leveraging AI to offering a learning process that adjusts to the learner’s style and mistakes

These tech and AI advancements can support individual learners by tailoring lessons to address specific needs and allowing them a choice of language learning solutions that work for them. We expect even more immersive and interactive language learning experiences to come in the future as technology advances further.

Gamification

Apps like Duolingo were at the forefront of gamification as a learning tool, and it’s advanced rapidly in recent years. Gamification elements like rewards and badges are used by language learning tools to motivate learners, adding an element of fun to language learning and supporting continuous engagement and progress.

Such features encourage users of all ages to practice regularly and persist in their learning journey. For that reason, the gamification trend is likely to grow – both in and out of the classroom- as educators explore new ways to make language learning a more accessible, dynamic, and interactive.

Globalization

We already mentioned how globalization and removing travel restrictions post-pandemic are helping the language learning market advance. The emphasis on branching out into international markets and consumers’ renowned interest in travel are fueling this growth.

Moreover, we expect that Generation Z, being the most diverse generation to date, and their interest in foreign language media will significantly influence the market, too, as the generation’s purchasing power increases in the next few years.

Language Learning Statistics Takeaways for 2024

We looked at the language learning market statistics and trends, so you now have a good grasp of where the market is going. We dived into the key players of the language learning market and the regional and generational trends and explored the possible future trends of the market.

Overall, we would say that the global language market is still poised to grow, with key trends such as globalization playing a pivotal role in its advancement. We look forward to seeing how technology, and AI in particular, will change the language learning market in the near future.

Sources

Click to expand sources
  1. Language Learning Market Size, by Language, by Learning Mode, by Learning Type, by End User, Forecast 2022-2032 (Global Market Insights)
  2. Language Learning Market by Age Group, Language, End User, and Geography – Global Forecast to 2030 (Meticulous Research)
  3. The most spoken languages worldwide in 2023 (Statista)
  4. Revenue of the global English language learning market from 2013 to 2022 (Statista)
  5. Distribution of English language learning revenue in 2022, by country (Statista)
  6. Number of downloads of selected language learning apps in the Asia-Pacific region in 2023YTD, by market
  7. Number of downloads of leading mobile language learning apps worldwide from September 2022 to September 2023 (Statista)
  8. Leading language learning apps worldwide in September 2023, by revenue (Statista)
  9. Number of daily active Duolingo users worldwide from 3rd quarter 2020 to 3rd quarter 2023 (Statista)
  10. Language learning apps – Statistics & Facts (Statista)
  11. Annual revenue generated by Duolingo Inc. from 2019 to 2022 (Statista)
  12. Market share of leading multilingual language learning apps among users aged between 20 to 34 years in selected European markets in 2021 (Statista)
  13. Average revenue per user (ARPU) of language learning apps worldwide as of 2022 (Statista)
  14. Distribution of revenue generated by Duolingo in 2022, by segment (Statista)
  15. Number of Duolingo app downloads worldwide from 1st quarter 2017 to 3rd quarter 2023, by region (Statista)
  16. Leading online education services ranked by brand awareness in the United States in 2022 (Statista)
  17. Leading online education services ranked by brand awareness in the United Kingdom in 2022 (Statista)
  18. Share of consumers in the United States who ever used selected language learning online programs and mobile apps as of May 2023 (Statista)
  19. Leading language learning apps worldwide in September 2023, by downloads (Statista)
  20. Most popular foreign language learning mobile applications in Vietnam as of June 2021 (Statista)
  21. Duolingo in-app purchase revenue worldwide from 1st quarter 2017 to 3rd quarter 2023, by region (Statista)
  22. Annual revenue generated by Babbel from 2013 to 2022 (Statista)
  23. Number of Babbel daily active users (DAU) via iOS worldwide from January 2019 to January 2022 (Statista)
  24. Number of Babbel daily active users (DAU) via Google Play Store worldwide from January 2019 to January 2022 (Statista)
  25. Highest Paying Foreign Language Jobs (Newsdle)
  26. What Are the Most Studied Languages in the World? (Newsdle)
  27. Duolingo language report reveals changes in top 10 languages studied around the world (Duolingo)
  28. 2023 Duolingo Language Report (Duolingo)
  29. 2022 Duolingo Language Report (Duolingo)
  30. Special report: Which generation is most serious about their streak? (Duolingo)
  31. Dear Duolingo: How does language learning differ between generations? (Duolingo)
  32. On the Cusp of Adulthood and Facing an Uncertain Future: What We Know About Gen Z So Far (Pew Research Center)

The post Global Language Learning Market Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/language-learning-market-statistics/feed/ 0
15+ Must Know Domestic Violence Statistics 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/domestic-violence-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/domestic-violence-statistics/#respond Mon, 15 Jan 2024 01:39:52 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3533847 Notable Domestic Violence Statistics

Domestic violence can permeate the most intimate spaces in devastating ways. As concerning statistics emerge on the prevalence of abuse within relationships, it becomes clear that this issue requires urgently...

The post 15+ Must Know Domestic Violence Statistics 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Notable Domestic Violence Statistics

Domestic violence can permeate the most intimate spaces in devastating ways. As concerning statistics emerge on the prevalence of abuse within relationships, it becomes clear that this issue requires urgently compassionate solutions. Studies suggest domestic violence impacts a diversity of demographics, though women aged 18-24 may face particular risks.

Accounting for 15% of total violent crime nationwide, intimate violence leaves deep scars, both physical and psychological. Its victims can feel trapped in a cycle of control they cannot escape alone. Beyond physical abuse, domestic violence encompasses emotional manipulation and sexual coercion as well.

In this article, relevant statistics and surveys on domestic violence are gathered to not only understand the scale but also inform efforts to empower those who suffer the most. Acknowledging the reality behind the numbers can shape stronger support systems. The first step is recognizing that every statistic represents a human life altered by harm within the home. Only through open eyes and compassionate action can healing emerge from the shadows.

Notable Domestic Violence Statistics

Notable Domestic Violence Statistics

  1. 1 in 5 victims in homicide cases lost their lives to their intimate partner. 
  2. 44.2% of men have experienced domestic violence. However, the domestic violence rate for women is higher at 47.3%.
  3. 19.6% of women and 7.6% of men passed through sexual violence from their intimate partner. 
  4. According to statistics, Intimate Partner Violence (IPV) begins early, before age 25.
  5. Over 20,000 phone calls reporting domestic violence are made by United States residents.
  6. Sadly, 93.1% of pregnant women experienced IPV. 
  7. 60% of children in the United States are eyewitnesses to domestic abuse against a parent. 
  8. 51.5% of multiracial men reported IPV in 2016/2017
  9. 63.8% of multiracial women officially reported IPV in 2016.
  10. LGBTQ community members face IPV at equal or higher rates when compared to heterosexuals.

Important Domestic Violence Statistics for 2024

Important Domestic Violence Statistics for 2023

1. 1 in 5 Victims in Homicide Cases was Killed by Their Intimate Partner.

According to an online violence prevention article, in about 1 to 5 homicide cases, the victim was slain by an intimate partner. These shocking statistics also reveal that their former or present domestic partners killed over 50% of female homicide victims.

2. 47.3% of Women and 44.2% of Men Reported Domestic Violence of Some Sort in Their Lifetime.

A survey in 2016/2017 reveals that in the United States, 47.3% of women reported various forms of domestic violence. This includes physical, sexual, bullying, or stalking by a domestic partner in their lifetime. These shocking figures imply that approximately 1 out of 2 women, or 59 million, have experienced such. On the other hand, men face violence on a scale of 2 in every five men, which is 44.2 or 52,1 million men. This confirms the fact that violence is not gender-specific and is a rising cancer in society.

3. According to Results From an NSVIS Survey, 19.6% of Women and 7.6% of Men Have Experienced Contact Sexual Violence From an Intimate Partner.

Cases such as rape and forced sexual contact are part of the crimes uncovered in this survey. Also, forced penetration is still under the contact sexual violence category and is a real concern.

4. Intimate Partner Violence (IPV) Often Begins Early, Before the Age of 25.

IPV recorded in the adolescent years is tagged Teen Dating Violence (TDV). Unfortunately, many teens in the United States experience TDC each year. Also, roughly 11 million males and 16 million females reported cases of TDV before they clocked 18.

5. Over 20,000 Phone Calls Reporting Domestic Violence are Made Each Day to the United States Authorities.

Domestic violence continues to be a thorn in the flesh for households and individuals. The US authorities field up to 20,000 phone calls on this subject daily. Also, nearly 20 people are harmed physically by their domestic partner each minute. The National Coalition Against Domestic Violence labels it as the sole greatest cause of injury for women.

Domestic Violence Distribution

Domestic Violence Distribution

6. 93.1% of Pregnant Women Undergo Intimate Partner Violence.

Sadly, a case study on domestic violence among 830 pregnant women revealed that 93.1% have experienced IPV. Also, the most common type of IPV was psychological abuse, at a rate of 92.9%. Meanwhile, sexual abuse occurred among 11% of the pregnant women, and physical abuse among 7.7%.

7. 60% of Children in the United States are Eyewitnesses to Domestic Abuse Against a Parent.

A national study reveals that 60% of American children were exposed to various forms of domestic abuse. This abuse usually occurred at home, school, or in their community. Additionally, almost 40% of children in the study were direct victims of domestic abuse with at least two or more violent actions. Another interesting statistic is that nearly 1 in 10 American children have witnessed one family member abuse another.

8. LGBTQ Members are Prone to IPV at Equal or Higher Rates Than Heterosexual People.

The LGBTQ community struggles with IPV as much or even more than heterosexual or straight people. So, IPV shows no gender discrimination and is not selective among humans. Domestic violence remains a major problem in the United States.

9. 63.8% of Multiracial Women Experienced IPV in 2016.

From an ethnic angle, multiracial women record the highest rates of domestic abuse in America. Also, the approximate number of IPV victims between 2016 and 2017 was 375,000. Notably, these figures were recorded before the Covid pandemic. Overall, domestic violence increased during the Covid era.

10. Approximately 51.5% of Mixed-race Men Also Experienced IPV in 2016/2017.

Also, Multiracial men were not spared from the rising wave of violence in the interracial community. Surprisingly, the highest number of IPV incidents occurred between 2016 and 2017 in the United States. Multiracial men faced the highest rates of IPV in the US, with 278,000 recorded cases.

11. Kentucky in the United States has the Highest Rate of Domestic Violence.

Domestic violence is alarming in the United States of America. Statistics reveal that it accounts for 37.2% of the cases recorded globally. Also, the state with the highest recorded rate of domestic violence is Kentucky at 45.3%. Meanwhile, South Dakota has the lowest cases, with 27.8% of domestic violence-related instances recorded.

12. Women Between 18 to 24 are Most Prone to Domestic Violence in the US.

Reports from 2022 reveal that domestic violence victims are higher among women aged 18-24. Also, men, women, and children of all races and ages are still prone to intimate partner violence (IPV). The Journal of Emergency Medicine reveals that there was a sudden increase in domestic violence cases in the US from 25% to 30% in 2020. However, there was no specific reason for this increase apart from the Covid lockdown era. With families spending more time together, previously disguised traits of violence were eventually unleashed.

Types of Domestic Abuse Statistics

Types of Domestic Abuse

13. About 48.8% of Men and Women (48.4% Each) Have Experienced at Least One Case of Aggressive Behavior From Their Intimate Partner.

These statistics prove that intimate partners are often guilty of domestic violence. Also, 4 in 10 women have put up with at least one type of aggressive behavior from an intimate partner. The same figures apply to men, with 4 out of 10 experiencing similar violence. Meanwhile, 17.9% of women have been prevented from contacting and seeing friends and family. Note that 95% of men who physically abuse their partner also damage them emotionally.

14. Between 21% to 60% of Domestic Abuse Victims Have Lost Their Jobs as a Result of the Abuse and Trauma.

Abuse can also become financial if a victim loses a job due to abuse at home, work, or other locations. So, 64% of IPV victims stated that the abuse affected their ability to work, causing a decline in productivity. Also, 40% of the victims said that their domestic partner abused them at work in person or on the phone. These causes could be quite embarrassing, leading the victims into trauma and depression, which could mature into suicidal thoughts.

15. Between 14% to 25% of Women are Sexually Assaulted by Their Domestic Partners in a Relationship.

Sadly, statistics reveal that between 40% and 45% of women living in abusive relationships will be sexually assaulted at some point in the relationshipAlso, women who suffer sexual abuse at the hands of their long-term partners often have long-term physical and mental health issues. Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) is one of the issues common among such individuals.

16. Domestic Violence Increased During the COVID-19 Pandemic.

Statistics from the Council of Criminal Justice reveal an increase of 8.1% in reported domestic abuse cases. This increase was recorded after the lockdown order for US residents. This data did not come from one source but was gathered from police call logs and domestic violence hotlines. Also, health records, administrative records, and crime reports were consulted to get a more accurate figure. So, the stay-at-home period likely led to an increase in IPV due to increased stress levels and having to deal with the various attitudes of children.

Major Elements of Domestic Abuse

Major Elements

Some elements that make up domestic abuse are listed below. Careful consideration could help you identify if you are a victim.

Emotional Abuse

This often occurs when a domestic or intimate partner ridicules or humiliates their partner in public. Also, the abuser could add threats, harassment, and insults to belittle the victim. Additionally, they could intentionally withhold affection and cut off access from family and friends. Some other features include constant criticism, insults, coldness towards a partner, and restriction from communication. Some abusers could seize a partner’s phone or mobile device to prevent communication with family and society. This form of abuse is manipulative and plays mind games on the victims, intentionally damaging their minds. 

Physical Abuse

Most times, emotional abuse not put in check gives birth to physical abuse. This form of abuse includes hitting, throwing objects, fighting, and using weapons. Also, it can increase to more violent forms like strangling, serious injury, and even murder or homicide.

Sexual Abuse 

Any form of sexual act forced on an individual qualifies as sexual assault. This includes the abuser forcing the victim to perform sexual acts, sexual assault, and unwanted sex. Also, forcing someone to watch pornography, forcing them to strip, or become a sex worker is part of sexual abuse. Furthermore, forcing someone to reproduce and refusing them birth control also qualifies as sexual abuse. All these forms of abuse are punishable under law in most regions. 

Financial Abuse

An individual can undergo financial abuse if a partner denies them access to joint funds or their money. Also, preventing them from owning a bank account, stopping the victim from working to earn, and forcing them to sign financial legal documents are under this category. Once an individual above legal age is denied free will to make financial decisions, it qualifies as abuse. Taking away access to finances often gives the abuser control over their victims since money is needed to survive.

Conclusion 

Domestic violence is an issue that has become a global cancer, leading to deaths and unimaginable pain. Despite the worldwide awareness campaign, domestic violence statistics are increasing significantly. Women, men, and children are all recipients of several forms of violence, with people feeling insecure in their own homes. The main challenge has been to tackle the problem from the rot before finding a practical solution. However, the fact remains that reporting any form of domestic abuse or violence is a sure way to begin the healing and recovery process.

Frequently Asked Questions

What are the vital statistics for IPV based on ethnicity?

What are the causes of domestic violence and abuse?

What do you do if you are a victim of violence?

Sources

The post 15+ Must Know Domestic Violence Statistics 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/domestic-violence-statistics/feed/ 0
Dogecoin Statistics 2024 and DOGE Price History https://techreport.com/statistics/dogecoin-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/dogecoin-statistics/#respond Sun, 14 Jan 2024 15:57:02 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532820 Dogecoin Statistics and Facts

Launched as a digital joke to parody crypto, Dogecoin and its iconic Shiba Inu meme mascot have had the last laugh by vaulting DOGE into the top 10 cryptocurrencies with...

The post Dogecoin Statistics 2024 and DOGE Price History appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Dogecoin Statistics and Facts

Launched as a digital joke to parody crypto, Dogecoin and its iconic Shiba Inu meme mascot have had the last laugh by vaulting DOGE into the top 10 cryptocurrencies with a jaw-dropping $20 billion+ market cap today. Yet the eccentric crypto asset dubbed “the people’s coin” traces a rollercoaster ride filled with flash crashes like last year’s 75% May plunge and headline-grabbing surges thanks to cheerleaders like Elon Musk.

As DOGE flirts with a long-dreamed price point of $1 in 2024, its future rides a razor’s edge between wider adoption and charges; its bark lacks real bite. This Dogecoin 2024 forecast dives into statistics from 120,000 daily crypto traders now accepting DOGE to the currency’s questionable utility beyond hype-driven speculation. Love it or hate it, the data suggests this meme coin could stay crazy enough to survive crypto’s harsh headwinds. This article on Dogecoin statistics considers the token’s origin, past performance, and present valuation in the market. Let’s get in.

Dogecoin Statistics and Facts

Summary of Dogecoin Statistics and Facts

  1. Born in 2013, Dogecoin came as an online joke.
  2. It is the first meme coin to exist in the world of cryptocurrency.
  3. DOGE is the code for the Dogecoin crypto network.
  4. Dogecoin’s market value is $10 billion.
  5. Jackson Palmer and Billy Markus are the creators of Dogecoin.
  6. Dogecoin has an initial supply limit of 100 billion coins.
  7. In May 2021, DOGE climbed to its highest price of $0.7376.
  8. A single Dogecoin wallet contains about 28% of DOGE coins.
  9. 65% of the total DOGE coins are held in less than 100 wallet addresses.
  10. Elon Musk supported and contributed to putting Dogecoin in the spotlight.

What is Dogecoin?

What is Dogecoin

Dogecoin became a light-hearted crypto asset through the famous Doge internet meme and a Shiba Inu dog theme. It imitates Bitcoin to present a peer-to-peer (P2P) open-source and fun-filled crypto token.

The asset uses blockchain technology to provide a secure and decentralized system. The system relies on several networks of computers known as nodes for recording and storing data and transactions in a public ledger. The entire process ensures the data on the network remains tamper-proof. 

Dogecoin came into the field in 2013, offering investors a very low price to engage in cryptocurrency. However, through massive acceptance and the influence of prominent crypto moguls like Elon Musk, DOGE climbed to the spotlight. The founders of Dogecoin included a community-centered approach to the project to support its decentralization. This raised the interest of many observers and quickly increased the token’s user base after its creation. Subsequently, Dogecoin transformed from a light-hearted joke to a notable crypto asset among other top contenders.

DOGE – The Native Coin of Dogecoin

DOGE is the code for Dogecoin, also known as its native token. It empowers the running of the entire Dogecoin ecosystem. As a meme coin, DOGE has no intrinsic value or use cases. It majorly serves as a speculating crypto asset for traders and investors. This accounts for the highly volatile nature of Dogecoin, which could trigger a huge risk for investors through excessive fluctuations.

Uses of Dogecoin

1. As a digital asset, Dogecoin is a peer-to-peer payment method among its users. It trades physical items on Reddit, Twitter, and others.

2. Its highly volatile attribute makes it a speculative asset for some crypto traders who benefit from its price fluctuations.

3. It is largely traded against other crypto assets and fiat currencies on crypto exchanges.

4. Due to its humor features, Dogecoin is a favorable option for online tipping. Some social media content creators receive DOGE tips from other users for creating interesting and attractive content.

History of Dogecoin

History of Dogecoin

5. In 2023, two software engineers, Jackson Palmer and Billy Markus, brought in an element of internet joke with Dogecoin. They brought the concept of a cryptocurrency that offers humor to users.

6. Initially, Plamer jokingly tweeted about an upcoming blast into the crypto space in the form of Dogecoin. The post received warm and massive responses from many crypto enthusiasts. 

7. Palmer and Markus introduced a digital payment system by blending the popular Bitcoin and internet meme Doge, calling it Dogecoin. This positioned Dogecoin as the first meme coin in the crypto industry.

8. Following its inception, Dogecoin gained much attention within the first month. The token’s official website recorded more than one million visits from interested crypto investors and speculators.

9. Dogecoin grew to become the dominant and leading meme coin. Its official social media account on the X platform comprises over 3.8 million followers and has many members in its crypto community.

10. The famous crypto personality and Tesla’s CEO Elon Musk contributed to Dogecoin’s explosive rise.

Unique Features of Dogecoin

Unique Features

No supply Limit

11. Unlike most crypto assets like Bitcoin, Dogecoin has no limit to its coin supply. Dogecoin miners received 10,000 DOGE coins for each successful block they produced. 

12. Moreover, each block on the network has an average mining period of one minute. This means that miners could produce up to 14,400,000 new DOGE coins in a single day. 

13. The massive production rate positions Dogecoin as a highly inflationary cryptocurrency with an infinite maximum supply.

Decentralization

14. The decentralized attribute of Dogecoin conforms with the usual security features that distinguish crypto assets from traditional ones. It removes the impact of a central party which could control or even manipulate the functions of the network.

15. Notably, the security of the Dogecoin network lies in the hands of selected users across the globe. The token maintains stable operations through decentralization and ensures its records remain immutable.

16. For a crypto asset like Dogecoin, its decentralization usually depends on its number of nodes and miners’ distribution. The network has over 6,000 nodes of individual computers that maintain and support its decentralization.

Coins are Concentrated in a Few Hands

17. A few Dogecoin wallets hold most of the coins in circulation. The biggest holder has about 28% of the total Dogecoin in circulation. 

18. On average, an estimated 0.002% of DOGE wallets contain almost 70% of the total coin supply.

19. This ownership level could pose liquidity risks and price fluctuation for the meme coin since the holders could control the token. The case differs for Bitcoin, whose coin wallet holders are evenly distributed.

What Could Influence Dogecoin and Other Cryptocurrencies

What Could Influence

Here are some conditions that could influence Dogecoin and other crypto assets:

The Place of Political Changes

20. Several governments of different countries have started regulating crypto using some agencies and authorities. Also, they make some decisions and laws that could affect crypto assets directly or indirectly.

21. Like other assets, Dogecoin can grow rapidly with favorable declarations in some regions. Notably, positive changes in the economic growth of a nation will push up the token’s value and even raise investors’ interest.

22. Conversely, some conditions in a country can limit the expansion and rise of DOGE. These include violence through war, terrorist attacks, economic crises, natural disasters, and others.

Rise and falls in Fiat Currencies’ worths.

23. When there’s inflation, where a lot of money purchases few goods, the overall price of any currency or asset will also fluctuate; this does not exempt any fiat currency as they respond like other payment mediums. 

24. When this happens, Investors will turn to alternatives like crypto, such as Dogecoin. These assets provide a haven for investors to avoid the effects of inflation. Notably, a slight rise in DOGE’s demand often increases the price dramatically within a short period. 

Intermittent Issues

25. It’s common knowledge in the crypto market that the price of cryptocurrencies responds to some stimulus or unpredictable elements. The unpredictable nature of the absolute crypto marketplaces, owing to policies and principles guiding the marketplace, conflicts and rivalries, or embargoes, influences the development of Dogecoin and other monies.

26. In 2022 FTX crypto give-and-take activities, nearly every crypto token experienced a great reduction in their worth. Dogecoin was one of the payment gateways that saw a fall in its value. Furthermore, the Securities & Exchange Commission (SEC) restriction on numerous crypto firms in the United States, such as Coinbase and Binance, brought DOGE and other currencies down in value.  

The impact of Social Media and News

27. Rumors are one of the factors that disturb crypto organizations and marketplaces. Information about plans affects the market so that it could lead to irregular changes in activities. Thus, many social media posts and news could completely alter crypto’s move towards development and expansion in worth. 

28. Furthermore, an atom of propaganda on would-be tokens with more prospects of gains could alter investors‘ goals within the crypto marketplace. 

29. An example of hype and its result could be seen in the case of how Elon Musk’s peeps and annotations concerning Dogecoin generated a helpful desire for it. 

30. Most investors adopted DOGE through Musk’s active promotions. Notably, many people believe in digital assets that have the support of prominent personalities and influencers.

How Dogecoin Moved in the Past

Moved in the Past

Following its creation, the Dogecoin community sees the token as a humorous meme coin with a relatively small value compared to most cryptocurrencies. Gradually, Dogecoin started making waves in crypto, paving its path amid different hurdles through the years.

2013

31. The overwhelming acceptance of people on the Reddit channel encouraged Palmer and Markus to bring Dogecoin into the industry. Within 48 hours from December 17 to December 19, 2013, DOGE’s value rose by over 460%.

32. Moreover, when Bitcoin and other crypto assets faced restrictions in China, Dogecoin saw more acceptance from users from different countries. Dogecoin closed the year with its value at $0.0004222.

2014

34. At the beginning of 2014, Dogecoin garnered more investors’ investors than almost all available tokens. It saw a massive growth in its trading volume, slightly exceeding the combined volumes of all other assets. However, DOGE’s market value still falls below that of Bitcoin.

35. Additionally, DogeTipBot emerged in 2014, creating more excitement for Reddit users. DogeTipBot is a tipping app that rewards great content creators and active users for commenting and promoting Dogecoin.

36. Through the inspiration of the DogeTipBot, the Dogecoin Reddit channel had up to 70,000 new users in August 2014.

37. Though the application lasted three years, it significantly impacted the Dogecoin community. For instance, the app generated $170,000 for charitable projects such as water cleansing in Kenya and distributing service dogs for blind kids and others.

38. The DOGE’s value had pronounced swings through the year amid competition from other crypto assets like Steller, Monero, and others. From its opening price of $0.0004228, Dogecoin ended the year at $0.0001866, reflecting a more than 120% decline in value.

2015

39. Dogecoin faced a huge blow in 2015 as one of its founders, Jackson Palmer, quit his stance on cryptocurrency. Palmer noted that his initial belief in crypto as a libertarian option to fiat currencies was wrong.

40. Palmer stated that his observation of cryptocurrency is a basic exploitative option that favors top proponents. He mentioned that such fundamentals parallel his ideas and political opinions and that he didn’t intend to return to crypto again.

41. While concurring with Palmer, Markus sold out all his Dogecoin holdings and other crypto assets. However, he expressed his shock in January 2021 after Dogecoin grew by 900%, commenting on how an internet joke succeeded. 

2016 and 2017

42. Dogecoin had no remarkable shift in its price trend in 2016. The coin’s price hovered between the $0.00020 and $0.00030 regions.

43. In 2017, Dogecoin indicated more potential for massive price change. Progressively, the value of DOGE scaled up to remove a fractional zero in the price and closed at $0.008972.

2018

44. On January 7, 2018, Dogecoin recorded a new milestone as its market cap reached almost $2 billion. The price of the meme coin climbed to $0.01877. 

45. However, Dogecoin failed to sustain the rise as the price slipped gradually downward in the following weeks. Amid the price swings in the crypto market, DOGE closed the year at $0.002346.

2020

46. There was no significant price movement for Dogecoin in 2020. The price of DOGE revolved around the $0.001 region from the beginning of the year.

47. Yet, Dogecoin stood its ground in the mean price range of $0.0020 to $0.0030 all through 2020. This little range in price could be connected to the virus, COVID-19, and international lockdown.

2021

48. The story changed for Dogecoin as it experienced a price rise and a boost in its performance in 2021. Many customers linked with the Reddit platform confess they are more interested in the token. Dogecoin witnessed a 210% price rise between January 28 and 29, 2021.

49. The after-effect of the post by Musk on his platform of 54 million followers was Dogecoin’s publicity and general acceptance. Next was a rise in its price to $0.07797 on January 29.

50. Furthermore, Dogecoin became the talk of the town among notable personalities and celebrities like Gene Simmons, Snoop Dogg, and Elon Musk. The currency got higher publicity in its worth by $0.08.

51. The coins kept rising in value until April, when they jumped to a mark above 527%,  and then the value added another figure, $0.7376, to mark its apex since initiation. It rose to $50 billion and above in 2021, came down by 26% ($0.2042) in September, and stayed at $0.1744 that year. 

2022

52. The coin’s market value dropped to $0.07029, contrary to the price of $0.1705 it recorded at the beginning of 2022.  

2023

53. Dogecoin rose in value to $0.09733, by a proportion of 0.35% on January 1.

54. Doge gained 17%, rising to $0.0953 in April and dropping by 19% to $0.07563 on November 23. So far, November has seen DOGE registering a 22% gain.

Conclusion

Dogecoin has remained unshaked while pushing more growth signals through the years. Thus, 2021 remained the best for Dogecoin, with significant achievements. The price of DOGE reached $0.7376, and the market value rose above $50 billion. In 2023, Dogecoin was a resilient and popular cryptocurrency characterized by volatility and widespread adoption. Its unique blend of humor, utility, and a devoted community continue to set it apart in the ever-evolving crypto landscape. Despite fluctuations in its price history, Dogecoin remains an intriguing contender, symbolizing the dynamic nature of the market and its journey from a “memecoin” to a legitimate player.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is Dogecoin an affordable payment gateway?

Is there hope for Dogecoin?

Sources

The post Dogecoin Statistics 2024 and DOGE Price History appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/dogecoin-statistics/feed/ 0
Deezer Statistics 2024 – Let’s Track Rising Streaming Trailblazer https://techreport.com/statistics/deezer-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/deezer-statistics/#respond Sun, 14 Jan 2024 15:32:19 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532851 Deezer Statistics

How did Deezer catapult from a scrappy streaming underdog in 2007 to a top global platform, counting 16 million monthly active users spanning 180 countries today? Behind this powerful wave...

The post Deezer Statistics 2024 – Let’s Track Rising Streaming Trailblazer appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Deezer Statistics

How did Deezer catapult from a scrappy streaming underdog in 2007 to a top global platform, counting 16 million monthly active users spanning 180 countries today? Behind this powerful wave lies an ocean of data on the music streaming giant. This inside look at pivotal Deezer statistics – from its 73 million track library to its still-minority 6% market share – reveals this European pioneer’s trajectory, challenges, and possible future paths.

We dive into everything from Deezer’s early days as a free service to its recent exclusive content blitz targeting younger listeners. With revenue up a promising 9% last year against competitors like Spotify, Deezer may be hitting its rhythm. Yet, with indie artists fleeing unfair payouts, can the platform balance artist relations with user growth? The data notes both discordant and harmonious chords as Deezer’s global symphony plays on in the tumultuous streaming era.

Deezer Statistics

Deezer Statistics – History

1. Given its shaky start, who would’ve thought Deezer would become so popular? It rose from the ashes of another failed music app called Blogmusik.

2. Blogmusik was shut down in 2006 because of copyright problems. But its founders believed in the idea because just two months later, they relaunched the site as “Deezer.” You have to give them credit for not giving up! And that perseverance paid off. 

3. In barely a year after the relaunch, Deezer already had nearly 900,000 songs that people could stream for free. This huge selection of tunes for free put them on the map. It got music fans excited and drew in subscribers quickly.

4. Deezer kept beefing up its catalog over the next decade. By 2015, we’re talking about 8 million songs!

5. Nowadays, Deezer has over 100 million playlists that folks can access and share. So, while it had a rocky start, Deezer pulled through and became one of the top names in music streaming. Not bad for a little site that died once and came back stronger, you know?

Deezer Statistics – Market Share

Deezer Statistics - Market Share

6. The yearly profits of the music streaming business hit nearly $30 billion in 2021, a big rise from the $18.90 billion record in 2020. It is also more than two times the $13.8 billion yearly profits in 2019

7. Considering these numbers, the industry’s growth is booming, so many companies now hustle for a piece of the cake. New platforms are popping up daily, but the data below shows the ones with the highest share in the market.

Company Market Share (%)
Spotify 32.77%
Apple Music 17.48%
Amazon Music 13.90%
Tencent Music 13.15%
YouTube Music 9.93%
Netease 4.83%
Deezer 1.39%
Other music streaming platforms collectively 6.55%

The data shows that Spotify and Apple Music command almost ½ of the combined market

8. Nevertheless, the competition remains fierce because of tech giants like Amazon, Tencent, Google/YouTube, and Netease.

9. Meanwhile, we still have 200+ new music streamers striving for listeners worldwide, and Deezer is out to take new positions.

Fascinating Deezer Statistics About User Growth in 2023

Deezer Statistics About User Growth

10. Reports indicate that Deezer attracts 16 million users monthly from various countries worldwide. Some even pay $10 monthly for access to diverse songs, premium features, and so on. 

11. This large user base hints at the platform’s steady growth. By the end of 2023 and beyond, this number might double as the platform will launch its new, unique features and upgrades.

12. Deezer offers various subscription options to enhance your music streaming experience:

  • Individual Plan – $9.99/month | Ad-free listening, Offline and on-demand access, and Unlimited downloads.
  • Family Plan – $17.99/month | Same features as above and Share with up to 6 devices.

All plans come with a 1-month free trial. Students also get 50% off the standard rates.

13. You can pay a monthly fee to unlock Deezer’s full features across devices – from offline listening and unlimited song downloads to an ad-free music experience. 

14. With two flexible plans, you can customize based on your budget and needs. Take advantage of the free trial or student discount to sample Deezer Premium.

Top Countries Using Deezer

Top Countries

As a French company, it’s no surprise that Deezer enjoys massive popularity in its home country. 

15. 35.32% of Deezer’s total user base comes from France alone. 

16. Deezer sees much of its growth coming from South American markets after France. 

17. Brazil has the second largest share at 12.69% of users. 

18. Mexico and Colombia hold another significant chunk, capturing 4.80% and 3.44%, respectively.

19. While France leads, Germany also contributes 5.69% of Deezer’s global listeners in Europe. 

20. Over one-third (38.06%) of users originate from other nations worldwide.

21. Deezer’s dominance in France likely stems from local brand recognition and a longer presence.

22. The streaming service’s popularity in Brazil, Mexico, and Colombia shows its potential in international and non-English markets.

23. Expanding beyond Western Europe, Deezer found an underserved Spanish-speaking audience to tap into across Latin America. 

24. Localized content and pricing tailored to these markets further drove adoption. Now, millions of South Americans help comprise Deezer’s diverse listenership spread throughout the Americas and across the globe. 

25. Capturing new regions has been key for Deezer to compete at scale versus American upstarts like Spotify and Apple Music.

Deezer Statistics – Demographics

Demographics

26. It’s no shocker that Deezer draws in the younger crowd more than the Boomer tunes-haters. 

27. The biggest number of users – we’re talking over 30% – falls in the 25 to 34 range

28. It makes total sense when you think about it. That crew grew up on iPods before going digital for life. Prime target market!

29. Next are the college-aged listeners, coming in hot at around 25%

30. Then you’ve got decent pull from folks aged 35 through mid-50s, too. But it drops hard after 55+. 

31. Less than 10% of Deezer’s fans are people over retirement who are vibing to jazz or classic rock playlists

32. The same goes for the 65+ grandparents group at less than 5%. Grandparents have quilting and bridge clubs to keep them busy, not concert streams!

33. If you laid out Deezer’s listeners by age in a bar graph, it would slope steeply from a tall peak at 25-35 to a barely visible sliver in the 60s and up. 

34. Turns out French tech trends middle-aged now, avec classique EDM pour danser!

How Much Site Traffic Does Deezer Get on Average?

Site Traffic Does Deezer Get on Average

So, get this – I’m looking at Deezer’s website traffic stats over the summer. 

35. We’re talking about a massive 22 million visits every month. In June and July, 22+ million people were chilling on Deezer dot com

36. August dipped barely, probably just during the vacation season, but we still saw over 21 million music heads bumping playlists. That’s wild website traffic for what most still call an “up-and-coming” streamer. 

37. But it has to feed the passion of all those millions of subscribers, right? Deezer has already hooked nearly 20 million registered users in total.

38. streaming traffic is 24 hours, seven days a week, 365 days a year. That’s because people zone out to music while working, working out, doing chores, drowning out family arguments – you name it! 

39. There are always going to be millions of music lovers touring Deezer to play DJ for the day. Plus, tons just discovered that indie French charm and signed up for a trial on the app. 

40. Over 20 million monthly visits to keep the playlists popping shouldn’t shock anyone. 

41. But still – 22 million! Monthly! French technology, who knew?! Deezer is out here making viral waves while Spotify stress-sweats over all this spicy competition!

Music Streaming Platforms and their Subscriber Count

Music Streaming Platforms and their Subscriber Count

42. Everyone remembers how we got stuck inside for months when COVID-19 first hit. Well, a whole lot of people needed music to keep them sane! The numbers are wild!

43. Globally, we went from having around 340 million paid music streamers at the end of 2019 to almost 450 million by the end of the next year. 

44. Oh, and just in the US? There were over 82 million subscribers in early 2021, which jumped 15% compared to the previous year.

45. With so many new sign-ups, Spotify and Apple cashed in big time. But Amazon, YouTube, and others expanded, with millions jumping aboard. Can you blame them? Sitting bored at home for months, you might as well soundtrack the monotony!

46. They say necessity breeds invention. But for music apps? The global pandemic breeds hundreds of millions of new subscribers. This is wild when the tunes are the bright side to everyone being stuck inside and stir crazy. Spotify investors rejoiced!” Below is data on these streaming platforms and their subscriber count:

Platform Subscriber Count
Spotify 165,000,000+
Apple Music 88,000,000+
Amazon Music 70,000,000+
YouTube Music 50,000,000+
Deezer 7,000,000+
Pandora 6,000,000+
Tidal Music 3,000,000+

47. Spotify leads with 165 million subscribers this year.

48. Apple Music takes second place with 88 million subscribers.

49. Amazon Music ranks for 70 million subscribers.

50. YouTube Music stands in with 50 million subscribers.

51. Deezer makes it ahead with 7 million subscribers.

52. Pandora boasts 6 million subscribers.

53. Tidal Music Trails has 3 million subscribers.

Conclusion

Deezer is not showing any signs of stopping. It’s out to serve the population with its music needs, and its strategies are matchless. Despite having millions of users, the platform wouldn’t mind doubling this figure before 2024 runs out. If you’re considering Deezer as your alternative music app, that’s an amazing step to take because it has a huge song library from your favorite artists. Also, for as low as $9.99 monthly, you can download tracks, albums, and even playlists to enjoy later when you have no internet connection.

Apart from streaming music, if you are into music as a career and need a perfect platform to showcase your talent to the world, then Deezer can be your best bet. You can publish a track to its 16M+ users and get the chance to grow your fan base in no time. So, conclusively, whether you’re a streamer or an artist, give a shot at Deezer and get the most out of music!

Frequently Asked Questions

Why is Deezer attracting more users?

What music genre selection does Deezer offer?

How many subscribers does Deezer have?

What is the price of a Deezer subscription?

Which devices are compatible with Deezer?

Can I play music offline on the app?

Sources

The post Deezer Statistics 2024 – Let’s Track Rising Streaming Trailblazer appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/deezer-statistics/feed/ 0
Drug Addiction Statistics 2024 (Key Facts About Drug Abuse) https://techreport.com/statistics/drug-addiction-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/drug-addiction-statistics/#respond Sun, 14 Jan 2024 15:24:45 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3533829 Top Drug Addiction Statistics

Drug addiction casts dark shadows across communities as numbers continue to spotlight its devastating impacts. In coming years, overdose fatalities are projected to climb another 14% to a staggering 102,000...

The post Drug Addiction Statistics 2024 (Key Facts About Drug Abuse) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Top Drug Addiction Statistics

Drug addiction casts dark shadows across communities as numbers continue to spotlight its devastating impacts. In coming years, overdose fatalities are projected to climb another 14% to a staggering 102,000 deaths annually nationwide. Behind these bleak statistics lie shattered lives and families struggling to break free.

This article pulls back the curtain on key drug addiction facts and trends we must know to tackle this unrelenting crisis. By charting key data from adolescent addiction rates to the explosion in synthetic opioid use, we reveal where needs remain most acute. Which populations show fast-rising addictions? What programs show promise against relapse? Answers drive smarter decisions and policies. It’s not just cold data. It’s mothers, sons, and friends in need. Their faces must guide our grasp of this epidemic that risks more precious lives with each passing day.Top Drug Addiction Statistics

Top Drug Addiction Statistics

  1. About (60 to 70) % of marriages in Shamble report having an alcohol use disorder.
  2. In 2020, approximately 16,416 fatalities resulted from prescription opioid overdoses.
  3. Around 66% of American adults are currently using some form of prescription medication.
  4. Roughly 30.8 million American adults are active smokers.
  5. Cocaine ranks as the second-most commonly used illicit drug in the United States.
  6. An estimated 774,000 Americans regularly consume methamphetamine.
  7. Nearly one-quarter of individuals who misuse heroin will develop an addiction.
  8. Globally, up to 3.3 million deaths occur annually due to alcohol-related issues.
  9. In 2017, an estimated 5.1 million young adults aged 18 to 25 grappled with substance abuse disorders.
  10. During the same year, around 13.6 million adults aged 26 and above, accounting for 6.4% of this demographic, battled various forms of substance abuse.

Statistics of Alcohol Addiction

Statistics of Alcohol Addiction

1. A Significant Estimation Suggests That 60% to 70% of People Who Engage in Physical Fights in Their Marriages are Alcoholics.    

Alcohol addiction is not just an individual issue. It affects the lives of people around you, especially married couples, regardless of whether they have kids. Becoming addicted to alcohol usually causes injurious consequences in families. It can cause financial drainage, spousal abuse, negligence of children, continual fights, and, most often, death. Moreover, this problem can extend to kids and loved ones. It nurtures codependency or enables behaviors to maintain peace despite the obvious harm instigated. Currently, many families are trying to address these challenges, especially through family therapy and rehabilitation. This is pivotal for family recovery and restoring peace and hope in families. These issues would have worsened, delaying any healing diagnosis if not for the intervention.

This data proves that alcohol hurts the central nervous system, as it hinders the brain from functioning. It has short-term and long-term effects. Memory loss, coordination difficulties, sensory distortions, indistinct speech, collapsing, and reduced self-consciousness are all short-term effects. However, the long-term effects are worse! Honestly, alcohol’s impact rate depends on factors like size, gender, weight, and consumption rate. Generally, individuals with lower body weight tend to experience heightened effects, with women often more susceptible than men to similar alcohol quantities. The long-term consequences of alcoholism are notably severe, encompassing issues like anxiety, neurological damage, liver ailments (such as cirrhosis or cancer), hypertension, cognitive decline, digestive disorders, heart ailments, ulcers, depression, and pancreatitis.

3. Around 2,220 Individuals Succumb to Alcohol Poisoning Annually in the United States, Equating to an Average of Six Deaths Per Day.

According to these statistics, 3 out of 4 deaths in the US were caused by alcohol poisoning. This occurs in individuals aged between 35 and 64. Moreover, a majority of these fatalities predominantly affect men and non-Hispanic Caucasians. Nonetheless, among specific demographics, Native Alaskans and American Indians have the highest alcohol poisoning mortality rates per million individuals. Alcohol poisoning ensues when the body detects elevated alcohol levels, prompting a shutdown of brain functions governing breathing, body temperature, and heart rate, ultimately leading to death. More than 38 million American adults admit to binge drinking at least four times monthly, consuming an average of eight drinks during these episodes.

4. Among American Students in Grades 9 to 12, 32.8% Reported Consuming Alcohol Within 30 days.

Shockingly, 7.8% of 61.4% of US students who drive acknowledged drinking while operating a vehicle, as per a Johns Hopkins study. Many studies, particularly the IAMSBIRT Project, hypothesized that the teenage brain is highly vulnerable to the effects of alcohol and drugs. According to the reports, screening for possible substances assists in categorizing suitable treatment for those endangered students. Brief interference strategies target motivating the person to reduce alcohol and substance abuse. Session durations differ depending on the person’s needs and the severity of substance abuse revealed during the initial screening. With these interventions, you can offer early support to lessen the danger of alcohol abuse for your loved ones. Moreover, seeking help and retrieval methods at an early stage is essential. This might be of little help in raising alcohol issues.

5. 85.6% of People (Aged 18 and Above) Said They Consumed Alcohol at Some Point in Their Lives.

Over 69.4% of respondents in a survey said that they have consumed within the past year. Let’s break down the data by gender within the age range of 18 and above. In 2019, the National Survey on Drug Use and Health discovered that over 58.9% of men and 51 percent of women drank alcohol in the previous months. Looking at these figures, it’s obvious that a huge portion is part of America’s adult population. These statistics, however, do not include any data on teens or preteens, an upsetting reality that needs 100% attention.

Opioids Use Statistics

Opioids Use Statistics

6. Opioid Pain Reliever Abuses Have Caused the Deaths of 38.2% of People Who Died Due to Drug Overdose.

In 2005, opioids constituted 38.2% of the 22,400 drug overdose fatalities in the United States. Taking or misusing painkiller drugs is a very critical problem. It contributes ominously to overdose-related mortalities. Currently, an opioid known as hydrocodone contributes to 24.3% of the 38.2% overindulge fatalities, as it is the people’s favorite. It’s essential to note that these death records involve not just people with legitimate prescriptions but also those buying these substances illegally on the streets. Opioid-related substances are oxycodone, codeine, and hydrocodone. Between 1990 and 2004, the number of non-medical users of prescription opioids went from 600,000 to over 2.4 million, which is pretty high. This makes this drug category one of the most frequently abused in 2004.

7. In 2018, Two Out of Three Drug Overdose Fatalities Were Attributed to Opioids.

In 2019, the misuse of prescription opioid painkillers among high school seniors reached its lowest recorded point. Additionally, the 2019 National Survey on Drug Use and Health reported that roughly 10 million people aged 12 and older had misused opioids within a year. Recent statistics from April 2021 showcased a surge in opioid-related overdose deaths, reaching 75,673, up from April 2020’s count of 56,064 opioid-related overdose deaths.

8. A 2020 Survey Estimated That 0.8%, Equivalent to 2.3 Million Individuals Aged 12 and Above, had Experienced a Prescription Opioid Disorder in the Past Twelve Months.

The 2020 NSDUH Annual National Report pointed out 58.7% of individuals (age 12 and above), equivalent to 162.5 million. They engaged in tobacco, alcohol, or illicit drug use within the past months, which was tagged ‘current usage.’ Parents should pay more attention to their 12-year-old and older kids to avoid abusing drugs of any kind.

9. In 2020, Approximately 16,416 Individuals Died Because of the Wrong Prescription of Opioids and Overdoses.

It’s essential to note that not all these fatalities were deliberate. Their report showed that some happened accidentally. For instance, some people forgot the correct dosage of their painkillers, while others had unbearable pain, which led them to increase their dosage. Americans are sad and scared because of this particular problem. Even though the statistics don’t consist of a specific age group, the figures shown are huge and hard to take in. Notably, this statistic precisely picks out people with opioid prescriptions. It doesn’t include people purchasing them through illegal routes. We can always know the actual count, as it remains indefinable, especially since the reported figures don’t show the complete picture.

10. Prescription Drugs Rose During the COVID-19 Pandemic.

Americans prescribed and abused not just opioids but also benzodiazepines, sedatives, and stimulants during the COVID-19 pandemic. Also, in 2020, opioid drug abuse incurred an annual cost of approximately $78.5 billion for United States taxpayers. To cure people with opioid addiction, you will need naltrexone, methadone, and buprenorphine. The medications help improve their excretory symptoms and restrain drug cravings.

Statistics of Prescription Drug Abuse Beyond Opioids

Prescription Drug Abuse Beyond Opioids

11. In Estimating the Scale of Prescription Drug Abuse, it’s Reported That Between 21% and 29% of Patients Prescribed Opioids for Chronic Pain Tend to Misuse These Medications.

Still, on opioids, let’s look at statistics related to prescription drug abuse within this drug group. Chronic pain affects a considerable segment of the American population, amounting to approximately 20.4%, or around 50 million adults as of 2019. Among these individuals, 7.4% endure chronic pain that significantly hampers their work and overall quality of life. Chronic pain doesn’t discriminate based on specific demographics, yet it notably affects higher percentages of older adults, women, individuals living in poverty, and those without employment. Doctors often prescribe various pain medications, including opioids, to alleviate their suffering. However, the predicament arises from the addictive nature of this drug category.

12. 66% of American Adults, Totaling Over 131 Million Individuals, Rely on Prescription Drugs, Reflecting the Highest Usage Among Elderly Individuals and Those Coping With Chronic Health Issues.

Regardless of the medication’s addictive potential, adults managing chronic conditions heavily rely on these prescriptions for their quality of life, spanning treatments for arthritis, diabetes, heart disease, and various chronic ailments. Among the adult population, three-quarters of those aged 50–64 utilize prescription medications, compared to 91% among individuals over 80. Moreover, as individuals age, the number of prescribed medicines typically increases. For instance, those aged 50– 64 receive an average of 13 prescriptions, compared to 22 for individuals aged 80 and above.

13. The United States Leads in Prescription Drug Spending Per Capita Compared to Other Countries, Emerging as an Anomaly in This Aspect.

The higher expenditure is partly attributed to American consumers bearing more out-of-pocket costs for their medications than citizens in other nations. Additionally, the significant number of uninsured individuals contributes to elevated costs compared to other countries. Addressing the need for reduced pharmaceutical expenses is a shared concern among most Americans seeking decreased out-of-pocket spending regardless of insurance coverage. However, the challenge lies not in the aspiration to cut prescription drug costs but in determining the most effective methodology for achieving this goal, which garners varying opinions among the populace.

14. Numerous Americans Acknowledge the Misuse of Prescription Drugs.

While the discussion primarily includes opioids, various addictive prescription drugs are also prone to misuse, as per the gathered statistics. Referencing the 2020 NSDUH report encompassing Americans aged 12 and above, several revelations emerged regarding the abuse of prescription medications.

  • Around 16.1 million individuals admit to misusing prescription psychotherapeutic medications.
  • Approximately 9.3 million people acknowledge misusing prescription painkillers.
  • Around 6.2 million people confess to misusing prescription sedatives and tranquilizers.
  • Approximately 5.1 million individuals acknowledge misusing prescription stimulants.
  • Around 4.8 million people report misusing benzodiazepine prescriptions.
  • A 2021 study report put out by NIDA on ‘Misuse of Prescription Drugs’ detects three categories of commonly abused treatments.
  • Some sets of drugs that stimulate the body, like Adderall, are often abused, according to statistics.
  • Xanax, Ambien, and Valium are regarded as antidepressants and are classified as prescription medications. These forms of drugs are reported as being among those prone to abuse.
  • Other opioid medications that people often misuse include fentanyl, oxycodone, and Vicodin. These drugs are still classified as being generally mishandled.

Considering the level of drug abuse nowadays, the state of affairs calls for action.

15. A Study Conducted by NSDUH in 2020 Shows That Nearly 9.3 Million People Were Exposed to the Wrong Use of Prescription Painkillers in the Preceding Years.

4.1% of persons within the age range of 18 to 25 years took the flag amongst people with cases of drug abuse. However, persons ages 26 and older who agreed to use prescription drugs wrongly were only 3.4%. It is important to note that prescription drug abuse does not occur among the youth alone! 2/3 of those individuals who had a first-time experience with painkillers during the study period were at least 25 years old. Nearly 774,000 US adult citizens (26 years old) consented to have a first-time idea of the pain killer in 2020.

Tobacco Addiction Statistics

Tobacco Addiction Statistics

16. Approximately 30.8 Million American Adults are Cigarette Smokers.

Cigarettes represent just one form of tobacco use, yet tobacco consumption stands as a leading cause of preventable illnesses, fatalities, and disabilities across the United States. Each day, an estimated 1,600 individuals under the age of 18 try their first cigarette in the US, and around 200 of them become daily smokers. The addictive nature of nicotine is so powerful that some prioritize purchasing cigarettes over essential needs like food or shelter. This level of drug addiction poses a considerable challenge to quitting. Additionally, tobacco farmers encounter “green tobacco sickness,” resulting from handling damp tobacco leaves and absorbing nicotine.

17. Approximately 2.55 Million Middle and High School Students Using Tobacco Products.

Encouragingly, the prevalence of cigarette smoking among young Americans has been decreasing. However, over 2 million middle and high school students have adopted e-cigarettes, a concerning trend as they pose risks, especially those containing nicotine, which can harm their developing brains. Several states in the US have increased investments in comprehensive tobacco control programs aimed at deterring youth smoking. These states have witnessed more rapid and substantial declines in youth and adult cigarette smoking.

18. One in Four Non-smokers is Exposed to Secondhand Smoke.

While smokers face various chronic health risks like heart disease, lung cancer, and stroke, individuals who don’t smoke but are exposed to secondhand smoke are also at risk. Secondhand smoke can cause health issues such as lung disease, cancer, and high blood pressure in non-smokers, particularly impacting infants by increasing the risk of SIDS (sudden infant death syndrome) and other illnesses. Long-term exposure to secondhand smoke has been linked to lung diseases and cancer in non-smokers, similar to the risks faced by active smokers.

19. Nearly 8 Out of 10 Chronic Pulmonary Disease (COPD) Cases are Associated With Smoking.

This worrying statistic directly correlates with numerous smokers and former smokers across America. COPD afflicts around 16 million Americans, a number that continues to rise. This figure excludes undiagnosed individuals with COPD who are not seeking treatment. While COPD has no cure, available treatments can alleviate symptoms and offer those affected by this lung condition a better quality of life compared to living without treatment.

20. Used Smoke Contributes to Over 40,000 Deaths Annually.

For individuals addicted to tobacco products like cigarettes, the repercussions extend beyond personal health impacts. This smoking-related statistic sheds light on the thousands of people annually who don’t smoke themselves but face adverse health effects due to exposure to smoke.

Cocaine Addiction Statistics and Facts

Cocaine Addiction Statistics

21. Cocaine Ranks as the Second-most-used Illicit Drug in the United States.

A study conducted in 2014 revealed that approximately 1.5 million Americans openly admitted to using cocaine, constituting roughly 0.6% of the nation’s entire population. While this data dates back a few years, the pervasive drug trafficking issues in the country might have led to an escalation in these numbers, although one would hope for a decline. As of 2020, marijuana stood as the most prevalent illicit drug in the US, with a staggering 49.6 million users. Following closely, cocaine ranked second with an estimated 5.2 million users, trailed by LSD users at around 2.637 million and Ecstasy users at 2.622 million.

22. According to the 2019 NSDUH, Cocaine Usage Might be Declining.

In 2019, nearly 1 million individuals aged 12 and older met the criteria for what’s referred to as cocaine use disorder, as classified in the DSM (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders). This condition indicates signs of drug addiction among these 1 million users. Contrastingly, a 2002 report documented 1.5 million instances of cocaine use, suggesting a noteworthy decline in cocaine usage over time. The most prominent reduction was observed in cocaine use disorder, with the most substantial decrease recorded among the heaviest users aged 18 to 25, particularly evident by 2019.

23. Approximately 5 Million Americans are Regular Coca-Cola Users.

Cocaine, classified as an illegal stimulant, poses severe risks to bodily organs, can incite mental health disorders, and may lead to respiratory failure. The drug’s addictive nature can initiate dependency even after initial use. Since 2013, the fatalities associated with cocaine use have been steadily increasing each year.

From 5,419 deaths in 2014, the toll of cocaine-related fatalities soared to 19,447 by 2020, signifying a significant increase in deaths linked to cocaine use over the past few years.

25. In 2017, 966,000 Americans Struggled With Cocaine Use Disorder.

The signs of cocaine use often manifest as rapid physical deterioration, akin to the effects of methamphetamine. Unlike some substances —both illegal and prescription—that cause a gradual decline in health, cocaine and methamphetamine induce noticeable and swift changes in appearance.

Methamphetamine Addiction Statistics

Methamphetamine Addiction

26. Approximately 774,000 Americans Have a Regular Methamphetamine Habit.

Methamphetamine, often known as Meth, is an illicit substance notorious for its propensity to cause drug addiction, abuse, and fatal overdoses. Sold in the form of white crystalline rocks intended for smoking, Meth poses severe risks to one’s health due to its highly addictive and hazardous nature.

27. Recent Data Indicates That Methamphetamine Contributes to 85% to 90% of Stimulant Drug Deaths.

Among stimulant-related fatalities, methamphetamine stands out as the primary cause, accounting for a substantial portion of these deaths. Between 2012 and 2019, fatalities linked to stimulant drugs increased by an alarming 29% annually. Much like cocaine, methamphetamine tends to provoke visible health deterioration at a quicker pace compared to other medications.

28. Methamphetamine Addiction Rehabilitation Admissions Saw a 3% Increase from 2014 and 2015.

Though the rise in rehabilitation admissions might seem modest, it signifies a positive step where individuals grappling with methamphetamine addiction acknowledge their need for assistance. Some might seek help through personal realization, while others might need to be compelled by legal ramifications before seeking rehabilitation. Today, numerous educational programs aim to inform individuals about the health hazards and legal repercussions of methamphetamine use, emphasizing the importance of support and therapy for those struggling with drug addiction.

29. In 2015, 225,000 People Initiated Methamphetamine Use.

Reflecting on 2015, we can hope for a decline in drug use and an increase in individuals seeking help and treatment for drug addiction. Methamphetamine stands as a dangerous illicit drug, posing severe risks to individuals’ lives. It has a devastating impact on families and contributes significantly to fatal overdoses. Unfortunately, most drug addictions have destructive effects and can tear families apart unless individuals seek assistance.

30. 30% of Law Enforcement Officials Identify Meth as America’s Most Significant Drug Problem.

Law enforcement officers regularly face the challenges of dealing with drug-related crimes, experiencing the harsh realities daily. When 30% of these dedicated professionals highlight Meth as a substantial threat to both individuals and society, their perspective warrants serious attention.

Statistics on Heroin Addiction

Statistics on Heroin

31. The 2021 Monitoring the Future Survey Indicated That 0.2% of 8th Graders Used Heroin.

In the same survey, estimates showed that 0.1% of both 10th and 12th graders reported using heroin within 12 months. The idea of young individuals engaging with such a hazardous illicit drug is deeply concerning.

32. About 13,165 Fatalities Were Attributed to Heroin Overdoses in 2020.

Heroin, an opioid derived from morphine sourced from opium plants in regions like Colombia, Mexico, the Southwest, and Southeast Asia, can manifest as a brown or white powder or a viscous, tar-like substance. An overdose occurs when the drug depresses or halts breathing, leading to hypoxia (reduced oxygen to the brain). It can inflict lasting damage on the nervous system, inducing permanent brain injury, coma, or fatality.

33. Individuals Already Addicted to Prescription Drugs Face a 40-fold Higher Risk of Heroin Addiction.

Given heroin’s classification as an opioid, this statistic, while staggering, is somewhat expected. It’s concerning to note that nearly all heroin users have also used at least one to three other substances. Those with cocaine addiction face a 15-fold risk of heroin addiction, and individuals struggling with alcohol or marijuana abuse are also at elevated risk.

34. Almost a Quarter of Heroin Abusers will Develop Addiction.

Heroin addiction statistics closely mirror those associated with opioid dependency. Among the higher-risk demographics are non-Hispanic males aged 18 to 25 living in metropolitan areas. Heroin, highly addictive and associated with severe physical, mental, and legal ramifications, poses significant risks to users.

35. An Estimated 652,000 Individuals Aged 12 and Older Were Affected by Heroin Use Disorder in 2017.

Heroin usage in the United States appears considerable, but globally, Russia claims the largest heroin consumer base, totaling 1.5 million users. Notably, Malaysia maintains some of the most stringent illegal drug laws, with capital punishment for drug sellers. Nevertheless, America stands as the largest per capita consumer of addictive substances.

Overall Drug Addiction Statistics and Details

Overall Drug Addiction

36. Merely 10% of Individuals Dealing With Substance Abuse Disorders Seek Treatment.

Shockingly, only a small fraction, approximately 10%, of those grappling with substance abuse actively seek or receive the necessary assistance. Factors such as unawareness about the need for treatment, refusal to seek help, or inadequate resources and support can contribute to this low figure. Considering the 23 million Americans affected by drug addiction, this percentage is notably small.

37. Over 20% of Americans Coping With Anxiety Disorders Also Struggle With Substance Addiction.

There appears to be a correlation between anxiety or depression and an inclination toward substance abuse. Many individuals dealing with anxiety or depression tend to resort to drugs or alcohol, increasing their risk of developing an addiction. The intricate relationship between addiction and anxiety or depressive disorders often creates a cycle where one condition exacerbates the other. For example, individuals with social anxiety disorder commonly grapple with alcoholism.

38. Globally, up to 3.3 Million Annual Deaths are Attributed to Alcoholism.

Additionally, statistics pinpoint that 95,000 deaths among Americans annually are directly linked to alcohol consumption. Furthermore, 7% of adults who consume alcohol are affected by alcohol use disorder (AUD), and around 60% increased their alcohol intake during the pandemic lockdowns.

39. A Combination of Family Environment and Genetics Contributes to Drug Addiction.

Findings from a 2012 study suggest that both familial upbringing and genetic factors influence substance abuse tendencies. However, there has yet to be a comprehensive adoption study to verify these current findings. Patterns often suggest that children of addicted parents may follow in their footsteps, although some break away from this cycle.

40. In 2017, 38% of American Adults Struggled With Illicit Drug Use Disorders.

This percentage encapsulates the misuse of both illegal and prescription drugs, whether prescribed to the individual or acquired illegally. Illicit drug use involves the improper use or abuse of any form of medicine, be it illegal substances or prescription medications obtained unlawfully. This category includes substances like marijuana, cocaine, heroin, methamphetamine, or various inhalants.

41. Roughly 4% of American Adolescents (aged 12 to 17) Grapple With Substance Use Disorders.

This figure represents 992,000 teens, translating to 1 in 25 individuals within this age bracket. Furthermore, 443,000 adolescents between 12 and 17 struggled with alcohol use disorder in 2017, constituting 1.8% of teens.

42. Estimates Indicate That Approximately 3%, or 741,000 Teens, Dealt With Illicit Drug Use Disorders in 2017.

In 2017, an estimated 5.1 million young adults aged 18 to 25 grappled with various substance abuse disorders. This figure represents approximately 14.8% of this specific segment of the American population, equating to about one in seven young adults. Within this demographic, around 3 million individuals struggled with alcohol use disorder, accounting for roughly 10% of this age group. Moreover, in 2017, illicit drug use affected 7.3% of young adults, totaling approximately 2.5 million individuals. Notably, heroin use within this age bracket doubled in the last decade.

43. In 2017, Approximately 13.6 Million Adults Aged 26 and Older Grappled With Various Substance Abuse Issues, Accounting for About 6.4% of This Demographic.

Among this age group, roughly 10.6 million individuals faced alcohol use disorder, which constituted 2% of that population. Additionally, about 4.3 million adults in this age range struggled with illicit drug use disorder in the same year.

44. Regarding Adults Over 65, Data From 2017 Indicated That 1 Million Individuals Dealt With Some Form of Substance Use Disorder.

Within this group, around 978,000 people aged 65 and older were contending with alcohol abuse disorders, while another 93,000 faced challenges related to illicit drug use. Notably, two-thirds of senior citizens aged 65 and older who battled alcohol-related disorders developed these issues before reaching 65. Furthermore, between 21% and 66% of elderly individuals struggling with any substance abuse issue also experienced some form of mental disorder.

Gender, Race, and Regional Drug Abuse Statistics

Gender, Race, and Regional stats

45. Data from 2017 Indicates That Men are More Inclined to Use Illicit Drugs Compared to Women.

The likelihood of struggling with drug addiction is similar between genders among substance abusers. Among individuals aged 12 and over, 5.2% of females experienced substance abuse issues, while 9.4% of males in the same age range grappled with similar problems. This underlines the fact that men are nearly twice as likely as women to abuse alcohol or drugs.

46. The Highest Rates of Substance Dependence and Abuse are Observed Among Alaskan Natives and American Indians Aged 12 and Above.

Caucasians (whites) had a substance abuse rate of 7.7% in 2017. African Americans faced substance abuse disorders at a rate of 6.8% within their population, while Hispanics were at 6.6%.

47. Among Asian Americans, Only 3.8% Experience Problems With Substance Abuse.

Their stricter household environments and lower levels of recreational drinking passed down to children often deter the development of these habits. Nonetheless, there are still cases of drug addiction within this demographic.

48. Around 4.6% of Pacific Islanders and Native Hawaiians Struggle With Substance Use Disorders.

Despite cultural norms that don’t encourage excessive drug or alcohol use, a small percentage of this group still faces drug addiction issues.

Conclusion

That wraps up the collection of drug addiction statistics we’ve compiled for 2024. Understanding drug addiction is complex, so there’s a wealth of information to explore on this topic. We trust that this article provided valuable insights. We aim to offer hope and guidance, especially for those supporting loved ones through drug addiction recovery.

These statistics shed light on the immense impact drug addiction has on individuals and their families. Remember, these figures capture only a fraction of the broader picture regarding the challenges faced by those battling drug addiction and their close ones. If you know someone struggling with substance abuse, it’s important to encourage them to seek help. Recovery is possible with the right support and resources.

Frequently Asked Questions

What drugs are common among teenagers and young adults?

Which age group (demographic) utilize marijuana the most?

What is the success rate of drug rehabilitation treatment?

Sources

The post Drug Addiction Statistics 2024 (Key Facts About Drug Abuse) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/drug-addiction-statistics/feed/ 0
SHEIN Statistics – The Brand’s Place, Reach & Controversies https://techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/#respond Fri, 12 Jan 2024 13:09:01 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3533276 Woman on beach looking at SHEIN app on phone

As one of the world’s largest fashion e-commerce retailers, SHEIN statistics and announcements are all over news. The company might be taking the world by storm, but its path hasn’t...

The post SHEIN Statistics – The Brand’s Place, Reach & Controversies appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Woman on beach looking at SHEIN app on phone

As one of the world’s largest fashion e-commerce retailers, SHEIN statistics and announcements are all over news. The company might be taking the world by storm, but its path hasn’t been without a number of controversies.

Formerly known as ZZKKO, SHEIN was founded in 2008 by entrepreneur Chris Xu as a wedding dress e-commerce company. In the 2010s, it began to sell its womenswear in different international markets and it’s currently active in over 25 countries. At the end of 2023, the retailer’s mobile app surpassed 250 million downloads.

It’s clear that SHEIN is gaining momentum and popularity, and is therefore worth paying attention to. In this guide, we’ll go over the statistics on SHEIN usage and downloads, its performance in different markets, its associated controversies and the possible future of the retailer. Let’s not waste any time!

Key SHEIN Statistics

  • By the end of 2023, the SHEIN app was downloaded over 251 million.
  • In Q1 of 2022, the SHEIN website had almost 500 million visitors, 140 million more than the previous quarter.
  • As of 2022, SHEIN has the largest market share of the fast fashion segment in the US at 40%.
  • Spain, Italy, and Saudi Arabia are the top three EMEA countries by number of SHEIN downloads, as of 2022. Spain took the lead with 6.38 million downloads.
  • The biggest segment of SHEIN’s audience is women aged 25-34.
  • SHEIN was the fifth-highest-earning e-commerce store in 2022, as it made $26.15 billion in total worldwide that year.
  • In 2022, SHEIN reported a pre-tax profit of almost £12.2 million in the UK. The total UK revenue amounted to £1.12 billion.

SHEIN User Statistics

With over 250 million downloads in 2023 alone, SHEIN is on its way to becoming one of the biggest players in the fast fashion e-commerce segment. Let’s take a close look at its downloads and visitor statistics.

Downloads

SHEIN app downloads 2020-2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/

SHEIN’s download statistics speak for themselves. In the first 10 months of 2023, the SHEIN mobile app was downloaded over 208 million times worldwide, over 12 million more than in 2022. By the end of 2023, that figure exceeded 251 million.

In 2021, SHEIN was the second-most popular mobile app on both iOS and Android in the United States.

On iOS, the app was downloaded 17.64 million times, with Amazon Shopping being ahead of it by just under 8 million downloads. As for Android, SHEIN was downloaded over 13.5 million times, narrowly beating out Walmart’s app.

The e-commerce tracking app Shop beat SHEIN to the first place by nearly 2 million downloads.

When it comes to SHEIN’s biggest competitor, Temu, the latter has a higher overall number of downloads as of December 2023. The top five most-downloaded shopping apps in 2023 are below.

Shopping App Number of downloads
Temu 314.19 million
SHEIN 251.56 million
Amazon Shopping 178.25 million
Shopee 152.42 million
Meesho 138.56 million

Visitor Traffic

SHEIN website visitors by quarter 2020-2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/

In addition to the popularity of SHEIN’s mobile app, its website is also enjoying high visitor volume. In Q1 of 2022, it had almost 500 million visitors, up 140 million versus the previous quarter.

The popularity of the retailer’s website is comparable with other major retailers’ portals, such as Amazon, Temu, and AliExpress.

While Amazon remains the overall winner in terms of unique visitor numbers (at least in the US), with over 631 million unique American visitors in Q1 of 2023.

SHEIN is the third-most-popular retailer website, having gained almost 113 million visitors in the quarter. That’s more than the AliExpress website, which had 57.7 million visitors during that period.

SHEIN Statistics by Region

SHEIN downloads by country 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/

But how popular is SHEIN around the world? What’s its biggest market and how well-known is it in certain countries?

In this section, we’ll go through the statistics about SHEIN’s popularity in different regions, such as EMEA, the Americas, and APAC.

The Americas

US fast fashion market composition
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/

The three countries with the most SHEIN downloads in the Americas in 2022 were Brazil, the US, and Mexico, with Brazil having the most downloads (almost 52 million, or 24% of the country’s population). The US had 27.25 million downloads, and Mexico 17.26 million.

As of 2022, SHEIN has the largest market share of the fast fashion segment in the US at 40%, followed by H&M (27%) and Zara (17%). Its size grew considerably over the past few years, seeing as it was only at 18% in 2020.

However, SHEIN’s brand awareness level in the US, 63% as of 2023, is somewhat behind other bigger fashion brands, such as Macy’s (88%) and Gap (86%). Despite that, the company’s level of brand recognition is still higher than that of its main fast fashion competitors you can see on the infographic above, such as Zara (49%).

In Canada, the SHEIN app isn’t as popular as it is in its southern neighbors, but people do use it. In November 2023, the mobile app was downloaded over 275,000 times by Canadians. SHEIN’s peak month in Canada, however, was May 2020, when it was downloaded almost 325,000 times.

EMEA

Most downloaded fashion apps in Europe in 1st half 2022
Source: Statista

Spain, Italy, and Saudi Arabia are the top three EMEA countries by SHEIN downloads, as of 2022. Spain took the lead with 6.38 million downloads, Italy had 5.49 million, and KSA 5.19 million. The UK had less than 4 million downloads.

Other EMEA countries also like to use SHEIN mobile app for online shopping, thanks to the low prices and convenience. For example, SHEIN is the second-most popular shopping app in the Netherlands and Belgium, after Temu, with 1.7 million and 1.5 million downloads, respectively.

In terms of brand awareness, the situation with SHEIN in EMEA is similar to that in the US. For example, in the UK, it’s far from the most well-known fashion e-commerce stores. SHEIN’s level of brand awareness in the UK is at 64%. To compare, other popular British online retailers like Argos, Primark, and NEXT, have a 94% brand awareness level.

APAC

Desire to buy at Chinese fashion retailer SHEIN among Japanese consumers as of February 2023
Source: Statista

Japan and the Philippines have seen the most SHEIN downloads in APAC in 2022, with 10.12 million and 7.87 million downloads, respectively. In South East Asian countries, SHEIN was downloaded 17.73 million times in 2022 in total.

As you can see from the statistics above, over 28% of Japanese consumers don’t wish to use SHEIN at all. However, almost 26% would want to buy from it for a specific occasion.

In terms of SHEIN brand awareness, statistics tell us that the majority of consumers in Japan (over 52%) have never heard of SHEIN. Only 10.8% know of it and have shopped there, and 36.4% have heard of it, even though they never used it.

SHEIN Audience Statistics

SHEIN audience by age
Source: Similarweb

SHEIN’s primary target audiences are young women under 35 interested in the latest fashion trends. And according to visitor statistics for October-December 2023 provided by Similarweb, the biggest segment of SHEIN’s audience is women aged 25-34.

That trend has seemingly been going on for a while. According to Statista, women made up 65% of the website’s visitors in December 2022, and 29.4% of all SHEIN visitors were aged 25-34.

That’s not to say SHEIN doesn’t appeal to other segments. A report by UBS stipulates that an average SHEIN consumer is a woman aged 34.7, making her a bit older than a typical Generation Z consumer SHEIN has been focusing their strategy on.

SHEIN Market Share & Sales Statistics

Leading unicorns worldwide as of April 2023
Source: Statista

As one of the top 5 “unicorns” valued at $65 billion, SHEIN’s financial and market positions are very solid. In this section, we’ll take a look at the company’s place in the fast fashion market and its sales figures.

SHEIN in Fast Fashion Market

UK apparel retail market
Source: Retail Gazette

The fast fashion market is forecast to be worth $185 billion by 2027, representing a growth of almost $80 billion from 2022. In the previous sections, we specified that SHEIN has the largest market share of the fast fashion market in different locations, especially the US. In 2022, its market share in the US was 40%.

Indeed, SHEIN has added more styles to its US website than any other fast fashion retailer in 2022 almost 315,000. To compare, Zara added a little over 6,800 styles and H&M added 4,414.

In other countries, SHEIN’s market share is also significant, especially in the Americas. For instance, in Mexico, it was the third-most-popular fashion retailer in 2021, with a market share of 6.9%.

In Europe, SHEIN is less prolific, although still very popular.

For instance, its French market share is 5.9%, and it was the sixth-most-popular fashion retailer (Vinted is the first, with a 16.7% market share) in 2021. And in the UK, where SHEIN faces competition from popular fast fashion retailers like Primark, its market share has nonetheless increased from 1.7% to 2.2% in 2023.

SHEIN Sales Statistics

Top online stores worldwide in 2022, by e-commerce net sales
Source: Statista

Unsurprisingly, Amazon was the top-earning e-commerce store in 2022, having earned $133.5 billion worldwide in revenue. However, SHEIN was in the fifth place of that rating, as it made $26.15 billion in total in 2022 worldwide.

SHEIN also performed well in local markets, as well as on the global scale. For example, in Canada, it was the fifth-highest-earning e-commerce store in 2022, having made $179 million.

The European market has also been successful. Spain, which is home to the highest number of SHEIN app downloads in Europe, brought SHEIN $858 million in revenue in 2022 alone.

The company’s UK business is showing financial resilience as well. In 2022, SHEIN reported a pre-tax profit of almost £12.2 million in the country. The total UK revenue amounted to £1.12 billion.

SHEIN Associated Controversies

SHEIN’s success and popularity do, however, come with a price. The company and the brand have been subject to various concerns and controversies throughout the years. We’ll look at the most significant ones now.

Sustainability Concerns

A big part of SHEIN’s success is the fast fashion industry and the ability to release low-priced pieces that are on-trend quickly. However, fast fashion is an industry that’s far from environmentally friendly, and the approach has led to significant sustainability concerns.

The company’s supply chain and sourcing practices are a big reason for these concerns. SHEIN was accused of using forced labor and hazardous materials in the production of their clothing.

The high-speed, high-volume approach of the company means excessive use of energy, long working hours and significant waste generation. The Fashion Transparency Index 2022 gave SHEIN the lowest score of 0-5%.

SHEIN vs. Temu Lawsuits

The two big e-commerce retailers have been engaged in significant legal battles over the last few years, ranging from mutual impersonation to anti-trust. Although they attempted to settle their lawsuits in October 2023, the legal issues seem to have re-ignited just two months later.

The latest lawsuit, filed by Temu in December 2023 in the US District Court for DC, claims that SHEIN used intimidation and bullying on their suppliers in China, even using threatening tactics and confiscating telephones. Temu accuses SHEIN of unlawful interference. The lawsuit has the potential to undermine SHEIN’s upcoming IPO plans.

Artists’ Lawsuits & Disputes

Temu isn’t the only party that’s using the law to settle disputes with SHEIN, however. At least three independent designers filed legal claims against the retailer in July of last year for copyright infringement of their work.

This is not the first time the company has had to deal with a copyright controversy. Earlier that year, a nail artist accused SHEIN of appropriating her work in their nail stickers. And in 2021, many indie brands accused SHEIN of copying their designs.

Is SHEIN Here to Stay?

Fast fashion is a huge industry where SHEIN has established itself as a major player. However, with consumers becoming more environmentally conscious and shopping more sustainably, the retailer might have a hard time in the future, not least because of the significant sustainability concerns that have been following it for many years.

With more people embracing slow fashion, especially the younger generation, SHEIN is likely to find it challenging to continue catering to the preferences of its target audience. We look forward to seeing how the company is going to address the aforementioned concerns and seeing how it’ll evolve with the needs and desires of its target market.

Sources

Click to see all sources
  1. SHEIN – Statistics & facts (Statista)
  2. Number of visits to shein.com from January 2019 to May 2022 (Statista)
  3. Number of app downloads of SHEIN-Fashion Shopping Online worldwide from 2015 to YTD 2023 (Statista)
  4. Top online stores worldwide in the Fashion segment in 2021, by e-commerce net sales (Statista)
  5. Market share of the leading fast fashion companies in the United States in March 2020 and March 2022 (Statista)
  6. Most popular online stores in the apparel segment in the United States in 2021, by e-commerce net sales (Statista)
  7. Top online stores worldwide in the Fashion segment in 2021, by e-commerce net sales (Statista)
  8. Most downloaded fashion apps in Europe in 1st half 2022 (Statista)
  9. Leading shopping apps on the Apple App Store in the United States in 2021, by number of downloads (Statista)
  10. Leading shopping apps on the Google Play Store in the United States in 2021, by number of downloads (Statista)
  11. Leading fashion online shops ranked by brand awareness in the United States in 2023 (Statista)
  12. Leading shopping apps worldwide in 2023, by number of downloads (Statista)
  13. Countries with the highest number of SHEIN-Fashion Shopping Online app downloads in 2022 (Statista)
  14. Fast fashion e-commerce – statistics & facts (Statista)
  15. Desire to buy at Chinese fashion retailer SHEIN among Japanese consumers as of February 2023, by age and gender (Statista)
  16. Level of recognition for Chinese fashion retailer SHEIN in Japan as of February 2023 (Statista)
  17. Leading shopping apps in Belgium in 2023, by number of downloads (Statista)
  18. Leading shopping apps in the Netherlands in 2023, by number of downloads (Statista)
  19. Desire to buy at Chinese fashion retailer SHEIN among Japanese consumers as of February 2023 (Statista)
  20. Monthly downloads of the SHEIN app on iOS and Android devices in Canada from January 2019 to November 2023 (Statista)
  21. Leading fashion online shops ranked by brand awareness in the United Kingdom in 2022
  22. Leading unicorns worldwide as of April 2023 (Statista)
  23. Estimated market share of sustainable apparel in the United States in 2022, by generation (Statista)
  24. Fast fashion market value forecast worldwide from 2021 to 2027 (Statista)
  25. Top online stores worldwide in 2022, by e-commerce net sales (Statista)
  26. Number of unique visitors to Amazon, Temu, Shein, and AliExpress in the United States from September 2022 to March 2023 (Statista)
  27. Leading online stores in the bags and accessories segment in Canada in 2022, by e-commerce net sales (Statista)
  28. Most downloaded free shopping apps in Southeast Asia in 2022, by number of downloads (Statista)
  29. SHEIN brand profile in the U.S. (Statista)
  30. Distribution of global visitors to shein.com in December 2022, by gender (Statista)
  31. Distribution of global visitors to shein.com in December 2022, by age (Statista)
  32. Year-to-date number of new fashion styles added in the U.S. as of April 2022, by brand (Statista)
  33. Leading online apparel retailers in Mexico in 2021, by market share (Statista)
  34. Leading online fashion retailers in France as of September 2021, by market share (Statista)
  35. Top online stores in Spain in 2022, by e-commerce net sales (Statista)
  36. Fast-Fashion Juggernaut Shein’s Sales Close In on Zara, H&M (The Wall Street Journal)
  37. SHEIN Demographics (Similarweb)
  38. Shein´s business model analysis (LinkedIn)
  39. Meet Shein’s typical shopper: The fast-fashion retailer attracts older and more environmentally conscious consumers than you might think (Business Insider)
  40. 5 toxic chemicals used in fast fashion clothing, and how they can affect your immune system (Business Insider)
  41. Shein hits £1bn UK sales as it becomes top 10 fashion firm (Retail Gazette)
  42. SHEIN DISTRIBUTION UK LIMITED Full Accounts (Companies House)
  43. Shein questioned on potential forced labor in its supply chain (Supply Chain Dive)
  44. Fashion Transparency Index 2022 (Issuu)
  45. Online retailer Temu sues rival Shein, alleging ‘mafia-style intimidation’ (The Guardian)
  46. Reclusive Shein founder Sky Xu prepares to enter the spotlight with IPO (FT)
  47. Shein Faces Lawsuit Over Copyright Infringement. Here’s What to Know (Time)
  48. Why Indie Brands Are At War With Shein And Other Fast-Fashion Companies (NPR)
  49. Shein: ‘My nail designs were stolen by Chinese fast-fashion firm’ (BBC)

The post SHEIN Statistics – The Brand’s Place, Reach & Controversies appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/shein-statistics/feed/ 0
20+ Most Exciting OkCupid Statistics in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/okcupid-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/okcupid-statistics/#respond Thu, 11 Jan 2024 12:58:15 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532809 Key OkCupid Statistics

Did you know that OkCupid has helped over 2 million people worldwide to find love? For many people, approaching someone they’re attracted to for the first time can be confusing. ...

The post 20+ Most Exciting OkCupid Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key OkCupid Statistics

Did you know that OkCupid has helped over 2 million people worldwide to find love? For many people, approaching someone they’re attracted to for the first time can be confusing.  This is why several people rely on dating apps like OkCupid. OkCupid presents itself as a leading dating platform with a touch of professionalism, improving the way potential partners find each other. The platform makes this easy through a user-friendly questionnaire to support the bond between people seeking compatibility.

Introduced in 2004 by four Harvard students, OkCupid became the first free online dating site ever known. It continued to grow in revenue as the number of users increased and stood at over 70 million last year. An aspect of the platform that contributes to this growth is the multiple types of relationships it contains. So, no matter what kind of relationship you’re searching for, you can find it on this platform. Find all the OkCupid statistics you may seek in this article, including its usage, user population, and many more. Let’s get in.

Key OkCupid Statistics

Key OkCupid Statistics

  1. Users on the platform engage with each other by answering multiple questions.
  2. Over 70 million people were on the platform as of last year (2022).
  3. OkCupid has completed over 2 million matches since its launch.
  4. Men on the platform can find a match in every 40 likes they get.
  5. The average age of users on the platform is 27.
  6. OkCupid has over 2 million active monthly users.
  7. As of the first quarter of 2023, OkCupid’s revenue reached $30 million.
  8. Around 76% of OkCupid users admire lovers of politics.

OkCupid Users Statistics

OkCupid Users Statistics

1. In a Single Year, OkCupid Brings About 91 Million Dates.

Statistics show that about 91 million dates come from OkCupid every year. This success has to do with the site’s matching potential lovers. This matching pattern puts together users who have the same interests and values. This is how OkCupid ensures its users’ compatibility.

2. What Makes OkCupid Outstanding Among Other Dating Apps.

The application was built with an emphasis on compatibility. This is one feature that makes OkCupid different from other dating applications out there. The online dating application was not created for just meet-ups or hook-ups but for meaningful long-term relationships.  A spectacular feature of OkCupid is the in-depth user profiles feature. OkCupid demands elaborate information from intending users about their personalities, beliefs, values, and interests. As such, these profiles created by users help the application analyze and match users with potential partners with whom they are compatible. The platform gives users access to reach members via multiple-choice questions. OkCupid dating app also allows users to upload photos and videos and express themselves using essays, etc.

3. OkCupid’s Conundrum Must Be Answered in the Quest for True Love.

The potential partners must be compatible to make a successful relationship match. OkCupid asks users to answer numerous questions concerning their faith, values, interests, and lifestyle rather than being solely dependent on appearance or age. When two people are compatible, they have the same interests, values, and objectives. This will make communication, understanding, and the resolution of disputes simpler for them. Interestingly, the site has made a name for itself through its matching pattern. For OkCupid, the matching process is as easy as assessing and collecting users’ information provided during registration. Notably, the platform is the only dating site with thousands of questions this year.

4. OkCupid Came Sixth Among the Most Common Dating Platforms Across the World in 2021.

OkCupid became the world’s sixth most popular dating platform, recognized in 2021 when it received 4.48 million monthly downloads. The site maintained this impressive growth, with Forbes evaluating it as the premier online dating platform this year.

5. OkCupid Reaches 500,000 Downloads in a Month.

The barometer of a dating app’s popularity often lies in its download numbers. OkCupid exemplifies this as it hit the 500,000 mark in monthly downloads, with the Google Play Store contributing 300,000 and the Apple Play Store adding 200,000 in May 2020.

6. OkCupid’s User Base Stood at 70 Million in 2022.

The relevance of OkCupid, as one of the pioneering online dating platforms with contemporary features, is evident in its expanding user base. In 2020, it boasted over 50 million registered users, which will surge to 70 million by 2022, showcasing sustained growth since its inception.

7. Almost 40% of OkCupid Users Admit That Their Dating Lives are Affected by Inflation.

Inflation has indeed impacted people who are dating due to the high cost of living. Statistical data reveals that around 40% of OkCupid users feel the economy somewhat influences their dating lives. In a survey, 54% say they can spend $50 and below on a first date, while 36% prefer spending between $51 and $100. 11% of participants said they would like to spend above $100 on their first dates. The spending rate on first dates varies across different age groups and demographics. While some age groups would prefer to spend less on dates, some would pay even more.

8. Over 10 Million Swipes are Made on OkCupid Daily.

OkCupid is an amazing app that can be used for different purposes. The platform features can be explored for other purposes depending on the user’s motive. Drawn from OkCupid swipe statistics, 6% of women and 35% of men swipe profiles. The daily swipe rate for the dating app stands at 10 million, making it one of the most swiped-on dating apps globally. The significant swipe rate proves that OkCupid efficiently seeks love and relationships. This is what makes the app outstanding among other dating apps.

9. More Than 2 Billion Matches Have Been Made on the Dating App Since its Inception.

Some people may ask, “Does OkCupid work? The answer is yes. The online dating platform is responsible for almost 200 million matches across the globe yearly. Statistics also reveal that since its birth in 2004, the app has recorded over 2 billion compatible matches. The figures testify to the platform’s success as an online dating application. This has boosted OkCupid’s reputation while providing more insights and attracting new users.

OkCupid User Demographic Statistics

User Demographic Stats

10. Over 56% of Men are OkCupid Users.

OkCupid’s user gender base is 56% male and 44% female. As dating apps evolve, the male make up the majority of most online dating platform users. The platform’s convenience is attractive, as most men can search for profiles anywhere and anytime. Some other reasons the application usage is common amongst men are choice and ability to explore the app (UX) in search of relationships. Understanding the user base helps identify improvement areas and feature prioritization on the platform.

11. In Every 40 Likes on OkCupid, the Male Makes One Match on Average.

Although OkCupid has more male users, getting matches can be difficult for men. Statistics reveal that a male user of this dating app gets 1 match in every 40 likes sent. This could be attributed to the fact that the application is male-dominated. To this effect, more men compete for women’s attention. Based on statistics, this online dating app is guided by this principle: the more men, the more challenging it is to find a match. In conclusion, men are less likely to find a match on OkCupid than women.

12. Women are Most Likely to Get a Match by 50%.

Unlike OkCupid’s male users, it is easier for the female gender to find a match. Statistical data shows that a woman gets an average of 1 match in every 2 likes sent. This is to say that women have a greater chance of getting a match on OkCupid than men. Although a woman’s chance of getting a match is 50%, this doesn’t apply to every woman.

13. 27 is the Average Age for OkCupid Users.

The average age of OkCupid users is 27 years; nonetheless, anyone within all age groups will have a good time using the app. This dating app is common among millennials and Gen Z. For young people to find love on OkCupid, emphasis should be placed on sincerity in their profile data while exercising patience.

14. 49% of OkCupid Users Fall Between the Ages of 25 and 34.

This international online dating application has users across all age groups, but the most common is the 25-34 age group. Most of its users fall within this age group because there are many singles among younger people. OkCupid’s primary focus on compatibility, amongst other features, makes it exceptional for all age groups, especially millennials.

OkCupid Usage Statistics

OkCupid Usage Statistics

15. There are Over 2 Million OkCupid Monthly Users.

Almost 2 million users actively use the online dating platform every month. These figures show that OkCupid has an enabling platform for users to meet new people and potential partners. This world’s popular dating app, OkCupid, is used by different genders and people with other interests and values.

16. Interestingly, Over 1 Million People Use OkCupid Daily.

OkCupid records over 1 million active users daily, indicating the platform’s popularity. This large user base enhances the chances of its users finding potential partners and proves that the app can be trusted. Users can find that special someone on OkCupid with this high rate of daily logins.

17. Out of All OkCupid Users, 75% Intend to Get into Relationships.

Generally, OkCupid users utilize the app for different purposes, from casual friendships to hook-ups to finding relationships. Interestingly, most people use the app in search of genuine relationships. Some statistical data shows that some OkCupid users acknowledge that environmentalism is one of their passions for using the app. This largely expresses how vital environmentalism contributes to the app’s user base and dating process factor. While it is easy for some to connect with potential partners with just a few swipes, it is challenging for others. Research data shows that only around 75% of OkCupid users want to get into serious relationships.

18. OkCupid Made a Whopping $30 Million in Q1 2023.

As the number of people searching for love partners increases by the day, online dating becomes even more prominent. To this effect, the market revenue increases for apps like OkCupid as the number of users increases. The first quarter of 2023 alone, the app’s revenue was $30 million. This revenue sprouts from downloads and subscriptions from the OkCupid app.

19. Only Around 7% of OkCupid Users Have Hook-ups as Their Intention.

The online dating app was designed for people with diverse intentions and interests. A few 7% of OkCupid users utilize this famous app for the sole purpose of hook-ups. This implies that the app meets the needs of those searching for hook-ups. This may contribute to most casual date culture on the platform.

20. A Massive 76% of OkCupid Users Feel that Political Enthusiasts are Delectable.

In the game of love, attraction differs from person to person. It is believed that most politically inclined individuals are intelligent and well-informed. The majority of OkCupid’s platform users find people who are passionate about politics to be attractive. About 76% of the users feel so about people in this category. This majority think that being political enthusiasts makes them compassionate and trustworthy. This may be good for society but not recommended for their love lives.

Additional OkCupid Statistics

Additional Stats

21. 38% of OkCupid Users Believe Online Dating isn’t Stressful.

Generally speaking, dating can be stressful, but the emergence of online dating apps eases the process. Although some dating apps have many pitfalls, OkCupid may be a great choice. Truly, online dating may be a less stressful way to meet prospective partners by giving you greater control over the process. This method eliminates some of the awkwardness and pressures associated with traditional dating.

22. 37% of OkCupid Users Believe that Online Dating Creates Room for Acquaintanceship.

Around 37% of OkCupid users perceive that online dating helps people get to know themselves better. They also share that these dating sites let people learn about other people’s interests and values at their convenience. Many people may be wondering why online dating helps people know others better. This is because the platform enables users to have intense conversations which may not be the same in person. 

23. 25% of OkCupid Users Utilize the App Due to the Freedom of Dressing Online.

25% of OkCupid users feel they can wear whatever they like. Unlike physical meetings, they think this way because they wouldn’t bother about first impressions. The platform allows users to post pictures and videos expressing their personality. Additionally, online dating allows you to show the world your true self without fear of being judged.

Conclusion

Most people explore many options in their search for love partners, such as social media, dating apps, etc. Finding the right platform in the hunt for a life partner can be tasking, just like dating itself. To help love-seekers find potential partners, most modern-day singles use online dating apps. OkCupid asks users to answer numerous questions on their profiles; these questions are vital for finding the perfect match.

OkCupid poses to remain relevant among other online dating services globally. It has a 5-star rating on Forbes as the leader in the best matchmaking and is a notable recognition for the dating site. These statistics took a deep dive into necessary information to help those searching for partners make informed decisions. The statistics also analyze OkCupid demographics, download rate, user base, and popularity of the online dating service.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is OkCupid for relationships or hook-ups?

What makes OkCupid outstanding?

What online dating site is considered the best?

Sources

The post 20+ Most Exciting OkCupid Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/okcupid-statistics/feed/ 0
Bankruptcy Statistics 2024: Business and Individual Filings https://techreport.com/statistics/bankruptcy-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/bankruptcy-statistics/#respond Thu, 11 Jan 2024 12:46:43 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532748 Key Bankruptcy Statistics

A decade ago, bankruptcy was a remote concept for most Americans, saved for extraordinary crises. Yet, in 2024’s challenging economic climate, insolvency threatens ordinary folks worldwide as filings swell into...

The post Bankruptcy Statistics 2024: Business and Individual Filings appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Bankruptcy Statistics

A decade ago, bankruptcy was a remote concept for most Americans, saved for extraordinary crises. Yet, in 2024’s challenging economic climate, insolvency threatens ordinary folks worldwide as filings swell into court dockets.

We document the unraveling landscape by shadowing a middle manager whose business buckles under pressure. With personal bankruptcies up 13% and business Chapter 11’s rising 30% over last year, these statistics expose systemic cracks. Peering behind the data at underlying forces, from easy post-recession money to the pandemic’s lasting financial carnage, this piece chronicles how an exception has become the norm, with neighbors now seeking legal refuge alongside corporate titans.

Key Bankruptcy Statistics

Key Bankruptcy Statistics 

  1. Personal debt makes up an alarming 97% of filed bankruptcy cases in America.
  2. The issue of unattended medical bills is one major reason people face bankruptcy.
  3. The number of filed bankruptcy cases by the same group of people accounts for 8%.
  4. Reckless spending is the cause of at least 5% of cases of bankruptcy.
  5. People earning less than $30,000 annually make up 60% of filed bankrupt cases
  6. The records show that men are more likely to file for bankruptcy than women
  7. Just 20% of bachelor’s degree holders or more filed bankruptcy cases in 2010.
  8. Corporate bankruptcy in America rose way high in nearly all the quarters of 2020. 
  9. It came as a surprise that 470 companies declared a state of bankruptcy from January 2020 until September. 
  10. 2019 was quite an overwhelming year as over 600 businesses were declared bankrupt by the New York Times. 

2023 Private Bankruptcy Statistics

2023 Private Bankruptcy Statistics 

This section will deal with a lot that has to do with bankruptcy at the personal level. The statistics and numbers here will give you a better understanding of bankruptcy at this level.

1. Personal Debt Makes up as high as 97% of Filed Bankruptcy Cases in America.

The records are plain on this, and who files the most bankruptcy cases cannot be doubted. It is alarming that most cases of bankruptcy that make their way to the law courts are personal. These cases cover student loans, car loans, credit cards, and mortgages. Cases of personal bankruptcy filed in 2019 alone all summed up to 752,160. Personal debt took a large chunk of these cases by 97%. The remaining cases, which totaled 22,780, came from the corporate world and were just 3% of filed cases. Most persons who filed for bankruptcy were not rich, nor did they have some secure investment to fall back on in their low moments. 

2. Unattended Medical Bills are One Major Reason Many People Face Bankruptcy.

Medical expenses stand as one of the main reasons people fall into debt. In the case where a person loses their job, then health issues will cause a strain on the finances. Nerd Wallet says that many Americans struggle to pay their medical bills. It says this will make 1.7 million Americans move to the law courts for bankruptcy protection. One in every five persons in a survey had been called out to pay their debts by collagen agencies. This is quite alarming, as one can only imagine how people go to the lengths of declaring a state of bankruptcy to pay off their medical bills

3. The Number of Filed Cases of Bankruptcy by the Same Group of People Accounts for 8%.

Statistics show that 8% of persons who have stepped out to file bankruptcy have done so before. Surprisingly, 16% of all cases filed are from those who once had a bankruptcy. Most experts see these repeated bankruptcy filings as an exploitation of the law. Little progress has been made so far in preventing the abuse of bankruptcy. This stems from the fact that it is hard to state when or why a person should declare bankruptcy. 8% of people who fall back on bankruptcy see it as the best way to clear their debts and start afresh

4. Reckless Spending is the Cause of Not Less Than 5% of Cases of Bankruptcy.

Cases of bankruptcy from reckless spending are surprisingly low at just 5%. A lot of cases of bankruptcy caused by spending come from financial hardships. This is mainly from low-income earners who sometimes face issues of health or even the loss of a job. This case makes the person run into debt and cripples the finance to a state of bankruptcy. In such instances, declaring a state of bankruptcy will help a great deal to ease the burden.

5. People Earning Less Than $30,000 Annually Make up 60% of Filed Bankrupt Cases.

An analysis made in 2011 showed that the number of bankruptcies that were filed fell from what it was four years before. This was a record success as it was at 66% four years ago. At the same time, there was an increase in the number of bankruptcies filed by persons who earned over $60,000 yearly. This was indeed a rise from where it stood at 5.5% to 9.2%. These events at the time showed that no one can be immune to financial troubles. 

6. The Records Show That Men Are More Likely to File for Bankruptcy Than Women.

The numbers of men and women who filed for bankruptcy are almost the same percentage. Men stood at 52%, while women were a little lower at 48%. Married couples within the same period made up 64% of private bankruptcies. The records also include those filed by those who jointly pay their taxes. Those who are widowed made up 3% of cases, single persons stood at 17%, and those who were divorced took up 15%. 

7. A Mere 20% of Bachelor’s Degree Holders or More Filed Cases of Bankruptcy in 2010.

A study done in 2011 showed that people with a good education level fall more into bankruptcy. This is not far from the truth, as many graduates struggle to repay student loans. Nearly 36% of submitted bankruptcy cases came from those with just a high school certificate. Those with a college degree held 29% of the cases filed over time.

American Corporate Bankruptcy Statistics

American Corporate Bankruptcy

8. Corporate Bankruptcy in America Rose Way High for Nearly all the Quarters of 2020.

The bankruptcy rate in the corporate world was a cause of concern for many experts in 2020. As high as 33% was filed from corporations in the first quarter of 2020. The average over the entire period stood at 18%. Large cases of bankruptcy in the same quarter stood at 6% as private companies had 25% filed cases. In the third quarter of the same year, 49% of organizations filed bankruptcy cases. Mega bankruptcy over the third quarter jumped to 15%. Public filings during this time stood at 26%, while cases filed by private companies made up 23%.

9. It was a Shock to Many, as 470 Companies Declared a State of Bankruptcy from January 2020 Until September.

This was indeed very surprising as this had never happened after 2010. When the 2020 curtain was drawn to a close, 500 companies emerged bankrupt. This was disheartening as 30 more companies were added to the already high number. Over the period, Advanzeon Solutions, alongside KB Holdings, Providence Hospital, and several others, filed a bankruptcy case of Chapter 11. These companies and many others, totaling 500, declared bankruptcy. 

10. 2019 was Quite an Overwhelming Year as Over 600 Businesses Were Declared Bankrupt by the New York Times.

One year that will continue to ring in the corporate world of Americans is 2019. It was a heavy year, with 636 bankruptcy cases from New York. California was not left out; it came second place with 577 bankruptcy cases. Right after, it was the city of Texas with 530 filed cases. Following closely was Illinois, with 486 filed cases, and in fifth place was Pennsylvania, with 483 bankruptcies.

2023 Bankruptcy Statistics

2023 Stats

11. Bankruptcy Rose 10% at the End of June 2023.

The number of bankruptcy filings from both the personal and corporate worlds rose 10% over 12 months. The number of cases has risen as high as 418,724. This is quite alarming, considering the 380,634 filed cases in 2022. Business bankruptcy filings rose from 12,748 to a high of 15,724 on the last day of June 2023. Personal bankruptcy at the same period stood out at 403,000, a rise from its earlier 367,886 in 2022.

12. Personal Filings Fell to a Downhill of 23.6% Bankruptcy at the Close of 2021.

Personal bankruptcy achieved quite a feat when it fell from a height of 522,808 to a low of 399,269 at the close of 2021. This brought hope as many saw it as reviving economic health. The courts were left idle as they had fewer cases to deal with in the year. Many tied the sharp rise to the bonus given out freely to persons without jobs during the pandemic.

13. Alaska had the Least Number of Filed Cases for Bankruptcy in 2021.

In 2021, there were only 107 filed bankruptcy cases in just Alaska. California had a record high of 18,817 during the same period. Other states like Montana, South Dakota, New Hampshire, North Dakota, and Maine were able to keep it under 300 filed cases all through 2021. Other states followed in the steps of California with more than 6,000 files of bankruptcy, including Florida, Ohio, Indiana, New York, Alabama, and a few others.

14. The United States had 413,616 Filed Cases in a Single Year.

The year 2021 saw a drop in the number of filed bankruptcy cases. It fell from the level of 544,463 in 2020 to end in 413,616 cases. This was, however, a fall of 24% from what it was at the end of 2020. Bankruptcy can be said to be falling ever since the pandemic crisis of 2019 and 2020. Business filings were not left out, as they fell by 33.7%. It stood at 21,655 in 2020, losing to 14,347 at the close of 2021. One can only hope that this drop in bankruptcy will continue in the long haul.

15. The Number of Corporate Fillings Took a Hike in 2022 by 32%.

Government relief programs greatly helped wade off bankruptcy issues from 2020 to 2022. This cutoff created a gap in American businesses in 2022. There was a hike in the number of filed bankruptcy cases in the first two parts of 2022. Corporate bankruptcy went all high to 250 at the end of April 2022. This scenario will likely keep on as the economy goes downhill.

16. The Debt Rate Increased to 15% in 2022.

Experts forecasted that 2022 will most likely see a hike in the rate of bankruptcy by 15%. To counter this, some measures were implemented by the United States.

Conclusion 

The issue of bankruptcy is tackled yearly, not just in the United States but worldwide. Taking a cue from the United States, we can see that the government plays a major role in fighting bankruptcy. The belief that filing for bankruptcy is the last option for anyone is not far from the truth. Anyone who can clear their debt is way above getting bankrupt. But it would be wrong not to remember that uncertainties such as accidents or even ill health can drive one to the state of bankruptcy. Given all these, one can only ask this penitent question: can I pay my debt within 5 years? If not., then filing for bankruptcy will not be a bad idea.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can just anyone file for bankruptcy?

How can bankruptcy be defined?

What are the various types of bankruptcy?

Sources

The post Bankruptcy Statistics 2024: Business and Individual Filings appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/bankruptcy-statistics/feed/ 0
Kraken Statistics – How Many People Use it in 2024? https://techreport.com/statistics/kraken-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/kraken-statistics/#respond Thu, 11 Jan 2024 12:37:46 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532688 Some Exciting Kraken Statistics

The cryptocurrency space has exploded over these past few years. When Bitcoin, the first cryptocurrency, was created, the general public was skeptical. Despite their disbelief in the asset, its price...

The post Kraken Statistics – How Many People Use it in 2024? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Some Exciting Kraken Statistics

The cryptocurrency space has exploded over these past few years. When Bitcoin, the first cryptocurrency, was created, the general public was skeptical. Despite their disbelief in the asset, its price kept going up. This attracted many to join the trend. More people and businesses are now interested in acquiring it. However, the only problem they were having was how actually to buy or store these assets. Fortunately, that’s the role crypto exchanges like Kraken are playing. Kraken ranks third on the BitDegree Exchange Tracker. The crypto exchange has a weekly trading volume of $138,192,522,565 on average

Kraken helps users to buy, sell, and trade different cryptocurrencies without stress. To add to the joy, all these are done in one place. This platform is an all-in-one forum, making things easy for even newbies in the space.

Since many started using the platform, it has gained much popularity. Surveys show that Kraken has brought over 8 million users from around the globe to its platform. This indicates that millions of people have come to depend strongly on this platform. As such, one of every five crypto traders relies primarily on Kraken to exchange and store assets. This article will examine more facts and Kraken statistics that crypto lovers need to know about the exchange.

Some Exciting Kraken Statistics

Some Exciting Kraken Statistics

  1. The exchange has exploded to over 10 million active users in 2023 alone. 
  2. Kranken receives nearly a million visitors every week. As of October 2023, Kraken got an average of 970,000 weekly visits from users. 
  3. The United States has always been at the forefront of expanding cryptocurrency. Therefore, it’s no surprise that over 36 percent of Kraken’s audience comes from this place.
  4. Demographically, Kraken attracts a lot of digital assets enthusiasts in their late 20s to mid-30s. 
  5. Surprisingly, more dudes are trading on Kraken. The report says they make up almost 74% of Kraken’s customers. 
  6. Most people visiting Kraken come directly to the website or app, not links or search engines
  7. Beyond that, this company keeps extending its reach all over the world. Presently, it serves customers from more than 190 different countries. 
  8. Kraken recorded yearly high inflows and outflows on the same day in November 2023. The customers also moved lots of funds in and out of the platform on the same day.

About Kraken

About Kraken

Created in 2011, Kraken remains among the long-existing crypto exchanges. Its headquarters is located in the United States. It was among the first Bitcoin exchanges listed on the Bloomberg terminal. Users from more than 190 countries have access to the Kraken exchange. These include people from the United States, Australia, the UK, Japan, Canada, and Germany. However, the exchange is restricted in some regions and countries. Notably, Kraken is not available in some OFAC nations like Iran, Cuba, Afghanistan, Libya, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, North Korea, Yemen, and others.

Kraken Regulation

Kraken complies with regulatory standards and requirements in different regions:

  • The exchange runs business as a Money Service Business (MSB) in the United States
  • In Canada, the exchange bagged an MSB.
  • In the United Arab Emirates, it acquired a Financial Service Provider (FSP) license.
  • The United Kingdom confers the exchange of the title of a crypto asset company with a futures trading license.

Globally, Kraken has licenses from the following regulators.

  • Financial Crimes Enforcement Network (FinCEN) in the United States.
  • Financial Conduct Authority in the United Kingdom.
  • Financial Transactions and Reports Analysis Centre of Canada (FINTRAC) in Canada.
  • Abu Dhabi Global Market (ADGM) in the United Arab Emirates.
  • Abu Dhabi Global Market (ADGM) by FSRA in Abu Dhabi.
  • Digital Currency Exchange (DCE) by AUSTRAC in Australia.
  • Virtual Asset Service Provider (VASP) by OAM in Italy.

Kraken User Statistics You Should Know

Kraken User Statistics You Should Know

1. Kraken has an Army of Crypto Traders These Days.

We’re talking about over 10 million people who use the platform regularly. The customers depend on the platform to satisfy their different crypto needs. This is amazing, considering they had 6 million customers a few years back.

2. Nearly a Million Folks Drop by to Visit the Platform Every Week.

Sometimes, we wonder if they’re checking the coin’s price or trying to take a quick trade. However, Kraken has captured many crypto traders.

3. The United States has the Highest Number of Kraken Users, Representing 36.65% of Kraken’s Core Audience.

Data on Kraken.com website traffic by countries showed that the United States has the highest number of Kraken users. It has 1.95 users, representing about 36.65% of Kraken’s global audience. 67.35% of US users use Kraken through mobile devices, while 32.65% come through desktops. Below is a table showing Kraken’s customers in some countries and the devices they use:

Country Global representation All devices Mobile Desktop
United Kingdom 11.52% 612.83K 69.91% 30.09%
Canada 10.53% 560.28K 81.2% 18.8%
France 5.06% 269.29K 49.52% 50.48%
Spain 4.86% 258.53K 81.59% 18.41%

4. 33.62% of Kraken Users are in the Age Category of 25 – 35 Years, Representing the Largest Age Class.

According to Kraken’s official user demographics by age, 33.62% of users are between 25 and 34. Audiences in this age category are the largest class of users. The 35 – 44 years category came second, representing about 22.09% of users, while the 18 – 24 years class came third, making up 18.06% of users. The 45 – 54 years and 55 – 64 years classes represent 13.35% and 7.73% respectively. The lowest class, comprising just 4.61% of the total users, belongs to those up to 65 years and above.

5. 73.97% of Kraken Users are Male.

Male clients on Kraken constitute 73.97% of the exchange’s total user base. This indicates that males prefer Kraken more than females, comprising 26.03% of users.

6. 67.44% of Visitors on the Kraken Website are From Direct.

Kraken records visit from different sources. About 67.44% of visitors on the Kraken site come from Direct, representing the highest source of visitors. Google takes the second place for the source of visitors with 16.68%. However, 48.25% of visitors on Kraken.com move to Google.com as their top destination. With 4.37%, etana.com takes the second top destination for visitors from Kraken.com.

7. Kraken’s Monthly Visits Plummeted by 3.33% for September 2023.

Kraken recorded about 5.32 million visits for September 2023. This value reflected a 3.33% drop from the 5.5 million visits in August. Meanwhile, the exchange saw up to 6.19 million visits in July. The monthly visits for September have an average session duration of 12.06.

8. 63.17% of Visitors on Kraken.com Use Mobile Devices.

According to a study on traffic by device shared on Kraken.com, 63.17% of visitors to the site are from mobile devices. Desktops constitute just 36.83% of the total visits on Kraken.com.

9. YouTube Bags the Largest Social Media Traffic to Kraken With 77.57% Engagement.

Most social media traffic to Kraken comes from YouTube, with 77.57% engagement. Instagram claimed the second position with 17.52% and Facebook the third with 4.91% user engagement.

10. Kraken is the Third-largest Crypto Exchange, With a Ranking Score 8.3.

According to CoinMarketCap ranking, Kraken is the third-largest crypto exchange, after Coinbase and Binance. Kraken scored 8.3, while CMC scored Binance and Coinbase 9.9 and 8.6, respectively.

11. Kraken is Available in More Than 190 Countries Across the World.

Users from more than 190 different countries have access to Kraken. These include the United States, the United Kingdom, France, Spain, Canada, Japan, Germany, Australia, and others. It is known that Kraken might not be the biggest crypto exchange presently. However, this company has prioritized the safety of its customers’ funds while making trading very simple. This means that both retail traders and institutions can now trade different crypto assets at ease. Regretfully, certain individuals who reside in New York and Washington are prohibited from creating new accounts on the platform. Additionally, American clients can no longer participate in Kraken’s staking programs to get payouts. However, the door is wide open for users outside of America.

Kraken Exchange Statistics

Kraken Exchange Statistics

12. Despite the market being dominated by platforms like Coinbase and Binance, Kraken could still take a tiny piece of nearly 3% of the worldwide volume

13. According to experts, more than 400 million people currently possess some amount of digital assets. It now makes sense why exchanges like Kraken are growing exponentially. 

14. Just this November, Kraken saw massive spikes in customers putting in and taking out of the platform. 

15. The report shows that exchange accounts for 2% of global trading activity. Meanwhile, OKX has the highest while Binance follows as the second.

16. Not so fast; Kraken’s workforce alone has doubled recently. Incredibly, the workforce is now more than 225 people. Therefore, even if an army of new crypto converts comes knocking, Kraken has the staff and equipment to let them in.

Year  Number of Staff
2022 225+ employees
2021 225 employees
2020 131 employees
2019 107 employees
2018 82 employees
2017 50 employees
2016 30 employees

17. “Kraken” is the top keyword search for Kraken, with 32.53%. The most-searched keyword in all Kraken-related inquiries is “Kraken,” which accounts for 32.53% of total searches. Other fascinating stats show Kraken searches are on the rise big time.

18. Keywords like “Kraken crypto” make up almost 2% of online searches lately. 

19. And “Kraken login” plus “Kraken exchange” combine for over 2.5%. Even searches concerning staking on Kraken are approaching 1%. This figure means millions of crypto fans flow into Kraken monthly to open accounts, access their wallets, stake, trade, etc.

Kraken Financial Statistics

Financial Stats

Kraken has proven to be more useful in the cryptocurrency market. Outside crypto trading, few things are more important than liquidity (the ability to rapidly buy and sell assets without crashing the price).

20. In 2023, Kraken has facilitated around $1 billion of daily trading volume, but that’s on average. This figure might seem like a drop compared to 2021’s bonanza, when different crypto assets hit an all-time high.

21. Kraken supports about 228 different cryptocurrencies and fiats in 2023. Also, it has up to 657 trading pairs available for investors and traders on the platform. So whether you’re an institutional whale looking to move large money or just a little fish for buying crypto assets, Kraken has the volume and infrastructure to get you swimming through the crypto market.

22. Bitcoin/US Dollar pairing see the highest 24-hour trade volume at $105 million for just one day. This makes it the most popular trading pair in the exchange. Also, it means that despite the growth of other cryptos, Bitcoin remains the most in-demand asset on Kraken.

23. On average, Kraken facilitated almost fifty billion dollars in monthly trades last year. As mentioned before, this huge trading volume enables smooth liquidity and shows how active users are on the platform. Here is a view of the exchange’s monthly trading volume in the past few years:

Year  Monthly average trading volume
2022 $33.14 billion
2021 $66.90 billion
2020 $2.06 billion
2019 $3.24 billion
2018 $12.64 billion
2017 $28.96 million
2016 $117.68 million

The crypto market has been on a wide ride these past few years. Prices of different assets shoot up very high and then drop back. Kraken and other similar platforms have probably had a tough time trying to make the market stable.

Additional Kraken Statistics

Additional Stats

24. Last two years ago, in 2021, when the price of Bitcoin was near $70,000, Kraken moved around $800 billion in assets each day. But this didn’t last for as long as expected. 

25. Last year, 2022, when the crypto winter kicked in and prices tanked, trading volume on Kraken plunged by half. But, the exchange still facilitated almost $400 billion in trades.

26. Adding to this, its revenue dipped a little last quarter by over 3 percent. But remember, that’s how the cryptocurrency works. Nothing is 100 percent sure! So, while Kraken rides both the market’s peaks and valleys, its continued growth over the long run has proven that the exchange is here to stay. Here is a representation of Kraken’s yearly revenue over the past few years.

Year Revenue
2022 $47.11 million
2021 $25.63 million
2020 $12.27 million
2019 $15.15 million
2018 $6.70 million
2017 $3.53 million
2016 $2.26 million

Kraken keeps making its customers proud by keeping its head above water. Running or operating a big trading exchange like Kraken isn’t cheap. You will need infrastructure, staff, marketing, and top security mechanisms.

27. Kraken recorded a small net loss of $1.8 million in 2022. And reports show that it hasn’t had a profitable year since 2016. Despite these losses, the platform still focuses on its long-term goals.

28. The good news is Kraken has turned the hand of the clock. Its net income turned positive in the first half of this year to $1.14 million. This figure is not huge, but it is still better than being negative. The table below reveals Kraken’s total income over the past few years:

Year Net Income
2022 -$1.89 million
2021 -$2.82 million
2020 -$3.96 million
2019 -$2.12 million
2018 -$2.12 million
2017 -$1.81 million
2016 -$1.07 million

Conclusion

Through this article, you’ve discovered that more than 10 million people use Kraken. Based on its simple and thrilling user interface and low trading charges, the exchange has risen among the prominent platforms in the industry. Moreover, the Kraken exchange performed satisfactorily, increasing most of its users’ trust over the years. You can browse the Kraken platform and check if the features satisfy your investment activity. However, consider your risk tolerance in the highly volatile crypto market.

Frequently Asked Questions

How many users does Kraken have?

What is Kraken valuation?

Are Kraken services available in the US?

Sources

The post Kraken Statistics – How Many People Use it in 2024? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/kraken-statistics/feed/ 0
Festive Travel Statistics: Christmas and New Year’s Eve Getaway Trends https://techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/#respond Thu, 11 Jan 2024 12:29:07 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532936 Travel bag with Santa hat on a beach

Christmas holidays might be over, but the festive travel statistics and trends are as hot as ever. Although COVID-19 impacted many people’s Christmas and New Year’s Eve traveling arrangements, the...

The post Festive Travel Statistics: Christmas and New Year’s Eve Getaway Trends appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Travel bag with Santa hat on a beach

Christmas holidays might be over, but the festive travel statistics and trends are as hot as ever. Although COVID-19 impacted many people’s Christmas and New Year’s Eve traveling arrangements, the pandemic is over, and festive travel is on its way back.

For that reason, it’s important to stay up to date with the latest holiday travel trends and plans. Not only can these plans significantly impact their spending patterns, but they can also be an example of macro-economic trends that prevailed in the last few years and are likely to prevail in the future.

We’ve put together this guide to the Christmas and NYE getaway statistics and trends around the world. We delve into the festive travel choices made by people worldwide, the most popular destinations for holiday travel, and the possible future trends for traveling during this period. Let’s dive in.

Key Festive Travel Statistics

1. Only 6% of US residents (20 million people) chose to go on a Christmas vacation in 2023. Most people preferred to stay home for Christmas.
2. Over 8 million of UK residents have gone abroad this holiday season by air travel alone.
3. 57% of Nigerians travel within their country to visit their relatives during the Xmas season. For Kenyans, the figure is 64% and for South Africans, it’s 60%.
4. Over 50% of Christmas travelers stay in London for 10 days or more, and London’s popularity as a Xmas destination grew 11% from 2022.
5. Four out of ten top global vacation destinations by hotel occupancy are located in APAC – they are Phuket, Tokyo, Sydney, and Taiwan.

Holiday Travel Statistics by Region

Christmas vacation score by country
Source: Statista

First of all, how many people around the world actually choose to go on Christmas vacations and what are their main reasons for doing so? Let’s take a closer look at how this manifested across different countries and regions, as well as extrapolate key trends.

The Americas

Number of people traveling home during the 2022-2023 holiday season in the US
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/

The song “Driving Home for Christmas” is very telling – most people who travel during Christmas in the US do so to get home. In fact, over 100 million US residents (almost 33% of the total US population) drove home for Christmas in 2023. By comparison, 7.5 million Americans flew home last year.

In contrast, only 6% of US residents (20 million people) chose to go on a Christmas vacation in 2023. Understandably, most people preferred to stay home for Christmas. By comparison, 7% of Mexico residents (approximately 8.9 million) went on vacation for a Christmas.

EMEA

Most popular UK airports for Christmas traveling in 2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/

Given the freedom of movement in the EU, more people there travel for Christmas than in the US – whether it’s to see their family in another country or to go on a ski holiday.

The Christmas travel trend is particularly prevalent in the UK. Although 66% of Brits spent Christmas at home in 2023, a significant proportion of UK residents have gone abroad this holiday season – over 8 million by air travel alone, to be precise. In 2022, that figure was just 5 million.

Many of these travelers prefer to go to sunny destinations to escape the rough British winters, such as Turkey and the Canary Islands. However, some Brits love traveling to Lapland: over 40,000 British residents visited Santa’s homeland last year with just one travel agency.

Africa

Christmas traveling in Africa, 2021-2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/

It seems that many residents of African countries, such as Kenya, Nigeria, and South Africa, go on a trip during the Christmas holidays. The majority of these trips are, however, domestic and involve visiting family.

57% of Nigerians travel within their country to visit their relatives. For Kenyans, the figure is 64%, and for South Africans, it’s 60%.

Few Africans travel abroad during the holidays. The figures for each of the aforementioned countries don’t constitute more than 10%.

APAC

Average spending per person on flights in Australi, October 2023
Source: Statista

 

Not every APAC country celebrates Christmas and New Year’s at the end of December. Despite that, the region is a popular destination for travelers around the world during the festive season.

Many countries, especially in the South East Asia, are warm and sunny all year round, making them popular among travelers from colder parts of the world.

For instance, 2023’s Christmas and New Year’s Eve bookings in APAC were 10% higher than the year before, according to Amadeus. In the next section, we examine the most popular festive period destinations in APAC and other regions.

Now that we’ve taken a look at the regional Christmas travel trends, let’s take a look at the most popular getaways of the festive season.

Destinations

Most popular Chrismast and New Year's destinations in 2023 per region
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/

Amadeus’ 2023 report reveals the top Christmas holiday destination to be Los Cabos, Mexico. But how does it stack up against other popular festive destinations?

APAC

As we mentioned above, the Asia-Pacific region is growing in popularity for the festive season. Four out of ten top global vacation destinations by hotel occupancy are located in APAC, according to Amadeus. They are Phuket, Tokyo, Sydney, and Taiwan.

In the 2023 Christmas season, the occupancy rate in Phuket was 69%, while Sydney has seen the highest increase in popularity: it’s up 22% from 2022.

EMEA

Most popular EMEA Chrismas and New Year's destinations in 2023 by occupancy
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/

According to RateGain, the top Christmas travel destinations for Europeans are:

  • London. The festivities in Covent Garden and the stunning Christmas light displays are big reasons for the UK capital’s popularity during the festive season. Over 50% of Christmas travelers stay in London for 10 days or more, and London’s popularity as a Xmas destination grew 11% from 2022.
  • Berlin. The popularity of the German capital during Christmas is largely thanks to the famous German Christmas markets. The majority of visitors spend 4 days or less in Berlin during the festive season.
  • Paris. The world’s most romantic city is also a popular Christmas destination. 63% of festive travelers linger there for a week or more.

However, Rome was the destination that experienced the highest increase in demand in the 2023 Christmas season – it’s up 33% from 2022.

Outside Europe, the popular EMEA Christmas travel destinations are Cape Town, which had a 71% occupancy during the 2023 festive season, and Dubai, with a 48% occupancy rate.

The Americas

As we mentioned above, a resort in Mexico was the top Christmas travel destination in 2023. Cancun was another popular destination, with an occupancy rate of 69%. In fact, the entire LATAM region’s popularity grew 4% in 2023, compared to 2022.

When it came to North America, Honolulu’s 64% occupancy took the crown as the most popular Christmas destination. Another Hawaiian location, Kahului, came second with 57%.

Accommodation

Occupancy rate in French mountain resorts, 2019-2021
Source: Statista

 

The festive season is one of the busiest times of the year for the hospitality industry, especially hotels and resorts. So, it’s no surprise that many providers look to raise prices and make the most of the season.

For instance, Airbnb hosts earned $107 million during Christmas Eve 2021 and $104 million after Boxing Day in the US alone, albeit slightly less than $112 million earned during the earlier Thanksgiving period.

It also sees a lot of New Year’s Eve travelers, an estimated 4.5 million guests around the world stayed in Airbnb accommodations on New Year’s Eve in 2021.

These figures tell us of the users’ increasing preferences for Airbnb. However, they don’t mean that people aren’t staying in traditional accommodations, quite the contrary. In 2021, the US hotel occupancy rate during the Christmas season was 47.3%, the highest figure ever recorded.

However, the COVID-19 pandemic delivered a significant hit to the hotel industry. For instance, the occupancy rate of French mountain resorts dropped from an average of 83% (2019-2020) to just 37% (2020-2021) during the Christmas season.

Transportation

Holiday travel forecast 2022
Source: Statista

As we mentioned before, driving is one of the most common ways of traveling around Christmas in the US, whether you’re going to see family in another state or trying to get some winter sun in Florida.

In 2022, the number of Christmas and New Year travelers in the US who drove reached 101.8 million, 2 million more than the year before. About 7.17 million people flew, and 3.66 million chose other methods of transport.

We delved into the statistics of festive season traveling, covering going home for Christmas and Christmas vacation preferences. As you can see, many people around the world prefer to stay home for Christmas, but a significant proportion of the population does enjoy going abroad, especially in Europe and the UK.

Marketers should, therefore, pay attention to the behaviors of that group and the key trends influencing their festive travel choices. Below, we put together some possible future Christmas and NYE travel trends worth bearing in mind.

Authentic Experiences

Travelers are increasingly choosing authentic, off-the-beaten-path adventures, and we predict that the festive season would be no exception. After all, Christmas is a time for connections, and meaningful connections are an increasingly significant priority for travelers.

Immersion in different cultures is also important, especially for families with children.

Sustainability

In an increasingly eco-conscious world and with Christmas gift choices becoming more sustainable, it’s very likely that Christmas travel choices will be impacted by the sustainability trend as well.

Travelers would be likely to choose destinations that prioritize sustainability, and the means of travel that reduce carbon footprint.

We believe that the travel industry is likely to respond to these preferences by promoting eco-friendly accommodations, transport, and activities.

Staying Connected

As we already mentioned, the holiday season is the time for connecting with loved ones. Digital transformation and advancements in telecommunications are making that possible, even if you’re far away from home.

Furthermore, increased connectivity and flexible working arrangements would allow many travelers to start enjoying an exotic destination early on in the festive season whilst working remotely, which enables savings on what would normally be expensive Christmas travel arrangements.

Shifts in Holiday Travel Statistics

As you’ve seen from this guide and our other festive guides, the Christmas season is a very important season for marketers. It signifies pivotal shifts in consumers’ behavior as they take advantage of sales and shop for presents.

The travel industry is no exception to this. Even though many people choose to stay home for Christmas, the numbers clearly show there’s a significant trend of festive travelers in every region, and their holiday choices have a significant economic impact.

Whether you stayed home this Christmas or went somewhere nice, the TechReport team hopes you had a wonderful time! Do let us know your favorite Christmas destinations in the comments.

Sources

Click to see all sources
  1. Number of year end holiday travelers forecast in the United States in 2022, by mode of transport (Statista)
  2. Number of year-end holiday travelers in the United States from 2018 to 2020, by transport type (Statista)
  3. Share of adults that plan on traveling to a vacation destination or gathering during the holidays in the United States in 2021, by holiday type (Statista)
  4. Share of citizens travelling during Christmas in Kenya as of 2022 (Statista)
  5. Share of citizens travelling during Christmas in South Africa as of 2022 (Statista)
  6. Share of citizens travelling during Christmas in Nigeria as of 2021 (Statista)
  7. Travel plans for New Year’s holidays in Russia in 2021 (Statista)
  8. Share of citizens travelling during Christmas in Nigeria as of 2021, by destination (Statista)
  9. Share of citizens travelling during Christmas in Kenya as of 2021, by destination (Statista)
  10. Share of citizens travelling during Christmas in South Africa as of 2021, by destination (Statista)
  11. Forecasted average spending per person on flights and travel during the Christmas period in Australia as at October 2023, by generation (Statista)
  12. Most popular ways to spend the Christmas holidays in Japan in 2022 (Statista)
  13. Christmas Vacations Score Low on This Year’s Wishlists (Statista)
  14. DRIVING Home for Christmas (Statista)
  15. Occupancy rate in mountain resorts in France from season 2019-2020 to season 2020-2021, by vacation period (Statista)
  16. Millions of Brits head abroad for The Great Christmas and New Year Getaway (ABTA)
  17. Five million Brits head abroad for the Great Christmas and New Year Getaway (ABTA)
  18. Jingle All the Way: Europe Christmas Travel Trends (RateGain)
  19. Thailand takes lead in Asia for Christmas and New Year’s hotspots (WiT)
  20. Most Profitable Events, Weekends, Holidays, and Times of the Year for Airbnb Hosts (Hostaway)
  21. US Hotels Set Performance Records Over Holidays (CoStar)

The post Festive Travel Statistics: Christmas and New Year’s Eve Getaway Trends appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/festive-travel-statistics/feed/ 0
Key Bumble Statistics in 2024 (65+ Facts) https://techreport.com/statistics/bumble-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/bumble-statistics/#respond Wed, 10 Jan 2024 19:20:56 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532642 General Bumble Statistics

Romance once sprouted from chance bonds in parks and bars; now, screens sprout relationships as singles seek love online. Amid the hustle, apps fill the gap left by vanished meet-cutes....

The post Key Bumble Statistics in 2024 (65+ Facts) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
General Bumble Statistics

Romance once sprouted from chance bonds in parks and bars; now, screens sprout relationships as singles seek love online. Amid the hustle, apps fill the gap left by vanished meet-cutes. Cue Bumble: Female-founded and personality-focused, its welcoming hive hosts 70 million users and counting.

Through one young professional’s eyes, as she downloads Bumble in 2024, we explore the app behind 30% year-over-year revenue spikes. Weighing growth against Bumble’s core character, analyzing data and demographics pre- and post-recent acquisition, this glimpse inside the busy hive evaluates whether Bumble can scale rapport-building algorithms without losing the magic kindling it pioneered. Let’s explore the key Bumble statistics and how it ranks with other dating apps.

General Bumble Statistics

General Bumble Statistics

  1. The online dating service has 42 million users every month on average.
  2. Bumble is the second most frequently used online dating platform in America, bested by only Tinder, according to a report by Wikipedia.
  3. Forbes magazine reported the platform was worth over $1 billion as of 2017.
  4. In 2019, the dating platform stated it has users across 150 countries globally, amounting to about 55 million subscribers collectively.
  5. The headquarters of the dating service is in Austin, Texas. 
  6. Bumble’s total assets were valued at $3.69 billion as of 2022.

Historical Bumble Statistics

Historical Bumble Statistics

7. Bumble was founded by an American business lady in the person of Whitney Wolfe Herd in 2014.

8. Whitney Wolfe Herd was also a co-founder of the Tinder dating platform before she left. 

9. Despite being known as the founder and CEO of Bumble, Whitney Wolfe Herd has only 20% ownership of the company, whereas a business tycoon, Andrey Andreev, controls 79% ownership of the company. This was an agreed-upon arrangement from their partnership to create the company.

10. Dating cyberspace was reported to have 650 people on its payroll globally as of 2021. 

11. Through a partnership with an audio/media streaming platform, Spotify, the team linked Spotify accounts to subscribers’ profiles. The aim is to help users see the audio preferences of their potential dating partners. 

12. To get rid of subscribers who use symbols on their profiles linked to hate speech, the service formed a partnership with the Anti-Defamation League, a non-governmental Jewish platform based in New York that focuses on civil law and strongly fights comments perceived to be hostile or show discrimination towards the Jews, including comments flagged as being extreme. This took place in August 2017.

13. In April 2019, the company launched a lifestyle magazine called “Bumble Mag.”

14. The mother company of Badoo dating service and Bumble, formerly called MagicLab, was renamed Bumble Inc. in 2020

15. The first brand to be owned by Bumble Inc. was a dating service called Fruitz. This service emerged in February 2022.

Annual Revenue Bumble Statistics

Annual Revenue

16. The online dating platform recorded making $10 million in 2016. 

17. In 2017, the company made earnings of $100 million, 900% more than what was obtained in 2016.

18. The following year, 2018, it enjoyed success with a 90% improvement in income, with a total of $190 million at the end of the year. 

19. According to a report by BusinessOfApps, the service made $240 million as of 2019, a progress of 23%, give or take. 

20. COVID-19 didn’t stop Bumble’s operations. Instead of falling, it made $91 million and rose to $337 million, meaning it gained by 38%. 

21. Generally, the online dating niche revealed growth of $532 million, showing a 58% improvement in value. 

22. As many people started using Bumble in 2022, the capital rose to $694 million, showing a 30.5% growth.

23. According to HelpLama, 2018 was a good year for Bumble. This is because 11.1 million users started using it.

24. Many people have also started downloading it on their devices. This interest showed a rise of 34%, 14.9 million plus. As it grew, the income also increased in 2019.  

25. The global pandemic didn’t stop the site, as there were 19 million connections in 2020. This connects means it had a 28% boom from its previous years.  

26. 22 million persons used their devices to download Bumble in 2021. This number of people shows it grew by 16%.

27. Bumble recorded 28 million links in 2022, all through its app. This was a 27% growth.

Download Statistics According to Region

Download Statistics According to Region

The US

28. The stats in 2020 showed 8.1 million app downloads.

29. A rise of 0.4 million was seen on record in 202. That was a 5% rise in its growth margin, pushing the downloads to 8.5 million.

30. A $10.7 million in income was realized in 2020 for Bumble. This was about 26% more than what was made in 2021.

North and Latin America

31. According to the report from BackLinko, of the global downloads, 56.6% came from the North and Latin American regions as of 2020.

32. Back in 2018, when there were fewer dating services, North and Latin America were responsible for 69.16% of the online dating market through Bumble, with 7,683,346 downloads globally. 

33. A year later, in 2019, the market share in this region dropped to 61.55% as more dating services came online, increasing competition. This area recorded a total of 9,189,872 downloads.

Asia-Pacific

34. About 1,129,401 downloads were made in this region as of 2018, controlling 10.12% of the global market share.

35. In 2019, due to the scarcity of dating services in the region, Bumble continued to flourish, improving its market share by holding 18.43% of the global share. It also got a collective total of 2,751,679 downloads.

36. Unlike in North and Latin America, the dating platform continued to become more popular without lots of serious contenders in 2020. As such, it got about 3,838,507 confirmed downloads and a market share rise of 20.83%.

37. The first quarter of the year under review began with 308,837 downloads, which ended with a slight drop to 302,358 downloads.

38. A continuous download drop was observed when the second quarter commenced. It started with 290,965 downloads and declined to 284,655 at the end of this period.

39. Bumble looked promising in the third quarter when it kicked off with 340,180 downloads. But it spiraled down to 232,317 downloads by September.

40. Starting with 312,764 downloads, the year’s final quarter was the most successful for Bumble in this region. The download figure increased to 428,257 in November, with a slight reduction to 421,283 downloads at the quarter’s end.

Africa, Europe, and the Middle East

41. The three regions collectively accounted for 20.67% of the global market share, with about 2.3 million downloads as of 2018.

42. In 2019, despite an increase in downloads, with 3 million, give or take, Bumble’s market shares in these regions dropped to 20.02%. This could be attributed to more dating platforms entering the market. 

43. Even with other dating apps competing in the market, Bumble blossomed with an impressive 4.1 million downloads as of 2020. This number took its global market share up to 22.56% from these geographical locations. If you need proof to show how strong the dating app is in the market, this is it.

44. The number of downloads fluctuated between 974,771 and dropped to 787,261 in the year’s first quarter. 

45. From the beginning of the second quarter, the application saw a further drop in downloads to 778,832. However, it picked up at the end of the quarter with 828,381 downloads.

46. A consistency in growth was noticed in the third quarter, starting with 861,765 downloads in July and 913,918 downloads in August. But it dropped in September to 818,455 downloads. 

47. In the last quarter of the year, Bumble had the highest number of downloads, starting with 921,190 and ending with 966,302 downloads.

Bumble Statistics About Demographic Subscribers

Demographic Subscribers

Age 

48. According to a report by Statista, folks between the ages of 18 and 29 account for 13% of the traffic on the online dating platform. This is the highest by any age group.

49. The older age group between 30 to 44 years makes up 10% of Bumble users. 

50. 4% of the platform subscribers are between 45 and 54.

51. Folks aged 55 and above make up 4% of people who patronize the dating service. As you can see, the older people become, the less likely they are to seek life partners.

Gender 

52. According to a survey by WebTribunal, 65% of Bumble subscribers worldwide are males.

53. Taking a further look at the male users, about 63% of them admitted to patronizing the dating platform because the company considers women before men. It has been called a feminist platform, which its owner confirmed.  

54. Despite being tailored to favor women, men make up a minority of 34% of users globally.

Global Bumble Statistics – Income from In-app Purchases

Income from In-app Purchases

55. As of 2017, the dating service made earnings of $39,496,427 by the end of the year.

56. The company improved on funds generated by 171%, totaling $107,108,843 in 2018. Impressive.

57. Bumble continued to rake in more money, with $165,788,278 generated in 2019, translating to an improvement of 55% from the previous year. 

58. The success rate of the platform continued to gain momentum with a total of $190,755,976 inflow of funds, better than what was achieved in 2019 by 15%.

North and Latin America

59. The online dating platform saw its funds rise to $35,758,434 in 2017, with a global market share of 90.53%.

60. Despite having more inflow of funds at $93,290,032 in 2018, the market share from this region was 87.1% as more competitors joined the market. 

61. Bumble continued to be successful in 2019, generating an income of $139,750,689. But its stake in the global market share continued to drop to 84.29% with more players. 

62. Like no one can stop a locomotive train, Bumble was unrelenting in its popularity and success. It raked in a total of $156,457,753 within this region, with a slight drop in market share to 82.02%.

Africa, Europe, and the Middle East

Note that these regions are not really into dating apps or services compared to the aforementioned other regions. Such an outcome is tied to their closeness to tradition and customs, especially in Africa and the Middle East. Let’s check the stats:

63. A total of $2,539,186 came from the app, with a 6.43% stake in the world market share as of 2017.

64. Just because the competition in these regions isn’t much, the increase in revenue of $8,965,075 in 2018 is almost in sync with the rise in market share, which grew to 8.37%.

65. Seemingly unchallenged by other players in the game, Bumble grew its revenue to $15,555,675 and continued to spread tentacles on the market share to 9.38% in 2019.

66. That’s not all. Bumble was unrelenting in its growth in revenue in 2020 to $20,251,773, finally reaching double figures in the global market with 10.62% in shares. The table below will show us at a glance how Bumble compares with other serious competitors:

Dating service  Global Market Share
Bumble 19%
Tinder  40%
Plenty of fish  5%
Hinge  6%
Match  3%
Grindr  4%
Other platforms 23%

Final Thoughts 

Despite having a long way to catch up with Tinder in popularity and market share, Bumble has established itself as a viable option for online dating platforms worldwide. The fact it continued to gain popularity and revenue in regions not known for patronizing dating services is a true measure of how strongly the dating service has planted its roots in this line of business. Bumble is not leaving anytime soon.

Frequently Asked Questions

How many people found their match in Bumble?

How many countries offer Bumble dating services in cyberspace?

How much does the average subscriber pay on Bumble?

Sources

The post Key Bumble Statistics in 2024 (65+ Facts) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/bumble-statistics/feed/ 0
60+ Smishing Statistics in 2024 (SMS Phishing Attacks) https://techreport.com/statistics/smishing-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/smishing-statistics/#respond Wed, 10 Jan 2024 18:59:58 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532629 General Smishing Statistics

It is no longer news that internet users face numerous dangers by clicking on links from anonymous sources. These dangerous links could come from social media, websites, and emails. The...

The post 60+ Smishing Statistics in 2024 (SMS Phishing Attacks) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
General Smishing Statistics

It is no longer news that internet users face numerous dangers by clicking on links from anonymous sources. These dangerous links could come from social media, websites, and emails. The usual way it works is for the link to redirect the unsuspecting user to a website where their details will be extracted and used to either empty their bank accounts or hold them for ransom. This act is called phishing. LookOut’s Global State of Mobile Phishing Report 2022 estimates that over 30% of users will be attacked quarterly.

But cybercriminals are now carrying out their devious action through text messages. Unfortunately, most users are unaware of this new trending development known as Smishing. Don’t fret; we are here to enlighten you on the existence of Smishing statistics to ensure you don’t become a victim. Let’s take a look.

General Smishing Statistics

General Smishing Statistics

  1. The black and white communities in America were targeted more with smishing than the Hispanic environments.
  2. Unfortunately, the age group that knows how bad smishing is is those aged 55 years and above. This means that many people don’t know about it yet.  
  3. Judging by what 58% of the people who responded to a survey in the US said in 2021, there were more spam calls and text messages in this period.
  4. Also, according to what was reported by KeepNetLabs, the average amount lost by victims of smishing all over the world was $800 per individual. If we combine all the losses from pharming, phishing, smishing, and vishing, we will look at more than $54 million. 
  5. The year 2020 was remarkable because the smishing attacks rose very high due to the pandemic. Hackers used COVID-19, and many people feared sending text messages with malicious links.
  6. Within that year, up to 76% of businesses worldwide saw smishing texts alone, not counting other phishing methods. 
  7. Spam text messages and calls saw a noticeable rise in frequency from the first two weeks of quarantine in the US.
  8. Perpetrators of such crimes use either programs that are malicious in nature or websites to compromise a user’s data. 
  9. $54.2 million was lost to smishing in 2019, according to a report from the FBI in 2020.
  10. The hackers used local numbers to make the dangerous text messages appear legit.

General Smishing Statistics for 2023

General Smishing Statistics

11. Victims of this sort of attack lost $86 million in America as of 2019. 

12. Such malevolent SMS reached mobile devices belonging to 17% of users involved in one enterprise. 

13. Spain was the most vulnerable country to smishing attacks by 100% as of 2019.

14. Gen X and millennials were more informed about the threat of nasty SMS than any other age group in 2019. 

15. More than 1 billion unwanted SMS are sent per minute.  

16. 65% of people questioned in the US said they would delete a text message that came from an anonymous source, not necessarily because they suspected smishing. 

17. Hackers have deviated from using unknown numbers to using those recognizable by the user to send malicious SMS.

18. More than 320,000 people in the US were successfully preyed upon with fraudulent text messages back in 2021, judging from a report by TheSmallBusiness

19. Only about 23% of users know what smishing is and the threat it poses. This is a disappointing reality, bringing the need to create more awareness of this new phishing development. 

20. More than 300 customers received compensation of eight hundred thousand euros from the Bank of Ireland. 

21. A report from TechJury shows the percentage of people who regrettably click on malicious links from text messages fluctuates between 8.9% and 14.5%.

22. 32% of companies allege that they conduct training tests to help prepare their employees for possible smishing situations. This was obtained from a report by IncrediTools.

23. Most people, about 27 to 42 years old, know everything they should about smishing. A comparison survey showed that they knew more than others in different age ranges. According to researchers, folks at least forty-three to fifty-nine years old (43-59) knew many things about the subject matter in 2019.

Global Data About Spam Texts and its Proportion

Global Data About Spam Texts

Health 

24. 1.2% of fraud-related messages on people’s health were distributed globally on October 19, 2023—this proportion of test messages accrued to 1,060,272,839 when rated in figures.

25. In 2021, records proved that billions of junk mail were also sent globally.

False Schemes on Apple Devices and Hardware

26. Approximately 2,601,735,612 false SMS tests, equivalent to 3%, were connected to winning Apple equipment

27. In 2020, there was a case of smishing where some criminals demanded the victim’s credit card data to get a free-of-charge iPhone 12. 

28. According to Kaspersky’s report, once a receiver clicks the link, they will see other steps before claiming the prize. This process makes the victim give away vital data that the criminal will use against them.

Bank 

29. Text messages related to bank issues were sent to 3 million with bad intentions. This was about 3.5% of the global smishing in 2020.

COVID-19

30. Hackers used the pandemic period to send out 5.7 million SMS, discussing the disease and vaccines but with evil intentions.

31. There was even a set of texts claiming to come from the US government, demanding the recipient to take a compulsory COVID-19 test with malicious links attached to deceive the receivers. 

Delivery

32. More than 23 million spam text messages on delivery were issued worldwide, topping the list in the most frequently used spam category. This resulted in 26.3% of smishing texts, as reported in Text-Em-All

33. Online criminals used false USPS to create a FedEx delivery text scam reported in September 2020. The attempt was to access the user’s credentials and banking information. 

34. As of 2022, 83% of businesses in the world admit to having fallen victim to phishing scams. This is because emails and SMS are how they frequently communicate, thereby falling into traps by clicking on messages that seem to be official

35. Spam SMS on delivery package deception comprised over a quarter of smishing in 2021.

Statistics of Mobile Phone Smishing Victims by Age and Gender

Victims by Age and Gender

36. Women between the ages of 35 to 44 years accounted for 32% of female victims.

37. Younger ladies aged 18 to 34 summed up 34% of the female gender who fell into the net of cybercriminals

38. For the men, 46% were between 18 and 34

39. The older age group from 35 to 44 years happened to be 51% of the male gender.

Hackers’ Mode of Operation

Hackers' Mode of Operation

40. The first step for the attacker is to compose a compelling text message that will lure the receiver into taking some action

41. The fraudster wants the recipient to click on the link that came with the SMS. Once this is done, the unsuspecting victim is directed to a program known as the phishing tool, designed to ask the potential victim to give away information.

42. Of course, these programs are tailored to look like websites or can be masked as apps that are relevant to the subject at hand. 

43. Just as brand owners have target audiences, hackers also have them, and they frequently select their targets based on their association with an organization or a geographical location where a remarkable event is taking place. These events are what they use to compose a malicious text message. 

44. Cybercriminals hide their phone numbers with “Spoofing.” It allows the attacker to mask their phone numbers with any other number, specifically numbers the potential victim is familiar with. The same method is used in VPNs to either hide or mask IP addresses. 

45. Some criminals use cheap and disposable phones to perfect their smishing schemes. 

46. The moment the hacker gets the desired sensitive information, they use it to compromise the data of the victim, which could be a direct theft of funds, have access to company information, or hold the victim to ransom by demanding a specific amount of money from them.

Frequency of Phishing SMS in America 2023

Frequency of Phishing SMS

47. The average number of daily fraudulent texts in the US is 415,172,654

48. Within a week, the number had climbed to 2,906,208,576 malicious SMS.

49. On weekends alone, we look at about 665,100,057 texts to receivers

50. To give a clearer picture of the horrors of smishing in the States, 288,314 texts from this category come in one minute! Alarming.

51. An individual got an average of 47 spam texts, with 429,406,658 sent out in a single day. 

52. About 4,970 of such “Robotech” occur per minute in America. 

53. Weekends had a surprising 2,299,126,399 smishing texts sent to people. This is attributed to more people being at home and more prone to fall into the traps set by hackers via smishing. 

54. 3,005,846,605 phishing texts occurred in just one week, making it the most popular phishing scheme.

Comparison of Smishing With Other Phishing Tools

Smishing With Other Phishing Tools

55. A part of the phishing scheme that operates on the gaming platform is 11.3%

56. The productivity industry records 10.2% of the phishing market.

57. Smishing from emails is very popular, with 15.4% of such scams coming from where most victims (about 75% or more) are corporate institutions rather than individuals.

58. Social media takes it to another level for hackers by 16.4%. Attackers turned their attention to this platform because 59% of the world’s population is on social media, according to Statista as of 2023.

59. The sports group of smishing constitutes 6.3% of text phishing, according to a report by LookOut

60. Malevolent texts relating to dating sites are trending by 6.1% compared to the rest.

61. With the rise of e-commerce as a convenient way to trade in today’s world, cybercrime is on the rise. However, it’s the least targeted category of the phishing business.

62. California, popularly called the City of Angels, makes the top list with an outrageous 1,315,688,592 fraudulent text this month, making it the most vulnerable state in America in this period. 

63. Texas comes second with 1,199,835,804 spam SMS. 

64. Georgia has recorded 975,473,480 smishing texts in the same month.

65. The state of Florida is number 4 on the list, with 756,018,915 phishing text messages. 

66. In September, having 534,341,450 such SMS to recipients makes New York the least vulnerable of America’s five most vulnerable states.

Final Thoughts

Having gone this far in statistics, you can see smishing has a far outreach than most phishing or any category of cybercrime. This is because it doesn’t just apply to folks with smartphones but people with mobile phones or devices. Ironically, as much as it ranks as one of the most common phishing methods for decades, it has only come to the limelight recently during the pandemic.

Frequently Asked Questions

What does smishing mean?

How often have smishing attacks occurred in recent times?

Are there countries more prone to smishing attacks than others?

Sources

The post 60+ Smishing Statistics in 2024 (SMS Phishing Attacks) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/smishing-statistics/feed/ 0
Intriguing Fetch Statistics – How Many People Use it in 2024? https://techreport.com/statistics/fetch-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/fetch-statistics/#respond Sun, 07 Jan 2024 19:14:15 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532617 Key Fetch Statistics

Fetch is an online shopping app that rewards customers for daily nitty gritty purchases. Quite a lot can be said of this online grocery market, which has successfully gathered many...

The post Intriguing Fetch Statistics – How Many People Use it in 2024? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Fetch Statistics

Fetch is an online shopping app that rewards customers for daily nitty gritty purchases. Quite a lot can be said of this online grocery market, which has successfully gathered many faithful users. Since its inception in 2013, the user base, downloads, and service have grown tremendously. The app has over 10 million downloads on Google Play and 4.9 million stars with a 4.8 star rating on the App Store.

One striking thing about Fetch is its simple and quick response to its numerous users. One cannot but come back again and again for a repeat experience. Promo codes, discount prices, and vouchers appeal so well in our world, where people depend on e-commerce for their daily needs. This and much more are offered and enjoyed by Fetch’s faithful users. We will consider and provide you with data about the most efficient services that Fetch offers and how well you can harness these services for your good. Keep reading to discover all key Fetch statistics.

Key Fetch Statistics

Key Fetch Statistics

  1. There are currently 15 million active users who use the fetch reward system. 
  2. Daily users of Fetch have grown over the years to reach a striking 5 million
  3. All shoppers can save money and earn rewards whenever they shop on Fetch. 
  4. Wes Schroll birthed the idea of the Fetch app alongside Tyler Kennedy.
  5. Signing up using a referral code on Fetch gives you 2,000 points.

General Fetch Statistics

General Fetch Statistics

1. Over 17 Million Active Users Currently Use the Fetch Reward System.

Each month, they seem to be an addition to the number of daily users of Fetch. It has over 17 million shoppers who use the app every single month in 2022. The app also grew rapidly to hit 5 million fetch rewards daily users in July of the same yearThis continued to the next month when it had a daily average user count of rewards of about 5.32 million. It peaked on August 6 with about 5.32 million everyday fetch rewards shoppers. The result became an eye-opener, showing that people are searching for ways to save costs on essentials.

2. Daily Users of Fetch Have Grown Over the Years to Reach a Striking 5 Million.

The number one choice of Americans in terms of reward for online purchases achieves a feat of 5 million everyday active users. This is no ordinary feat, as the dream of its founders to reach a wide audience is solely and surely coming to passConsumers are offered a variety of brands with the best shopping experience ever. 

3. All Shoppers can Save Money and Earn Rewards Whenever They Shop on Fetch.

Fetch offers consumers not the regular shopping experience but one that keeps them coming back again and again. It gives users an exciting and fun experience while shopping. All receipts are turned into rewards with a snap. 

4. Wes Schroll Birthed the Idea of the Fetch App Alongside Tyler Kennedy.

The idea of Fetch was birthed from an observation of Wes Schroll in his university daysDuring those days, he would purchase regular or the same items without any loyalty rewards. Most times, he bought these items from virtually any shop. Wes Schroll developed this unique business plan in 2013 alongside his partner, Tyler Kennedy. Customers had to scan the barcode on every item they bought from a store to receive a Fetch reward in its early years. After this, customers must go to a fetch checkout spot to scan all selected items. Fetch had to shift its eyes to closing agreements with grocery stores. It could boost by having 30,000 downloads in just two years.

5. Signing Up Using a Referral Code on Fetch Gives You 2,000 Points.

A referral code is a good way to start your journey by earning rewards on Fetch. You receive 2,000 points when you refer someone. It doesn’t end there, as the one given a referral code gets 2,000 points when they complete their first receipt scan.

6. Fetch has Over 17 Million Active Users Every Single Month.

The number of active shoppers on Fetch proves it is an amazing site for anyone. You can easily download the fetch app from any country’s Google Play Store or App Store. The majority of Fetch’s traffic comes from the United States and Canada. That does not rule out the fact that other countries contribute to the user traffic of Fetch.

Fetch Statistics About Rewards

Fetch Rewards 

7. Fetch Places More Focus on Brands Rather Than Stores.

Two young entrepreneurs made the reality of a consumer reward system possible. Fetch loyalty program called reward places its focus on brands and not stores. The idea is to work with big brands willing to reward customers patronizing them on the Fetch app. Consumers are rewarded with points when they purchase from their favorite grocery shop. The brands they buy give out rewards that are not similar in any way. Bigger brands tend to give out more rewards to encourage repeat purchases. 

8. Affiliate Marketing Drives Money into the Pockets of Reward Apps.

Like every other app in the business, Fetch makes money from affiliate marketingIt earns money through commissions from brands that showcase products on its app. Fetch has achieved a name for itself in the United States as the most loved consumer-friendly appUsers are allowed to become members of an exclusive club called Fetch Club. You can access special clubs like the Huggies or Mills Good rewards here. 

9. In April 2021, Fetch’s Market Value Increased to $1 Billion.

Fetch has had quite a good history in terms of market value. It recorded an impressive $1 billion in market value in April 2021. It scanned a total of 1 billion receipts during that same period.

10. 87% of Fetch Users Come From the United States.

The high number of users from the United States should not be surprising as it is Fetch’s home base. Below is a list that shows the percentage distribution of users of fetchrewards.com:

  • The United States: Americans are known to produce 87.14% of the total global Fetch reward website visits.
  • Canada: Our next stop is Canada, with 1.10% Fetch rewards website visits.
  • Brazil: Brazilians give out 1.05% of Fetch reward website visits. 
  • Germany: Consumers from Germany create 0.66% of Fetch rewards website total visits. 
  • United Kingdom: Britons shoppers give 0.66% of traffic that comes to fetch rewards. 
  • Other countries: Releasing 9.39% visits to Fetch rewards.

11. Fetch has the Highest Appeal to Persons Between 18 and 34.

A large chunk of Fetch consumers are young people not more than 34 years of age. People between 18 to 24 and 25 and those between 25 and 34 years of age find it thrilling to shop on Fetch. This analysis is because both age groups claim 24% of the Fetch user base with a difference of 0.10%. Below is a nice breakdown of the percentage of users across various age groups:

  • 18 to 24: Those in this age group are the highest, with 24.20% of the Fetch user base
  • 25 to 34: Persons in this age group make up 24.30% of the user base on Fetch rewards. 
  • 35 to 44: This age group comes right after, with 18.90% of the total user base. 
  • 45 to 54: 15.39% of Fetch Reward traffic comes from this age group.
  • 55 to 64: Persons within this age group produce 10.24% of the Fetch user base. 
  • 65+: People at this age make up a mere 6.97% of traffic on Fetch rewards.

12. Female Fetch Users are Way Above That of Men, With 51.30%.

We have more female users on Fetch than men. Males stand at 48.70% and females are way higher at 51.30%.

Fetch Statistics – Revenue and Valuation

Revenue and Valuation

13. Fetch Raised a Total of $581.51 Million in Revenue.

In 2022, Fetch raised a total revenue of $581.51 million.

14. Fetch Maintained a Valuation of $2.5 Billion for Two Years in a Row.

Experts estimated the company to be worth $ 2.5 billion in 2022, and it remained unchanged in 2023 as its revenue remains $2.5 billion.

15. Scan a Receipt Before the 14-day Expiry Request for a Reward.

Getting a reward from Fetch is easy and without any stress. You only need to scan your receipt from the store using your Android or iOS device. You will get a reward after completing a scan whether or not the issuer is a partner brand to Fetch. All receipts are honored when they meet up with fetch requirements. One amazing thing about the receipt upload process is that it takes just 10 seconds. Receipts like sales slips or electronic receipts that are in print are not accepted on FetchThe company has a well-dedicated fraud department that checks every scanned receipt. Fetch does this to make sure that it rewards only genuine scan receipts.

16. You Can Get up to 5 Points or More When Fetch Accepts Your Receipt.

One fun thing about Fetch is getting up to 5 points or more with one receipt. Your earning of 1,000 points is considered equal to $1. You can redeem a gift card using the points earned on Fetch when it gets to 3,000 points. You can also use the gift card any day to buy items from any of your preferred brands.

How to Earn Points and Get Rewards?

How to Earn Points and Get Rewards

You can do some things to earn good points and rewards on Fetch. Some of them are outlined below:

Using a Referral Code

The referral code is a great way to earn some good points on Fetch. As a new user, you can make a welcome bonus of 2,000 points upon signing in with a referral code from your friends or family.

Through Brand Discounts

Brand discounts present attractive reward-earning opportunities to Fetch users. To get this discount, all that’s required of you is to buy items from any companies listed on the Fetch roster. 

Completing a Task

Fetch’s loyal customers can complete tasks to earn redeemable rewards. You must go to the “Discover” section on the Fetch app and complete the task posted there. 

Connecting Your E-commerce Account to Fetch Rewards

This is another interesting way to start earning on Fetch. For this, you’d have to connect your e-commerce account with Fetch. Once you do that, you can scan the e-receipts issued by any service provider to gain points.

Conclusion

Fetch is the go-to e-commerce platform for those looking to slash daily supplies expenses. Discounts are a great way to get consumers’ attention, and Fetch doesn’t joke about it. Every day, people storm online stores looking for goods with a reduced cost, and they turn to Fetch. Its mobile app, with a 4.5 rating on the Google Play Store, speaks volumes about what Fetch offers users. Due to Fetch’s attractive reward system, many people are using the platform. Big companies looking for more customers are also using Fetch.

Frequently Asked Questions

How does Fetch as a company make a profit?

What is the value of Fetch as an online mobile app?

How many people use Fetch to make online purchases daily?

Sources

The post Intriguing Fetch Statistics – How Many People Use it in 2024? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/fetch-statistics/feed/ 0
Most Important Brave Market Share Statistics in 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/brave-market-share-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/brave-market-share-statistics/#respond Fri, 05 Jan 2024 22:32:07 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532593 Major Brave Market Share Statistics

The Brave browser, though not popular, attracts many users. Its market share might not be as large as that of Chrome and Safari, but it’s still something worth talking about....

The post Most Important Brave Market Share Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Major Brave Market Share Statistics

The Brave browser, though not popular, attracts many users. Its market share might not be as large as that of Chrome and Safari, but it’s still something worth talking about. An inbuilt ad and tracker have placed it one step ahead of its competitors. Like always, something must create an advantage for a service, which applies perfectly to Brave Browser. Despite having more than 50 million users, Brave holds only 1% of the global browser market.

The need for a better privacy experience has driven many people to use Brave as their perfect browser. It is in its own right doing a great deal better than some tech sites like WordPress. Brave’s browsing speed will keep Brave on the market for the long haul. Here, we will analyze how Brave Browser has performed over the years and what its future holds. Let’s plunge in.

Major Brave Market Share Statistics

Major Brave Market Share Statistics

  1. Brave has secured about 1% of the world browser market. 
  2. One of Brave Browser’s main concerns is to curb trackers and unwanted ads for users’ safety.
  3. A bookmark, extension, or even password takes not more than 60 seconds on the Brave Browser. 
  4. We have 50.2 million people who actively use Brave every single month to browse the internet.
  5. Brave can boast of having 15.5 million loyal daily users on it. 
  6. The browser celebrated a total of 171.9 million visits in April 2023.  
  7. You are qualified to receive a Basic Attention Token when you use the Brave Browser.
  8. Youngsters between 18 and 24 have the largest slice of the Brave audience at 59%.
  9. In April 2023, the United States made a good imprint on Brave with over 37% traffic.

General Brave Market Share Statistics

General Stats

1. Brave has Secured About 1% of the World Browser Market.

The extraordinary features of Brave have set it apart for growth. It has greatly impacted users’ lives, with just a 1% market share. 

2. One of Brave Browser’s Main Concerns is to Curb Trackers and Unwanted Ads for Users’ Safety.

One unique quality of Brave is giving its users a faster and more seamless web experience. Brave often upgrade every one of your connections to safer HTTPs. Its method usually involves an automatic block of all cross-site trackers. Brave does not leave aside phishing attempts and third-party cookies. 

3. A Bookmark, Extension, or Even Password Takes Not More Than 60 Seconds on the Brave Browser.

Switching to Brave Browser will not take much of your time, as the process takes 60 seconds at most. Be it passwords, bookmarks, or even extensions, they will be safer than any other browser. It also gives you, the esteemed users, an inbuilt IPFS integration, a custom filter, and much more privacy security.

4. We Have 50.2 Million People Actively Using Brave Every Month.

The number of Brave browser users keeps on increasing, and more will still add to the number. Being a part of the over 50 million loyalists of Brave’s fast and safer web service will be a great experience for anyone. 

5. Brave Celebrated a Total of 171.9 Million Visits in April 2023.

Brave has had its number of active monthly users doubled for five years. The browser had a total of 24.1 million active monthly users in 2020. This did not end there as more was added, finishing with 50.2 million in 2021. Year after year, more people added to the already existing number of monthly visits and gave a brightening 171.8 million in April 2023. The answer to this skyrocketing growth is not farfetched, as people always look for a faster browser. 

6. You are Qualified to Receive a Basic Attention Token When You Use the Brave Browser.

As an open-source browser, brave places great value on user privacy. It blocks adverts and web trackers with its Chromium browsers by default. It gives users the benefit of a Basic Attention Token, popularly called BAT, for ad view. One fascinating truth about the BAT is that it has a nice spot in the cryptocurrency market cap. The market capitalization is also doing fairly well at about $445 million. BAT has had a downturn for some time, but it is slowly reviving, and in 2023, it will be at 76%. When Brave Rewards started running, over 1,000 advertisers displayed over 5,900 ads. An interesting thing about these ads is that users can enjoy rewards by simply viewing ads. 

7. Youngsters Between 18 and 24 Have the Largest Slice of the Brave Audience at 59%.

People between 18 and 24 make up the most visits to Brave Browser. Men, at 68.29%, take up the largest chunk of the audience when it has to do with gender use. The next age group on the line of highest visitors to Brave are those between 25 and 34 years, with 28.66%.

8. In April 2023, the United States Made a Good Imprint on Brave With Over 36.99% Traffic. 

The United States ranks first with a traffic capacity of 36.99%. It can be said that most of Brave’s traffic comes from the United States, with 36.99%. India follows far off in second place with a mere 6.55%; then we have Mexico, the United Kingdom, and Canada, bringing in 4.99%, 4.42%, and 4.2%, respectively. Other countries are not excluded from Brave traffic as they combine to bring in 42.86% of traffic visits.

9. Brave is a Free Browser That is Excellent in Giving Online Privacy Protection to Users.

One arresting feature of Brave is that it is very protective against ads and even trackers from external sources. This has earned it a place in the hearts of over 50 million users.

Brave User Statistics

Brave User Statistics

10. Over 59.35 Million Users Keenly Used the Brave Browser in October 2023. 

Brave operates from its headquarters in San Francisco, USA. It had 23.9 million active users all through JulyThis was a feat of success worth mentioning, as over 1.6 million creators posted their content in the previous month.

11. The Journey Began in 2015 When Brave Software Inc. Came up With the Idea of Opening a Daunting Browser.

Brendan Eich and Brian Bondy gave birth to this classic software app at a time much needed in May 2015. Launching it to the masses took a while, but in January 2016, it was unmasked for public use. The first version, released for the public, had an ad-blocking feature. The idea behind Brave creation is to give users value for their time. This ensures that users’ privacy is protected and unwanted ads are blocked. It has great features like the Brave rewards to give users more value.

12. Saving Your Password, Bookmarks, and Extensions is Possible Within a Few Seconds in Brave. 

Users who see online privacy as a big deal will appreciate the Brave Browser. Persons who need a fast browser will also see Brave as the best choice. It wouldn’t be too loud to state that Brave Browser is more closed than Chrome. You can safely save your bookmarks, passwords, and extensions within a minute on Brave. Below is a nice breakdown of the active monthly users from 2017 to the end of 2021. 

  • Each month was a rewarding year that ended well with 1.2 million active customers
  • 2018 was far more rewarding, with 5.9 million users every single month
  • Each month progressed nicely in 2019, with 11.2 million monthly active users.
  • 2020 was not different, as it had 24.1 million monthly active users.
  • 2021 was a very successful year with 50.2 million monthly active persons.

Brave Browser Visits

Brave Browser Visits

13. The Traffic of Brave.com Saw a Downfall of 2.49% in April 2023.

In April 2023, there was a total of 171.9 million visits. This was not a nice turnout, as Brave had 176.3 million visits last month. Users spend an average of 4.31 minutes on each visit to Brave.com. This is quite fast, as it has worked to ensure users have the best experience in the shortest possible time. Most traffic to Brave comes from organic and direct searches. The topmost searches on Brave are from natural or organic traffic. Just a mere 0.01% of all traffic comes through paid searches. Some of the reasons why most people use Brave daily can be found just below:

  • It takes no notice of a user’s personal information. This simply means that your data will never be shared with others without your consent.
  • They do not use an algorithm to track a user inquiry or a click at any time.
  • One other thing that stands out is its embedded block ads and trackers. It also can identify fingerprints and disallow cookies, making it a great site.

14. You are Qualified to Receive its Basic Attention Token After You View Any of its Privacy Ads.

This reward can be used to support your ideal content creator, publisher, or even website. All you need to do is allocate some of your BAT earnings to show support.

15. Brave Browser Works Pretty Well With Chrome Extensions.

One striking feature about the Brave Browser is that it works perfectly well with Chrome extensions. This comes to be as it is made on Chromium with the best user browsing experience.

16. Visits From the United States Make Up as Large as 37.52% of Brave.

April saw 37.52% of visits to Brave just from the United States. India trailed behind with 5.49%, and in third place was France, with a total of 4.55%. 

17. Most Traffic Came From Persons Between 18 and 34 Years of Age. 

The younger generation is taking the lead in driving traffic on Brave. The age range of 18 to 34 makes up 59.13% of traffic to Brave. This indicates that young people seek a faster, safer, and more secure browsing experience. They will, therefore, go for a browser that can meet up with their ideal need.

Conclusion

One feature that brings out Brave Browser over all others is its privacy policy. Anyone and almost everyone will go all out for a browser that is fast and also protects their data. Brave Browser has come a long way in terms of user base. Users keep adding to Brave Browser year after year since its entry into the market. The market share is not large but has attracted many users. The young age band’s search for faster and faster browsers will keep it running for the long haul. Worth stating is the Basic Attention Reward that many users benefit from. This is one feature that will surely keep visitors coming to Brave.com again and again.

Frequently Asked Questions

What percentage of people use the Brave Browser?

How fast can Brave Browser get in use?

What makes Brave Browser so popular today?

Sources

The post Most Important Brave Market Share Statistics in 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/brave-market-share-statistics/feed/ 0
Hinge Statistics – How Many People Use It in 2024? https://techreport.com/statistics/hinge-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/hinge-statistics/#respond Fri, 05 Jan 2024 16:05:06 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532578 Hinge Key Statistics for 2024

Our world has gone digital as technology continues to advance. Now, most aspects of life are digital, including our relationships. Many things are directly influenced by the advancement of technology,...

The post Hinge Statistics – How Many People Use It in 2024? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Hinge Key Statistics for 2024

Our world has gone digital as technology continues to advance. Now, most aspects of life are digital, including our relationships. Many things are directly influenced by the advancement of technology, including our relationships. Nowadays, we have social media websites and dating apps that let people connect online within and beyond their countries. The beauty of these relationship apps and websites is that they help individuals find love partners easily. About 52% of Hinge users make less than one match a day. Moreover, 13% of guys on Hinge get fewer than one match weekly.

Interestingly, young males who can’t walk up to a lady could easily build confidence through dating apps before a first date. However, as most people would say, there is always a Judas in every gathering of the twelve, so it is with online love seekers’ platforms. The bad eggs in the basket have seen these online platforms as good media for carrying out romance scams. Sadly, Hinge, being one of the dating apps in the market, is not left out in this issue. In Hinge, one can taste all shades of green and grey in the digital dating space. If you want to discover facts on the Hinge dating app, this article will provide you with the most important Hinge statistics. Let’s proceed.

Hinge Key Statistics for 2023

Hinge Key Statistics for 2024

  1. Available information shows that 815,100 individuals visited the platform in October 2023, with a bounce rate of 68.24 percent.
  2. Studies on Hinge show that an average individual using the company’s services spends $123 annually.
  3. According to the provided statistics on Hinge, for every ten people who use the platform, 4 of them are seeking a serious and lasting relationship.
  4. In October 2023, the firm received 45.18 percent of all visitors from the United States of America.

Hinge General Statistics 2024

Hinge General Statistics 2023

1. Match Group Developed the Hinge App in 2012.

Hinge is a well-known tech and internet company in Texas. Justin McLeod founded Hinge in 2012. He is currently the company’s chief executive officer. Some reports show that Hinge launched the Matchmaker Android version in the third quarter of 2017. It’s also good to know that in 2017, The New York Times newspaper always mentioned Hinge in the wedding section. Furthermore, in 2023, CNET also discussed the platform, describing it as one with interesting features.

2. As the Firm Grew, Match Group Bought 50% Ownership of the Company in 2018.

In 2018, Hinge was also given the right to get full ownership of Hinge after one year of getting 50% ownership. Keeping to the agreement, Match Group fully owned the firm in 2019. Remarkably, between 2018 and 2019, the company’s revenue grew by 400% as it bought half ownership of the platform. Moreover, when Match Group took full control of the company, the platform’s revenue rose to $284 million in 2022 from $8 million in 2018.

3. Hinge Stands Out as One of the Known Relationship Platforms in the UK, Canada, Australia, and the US.

The firm also takes third position, among others, in the United States, after Tinder dating app and Bumble. Statistics also reveal that 23 million people joined the company in 2022, most of whom came from the US. Moreover, it also shares that more than 10 million individuals on Hinge came from the United States. Some studies reveal that the company has seen remarkable growth in the number of people registering on the platform. For example, in 2021, Hinge had 20 million members, meaning it registered an additional 7 million users to the 13 million recorded in 2020. With the help of the table below, we can see how the firm’s members grew from 2017 to 2022.

Year  Number of Users at Hinge
2017 2.4 million 
2018  4 million 
2019 8 million 
2020 13 million
2021 20 million
2022 23 million 

4. Statistics Tell Us That 1.3 Million Paying Users Were Using Hinge in the Third Quarter of 2023.

We learned From reports that the company had up to 800,000 paid users in 2021 after recording 500,000 in 2020. Considering the magnitude of progress, analysts estimated that Hinge will record 1 million paid users in the year 2022. In 2023, Hinge got up to 1.3 million paying users, which is approximately 33% growth above the number it had during the same period in 2022.

5. Each Visitor Viewed 1.73 Pages of the Dating App for an Average of 39 Seconds.

In the fourth quarter of 2023, data from Similarweb revealed that Hinge’s total web visitors were 815,100, with a 68.24% bounce rate.

6. The US, UK, Canada, India, and Australia are the 5 Top Countries That Used Hinge the Most in 2023.

Statistics show that the US had 45.18% of all Hinge visits. The UK contributes 12.1%, and users from Canada make up 6.47% of all Hinge visitors. Now, the platform is available in over 120 nations.

Countries Percentage of Web Visitors
United States 45.18%
United Kingdom 12.1%
Canada 6.47%
India  3.99%
Australia 3.77%
Others  28.49%

7. Hinge Consisted of 58.84% Men and 41.16% Women Visitors in October 2023.

Considering this data, the popular saying, “There are more males than females who register with relationship platforms,” is true.

8. The Age Group That Uses the Hinge App Most Often Ranges Between 25 and 34 Years Old.

Further, 20.71% of its users are within the 18 to 24 age category, while 18.43% fall within the 35 to 44-year age bracket.

Age Distribution User Percentage
18 – 24 20.17%
25 – 34 37.17%
35 – 44 18.43%
45 – 54 12.75%
55 – 64 6.93%
65+ 4%

9. Researchers Discovered That for Every 40 Likes, Men on a Hinge Will Find a Match.

Sadly, about 52% of males there might have no match in a day. Another piece of information is that 13% of men on the platform do not get a match within seven days after joining the dating platform. However, statistics reveal that female users on the dating platform could have a match per 2 likes. We noticed that, on average, men at Hinge like 1 in every 3 female profiles they view.

Hinge’s Statistics on Relationship Interest 2024

Statistics on Relationship Interest

10. From Statistics, We Discovered That 4 Out of Every 10 Hinge Users Want to Have a Serious Relationship.

Considering this information, it means that 40% of its entire users are not for casual relationships. Moreover, 35% of all users using the dating platform are interested in getting married or having a steady relationship.

11. Studies Reveal That 90% of Users on Hinge are Ready to be the First to Say “I Love You.”

In addition, the dating platform noticed that 72% of all dates on the dating app also plan for a second one. Remarkably, studies show that 90% of users on Hinge noted they had a great date on their first day.

12. In 2016, it Was Observed that Some Users Who Succeeded in Getting Partners had 4 to 5 Dates.

In 2016, successful users achieving romantic partnerships typically experienced success after engaging in 4 to 5 dates, highlighting the significance of multiple interactions in forming meaningful connections. This observation emphasized the importance of sustained efforts and interpersonal interactions in the dating landscape during that period. Most of them had an average of 16 matches before finding a partner.

13. In 2018, Hinge Recorded 50 Thousand Dates Every Seven Days. It is estimated that About 3,000 of the Dates Led to a Prolonged Relationship.

In 2018, Hinge, a dating app, facilitated an impressive 50 thousand weekly dates. Among these encounters, an estimated 3,000 blossomed into lasting and meaningful relationships, highlighting the app’s success in fostering connections. Furthermore, Statista shows that the dating company has recorded over 12 billion matches since its launch.

Hinge’s Market Share and Revenue for 2024

Hinge's Market Share and Revenue

14. According to research, Hinge recorded an 18.7% market share in 2022. This made it go below Tinder, which had 29.2%. We also saw Bumble’s smile as it got a higher market share than Hinge, recording 26.4% in the same year. However, the dating platform outpaced other known rivals, Plenty Fish and Badoo, which recorded 11.4% and 5% shares, respectively.

15. The firm had a revenue of $61 million in the first quarter of this year. Analysts looked at this achievement and predicted it could make more than $300 million in revenue at the end of the year. Moreover, the platform also cashes out from paid features like advanced preferences and limitless likes.

16. According to reports, an average paying user on Hinge spends $123 every year.

17. Again, we noticed that the dating platform makes 70% of its revenue from the US, and the UK is its next largest market.

18. Hinge had an annual revenue of $284 million the previous year, recording a 44 percent growth from $197 million in 2021.

19. In 2020, the dating company had $90 million in revenue, which marked an increase of 82% from the value in 2019. The table below shows Hinge’s yearly income from 2017 to 2023.

Year  Generated Revenue
2017 $2 million
2018 $8 million
2019 $31 million 
2020 $90 million
2021 $197 million
2022 $284 million
Ist. Quarter of 2023 $61 million

20. Between 2019 and 2022, Hinge’s number of paid users increased from 200 thousand to 1.06 million.

21. In 2020, the dating platform had 500 thousand paid users, but in 2021, the number increased to 800 thousand.

Hinge Additional Statistics 2024

Hinge Additional Statistics

21. Our research found that 55% of UK citizens know about the Hinge app.

22. According to studies, 50% of users on Hinge prefer having virtual dates.

23. Some users on the dating platform get a match within their hometowns.

24. From statistics, we learned that 20% of Hinge’s users are from the LGB community and are likely to have connected.

25. The dating app has over 35 million downloads from love seekers.

26. According to research, two users on Hinge who show interest in a relationship are likely to share their phone numbers. Equally, Hinge’s users sharing similar religions have a 97.5% chance of exchanging phone numbers.

27. From our discovery, we observed that 87% of bisexual individuals on Hinge decided to explore their sexuality more.

28. Research has it that users on the dating platform are likely to change their numbers 16 times more than users on other dating apps.

29. According to Similarweb, Hinge received 70.73% of its visitors from organic search traffic and 25.11% from direct traffic in October this year. Also, at the same time, it got 100% of total web visits from organic traffic and 0% from paid traffic.

30. It is worth noting that Hinge received its traffic through 693 keywords as of October of this year. Again, in the same period, it got web traffic through the help of 19 referral websites. Moreover, six social networks also contributed to its traffic. These include Reddit, Instagram, Linkedin, TikTok, Facebook, and others, with Reddit giving the highest.

Conclusion

Hinge provides a platform that is not only for casual relationships but for serious ones that could lead to marriage. This makes it different from others, where most users are focused on getting casual relationships and hook-ups. Again, the number of users on Hinge grew immensely. This means that many love-seekers are interested in the platform. Its current market share in the industry also agrees with the growing interest of people in the platform. Furthermore, Hinge is the third most populous relationship platform in the United States, with the UK being its second-largest market.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the average time users on Hinge spend?

Are users on Hinge real?

How often do users open the Hinge relationship app?

How long do Hinge’s users view others’ profiles?

Sources

The post Hinge Statistics – How Many People Use It in 2024? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/hinge-statistics/feed/ 0
70+ DoorDash Statistics to Know (2024 Figures and Trends) https://techreport.com/statistics/doordash-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/doordash-statistics/#respond Fri, 05 Jan 2024 13:11:47 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3532416 General DoorDash Statistics

Nowadays, the extreme economic situation has spurred people to seek “side hustles” other than regular nine-to-five jobs to “meet up” with their financial needs. As a result, they are always...

The post 70+ DoorDash Statistics to Know (2024 Figures and Trends) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
General DoorDash Statistics

Nowadays, the extreme economic situation has spurred people to seek “side hustles” other than regular nine-to-five jobs to “meet up” with their financial needs. As a result, they are always on the move, busy with one thing or another. In such situations, cooking is out of the picture, and ordering food becomes a top choice.

Besides the ever-busy, working-class people, most younger generations hate to cook. They prioritize other things and prefer to order takeout from their homes. Occasionally, we get tired thinking of what to prepare. In those times, online vendors can save the day. In 2022, DoorDash’s revenue increased by 34.8% to $6.58 billion. In the US, 34% of customers use third-party platforms like DoorDash to choose restaurants for delivery or takeout.

You don’t need brick-and-mortar restaurants or outlets for an enjoyable meal. Online platforms work magic. While busy with work, you can order with your phone and have your meal delivered to where you are.

It’s that simple. DoorDash identified this need and found the right way to help people meet it. So, it launched its virtual food business, DoorDash Kitchen. This business has done so well; we will see how and how much in this article. These DoorDash statistics outlined here will give us a comprehensive view of how DoorDash has done since its inception. Join us as we proceed.

General DoorDash Statistics

General DoorDash Statistics

1. DoorDash wrapped up 2022 on a good note with a massive $2.99 billion gross profit.

2. About 90.48% of DoorDash’s market share comes from America, which now tops the list of countries that use the service.

3. DoorDash’s net worth as of 2022 was $18.13 billion.

4. As far as global reach is concerned, DoorDash has covered a huge milestone. It now boasts over 32 million users globally subscribed to its services.

5. As of April 2023, DoorDash’s market capitalization was approximately $23.79 billion.

6. The United States is top of the list as the country with the most users, about 28 million, in 2022. Canada tailed closely behind the US with 1.7 million DoorDash users.

7. Australia came third with 896,000 users, New Zealand scaled through the fourth position with 76,800, while the UK ranked fifth among the top five countries with only 44,800 subscribers.

8. Collectively, the number of DoorDash users from other countries globally was 304,000 in 2022.

9. Impressively, DoorDash got 1.7 billion orders from the food delivery service in 2022.

10. In 2022, it made sales worth $40 billion.

11. DoorDash works with 400,000 restaurants and food stores that operate online.

12. At the end of 2022, DoorDash had realized a remarkable revenue of $6.58 billion.

Historical DoorDash Statistics

Historical DoorDash Statistics

13. Evan Moore, Andy Fang, Stanley Tang, and Tony Xu are the founding fathers of DoorDash.

14. In June 2013, the platform was officially incorporated as “DoorDash”.

15. DoorDash achieved a remarkable feat in December 2018 when it surpassed Uber Eats in food delivery sales in America. It came second, with GrubHub topping the list with America’s highest food delivery sales.

16. Eventually, DoorDash outpaced GrubHub in March 2019 in sales and then topped the list with 27.6% for on-demand delivery businesses.

17. They went on to be established as the biggest food delivery service in America in the first quarter of 2019, which was gotten from rating how consumers spend in the market. DoorDash didn’t lose its grip on the top position in the market throughout that year.

18. In fundraising conducted in June 2020, DoorDash raised over $2.5 billion in funds through venture capitalists Kleiner Perkins, Y Combinator, and GIC. Other venture capitalists like Charles River Ventures, SoftBank Group, Khosla Ventures, and Sequoia Capital were also on the list.

19. During the peak of the COVID-19 pandemic, DoorDash gave out free hand sanitizers and hand gloves through its delivery drivers. This gesture yielded massive patronage for DoorDash, and it became the fastest-growing food delivery platform in April 2020.

20. DoorDash had a deal with Bay Area restaurant Burma Bites to launch its first brick-and-mortar restaurant in November 2020.

21. In September 2023, DoorDash moved its stock listing from the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) to the Nasdaq.

22. DoorDash had its public shares sale in December 2020, its first time going public since its inception.

23. In February 2021, women comprised about 55% of DoorDash’s delivery drivers. This means that at DoorDash, men and women have equal opportunities.

DoorDash Statistics – Market Share

Market Share stats

The section below considers DoorDash’s market share in different geographical locations in the United States.

24. Accounting for 71% of Dashdoor’s market share, San Francisco tops the list for metropolitan regions in America as of November 2023.

25. Houston took the second place with an impressive 64% portion of DoorDash’s market share.

26. 56% of the market share comes from Dallas-Fort Worth, making the city the third-highest on the list.

27. 54% of the DoorDash market share came from Philadelphia, the fourth on the list of metropolitan cities.

28. Phoenix, famously known as the “valley of the sun,” commands about 53% of the shares in the platform’s market, the fifth on the line.

29. Atlanta, the eighth most populous city in the southeastern part of America, makes it to the top six with 46% of the DoorDash market.

30. Los Angeles, popularly known as the “city of angels,” is responsible for 44%, the seventh on the list.

31. Despite being the third biggest city in America, Chicago controls an unimpressive 38% of the market share.

32. The next in line is Boston City, often called the Red Sox, which has a 35% grip on the platform’s market share.

33. New York is The last and certainly the least on the list of the top 8 cities. It ties in with Boston City, with 35% of the market share coming from there.

DoorDash Statistics – Traffic Usage by Age

Traffic Usage by Age

It becomes very obvious from the age stats that traffic declines as we get to older age groups. The younger generations make up the bulk of active users of the platform.

34. According to a report by SimilarWeb, folks between the ages of 18 and 24 years make up 21.29% of DoorDash traffic.

35. The number of users aged 24 to 25 is the highest, at 33.68%.

36. 18.4% of DoorDash traffic is used by users aged 35 to 44 years.

37. 13.56% of the DoorDash traffic came from people between 45 and 54 years old.

38. 55- to 64-year-old users use 8.27% of the platform’s traffic.

39. 4.8% of DoorDash traffic is used by older people 65 years and above.

40. Males use 53.38% of the platform’s traffic.

41. The females come second with 46.62%.

DoorDash Statistics – Traffic Source From Desktops

Traffic Source From Desktops

42. The highest traffic source for the DoorDash platform came from what is referred to as direct traffic, with 75.49% coming from people who visit the platform directly from their desktops.

43. The second highest source of traffic(13.15%) came from organic search. It means people who accessed the DoorDash platform through results from search engines.

44. 5.56% of the traffic from paid searches is the third on the list. Unlike an organic search that is not paid, certain individuals are paid for the task of searching for platforms in cyberspace.

45. For traffic that came from referral websites to the DoorDash website, this makes it the fourth on the list with 2.81%.

46. 1.36% of the desktop traffic is derived from the social media platform, including the popular Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, and others, the fifth on the list. This isn’t very pleasant when most people on the internet are also on social media.

47. Emails are responsible for 1.26% of the traffic(7th), which goes a long way to show awareness needs to be made about using emails as a platform to sell business ideas.

48. Display advertising on desktops is at the bottom of the list of top 8 sources, with 0.3% DoorDash traffic coming from there.

49. In August 2022, DoorDash publicly declared the termination of its partnership with Walmart, which took effect in September of the same year.

50. DoorDash relieved 1,250 of its corporate staff of their duties in quarter two of 2022 to cut costs, reducing its workforce by 6%.

DoorDash Statistics on Referral Traffic (Distribution Genre)

DoorDash Statistics on Referral Traffic

51. Delivery and restaurant control 43.01 of the traffic, with the “start a trial” advert contributing 9.75%.

52. 8.74% of DoorDash traffic stemmed from employment/jobs. Also, the “start by trial” commands 8.73%.

53. Electronics, which include computers from the technology category, command 8.61% of the traffic, with 7.99% of those from “start a trial” referrals.

54. About 6.72% of the DoorDash traffic comes from search engines, with Google having a majority at 5.74%.

55. Education follows with a 3.7 control on the traffic. TryCavier.com specifically controls 4.58%.

56. Other categories of traffic distribution for DoorDash collectively are responsible for 29.23% of the traffic globally.

57. In June 2023, DoorDash stakeholders offered the company drivers more money-making options by paying them minimum wage per hour instead of payment per delivery. But there was a catch. Only delivery drivers who are actively working will receive hourly payment. Drivers who aren’t active won’t receive hourly pay.

DoorDash Revenue Statistics

DoorDash Revenue Statistics

58. From 2018 to 2022, the DoorDash platform has continued to grow its revenue, a testament to its success. Let’s take a look at these stats from a report by TheRideShareGuy.

59. In 2018, the platform raised a revenue of $291 million.

60. About $885 million was realized by DoorDash company in 2019, which translates to about a 204% increase from the previous year, a quantum leap.

61. The platform had $2.886 billion in revenue as of 2020, a mindboggling improvement from 2019 by 226% during the pandemic.

62. The following year, 2021, the company made $4.888 billion in revenue, amounting to roughly 69.4% improvement.

63. The company experienced a 34% improvement in revenue, with a total of $6.583 billion raised.

Fundraising Statistics of the DoorDash Platform

Fundraising Statistics

64. As of September 2013, the company raised $2.4 million in funds, which was achieved from the contributions of 11 investors.

65. In May 2014, the platform got the interest of 5 investors who collectively coughed out $17.3 million, about a 620% improvement from 2013.

66. $40 million was raised by nine investors for the DoorDash platform in March 2015, with an impressive growth of 620%.

67. Six investors raised $127 million for the company in March 2016, better than what they got in 2015 by 218%, give or take.

68. The company hit the $535 million mark in March 2018 with the help of just four investors, which is about 321% better than the last fundraising.

69. In the third quarter of 2018, the delivery service total sum from fundraising was $250 million, a noticeable drop from the previous first quarter by 114%. It should come to your notice that despite coming short compared to what was gotten early in the year, it came from just two investors. A total of $785 million was realized that year.

70. In the first quarter of 2019, nine investors contributed $400 million collectively to the company.

71. $600 million was obtained from eight investors in the second quarter of 2019, which is better than the amount achieved in the first quarter by 50%.

72. By the time it got to the last quarter of 2019. An investor contributed $100 million, representing a remarkable drop from what was obtained in the second quarter by 500%.

73. $400 million was realized from three investors in the second quarter of 2020.

DoorDash Market Share Comparison Statistics With Other Competitors

The table below will provide the information you need at a glance.

Delivery Service  Market Percentage
DoorDash  59%
Uber Eats 24%
Grubhub  14%
Postmates  3%
Other similar services collectively  1%

Final Thoughts

The statistics say it all. DoorDash not only runs a successful food delivery service but also the biggest. It outpaces its rivals with a long rope. The platform has made a name for itself and has become a household brand whenever online vendors come to mind. The statistics outlined in this article point to how good DoorDash is in the food delivery craft. They also present it as a very profitable venture for people who like to invest in the business.

FAQs

How many deliveries does the DoorDash service make?

What is the average amount a subscriber spends on DoorDash?

How long does it take for deliveries to arrive after placing an order?

Sources

The post 70+ DoorDash Statistics to Know (2024 Figures and Trends) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/doordash-statistics/feed/ 0
Car Sharing Market Statistics: Industry Growth Forecast for 2027 https://techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/ https://techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/#respond Fri, 05 Jan 2024 09:29:50 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531914 Person using car sharing app on smartphhone

One of the signs of an advancing sharing economy is the impressive car sharing market statistics. The car sharing market has permeated most regions, as more and more of the...

The post Car Sharing Market Statistics: Industry Growth Forecast for 2027 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Person using car sharing app on smartphhone

One of the signs of an advancing sharing economy is the impressive car sharing market statistics. The car sharing market has permeated most regions, as more and more of the world embraces sustainable mobility and people are looking to reduce the ownership costs of their cars.

The car sharing market emerged as a result of these changing preferences, and has been growing for the last few years.

For that reason, car sharing is something both marketers and car owners should be paying close attention to. To help you get the most out of your current and future car, we put together this guide to the latest car sharing statistics and trends and how it’s changed across the years.

Let’s dive in.

Key Car Sharing Market Statistics & Figures

  • 🌎 By 2028, the global car sharing market is expected to reach $15.4 billion, with a CAGR of 14.04%
  • 🇺🇸 By 2027, the American revenue in the car sharing market is projected to reach $3.23 billion, while revenue on the Canadian side is forecast at $0.6 billion.
  • 🇩🇪 The Continental European country with the largest car sharing market by revenue in 2023 is Germany, which saw $0.80 billion in revenue, and has 4.4 million car sharing users.
  • 🇬🇧 The UK’s car sharing market is the biggest one in Europe in terms of revenue, and is forecast to grow at a CAGR of 3.51% from $0.8 billion in 2023 to $0.93 billion in 2027.
  • 📈 By 2028, the number of car sharing users worldwide is expected to rise to almost 65 million.
  • 🇨🇭 70% of German and 80% of Swiss car sharers are men, who use free-floating car sharing services.
  • 🇨🇦 In Canada, the majority of free-floating car sharing users (74%) are aged 25-44, and Canadian station-based car sharing users are mostly aged 25-49 (71%).

Car Sharing Market Size

Car sharing involves individuals renting vehicles for a short period of time (as short as an hour). They can either rent from a company or a private individual – a phenomenon known as “peer-to-peer” car sharing. 

To kick off our exploration of one of the largest shared mobility markets, we take a look at the global car-sharing market size and the key players.

Global Market Figures

According to Business Wire, the global car-sharing market cashed in a total of $7 billion in 2022. By 2028, this figure is expected to grow to $15.4 billion, with a projected a CAGR of 14.04%

As you might have expected, different providers disproportionately contribute to this total total revenue. Below, we examine the top car sharing providers worldwide.

Top Car Sharing Providers – Shares & Statistics

Biggest car sharing companies in 2022 by market share
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/

As of 2022, the largest car sharing provider in the world is Zipcar, with a 13% market share. Other companies with a significant share are Getaround (10%) and SHARE NOW (8%), which owns car2go and DriveNow.

Compared to the above, other brands don’t have a significant market share.

However, as you’ll see in the next section, some brands are more predominant than others in certain regions.

Car Sharing Market – Sales & Revenue Statistics

Let’s take a closer look at the current global state, as well as at predicted figures for sales and revenue of the car sharing market. These statistics don’t include peer-to-peer car sharing – rather, they focus on car sharing companies.

North America Car Sharing

North America car sharing revenue stats and forecast 2022-2027
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/

In the US, which is the one of biggest car share markets by revenue, car sharing is on track to reach $2.89 billion. That’s over six times more than the Canada’s $0.44 billion.

By 2027, the American revenue is projected to reach $3.23 billion, and the Canadian car sharing revenue is forecast at $0.6 billion. The average revenue per user (ARPU) in 2023 is the same in both countries – $520, which is predicted to increase to $540 by 2027.

As for Mexico, given its smaller size and population, the car sharing market is much smaller than that of its Northern neighbors. In 2023, it amounted to $20.65 million, and is projected to reach $26.36 million by 2027.

EMEA Car Sharing

Car sharing revenue EMEA forecast 2027
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/

In Europe, Middle East, and Africa, the car sharing market is also booming. For example, the European revenue of the car-sharing market in 2023 was $4.89 billion. However, the ARPU in Europe is lower than that in Canada or the US – $272, compared to North America’s $520.

The Continental European country with the largest car sharing market by revenue in 2023 is Germany, which cashed $0.80 billion in revenue for the industry. Germany also expects the largest growth of the market by 2027, as it’s forecast to surpass the $1 billion mark.

With over 4.4 million car sharing users in Germany in 2023, such an increase wouldn’t be much of a surprise. Spain, which boasts $0.78 billion in revenue, is in second place.

Despite leaving the EU and limiting travel possibilities, the UK is the de facto leader of the European car sharing market, with $0.81 billion in revenue in 2023. Below, we take a closer look at it.

SHARE NOW is the largest car sharing provider in Europe, with a market share of 16%. It’s closely followed by Zipcar at 11%.

As for Africa and the Middle East, Saudi Arabia takes first place for 2023 car sharing revenue, as the industry generate $111 million throughout the year.

It’s also forecast to earn $149 million in 2027.

Israel is in second place, with a 2023 car sharing revenue of $83 million and predicted 2027 revenue of $123 million (CAGR of 10.35%)

United Kingdom

Most used car sharing brands UK 2023
Source: Statista

The UK’s car sharing market is the biggest one in Europe in terms of revenue, and is forecast to grow at a CAGR of 3.51% from $0.8 billion in 2023 to $0.93 billion in 2027. The UK ARPU is $400, almost double of the European average.

The demand for car sharing services grew by 22% in the UK from 2019 to 2023, indicating that Britons have a significant need for this service.

The most popular car sharing brands in the UK are Enterprise CarClub and Zipcar, which have a 36% and a 28% market share, respectively. According to a report by Zipcar, 87% of UK car sharing users were based in London as of 2020.

APAC

APAC car sharing market revenue forecast 2027
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/

When it comes to the Asia Pacific (APAC) region, Mainland China is the clear winner in terms of the car sharing market revenue. Its 2023 revenue amounted to $2 billion, an increase of over $200 million from 2022.

By 2027, it’s predicted to surpass $3.2 billion. To compare, Hong Kong’s 2023 car sharing revenue was just under $170 million, and India’s was $72 million.

That’s not to say that other APAC countries aren’t looking promising. Japan and South Korea’s forecast 2027 growth of the car sharing market is very close to $0.8 billion.

Australia and New Zealand are admittedly lagging behind, with Australia’s 2027 revenue forecast set at $0.32 billion, and New Zealand’s at just $0.15 million.

LATAM

Finally, the Latin America (LATAM) region. Statistics indicate that it’s the smallest car sharing market in terms of revenue. 

Here’s a breakdown of LATAM countries’ car sharing market revenue in 2023, as well as their respective predicted revenue by 2027.

Country Revenue 2023, USD Projected revenue 2023, USD
Argentina $14.1 million $14.4 million
Brazil $13.3 million $17.9 million
Chile $25.4 million $34.5 million
Colombia $11 million $14.8 million
Uruguay $1.7 million $2.4 million

Car Sharing User & Demographic Statistics

Car sharing users in Europe 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/

In this section, we’ll explore the user statistics for the car sharing market and take a look at the service’s main demographics.

Number of Car Sharing Service Users

Forecast of car sharing users worldwide 2027
Source: Statista

Economists expect the car sharing market bring more revenue around the world. And as you might expect, a significant reason for that is the growth in the number of users.

By 2028, the number of car sharing users worldwide is expected to reach almost 65 million, almost as much as the entire population of the UK!

To put things in context, this is almost double the number of car sharing users in 2017 (36 million). Since then, the number has been growing consistently, with around 3 million new users coming on board each year. Some of the key reasons behind this growth are:

  • Reduction in fuel and parking costs – a significant motivation for many who struggle with inflation and cost-of-living crises.
  • Reduction in car costs for owners who share their vehicle.
  • Reduced carbon emissions and pollution due to lower overall number of purchased cars.
  • Opportunities to try out electric cars at a very affordable cost.

Key Car Sharing Market Demographics

In terms of car sharing user breakdown by gender, a 2022 study by the Polytechnic University of Turin suggests that men account for a larger proportion of car sharers than women, and are more likely to switch to that mode of transport. 

However, the study stipulates that the gender breakdown in different regions largely depends on socioeconomic conditions. For instance, 70% of German and 80% of Swiss car sharers are men.

On the other hand, 63% of free-floating car sharing users in Canada are women. And women in North America are generally more likely to choose car sharing services than women in Europe.

In terms of age differences, the study makes clear links between younger people and increased use of car sharing services. For instance, in Turin, 93% of members of free-floating car sharing services are aged 18-34.

At the same time, the majority of free-floating car sharing users in Canada (74%) are aged 25-44, and Canadian station-based car sharing users are mostly aged 25-49 (71%).

Car sharing is emerging as an increasingly disruptive force, thanks to the changing habits of consumers and the increased urbanization. As a result, the automotive market is experiencing a shift through shared mobility becoming more prominent.

In this section, we take a look at what the future might hold for the car sharing market and the key emerging trends that could shape it.

Urbanization & Sustainability

As the levels of urbanization grow, so does the demand for sustainable travel. Car sharing offers an attractive alternative to traditional car ownership.

With car sharing, those living in an urbanized area can access cars on a short-term basis without the extra costs of maintenance, parking, and insurance.

With limited parking space in urban developments, car sharing services can provide the answer that’s less costly and more sustainable.

Shifting Mobility Patterns

The shift to remote and hybrid work induced by the COVID-19 pandemic has changed many areas of our lives forever, and mobility is no exception. With many people no longer needing to commute to work every day, the need for car ownership decreases, and that’s where car sharing comes in.

For those who live in suburban areas and don’t need to go to the office every day, but do need to run errands that require a vehicle, car sharing is becoming the solution. We expect that trend to continue in the future.

Electric Vehicles

Electric vehicles (EVs) represent another significant shift in the automotive industry, given their sustainability offering, but they’re expensive to own and their purchase requires significant decision-making. Car sharing offers a chance for consumers to test out the EVs before buying while also reducing their carbon emissions.

Subscription Economy

The subscription trend is unfortunately permeating many industries today, and it’s only a matter of time until it reaches the automotive industry.

Certain car manufacturers are, in fact, already using this model to break into the car sharing market.

The flexibility and customization offered by the subscription-based car sharing service allows customers to choose packages tailored to their specific needs. This shift towards subscription-based car sharing is a reflection of a broader consumer trend, where they’re increasingly interested in personalized and on-demand services.

Driving the Point Home

Car sharing is an exciting market that emerged as a result of significant changes in our environment and preferences.

The increased interest in sustainable living and traveling, urbanization, and increased remote work have all contributed to the growth of the car sharing market, forecast to reach $15.4 billion by 2028.

These trends and statistics are a strong indicator of the increasing dominance of shared mobility and focus on sustainability. As governments around the world introduce more incentives for the latter, we predict car sharing to gain even stronger ground in the next few years.

Sources

Click to expand all sources
  1. Snapshot of the European car-sharing market (McKinsey & Company)
  2. Car sharing industry analysis – research and statistics (Zipcar)
  3. Global Car Sharing Market Report 2023: Sector is Expected to Reach $15.4 Billion by 2028 at a CAGR of 14.04% (BusinessWire)
  4. Car-sharing – Worldwide (Statista)
  5. Market shares of leading car-sharing companies worldwide in 2022 (Statista)
  6. Car sharing in Germany – statistics & facts (Statista)
  7. Number of car sharing users worldwide from 2017 to 2022 with a forecast through 2027 (Statista)
  8. Most used car sharing brands in the UK as of September 2023 (Statista)
  9. Market shares of leading car-sharing companies in Europe in 2022 (Statista)
  10. Car-sharing – United States (Statista)
  11. Car-sharing – Canada (Statista)
  12. Car-sharing – Mexico (Statista)
  13. Car-sharing – Europe (Statista)
  14. Car-sharing – France (Statista)
  15. Car-sharing – Germany (Statista)
  16. Car-sharing – Netherlands (Statista)
  17. Car-sharing – Spain (Statista)
  18. Car-sharing – United Kingdom (Statista)
  19. Car-sharing – South Africa (Statista)
  20. Car-sharing – Morocco (Statista)
  21. Car-sharing – Kuwait (Statista)
  22. Car-sharing – Bahrain (Statista)
  23. Car-sharing – United Arab Emirates (Statista)
  24. Car-sharing – Saudi Arabia (Statista)
  25. Car-sharing – Israel (Statista)
  26. Car-sharing – South Korea (Statista)
  27. Car-sharing – Australia (Statista)
  28. Car-sharing – Japan (Statista)
  29. Car-sharing – China (Statista)
  30. Car-sharing – India (Statista)
  31. Car-sharing – New Zealand (Statista)
  32. Car-sharing – Hong Kong (Statista)
  33. Car-sharing – Colombia (Statista)
  34. Car-sharing – Argentina (Statista)
  35. Car-sharing – Brazil (Statista)
  36. Car-sharing – Uruguay (Statista)
  37. Car-sharing – Chile (Statista)
  38. Number of registered car sharing users in Germany from 2013 to 2023 (Statista)
  39. Number of car sharing users in Europe in 2022, by country (Statista)
  40. The UK could see huge car ownership changes as demand for car-sharing increases by 22% (Express)
  41. Car sharing (NI Direct)
  42. A review of the socio-demographic characteristics affecting the demand for different car-sharing operational schemes (ScienceDirect)
  43. The best car subscription providers (The Car Expert)

The post Car Sharing Market Statistics: Industry Growth Forecast for 2027 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/car-sharing-market-statistics-forecast-2027/feed/ 0
40+ Mind-blowing Cognizant Statistics and Facts for 2024 https://techreport.com/statistics/cognizant-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/cognizant-statistics/#respond Tue, 02 Jan 2024 23:01:48 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531658 Key Cognizant Statistics

Headquartered in Teaneck, New Jersey, global information technology powerhouse Cognizant began humbly in 1994 as an in-house team serving parent company Dun and Bradstreet out of Chennai, India. Co-founders Kumar...

The post 40+ Mind-blowing Cognizant Statistics and Facts for 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Cognizant Statistics

Headquartered in Teaneck, New Jersey, global information technology powerhouse Cognizant began humbly in 1994 as an in-house team serving parent company Dun and Bradstreet out of Chennai, India. Co-founders Kumar Mahadeva and Francisco D’Souza steadily grew their specialized consulting outfit focused on emerging digital transformation needs. Their vision to deliver innovative, custom-tailored solutions for clients worldwide soon morphed Cognizant into a veritable one-stop shop IT partner.

Under current CEO Brian Humphries, Cognizant now rakes in nearly $20 billion annually. Their services extend beyond consulting to include digital strategy, cloud implementation, data analytics, AI solutions, and more. But despite swelling to a workforce of more than 350,000 across 87 global offices, Cognizant continues to promote its people-first foundation.

Cognizant’s investment in understanding each customer’s unique needs while supporting employees to excel has fueled its meteoric rise as a global IT leader. But the numbers reveal even bolder ambitions to dominate as a digital transformation trailblazer. According to IDC, global digital transformation spending is projected to reach over $7 trillion by 2025. And Cognizant aims to continue growing along with it if the past three decades have shown anything.

Intrigued by the company’s origins and its exponential growth? Read on as we unpack key statistics documenting Cognizant’s impressive journey. Upcoming sections will spotlight financials, customers, offerings, and workforce metrics that showcase this IT giant’s global influence.

Key Cognizant Statistics

Key Cognizant Statistics

  1. Born in 1994, Cognizant kicked off as an in-house unit of Dun & Bradstreet.
  2. Cognizant had its first Initial Public Offering in 1998.
  3. Cognizant stock price had been relatively stable throughout 2023, mostly trading at $65.28.
  4. Cognizant ranks #7 among the most valuable IT companies.
  5. The most valuable conferencing platform is Cognizant.
  6. The average working period for Cognizant staff is 6.5 years.
  7. Approximately 6,000 consultants work at Cognizant.
  8. As of last year, Cognizant’s revenue was about $19.4 billion.
  9. Cognizant staff are entitled to benefits such as Visa and green card sponsorship, flexible work-from-home opportunities, and annual performance bonuses.

General Cognizant Statistics 2024

General Cognizant Statistics 2023

1. Cognizant is a Global Professional IT Servicing Company.

Cognizant was first established in India and is a professional IT service and consulting company currently in the USA. It is now a household name in business process services, software product engineering, digital strategy, application services, and infrastructure services.

2. Cognizant is Headquartered in Teaneck, USA.

Cognizant has its headquarters in Teaneck, New Jersey, USA. It started in Chennai, India, as a division of Dun & Bradstreet in 1994. In 1998, Cognizant Corporation split into two companies, IMS Health and Nielson Media Research, to enhance growth. It later moved its headquarters to the US in March 1998, with Kumar Mahadeva as the CEO. Cognizant Corporation conducted an initial public offering (IPO) of the subsidiary’s stock, raising $34 million. This amount raised was less than IMS Health’s expectation. The firm wanted to use the funds raised to clear debt payments and to upgrade company offices. Afterward, the company sold its stake and acquisition.

3. Cognizant was Founded in 1994 as a Technological Unit of Dun & Bradstreet.

Cognizant started as Dun & Bradstreet Software (DBSS) on January 26, 1994. The company Cognizant was established as an in-house unit of Dun & Bradstreet for IT projects. In 1996, the company rebranded as Cognizant Corporation and to Cognizant Technology Solutions in 1997. Cognizant was co-founded by Kumar Mahadeva and Fransisco D’Souza and led by Brian Humphries, Karen McLoughlin, and Malcolm Frank.

4. Cognizant Began to Render Services to Customers in 1996.

Cognizant was established in 1994 to institute IT projects and to make organizational processes less complex. However, Cognizant (then DBBS), though stable in operation, began offering services to clients in 1996.

5. Cognizant Conducted its First IPO in 1998, Accompanied by Years of Rapid Growth in the Early 2000s.

After Cognizant Corporation split into separate units and spun off some assets, IMS, a sub-unit of Cognizant Corporation, conducted an IPO. The sole aim of Cognizant’s completion of an IPO was to pay debt and upgrade its offices in India. Cognizant registered under a ticker and had their stock opened at $10 in June 1998. Cognizant could only raise a net of $34 million from sales of shares at $10 instead of the $11-$13 the company wished to sell at. It experienced super-fast growth in the 2000s, recognizing the company as a Fortune 500 Company in 2011.

6. Cognizant has Made 78 Competitor Acquisitions Across the Globe in its Years of Existence.

According to Wikipedia, Kyndryl and Mustache bought a Cognizant acquisition (Oy Samlink) in 2022. The acquisition above was, in turn, sold to DJE Holdings. Cognizant acquisitions in record are estimated to be 78 and spread across 18 countries. Cognizant acquired these companies between June 2002 and January 2023.

7. Cognizant Technology Solutions Rebranded from Dun & Bradstreet Satyam Software in 1997.

After Dun and Bradstreet spun off some subsidiaries in 1996, the company rebranded as Cognizant Technology Solutions in 1997. Cognizant bought about 24% stake at $3.4 million and moved its headquarters to the US.

8. Besides Being Facebook’s Monitor, Cognizant is a Hosting Provider for Healthcare Providers and Financial Services.

The Healthcare industry is broad. Therefore, digitalization is necessary to optimize and improve healthcare solutions. This is why most Healthcare providers utilize Cognizant for payers, providers, and other services. Aside from being a host to healthcare providers, Cognizant moderates Facebook content as a tech company. Cognizant came into the spotlight after being Facebook’s monitor, watching out for violating content.

9. Poison Pill Issued Shortly After Cognizant Purchased 56% of IMS’ Stake in 2003.

The rationale for selling IMS’s stake was to raise enough money to clear debts and invest in other businesses. In 2003, Cognizant possessed 54% of the IMS’s stake. Upon the legal purchase of IMS’s stake, Cognizant implemented a poison pill shareholders’ rights plan. The issuance of poison pills prevents hostile takeover attempts by intruders.

Cognizant Market Share Statistics

Market Share Statistics

10. Cognizant will Make Up 3.81% of the Market Share in the Second Quarter of 2022.

Statistics reveal that Cognizant dominates 3.81% of the world’s market share as of the second quarter of last year.

11. Cognizant Saw a 0.41% Decline in its Market Share 2024.

Cognizant’s share price fell by 0.41%, losing its market share estimated to 3.78% in the second quarter of this year.

12. Market Observers Estimated Cognizant Market Stock Will Reach $63.28 This Year.

Market observers set the stock price for Cognizant at $69.01 as of August last year, but by November this year, the figure is already at $63.28.

13. Cognizant’s Stock Surged to $66.53 Between Last Year and This Year.

The stock of Cognizant reached a year’s high of $93.47 and a year’s low of $63.26 between 2021 and 2022. Data from the Financial Times revealed that these figures dropped to $66.53 and $59.62 between last year and this year.

14. In 2023, Cognizant Attained the Same Profit Margin and Operating Margin at 14.25%.

Statistics show that Cognizant’s profit margin as of 2022 hit 11.74%, with an operating margin of 15.32%. However, the case was different for Cognizant in July 2023, as the profit and operating margin marked the same margin at 14.25%.

15. Cognizant Emerges Among the Industry’s First Three Most Valuable IT Services Companies.

By its brand value of $8.63 billion and its outstanding efforts, Cognizant ranked the third most valuable IT company in 2023. The IT firm is set to deliver the best healthcare financial services and provide IT support solutions to businesses in need.

Usage Statistics of Cognizant

Usage Stats

16. The Top 5 Internet Companies Utilize Cognizant Platform.

The ability to service diverse areas besides CRM services is a plus for Cognizant. The globally recognized CRM software company renders quality IT support, maintenance, and cloud computing services. The top 5 internet companies that depend on Cognizant IT services include Google, Amazon, Microsoft, Apple, and Cisco.

17. 30 of the Largest Pharmaceutical Companies in the World Use Cognizant IT Services.

Around 30 leading players in the pharmaceutical industry deploy the services of the Cognizant platform. As a leading provider in the Healthcare industry, Cognizant is committed to managing pharmaceutical infrastructure for enhanced business efficiency. Some pharmaceutical companies served by Cognizant include:

  • Johnson & Johnson
  • Pfizer
  • Roche
  • Novartis
  • Merck & Co.
  • AbbVie

The number of pharmaceutical companies using Cognizant’s IT services is vast and not limited to the list above.

18. 90% of Banks in Europe Utilize Cognizant Platforms and Services.

As we all know, Cognizant services different industries, including the banking and financial sectors. Cognizant services cut across data analytics, application development, IT consultation, and more. In the list below, you’ll find some of the largest European banks that utilize Cognizant’s platforms and services:

  • Barclays (UK)
  • BNP Paribas (France)
  • Deutsche Bank (Germany)
  • HSBC (UK)
  • Intesa Sanpaolo (Italy)
  • Lloyds Banking Group (UK)
  • Santander Group (Spain)
  • Société Générale (France)
  • UBS Group (Switzerland)
  • UniCredit (Italy)

Cognizant serves 9 in every 10 banks and financial institutions in Europe. 

19. Cognizant Creates a Significant Impact in the Healthcare Industry by Rendering 23 Out of 25 Healthcare Plans.

It drives better health outcomes by helping the Healthcare industry make informed decisions on Analytics strategy and process innovations. Cognizant offers IT support services such as ERP and CRM systems, E-health, and portal development services. Research shows Cognizant renders as much as 23 of 25 healthcare plans.

Cognizant Employees and Customers Statistics

Employees and Customers Statistics

20. India Makes Up 45% of Cognizant’s Global Employees.

India is supposedly the country with the largest number of Cognizant employees. Out of the 355,300 Cognizant employees across the globe, its former headquarters, India, records the greater percentage of its staff. Indian employees who work with Cognizant in India number about 150,000 and makeup 45% of the global employees. Cognizant’s large employee count has contributed to the company’s growth in the IT industry.

21. Gender Disparity Amongst Cognizant Employees, Men (65%) and Women (35%).

Reports show that the disparity in gender at Cognizant is about 30%. The men make up 65% of Cognizant employee count, while the women make up 35%. A factor that could influence gender disparity at Cognizant is that males dominate the Information Technology industry. Cognizant is making progress toward gender equality in its employee roll-list. The number of female employees at Cognizant dropped from 30% to 35% between 2017 and 2020. During this time frame, statistics show that the women’s participation at Cognizant was 36% to 38%, respectively. Furthermore, the number of female employees in Senior Management grew from 11.8% to 13.1% from 2020 to 2021.

22. Cognizant’s Major Employees’ Ethnicity Comprises 42% of Asians, 36% of Whites, and 10% of Latin Americans.

Statistics reveal the Asian race in the Cognizant workforce is 42%, and the Whites make up 36%. The Latino Cognizant staff are approximately 10%, and the remaining percentage is an unidentified race. In addition to Asian being the most common ethnicity at Cognizant at 42%, it has the most common minority employees in the company.

23. Staff at Cognizant Work for at Least 6.5 Years on Average.

Around 29% of Cognizant staff stay employed for at least one to two years. 25% of employees work for 11 years or more, and only 8% work for eight to ten years. Employees are most likely to work with Cognizant for 6.5 years on average. Most Cognizant employees stay in the company for only 1-2 years.

24. Cognizant Employees Earn $84,545 on Average Yearly.

The department and varying geographic locations can influence the salary of a Cognizant staff member. For instance, Cognizant staff in the marketing department earns around $88,091 on average, and software engineers earn as much as $105,000. The IT service company pays its staff $84,545 annually annually and is generally well-paid. Statistics show that employees at Cognizant based in Los Angeles, CA, and Bellevue are the highest earners.

25. Minorities Make up the Greater Percentage of Cognizant Employees at 64%, and Minority Executive Staff are About 49%.

Notably, Cognizant executive minorities make up 49%, but generally, all minority employees are about 64%. These figures represent the diversity in Cognizant’s employees. Minority diversity awareness fosters career growth for minorities to create a safe and open environment.

26. According to its Employee Count, Cognizant had Approximately 6,000 Consultants in 2018.

Cognizant recorded around 6,000 global consultants from vertical and horizontal units in 2018. These units together comprise the Consulting team across all the company’s sections. In addition, the consultants contribute to the number of employees at Cognizant globally.

Cognizant Revenue Statistics

Cognizant Revenue Statistics

27. Cognizant’s 2021 Revenue was $18.5 Billion, Marking its Highest Profit Ever After Eight Consecutive Years of Growth.

Cognizant’s annual report shows the company hit $18.5 billion in revenue in 2021. This figure pointed to a growth of 11.1% over the previous year. In the IT service business, 2021 recorded the highest profit in revenue for Cognizant, following eight years of consecutive growth.

28. Cognizant’s Revenue Grew to $8.8 Billion in 2013.

In terms of growth, Cognizant has gone green, maintaining a steady revenue increase over the years, specifically between 2012 and 2013. During this period, Cognizant’s revenue moved from $7.3 billion to $8.8 billion, reflecting a 20.4% rise.

29. Cognizant’s Revenue Increased Consistently, Surpassing the $19.25 Billion Mark Predicted for 2022.

All through 2022, Cognizant witnessed substantial revenue growth. As reported in its 2022 annual report, its revenue in 2022 hit $19.4 billion, showing a 5% increase compared to 2021. This surpassed the $19.25 billion mark predicted for 2022.

30. Cognizant Recorded Growth in its Gross Profit, Which Amounted to $6.98 Billion Last Year.

According to statistical data, Cognizant earned a gross profit of 6.98 billion dollars in the 2022 financial year. From 2021, this represents an increase of 1.12%For the second quarter of 2023, gross profits amounted to $6.78 billion, representing a 3.85% decrease from last year.

31. Cognizant Recorded a Notable Annual Revenue Increase to $16.6 During the 2020 Financial Year.

Cognizant’s total revenue held at $16.6 billion. This achievement occurred in the 2020 financial year, coinciding with the significant effect of the global pandemic.

Cognizant Benefit Statistics

Benefit Stats

32. Cognizant Gives its Employees Several Health Benefits, Such as Medical, Dental, Vision, Life, Accident Insurance, and More.

According to data from a survey, Cognizant employees admitted they are beneficiaries of health insurance as the organization’s staff. Reports show that 100% have access to health insurance, and 84% of the employees enjoy life insurance. 64% of Cognizant staff enjoy mental health well-being benefits, and 55% enjoy gym membership. Other health benefits include dental, accident, vision, and eye care insurance.

33. Cognizant Staff Enjoy Maternity and Paternal Leave Benefits, Stock Options, Employee Discounts, 401(k) Plans, and Ten Days of Paid Vacation.

Besides the health benefits, an AmbitionBox survey reveals that 100% of people working at Cognizant said they have access to maternity and paternity leave. 100% of the company’s staff also said they enjoy other time off, such as annual leaves, while 27% enjoy career breaks or sabbatical leaves. Employees of Cognizant also get financial benefits. About 42% of Cognizant staff said they benefit from stock options (42%) and stock purchase plans, while 60% are 401(k) plan beneficiaries. Additionally, time-off bonuses of up to ten and employee discount days are added advantages that Cognizant employees enjoy.

34. Cognizant’s Green Card Statistics Show That its Employees Can Receive Visa and Green Card Sponsorship, Flexible Work-from-home Opportunities, and Annual Performance Bonuses.

Cognizant offers numerous benefits to its employees. They often get flexible work hours, some working-from-home days, and annual performance bonuses. Also, sponsorship on green and Visa cards are some other benefits enjoyed by employees at Cognizant. Although Cognizant provides its staff with Visa sponsorship, this benefit is not for people in all roles. Only qualified staff can secure an H-1B visa from Cognizant.

35. Cognizant Runs Assistance Programs and Employee Coaching Programs as Benefits for its Employees.

Working at Cognizant surely has several accrue benefits. Cognizant supports its staff through employee assistance programs, mentoring schemes, annual performance bonuses, and health and insurance benefits.

36. Cognizant Raised $34 Million in its First IPO, Less Than Expected by the IMS Health Underwriters.

Cognizant made around $34 million on the first attempt at an initial public offering in 1998. Unfortunately, the amount was below the expectations of the underwriters of the initial public offering of IMS. The IPO occurred after the parent organization spun off and moved its headquarters to the US in March 1998.

37. Cognizant is Comprised of Several Different Horizontal and Vertical Business Units.

The company is categorized into horizontal and vertical units comprising business consultants. These consultants make up the Consulting team across all branches of Cognizant. The vertical unit is involved in:

  • Manufacturing
  • Retail
  • Healthcare
  • Banking and Finance
  • Insurance

The horizontal unit is specialized in:

  • Analytics
  • Mobile Computing
  • BPO
  • Testing

38. Over the years, Cognizant has Been Prosecuted Worldwide for Countless Incredible Numbers of Illegal Acts.

A few years back, Cognizant and two of its former executives faced a lawsuit for violating the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA). The “SEC” charged the organization for violating anti-bribery, books and records, and internal accounting provisions in the Securities Exchange Act 1934. Investigation into the illegal acts was conducted, and Cognizant agreed to pay $25 million to settle violation charges. On the other hand, the former executives were accused of influencing the payment of bribes to an Indian government official. Some of the illegalities Cognizant was charged with included poor working conditions, corporate violations, tax evasion, bribery, corruption, and wage theft.

Cognizant Ranking in Fortune

Ranking in Fortune

39. Cognizant was Named to the Fortune 500 List in 2011.

The IT firm debuted on the Fortune 500 list of largest companies 17 years after its inception. As of 2011, Cognizant ranked 484 on Fortune’s list of companies based on its revenue in 2010, which was worth $4.59 billion. Enlisted below is Cognizant’s ranking on the Fortune 500’s list since it was named:

Year Fortune 500 Rank
2011 484
2012 398
2013 352
2014 308
2015 288
2016 230
2017 205
2018 195
2019 193
2020 194
2021 185
2022 194
2023 208

40. As of 2021, Cognizant is Ranked 185th on the Fortune 500 List.

Companies are ranked by the respective revenues for their financial years on the Fortune 500’s list. The 2020 fiscal year revenue of $16.7 billion impacted Cognizant’s rank on the Fortune 500’s list in 2021. By the end of 2020, the revenue moved the company’s ranking from 194 to 185 on Fortune’s list.

41. Cognizant’s 2021 Fortune 500 ranking of No. 185 is its Highest Ranking Since it First Appeared on the Fortune 500 Company Rankings in 2011.

Since appearing on the Fortune 500’s list, Cognizant has grown significantly, rising from its initial position of 484 to 185 in 2021. This marks the highest point the company has attained since it secured a place on the list.

42. The Fortune Magazine Ranked Cognizant as the World’s 5th Most Admired IT Service Provider in 2022.

In 2022, Fortune 500 magazine recognized Cognizant as the world’s fifth most admired IT Services Company. But this represents a slight shift from the position it held in 2015. Cognizant was named the 4th most admired IT Company in Fortune’s 2015 list. According to Fortune’s criteria, Cognizant was rated as follows:

Fortune’s Attributes of Reputation Scores
Innovation 4
People management 4
Use of corporate assets 4
Social responsibility 5
Quality of management 4
Financial soundness 4
Long-term investment value 4
Quality of products/services 4
Global competitiveness 4

To be listed on Fortune’s list implies that Cognizant’s score ranked in the top half of the IT services industry. Interestingly, Cognizant appeared on Fortune’s World’s Most Admired Companies for eleven consecutive years.

43. In 2017, Cognizant was Named to Fortune Magazine’s List of  Future 50 Companies.

An outstanding IT firm was ranked in 2017 on Fortune’s seventeenth Future 50 list of companies. Fortune’s Future 50 list evaluates companies in terms of long-term growth and best prospects. The methodology for this ranking was leveraged on non-financial data to give insights into the future view.

44. From 2003 to 2012, Cognizant Surfaced on Fortune’s List of the “100 Fastest Growing Companies.”

Due to the fast-paced growth of the IT firm experienced in the 2000s, Cognizant emerged on Fortune’s 100 Fastest Growing Companies list. Since the company first appeared in 2003, the firm has been on the list for ten consecutive years.

45. In 2023, Cognizant Ranked 208 on the Fortune 500 List of Large Companies.

With an annual revenue of $19.4 billion in 2023, the Information Technology servicing company is positioned at 208 on Fortune 500’s companies list. However, this figure represents depreciation from the previous year’s ranking at 194.

Wrapping Up

Cognizant offers IT and consulting expertise on IoT, AI, digital engineering, cloud computing, and key digital technologies to unlock business value. Its services are for clients in healthcare, life sciences, insurance, banking and finance, engineering, technology, retail, and modern enterprise competitors. These statistics provide a sneak peek into Cognizant’s global presence, operations in over 40 countries, and numerous delivery centers. Also, they give insights into the history, employee data, and achievements of the IT firm since its inception till date. 

Cognizant keeps making waves in the IT industry, experiencing revenue growth without being affected by many illegal acts recorded. Also, Cognizant has massively taken many unemployed individuals off the streets and has given more beauty to the IT industry. Cognizant’s modules, interface, and diverse services it offers have helped in the management of different businesses. It’ll be interesting to see this company continue on this upward trajectory.

FAQs

What makes Cognizant special?

Does Cognizant have acquisitions?

What is Cognizant’s ranking in Fortune?

Sources

The post 40+ Mind-blowing Cognizant Statistics and Facts for 2024 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/cognizant-statistics/feed/ 0
The Most Mind-Blowing Infor Statistics for 2023 You Must Know https://techreport.com/statistics/infor-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/infor-statistics/#respond Mon, 01 Jan 2024 01:03:08 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531289 Key Infor Statistics

Unless you’re in the enterprise software game, chances are Infor doesn’t ring too many bells. But behind the scenes, this company born out of Koch Industries has been pushing hard...

The post The Most Mind-Blowing Infor Statistics for 2023 You Must Know appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Infor Statistics

Unless you’re in the enterprise software game, chances are Infor doesn’t ring too many bells. But behind the scenes, this company born out of Koch Industries has been pushing hard to bring old-school business applications into the modern age.

Rather than just churning out software that gets the job done, Infor infuses next-gen technology like data science and top-notch user experience into the mix. The result? Efficient, easy-to-use products across everything from finance to HR that digitize cumbersome systems and provide real-time insights to inform better decisions.

And their aggressive shift to the cloud and focus on specific industries seems to be clicking with customers. Infor boasts impressive stats like:

  • 68,000 global customers dependent on their solutions
  • Cloud revenue shooting up over 25%
  • 90 of the top 100 aerospace companies leverage their software

Intrigued yet? Well, buckle up, buttercup; we’re just getting started highlighting all the numbers that showcase Infor’s experience-driven approach paying dividends. Read on for more fascinating stats and trends revealing this unsung software disruptor making seismic moves in the shadows.

Key Infor Statistics

Key Infor Statistics

  1. Infor was founded in June 2002 upon acquiring homogenous software services.
  2. In 2004, Infor Global Solutions rebranded from Agilisys.
  3. Infor recruited ex-Oracle executives in 2010.
  4. Infor started with just 1,300 customers and grew through other acquisitions.
  5. In July 2016, Infor recorded over 68 million cloud users.
  6. A vast majority of industries use Infor’s platform and services.
  7. Infor has customers spread across 175 countries in the world.
  8. Since 2014, Infor has been using AWS product (CloudSuite) as a SaaS.
  9. Microsoft and Infor own about half of SAP and Oracle’s share of the ERP market.
  10. Infor workforce estimates to be 180,000.
  11. An Infor employee earns $91,357 on average yearly.
  12. Infor generated $3.2 billion in revenue in 2021.

General Facts and Statistics on Infor in 2023

General Facts and Statistics on Infor

1. In 2002, Infor was Founded by Acquiring Other Companies Providing Similar Business Software Services as Agilisys in Malvern, Pennsylvania.

Infor was spun off from Systems & Computer Technology Corporation of Malvern, Pennsylvania, in June 2002. The company was renamed Agilisys when it had 1,300 clients in the Process of manufacturing ERP software.

2. New York, NY, is the Home of Infor Global Solutions Today.

Upon acquiring Infor Business Solutions AG in 2004, Agilisys moved its headquarters from Alpharetta, Georgia, to New York in 2012. Currently, New York is Infor’s headquarters.

3. In February 2004, Agilisys Acquired the German Company Infor Business Solutions and Changed its Name to Infor Global Solutions at the Same Time.

Infor Business Solutions was acquired by Agilisys in 2004 and rebranded to Infor Global Solutions. This measure was intended to strengthen the company’s ambitions following two years of sustained growth in several markets.

4. Infor Applied a Cloud Computing Strategy to Merge the Old and Software to Compete With Other Leading ERP Vendors.

After the change of leadership in 2010, Infor launched a cloud computing strategy, bringing its portfolio of older software to the modern era. The modernization of the software seeks to challenge the largest number of Enterprise Resource Planning vendors.

5. Recruiting Former Oracle Officials was Part of a Management Change 2010 at Infor.

As earlier established, the change in management at Infor was to grow the company and compete in the global market. This is why Infor saw hiring some former officials from Oracle in 2010 as a strategic move.

6. Infor Designs its ERP Software and Offers Services From an Extensive Library of Software Obtained via Business Acquisitions.

Infor designed multiple software products on its own, such as 10X. The company also created an ERP cloud platform in 2013 and a collaborative tool intending to work across other Infor products. In addition to its ERP software development, Infor sold other products for specific manufacturers.

Statistics on Infor Users in 2023

Statistics on Infor Users in 2023

7. With Only 1300 Customers, Infor Started and Expanded Significantly With the Continued Acquisition of Other Competitor Firms and Their Clients.

Infor began in June 2002 with around 1,300 customers of process manufacturing Enterprise and Resource Planning software. Infor grew through Golden Gate Capital and Summit Partners acquisition backing. Through the continuous acquisition of similar ERP companies and clients in the industry, Infor experienced significant growth.

8. By the Summer of 2006, Infor’s Client Base had Grown to 17,500 Just Four Years After its Inception.

Infor’s rapid growth in its early years proves the company focuses on presenting businesses with trustworthy and innovative ERP solutions. As of 2006, the company had around 17,500 customers for whom it rendered services.

9. Infor has Over 68 Million Cloud Users in Over 170 Countries, With Over 14,000 Cloud Customers as of July 2016.

According to research data, the number of Infor’s cloud users was estimated to be 68 million in 2016. The active Infor cloud users are all over 170 countries in the world. Additionally, Infor’s total number of cloud customers as of July 2016 amounted to 140,000. Infor is more than just an ERP company; it is a business that spans HCM, SCM, and even WFM. However, Infor confirms that it has over 15,000 customers on its cloud.

10. The Internal Software Research and Development Lab of Infor is Hook and Loop.

Hook and Loop’s primary focus is UX, which tailors the software developed for individual customers. In 2012, Infor established an internal software research and development laboratory, Hook and Loop. This R&D, which focuses on software User Experience (UX), was developed for individual customers and the Infor product line.

11. Enterprises Use Infor Across a Variety of Industries.

Infor is well known for multiple product lines and strong offerings in IT, Aviation, Defence, and Healthcare industries. Infor offers services to Manufacturing and Distribution, Retail and Fashion, Finance and Banking, Food and Drink, Hotel and Resorts, Electricity, and Gambling industries.

Statistics on Infor Usage in 2023

Statistics on Infor Usage

12. Over 65,000 Organizations Worldwide use Infor to Transform Their Business and Overcome Market Disruptions on a Digital Basis.

Over 65,000 organizations rely on Infor for digital transformation. These organizations also depend on Infor’s deep industry expertise to help overcome market disruptions and achieve business-wide goals.

13. Infor Customers are in Over 175 Countries and Territories Worldwide.

In more than 175 countries, Infor is focused on serving its customers in multiple regions and industries. Infor’s fundamentals are changing its system of publishing information within the company. Infor ERP was designed to establish a sustainable operating advantage regarding security and time to value.

14. The Incredible Value of the ERP System Showed in Just 1% of Today’s Firms Having No Cloud Infrastructure.

Statistics show that 48% claim that their digitization projects are complete. Of these, only 1% of businesses can be said to have no form of cloud infrastructure at all. Infor ERP has helped improve business operations, enhanced reporting and visibility, and increased growth and competitiveness. This is to show the importance of the ERP system in businesses.

15. Infor has Been Using Amazon Web Services (AWS) as a Public Cloud Platform for its SaaS Products Since 2014.

In 2014, Infor introduced CloudSuite, an Amazon Web Services-powered product. The purpose of Infor’s partnership with Amazon Web Services as infrastructure to Infor CloudSuite was to grow over 60 million customers.

16. Infor and Microsoft are Tied for Third Place in the Top ERP Vendors.

Most analysts put Infor in a tie for 3rd position with Microsoft ERP. Statistics show that Infor is recommended for large industrial organizations and Microsoft for Windows users. Other data in 2023 indicates that Infor is ranked at eighth position and best for complex supply chains, while Microsoft is best for integrations.

17. Half of the Share of ERP Market Leaders (SAP and Oracle) is Dominated by Microsoft and Infor.

As of 2017, Infor and Microsoft had around half the share of SAP and Oracle combined in the ERP market. In the same year, Infor significantly changed its workforce and customers.

Infor Workforce Statistics 2023

Workforce Stats

18. Infor has Over 18,000 Employees.

According to recent statistics, over 18,000 employees work at Infor. Other data show that some Infor employees are likely to be members of the Democratic Party.

19. Infor’s Support Team Comprises More than 1,700 Experts Helping to Transform Business Processes.

Infor’s support specialists assist in transforming businesses through the integration of business processes and document management. The support experts’ count at Infor is estimated at 1,700, and they ensure that customers have a wonderful experience when using the platform.

20. Infor has Other Partners from More Than 110 Offices Spread Across 45 Countries Globally, Estimated to be 2,000.

Since Infor focuses on providing efficient cloud software services, it partners with 2000+ partners worldwide. You will find these business partners in 110 office locations scattered all over 45 countries across the globe. Nashua, New York, Saint Paul, and Alpharetta have the most Infor offices.

21. In 2021, the Revenue-per-employee at Infor Reached $177,778.

Revenue per employee is calculated as a company’s total revenue divided by the number of employees. This helps to measure how much each employee generates for the company. With over 180,000 employees and a revenue of $3.2 billion, Infor boasts a revenue per employee of approximately $177,778.

22. An Employee at Infor Makes at Least an Average of $91,357 Annually.

In the US, an Infor employee earns an average yearly income of $91,357. In addition, the annual salary for the 10th percentile stands at $66,000, while the 90th percentile holds at $125,000.

23. The Average Time an Employee Works at Infor is 5.8 Years.

Infor continually evolves and takes proper care of its staff. Statistics reveal this could contribute to why most of their staff stay with Infor for an average of 5.8 years. Additionally, statistics show that, on average, 14% of Infor employees stay with Infor for 5.8 years.

24. The Percentage Ratio of Female Employees to Male Employees at Infor is 60%:40%.

In most work environments, gender disparity is the order of the day, especially at Infor. At Infor, the population of males compared to females is higher, which means the company is male-dominated. According to statistics, Infor comprises 60% male and 40% female employees. A major factor could be that Infor isn’t doing enough for its female employees.

25. About 57% of Infor Employees are Whites, Asians Make up 13% of the Workforce, and Latinx 13%.

The most common ethnicity at Infor is Whites, making up 57% of the total workforce. The Asians and the Latin Americans constitute about 26% of Infor’s employees.

Infor Revenue Statistics

Revenue Stats

26. 2017 will Continue to Echo in Infor as Koch Equity Pulled in More Than $2.2 Billion.

This move wasn’t the end, as another $1.5 billion was invested again in 2019. Much later, in 2020, the company rose to the height of a self-sufficient part of Koch Industries.

27. We Expect the ERP Software World Market to be Better Positioned by 2026.

It will reach $78.4 billion by the end of 2026, bringing a positive outlook for Infor Company. 

28. Infor Made a Progress of $3.2 Billion Just Within 2021. 

Revenue peaked for Infor Company in 2021 with an amazing $3.2 billion. It was a year that Infor as a company will not forget for a long time.

29. One of The Greatest Achievements Infor has Ever Made was its Purchase of Lawson Software for $2 Billion in 2011.

Before buying the Lawson software, it bought GEAC ERP in 2006 for $1 billion. It acquired the GT Nexus in 2015 for a tidy sum of $675 million in year 2015.

Infor introduced machine learning and AI applications in 2018 to avoid being left out in the open. This became an excellent move added to the company roster of enterprise resource planning services.

Conclusion

Undoubtedly, the ERP industry continues evolving to meet the rapidly changing business environment and future trends. The key to successful business operation lies greatly in understanding the value of ERP in today’s businesses. Infor has been listed among the leading ERP and cloud computing vendors since 2010. Cloud-based ERP like Infor has a greater advantage over on-premise products as they are innovative, flexible, and scalable. 

Due to Infor’s massive revenue growth in 2021, especially in SaaS orders, its industry depth is to accelerate cloud migration. The statistics show the functionality of cloud infrastructure, client base, general facts, and history of Infor. The statistics also address all the important information you need to know about the Infor.

FAQs

How much revenue did Infor make in 2023?

What numbers of people are Infor employees?

What are the services that Infor provides?

Sources

The post The Most Mind-Blowing Infor Statistics for 2023 You Must Know appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/infor-statistics/feed/ 0
Insightful Alibaba Statistics: Impact, Revenue, and Trends for 2023 https://techreport.com/statistics/alibaba-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/alibaba-statistics/#respond Mon, 01 Jan 2024 00:55:51 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531282 General Alibaba Statistics and Facts 

Think Amazon rules global eCommerce? Not so fast. Alibaba captivates customers across China and beyond at a scale matching Bezos’ behemoth. Raking in 3x the sales volume of Amazon annually,...

The post Insightful Alibaba Statistics: Impact, Revenue, and Trends for 2023 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
General Alibaba Statistics and Facts 

Think Amazon rules global eCommerce? Not so fast. Alibaba captivates customers across China and beyond at a scale matching Bezos’ behemoth. Raking in 3x the sales volume of Amazon annually, Alibaba powers 80% of Chinese online shopping and has expanded its tentacles into advertising, fintech, cloud, and even brick-and-mortar retail. Still not impressed?

Buckle up – we’ve barely scratched the surface of this Eastern enigma muscling in from the West. This article featuring Alibaba statistics reveals alluring facts behind Alibaba’s popularity and growth. We’ll learn more about the force behind its dramatic growth from the following Alibaba statistics and probably presume how far it can go. Let’s dive in.General Alibaba Statistics and Facts 

General Alibaba Statistics and Facts

  1. Alibaba is gaining traction as a top-ranking podium for all online marketers. 
  2. Alibaba will stay for 102 years, disseminating items globally. 
  3. It’s in the public eye as the top online global trading firm. Thus, it got 979 million active users in 2021.
  4. Alibaba gets 12.7 billion orders annually from firms seeking growth. 
  5. Prospective customers can pay for services in currencies like dollars and euros.
  6. Users see it as a “one-stop-buy-all” platform for their routine needs. Thus, Alibaba handled 583,000 orders every second during the 11.11 International Shopping Fiesta 2020.
  7. Tirelessly, it allows at least half of Chinese native parcels to come via Alibaba. 
  8. Alibaba provides fresh groceries and offers assistance in the areas of cloud computing. 
  9. It has won the coast of China and also serves numerous countries. So, you can log into Alipay in 110 states
  10. Alibaba has stretched out its frontlines of dominance to cover main marketplaces across the globe. Hence, 66% of its overall gain for 2021 was through retail services in China.
  11. It’s already beating Walmart’s global sales as 8.5 million sellers utilize its e-commerce platform.

A Comprehensive Overview of Alibaba Statistics

Overview of Alibaba Statistics

1. Alibaba Group was Founded by Jack Ma in 1999.

The conglomerate started in 1999 in Jack Ma’s house, which was an English teacher at the time. He shared his idea of connecting small and medium enterprises with global buyers with 17 others, and it kicked off right in his home. This idea birthed the B2B website called Alibaba.com, which has risen to become a global marketplace.

2. The Story of ‘Ali Baba and the Forty Thieves Inspired Jack Ma to Establish ‘Alibaba.”

Jack Ma decided to name Alibaba at a café in San Francisco. He had asked the café waitress how best to describe the tale of “Ali Baba and the 40 Thieves.” She responded with the phrase, “Open Sesame.” This opened his eyes to the story’s popularity. Thus, the brand’s name ‘Alibaba’ and the word “Open Sesame” have opened multi-commerce doors globally to assist small and medium-sized firms in China. From Alibaba came a successful (B2B) website, “Alibaba .com,” a top-notch global platform for wholesale trading between local businesses. 

3. Alibaba’s Headquarters is at 969 West Wen Yi Road, Hangzhou, China.

Alibaba raised $80,000 to commence the firm in Hangzhou, China. The capital was used to build an internet marketplace for Chinese organizations. In the platform, they list and market their items in bulk. Now, it is accessible in over 110 states and receives payment via nine world currencies. You can log into Alipay, its payment app, from 110 nations. 

4. Alipay’s Payment App was Instituted in China in February 2004 by Alibaba Group and Jack Ma.

In 2013, it surpassed PayPal as the largest online payment platform in the world. In June 2020, it served over 1.3 billion people and about 80 million suppliers globally. 

5. Alipay Receives Payment in 9 Currencies of the World. 

Alipay has what it takes to facilitate easier payments across boundaries. It allows payments from different locations. You can send and receive payments in Australia, the UK, Japan, New Zealand, Singapore, or the US. But for now, Alipay only accepts nine currencies, which include CNY, CAD, JPY, GBP, EUR, USD, SGD, AUD, and HKD. Whether it will add support for more currencies is yet to be determined. If the Alipay page doesn’t display currencies, you must contact the platform support team to guide you on how to proceed with your payment.

Alibaba Market Statistics

Alibaba Market Statistics 

6. Alibaba Group Rose With Full Force to Become the World’s Third-largest E-commerce Company in 2021.

The conglomerate has been performing exceptionally well. It gradually became the third among the world’s largest e-commerce platforms in 2021, when it amassed an aggregate revenue of $109.48 billion. This value marked a 52.09% increase from the revenue recorded in 2020. In the same year, Amazon was in the first position with a profit of $469.82 billion, while JD.com secured the second position with $129.48 billion. 

Alibaba has never stopped its remarkable performance, even amid economic meltdowns. Instead, it keeps waxing stronger. In June 2023, the Alibaba Group became number three amongst other online retail outlets in market capitalization. Notably, Alibaba holds great influence as an undisputable leader in China’s merchandising sector. In its history, Alibaba has claimed a 55.9% share of retail e-commerce in China. That was a great way of ending the 2019 fiscal year.

7. In 2023, Alibaba Got Over 582.73 Billion Yuan in Revenue from China Alone. 

We can describe Alibaba as the true definition of resilience and adaptation, aggressively navigating the changing tides in the e-commerce industry with remarkable progress. The e-commerce giant has a lot of loyal customers who prefer to use its services. So, Alibaba uses this impressive customer loyalty to its advantage. As of March 2023, reports tell us that Alibaba commands 582.73 billion yuan in revenue. 

Its fiscal accounting evaluation shows that the firm made remarkable progress, and its income increases yearly. So far, in 2023, it has gotten over 49.9 billion yuan in profit. In addition, Alibaba reported that it realized 65.57 billion yuan in revenue. This proves that 2023 was better off than 2022, with a gap of 47 billion yuan.

8. The Success Story of Alibaba Company Injected Massive Revenue into the E-commerce Market in China.

As the records state, China, like other years, witnessed a rise in e-commerce activity in 2022. In just 12 months, the country made 13.8 trillion yuan from e-commerce. This suggests there may not be a slowdown of this growth trend soon.

9. Alibaba Holds its Users in High Esteem. It Prioritizes User Satisfaction, and That Boosts the Company’s User Base.

Due to its commitment to customer satisfaction, Alibaba.com has been actively improving its service delivery. It conducts promotional campaigns that attract more customers. As a result, it attracted more than 1.28 billion people to use its services. In 2021, Alibaba.com recorded 979 million users, which continued to increase, reaching 1.280 billion users within that same year. Of this number of users, 301 million came from Chinese nationals, while 979 were foreign users. As Alibaba’s fame grew, it resulted in a great inflow of users and visitors in the first half of 2022.

Alibaba Demographics

Alibaba Demographics

10. 122.94 Million Users Make Their Purchases Straight From Alibaba as the Firm Poses an Ultimate Choice for Internet Transactions.

Online purchases take roughly 12.25 minutes. So, Alibaba lured 122.94 million visitors to its online service. Within two months of operation in September 2023, the firm has bagged a 3.12% increase in site users. Out of all traffic to the firm, United States users make up the largest stream. The United States customers were 17.95 million, Indians were 8.76 million, and Indonesians were 8.1 million. 

11. About 50% or more of the Traffic Stream Comes From Mobile Phone Users, and the Highest Traffic Stream is From Mobile Devices at 68.99%. 

Desktop users accrue 31.01 % of traffic to the site. One of the entrée policies here is “free entry and free exit”; thus, Alibaba is very open and receptive to users. This “free entry and free exit” policy is strongly linked with the chief aim of the initiator, Mr. Jack. His major aim was to link up both small and medium-size retailers in China for a global audience. Other activities, such as online marketing, mobile commerce, and digital training, are on affiliated Alibaba sites. 

12. Alibaba Group’s Employee Statistics are Approximately 70 Million Workers (Direct and Indirect).

Alibaba statistics here might not include all the employees as it creates chances for both direct and indirect workers globally. The firm has reported a rise in the number of fully employed workers in 2021 to 259,316, but there were just 251,462 workers in March. Thus, 7,854 employees joined within nine months.  

13. 30% of Women Occupy Top Management Positions, and From the Horse Mouth, Women Play Top Roles Online to Effect Positive Results.  

Also, 45% of the staff and management team are females under 3d. Other allied businesses take over aspects like online marketing, consulting, mobile e-commerce, digital professional training, logistics, and operations outsourcing.

Alibaba Order Statistics

Alibaba Order Statistics

14. Alibaba Processed 583,000 Orders in November 2020. 

On 11 November 2020, 583,000 orders were processed per second during the sales event. This contributed immensely to the revenue generated in 2020. Then, 12.7 billion orders were taken annually; Holdings normally receives up to 12.7 billion orders from its numerous users across the globe. According to world data, about 35 million orders are processed successfully daily. 

15. Alibaba was Listed on the NYSE in 2014.

You can find Alibaba under “BABA” on the NYSE-New York Stock Exchange, according to data from the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). The company’s initial offering price of BABA was $68 for each American depositary share (ADS), from which it made approximately $21,8 billion.

16. In 2023, 65% of Alibaba Group’s Revenue Came From China.

The year 2023 started on a good footing for Alibaba Group and continued throughout the year. It shouldn’t surprise anyone that Chinese users bring in a bulk (65%) of Alibaba’s revenue

17. Alibaba’s Active Chinese Users Reached 903 Billion in 2023.

Alibaba has many reasons to smile in 2023, one of which is that it recorded more than 903 billion active Chinese consumers in 2023. Notably, this figure also includes all of the company’s retail users in the country.

18. Alibaba Saw a 24.3% Boost in Revenue When the COVID-19 Pandemic Was at its Peak.

One can say that COVID-19 was a blessing in disguise for the e-commerce sector. The reason is that several e-commerce firms witnessed a revenue and customer base boom. According to the report, with a 24.3% increase, Alibaba joined the cue of firms whose revenue skyrocketed after the COVID-19 epidemic. 

19. Annual Reports for the 2022 Fiscal Year Show Alibaba Group Realized $29.124 Billion in Revenue in September 2022.

Alibaba Group performed remarkably well in the 2022 fiscal year, realizing $29.124 billion in revenue, marking a 3% increase year-over-year.

20. Alibaba Spent 57 Million Yuan on Ads and Publicity Rallies in March 2021. 

The management of Alibaba Group bets high on advertising and publicity, believing these campaigns will drive more customer traffic. As a result, the company spent approximately 57 million yuan on advertising campaigns in March 2021 alone.

21. Alibaba’s Network Comprises 13 Key Firms.

Tmall and Taobao are the sites where you can get anything you want. Taobao.com and Tmall will offer groceries and many other things. It was initially launched in 2003 as a C2C internet shopping podium in China. Lazada was picked up in 2016 as an e-commerce platform in Southeast Asia. Freshippo is the grocery chain platform in China in 2016. It joins delivery services and restaurants, too.

AliExpress is a B2C popular brand among Brazilian, French, Russian, Spanish, and American users. 13.04% of its traffic is from Brazil, 8.20% is from the US, and Spain accounts for 7.49%. It was established in 2010. Youku was another acquisition in 2016. Other affiliates include:

  • 1688.com
  • Cainiao
  • Alibaba Cloud
  • Ele. me
  • DingTallk
  • Alibaba
  • Alimama

22. The National Single Day is a Notable Period in the Firm’s History. 

In 2021, the Chinese firm experienced a dual jump in its profit and sales volume because of this stated day. It is always a special day in November for the Chinese when prices of goods are brought down to the barest minimum. It’s also symbolized with (11.11), and that of 2021 was the most memorable; there was an exchange of gifts by all at a discounted price and a rise in sales volume till a gain of $84.5 billion was recorded.

23. Every 11 November (11.11), the Chinese Hold Singles’ Day Increases Sales. 

Users spend billions up to $84.54, according to 2021 festive year statistics. A record of this event occurred in 2020, which marked double figures in sales, from (38.4 to 74.1) or a 92.97% increase. This festive lasts for 14 days, and buyers enjoy discounts. Interestingly, the (GMV) or gross Merchandise volume rises above Cyber Monday or black Friday in the US.

Alibaba, Technology, and Its Future Expectations

Alibaba, Technology, and Its Future Expectations

Alibaba isn’t perturbed over what its future holds. Any fish swimming in the world’s oceans should certainly be alerted of the dangers of sharks! Thus, Alibaba tends to grow wider in knowledge as per technological inventions! Let’s have a look at Alibaba’s future!

24. The “Buy now and Pay later” or “BNPL” sales strategy by Alibaba in Asia draws users towards the firm

25. Alipay, a payment app, is for fast execution, affordable and stable prices, with seamless withdrawals. 

26. Since 2015, It’s been offering consumption micro-credits that were invented for customers to make installment payments for their purchases. These payments usually take the customers between 6 and 12 months to complete

27. This approach of purchasing goods is an option for 38% of people living in Singapore

28. Alibaba plans to assist 2 billion people worldwide in 2036. What it did in 2022 and 2023 is incomparable to what it envisaged to do in 14 years to come!

29. It is providing e-commerce services to 25% of Earth’s planet already; what could happen in the future when the Earth’s population is more than 8 billion? 

30. Experts believe the online retail market will hit $4 trillion in sales by the end of 2027 due to the fast growth in online retailing.

Conclusion

From all indications, Alibaba is taking over as the top household name in China. It is extending its scope of operations to all countries of the world. No wonder it plans to operate for another 102 years! Its easy payment and “buy now pay later” techniques have unlocked the magical door to vast awareness of Alibaba facts in China, Singapore, and worldwide. Analysts expect Alibaba to go on growing in everything. With its e-commerce strategies, enterprising ability, and good customer service delivery, the expectations will be accomplished.

Frequently Asked Questions

Which state observes the highest number of Alibaba customers?

What popular sites are used by Alibaba users?

What factors contributed greatly to Alibaba’s success?

Sources

The post Insightful Alibaba Statistics: Impact, Revenue, and Trends for 2023 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/alibaba-statistics/feed/ 0
Key Akamai Technologies Statistics in 2023 (and Facts) https://techreport.com/statistics/akamai-technologies-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/akamai-technologies-statistics/#respond Thu, 28 Dec 2023 12:58:53 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531266 Key Akamai Technology Statistics 2023

Akamai is no ordinary tech company. This digital solutions powerhouse is on a mission to fast-track businesses into the future. And with over 1 million websites relying on them for...

The post Key Akamai Technologies Statistics in 2023 (and Facts) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Akamai Technology Statistics 2023

Akamai is no ordinary tech company. This digital solutions powerhouse is on a mission to fast-track businesses into the future. And with over 1 million websites relying on them for cloud computing, cybersecurity, and other cutting-edge offerings, it’s safe to say Akamai is leading the charge. But the real measure of this trailblazer lies in the numbers. Akamai’s net worth sits well over $10 billion. 800,000+ US websites alone leverage Akamai’s special sauce to accelerate performance. And revenues? We’re talking billions per quarter – with growth riding high.

Yet revenue is only part of Akamai’s value proposition. Each day, the company fine-tunes and future-proofs its solutions, working tirelessly so customers can work effortlessly. No wonder titans like Microsoft and Apple amplify their tech with Akamai. But as impressive as these stats are, Akamai’s true impact is how it propels enterprise efficiency. With Akamai, businesses save millions in IT costs, defend against cyber threats, and deliver next-gen digital experiences – the kind that delight customers and drive revenue.

So, while the numbers speak volumes about Akamai’s leadership today, it’s the value they provide that spells success for their customers tomorrow. And with innovation in Akamai’s DNA, one thing is certain – the best is yet to come.

Key Akamai Technology Statistics 2023

Key Akamai Technology Statistics 2023

  1. Akamai Technologies made $936 million in revenue in the second quarter of 2023.
  2. Again, the cyber-security company saw an encouraging net income of $523 million in 2022.
  3. Akamai servers hold up to 31,837 live websites, according to statistical data.
  4. Impressively, in October 2023, Akamai’s website received 1.6 million web visitors.
  5. Based on reports, Akamai Technologies is worth $16.45 billion as of November 7, 2023.
  6. The cloud computing company recorded $8.303 billion as the worth of its total assets in 2022.

General Akamai Technologies Statistics and Facts for 2023

Akamai Technologies Statistics

7. Daniel Lewin, Randall Kaplan, Jonathan Seelig, F. Thomson Leighton, and Preetish Nijhawan founded Akamai Technologies Inc. in 1998.

8. Akamai Technologies participated in the MIT $50 thousand competition organized in 1998. During the competition, the founders presented a business proposal on consistent hashing.

9. The company’s headquarters is located in Cambridge, Massachusetts, United States of America.

10. In August 1998, the founders of Akamai Technologies created an effective prototype and incorporated the American company on August 20.

11. From statistics, we found that Akamai Technologies was listed on the stock market in October 1999. We also learned that the founders commenced the company’s commercial service that year.

12. In July 2001, Akamai Technologies Inc. joined the Russell 2000 Index and Russell 3000 Index lists.

13. In July 2005, the American company made $1.37 billion in yearly revenue.

14. In 2007, Akamai Technologies entered the S&P 500 Index list.

Akamai Technologies Market Share Facts and Statistics 2023

Market Share Facts and Statistics

15. Reports share that 55% of Akamai customers are among the best companies in the Fortune 500 list.

16. Other reports show that Akamai Technologies Inc. holds a 1.11% share of the market for content delivery networks.

17. Statistics show that the top 10 biggest online merchants use Akamai’s products and services.

18. From statistics, we saw that 10 leading fintech companies also use the Akamai products and services.

19. Interestingly, Akamai Technologies occupies the fourth position of the most famous content delivery network firm in the U.S. Moreover, statistics disclose that the firm is the world’s fourteenth most renowned content delivery network company.

20. According to statistics, 7 out of 10 leading international banks use Akamai services.

21. From shared reports, we saw that Akamai’s historical customers’ website amounted to over 9.78 million.

22. Akamai Services is a friend to all businesses; even the military uses it for digital operations. Statistics say that the 6 branches of the United States military use the company’s services.

23. Research discoveries have revealed that 7 out of 10 top healthcare companies use Akamai Technologies services.

24. From reports, we discovered that 2,383,451 websites are live on Akamai’s server. However, data showed that 7,398,406 websites have used the Akamai server in recent years.

25. Statistics reveal that 10 leading video streaming networks use the services of Akamai Technologies.

Akamai Usage Statistics and Facts 2023

Akamai Usage Statistics

26. Statisticians shared that Akamai has made an average of 3 trillion online transactions daily.

27. From statistics, we learned that Akamai Technologies has been Apple’s principal content delivery network provider since 1999.

28. According to reports, Akamai Intelligent Edge Platform has 360,000 internet servers in over 135 countries.

29. The company’s Edge Platform has 31,837 live websites on its internet server.

30. The Edge Platform internet servers collected real-time information from 1,350 global networks.

31. The cyber-security company revealed that it had over 9,800 employees in 2022.

32. According to statistics, Akamai’s employees comprise 64% men and 36% women

33. We also discovered that the employees at Akamai Technologies work for an average of 3 years and 3 months before resigning.

34. The common races seen among Akamai’s workers are White (55%), Asian (20%), and Latino (13%).

35. Akamai Technologies Inc. pays its employees an average yearly salary of $110,629.

Akamai Revenue and Stock Value Statistics and Facts 2023

Revenue and Stock Value Statistics

36. Akamai’s report shares that it recorded $936 million in revenue in the second quarter of 2023. The revenue is up by 4% above the $903 million recorded in the second quarter of 2022.

37. Akamai generated $433 million from security revenue in the 2nd quarter of 2023, which is 14% higher than 2022.

38. The company received $380 million from the delivery revenue in Q2 of 2023, a disappointing scenario because it shows a drop of 9% from 2022.

39. Again, Compute revenue gave Akamai Technologies $123 million in the Q2 of 2023. This was encouraging, given that the value rose by 16% from what it was in 2022

40. Remarkably, Akamai’s report for the Q2 of 2023 says that $480 million in revenue was generated from the United States. This value is only 1% bigger than what it got in the same year period from the same country.

41. The report states that Akamai had $456 million from international revenue, which increased by 7% from last year’s figure.

42. Akamai Technologies obtained $3.6 billion in yearly revenue, and the amazing thing is that the value is 8% higher than what it got in 2021.

43. Based on reports, Akamai made an annual gain of $557 million in 2020.

44. In 2021, Akamai Technologies realized $3.5 million in annual net income.

45. In 1999, Apple Inc. got $12.5 million in Akamai Technologies Inc., statistical data reveals.

46. Meanwhile, data from Google Finance revealed that Akamai’s stock was worth $108.47, holding a trading volume of $1.4 million on November 8.

47. Akamai had a market cap of $16.44 billion and a business valuation of $16.45 billion on November 7, 2023.

Fiscal Year Net Income and Operating Income Statistics on Akamai Technologies 2023

Fiscal Year Net Income and Operating Income Statistics

48. Statistics share that Akamai got $523,672 net income in the 2022 fiscal year, a fall of 19.64% from 2021. 

49. Stock analysis shows that the American company realized a net income of $651,642 in the 2021 fiscal year. Also, we observed that the recorded value was a 16.98% rise from the value in 2020.

50. Akamai Technologies had $557,054 in its 2020 fiscal year net income, marking a 16.53% increase from the value in 2019.

51. It gradually grew well in 2022 and got $676,274 in operating income for that fiscal year.

52. The Stock Analysis report discovered that Akamai had an operating income of $783,148 in its 2021 fiscal year.

53. The nice company said it spent $391,434 on the Research and Development Unit in the 2022 fiscal year.

54. Stock Analysis shares that Akamai recorded $78,512 as money spent on other operating expenses in the 2022 fiscal year.

55. Akamai Technologies spent $1,086,615 Selling General and Admin Units in the 2022 fiscal year.

56. Statistics show it spent $1,556,561 on operating expenses in the 2022 fiscal year.

57. Statistics say that Akamai recorded $335,372 as expenses spent on the Research and Development Unit in the 2021 fiscal year.

58. Akamai Technologies spent $1,406,943 on operating expenses for the 2020 fiscal year.

59. Stock analysis showed that the company made $2,232,835 gross profit for its 2022 fiscal year.

60. Statistics said Akamai Technologies realized a gross profit of $2,192,267 in the 2021 fiscal year. 

61. For the 2019 and 2020 fiscal years, it made a gross profit of $1,905,993 and $2,065,477, respectively.

Akamai Yearly and Quarterly Asset Statistics

Akamai Yearly and Quarterly Asset Statistics

62. According to data from Macrotrends, Akamai’s total asset value was $8.18 billion in the first quarter of January this year.

63. In the second quarter of the same year, we found out that Akamai’s total assets were worth $8.34 billion, reflecting a 1.95% increase from the previous value.

64. Furthermore, the firm’s total assets in the fourth quarter of last year were worth $8,303 billion.

65. But, in the second quarter of that same year, Akamai Technologies made total assets worth $8,211 billion.

66. In the remaining part of last year, the American firm’s total assets rose to $8.3 billion, reflecting a 2.02% rise from its figure in the preceding year.

67. For the value in 2021, Macrotrends disclosed that it was worth $8.13 billion, a 4.82% growth from the previous year.

68. It still made a remarkable stride in 2020, with its total assets totaling $7.76 billion, indicating a 10.81% growth from the previous year.

69. As of October this year, the Akamai website ranks #28,092.

70. Akamai’s website got 1.6 million web visitors and 9.43 viewed pages from each visit in the same month. It also had a 40.62% bounce rate.

71. Still, in October, we noticed that 28.28% of Akamai’s web visitors came from the United States and 23.82% from India.

72. Similarweb stated that the company’s website received 29.84% of its traffic from women and 70.16% from men in October this year. 

73. In October this year, the company’s website grabbed the attention of web visitors, and traffic rose from people between the ages of 25 and 34.

74. Still, in October, it got 89.46% of its web visits from organic traffic, 10.54% from paid traffic, and nine thousand keywords sent to it.

Akamai’s Yearly Net Income Statistics

Yearly Net Income Statistics

75. Similarweb said the keyword Akamai sent over thirty-one thousand web visitors to the company’s site in the same month.

76. In the last quarter of 2023, we noticed that Akamai’s website received some web visitors from eleven social networks. Some of these social networks include YouTube, LinkedIn, and Reddit.

77. Akamai recorded a net income of $523 million in 2022. This value was $128 million less than what it got in 2021.

78. From statistics, we saw that the company made an annual net income of $651 million in 2021. Remarkably, this value represented a 16.88% increase from what it had in 2020.

79. In 2019, Akamai Technologies had a yearly net income of $478 million. This year, it recorded an interesting figure, 60.49%, a rise from what it had in 2018.

80. The company has 345,000 internet servers in 135 countries. 

81. And now, it’s in the top 5 content delivery networks alongside Google and Fastly Inc.

82. In 2022, Akamai’s website presented about 340,000 internet servers in over 130 countries. It also disclosed that the company has more than 1,200 networks worldwide.

83. Also, the Technologies revealed that 6 out of 10 leading automotive firms use its services and products, and 45 out of 50 top brokerages patronize them.

84. Statistics say that Akamai’s services are used by 14 out of 15 United States federal civilian agencies.

Conclusion

Akamai Technologies Inc. has proven its claims as one of the top-notch content delivery networks worldwide via its efficient services. With its internet servers seeming to be highly valued, when considering the number of sites associated with it, would anyone doubt this giant? Regarding the company’s pace in digital innovations, Akamai expects a troupe of users in the coming years.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is Akamai Technologies known for?

What companies patronize Akamai Technologies?

What are Akamai’s rival companies?

Sources

The post Key Akamai Technologies Statistics in 2023 (and Facts) appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/akamai-technologies-statistics/feed/ 0
Women Entrepreneurs Statistics 2023: The Rise of Sheconomy https://techreport.com/statistics/women-entrepreneurs-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/women-entrepreneurs-statistics/#respond Tue, 26 Dec 2023 16:32:52 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3531042 Women Entrepreneurs Statistics

Remember when starting a business wearing a skirt seemed unlikely? Not anymore. From small shops to bold startups, women are trailblazing into entrepreneurship and making things happen on their own...

The post Women Entrepreneurs Statistics 2023: The Rise of Sheconomy appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Women Entrepreneurs Statistics

Remember when starting a business wearing a skirt seemed unlikely? Not anymore. From small shops to bold startups, women are trailblazing into entrepreneurship and making things happen on their own terms. But the playing field isn’t quite equal yet. Behind the breakthroughs, female founders still see more doors closed than opened regarding funding and fair chances. The percentage of women who started a business in the last year was 47%, compared to 44% for men.

But sisters do it for themselves, nevertheless. Woman-run startups create ripple effects, change mindsets, and empower the next generation to dream big. The GEM report found that almost 80% of American women consider entrepreneurship a “good career choice.” It’s evident there’s room for that ripple effect to become a wave.

The number of women-owned businesses in the U.S. stands at 12.3 million. As the numbers will show, women are willing and able to excel given the opportunity. So, while the barriers are real, each woman who jumps over one joins the collective force toward making entrepreneurship more inclusive. Our groundbreakers today clear the way for future founders to build exactly what they imagine.

Major Women Entrepreneurs Statistics

Women Entrepreneurs Statistics

  • There are currently 12.3 million women-owned businesses today, compared to 402,000 in 1972.
  • 43% of the total number of entrepreneurs worldwide is made of women.
  • Women between 40 and 59 comprise the highest percentage of female business owners.
  • Ten women-owned businesses became unicorns in the first six months of 2019.
  • The issue of gender predisposition has affected over 35% of female entrepreneurs.
  • In 2021, women in the United States owned and operated about 31% of startups.
  • Over 50% of female entrepreneurs solely rely on their firms to cater to their needs.
  • Just a quarter of female entrepreneurs request business financing at the inception of their business.
  • 88% of businesses owned by women produce below $100,000 revenue yearly.
  • Barely 13% of firms in the construction, administration support, industrial, and waste management sectors are owned and operated by women.

Top Statistics on Women Entrepreneurs

Top Statistics on Women Entrepreneurs

1. There are 12.3 Million Women-Owned Businesses Today, Compared to 402,000 in 1972. 

There is a great difference between the number of businesses owned by women today and 50 years ago. As the years go by, the number of female startups increases globally. In 1972, only 402,000 women-owned companies existed, but this has grown to 12.3 million businesses in the United States today. However, the figure is still rising and isn’t expected to dwindle soon.

2. 43% of the Total Number of Entrepreneurs Worldwide is Made of Women.

Women entrepreneurs make up 43% of total business owners globally in 2021. Though women are making great efforts in the business cycle, they are still far from taking dominance in the business world.

3. Women Between 40 to 59 Years of Age Make Up the Highest Percentage of Female Business Owners.

Women between 40 to 59 years of age make up 62% of the total population of female entrepreneurs. 80% of women within the age bracket have a college degree, while just 30% of businesses are owned by women less than 40 years of age. The high number of older women in business can be attributed to the fact that growing a successful business requires experience, diligence, determination, and commitment. Also, the entrepreneur needs to build a formidable business network and maintain working capital.

4. 10 Women-Owned Businesses Became Unicorns in the First Six Months of 2019.

Ten women-owned businesses in 2019 achieved a unicorn status during the first half of 2019. At the end of 2019, 11 more companies were added to the list of women-owned businesses that made over $1 billion.

5. The issue of gender predisposition has affected over 35% of female entrepreneurs.

Getting a conventional loan from the bank is still a cumbersome task for many women intending to start a business. Over a third of female loan applicants have faced rejections or biased behaviors from financial institutions. Successful female loan applicants receive 5% less of the funding offered to men for business.

6. As of 2021, About 31% of Startups in the United States were Owned and Operated by Women.

A survey by Small Business Trends showed that 27% of women owned small businesses in 2020, which increased to 30% in 202130% of women-owned striving companies have succeeded for over 10 years. Meanwhile, 17% of women-owned businesses were opened to be financially independent.

7. Over 50% of Female Entrepreneurs Rely on Their Firms to Cater to Their Needs.

A report by SCORE states that 62% of women entrepreneurs depend on their businesses to cater to all their needs. Women entrepreneurs receive support as low as 8% from investors because they tend to invest more in male-owned firms. Female entrepreneurs charge 7% extra on their business credit card than their male counterparts. This credit card can help the business keep afloat in times of insufficient capital.

8. A Quarter of Female Entrepreneurs Request Business Financing At its Inception.

A negligible fraction of women (25%) request startup capital. One out of four applications for startup business financing to venture capitalists and finance houses comes from women. On average, women request for financing $35,000 lower than their male counterparts. Also, women in the corporate work environment ask for smaller salary raises when compared to men.

9. 88% of Women-Owned Businesses Make Below $100,000 in Revenue Yearly.

The Women Business Enterprise National Council stated that 88% of women entrepreneurs do not earn up to $100,000 as revenue yearly. Just 1.7% of female entrepreneurs exceed a revenue base of $1 million yearly. There is also a high influx of women into leadership positions globally.

10. Barely 13% of Firms in the Construction, Administration Support Services, Industrial, and Waste Management Sectors Are Owned and Operated by Women.

Industries like the construction, waste management, admin support services, and manufacturing sectors have seen more participation of women in recent years. Women are diving into opening new firms in these industries, and many have been successful in business in the first year of operation.

11. 1 in Every 3 Businesses has a Woman as Principal Owner.

Women are achieving quite a good feat in the business world, with one-third of principal owners of businesses comprising females. 1 of every 4 firms in an underdeveloped nation is owned by a woman. Meanwhile, 37% of companies in developed countries are held by women.

Statistics of Male vs Female Entrepreneurs

Male vs Female Entrepreneurs

12. Both Genders have a 32% Likelihood of Starting and Running a Business.

There is no difference in the level of entrepreneurial spirit in men and women. At 32% in both genders, it can be said that both genders have the same zeal for operating a business.

13. Crowdsourcing has a Success Rate of 69.5% in Women Compared to 61.4% in Male Counterparts.

Crowdsourcing has helped 69.5% of women in establishing a business. It is known as a viable way for women to get access to business financing.

14. An Average of $39,000 and $44,000 in Business Loans Was Obtained by Men and Women in 2020.

Statistics reveal that men are more at an advantage in loan procurement. On average, women needing venture capital received $39,000 compared to their male counterparts’ $44,000. Male entrepreneurs tend to have more access to business funding even when women are known to strive to achieve more profits in business than men. Women entrepreneurs’ revenue in 5 years of business activities is 10% more than the males in the same industry.

15. Women Entrepreneurs Appear More Stressed Out than Business Men.

About 26% of female entrepreneurs reported being more stressed out after starting their own business. This also includes a third of them having sleepless nights over the likelihood of their business failing. Statistics show that women, unlike men, are a bit pessimistic about their business sales growth, profit, and revenue earnings. This has reduced considerably over the years as more women start their businesses.

16. Investors Get 63% More Returns on Investment From Women Entrepreneurs Than From Male Startups.

Women entrepreneurs are known to give higher investment returns than their male counterparts. This has become one of the major reasons investors provide funding to women entrepreneurs.

Colored Women Entrepreneurs Statistics

Colored Women Entrepreneur Statistics

17. Women Entrepreneurs Have the Fastest-Growing Businesses in the United States.

Businesses owned and operated by black females in the United States between 2014 and 2019 increased by 50%. About 2.7 million enterprises in the United States are owned and managed by black women.

18. The United States Census Bureau of Statistics Revealed That the Minority-Owned 18.3% of Businesses Nationwide.

Besides the ownership of 18.3% of businesses by the minority, 19.9% of firms across all industries in the United States are owned by women. Yearly, more black women open small businesses, and Hispanic women closely follow this.

19. African-American Women Own Over 2.5 Million Companies in the United States.

African-American women are far ahead of men of the same race regarding business ownership. They are the only racial group whose business ownership rate surpasses their male counterparts. Black women’s business ownership has continued to increase steadily in recent years.

20. Minority Women’s Participation in Side Hustle Jobs Rises by 65%.

There has been an increase in women engaging in side hustles from 32% to 65%, which is not expected to slow down soon. Women’s side hustles include bookkeeping, customer service, animal care, consultation, beauty salons, and legal services.

The Impact of Covid 19 on Women Entrepreneurs

Impact of Covid 19 on Women Entrepreneurs

The COVID-19 pandemic affected financial well-being, reduced consumer demands, and disrupted women entrepreneurs’ supply chain and employee support system.

21. 70% of Female Entrepreneurs Are Worried About the Survival of Their Businesses Due to the COVID-19 Pandemic.

The SME firms owned by the feminine gender of the society experienced financial crises. Thus, about 70% of these women entrepreneurs are unsure of what the future holds for their firms.

22. The Canadian Administration Provided $15 Million to Support Female Entrepreneurs Whose Firms Were Affected by the COVID-19 Pandemic.

The subsidy was to boost the goals of (WES), also known as the ‘Women Entrepreneurship Strategy.’ The government aims to assist female entrepreneurs in remaining in business during the epidemics.

23. Of 100% of Firms Running in Saudi Arabia, 33% Were Initiated by Arabian Women.

The Saudi Arabian women make up 33% of the businesses operating in the state. That is nearly one-third of the firms in operation.

24. Women Are Anticipated to Bring About $18 Trillion in Revenue Out of Everything Attributable to Income in Saudi.

From all indications, the women’s fold is soaring to raise more than what was obtainable, that’s $13 million. Their prediction is to grab a revenue of $18 million within the next years. This deal is anticipated to come from women entrepreneurs within China and India.

25. The COVID-19 Pandemic Crushed the Stance of Company Owners, Especially Organizations Erected by the Feminine Gender, to 13%.

According to the US Chamber of Commerce report, lady inventors foresee a 60% drop in management to 47% all because of COVID-19. The case differs from their male colleagues, who experience only a 5% drop in functionalities.

Women Entrepreneurs Employment Statistics

Women Entrepreneurs Employment Statistics 

26. Female Entrepreneurs have Employed Over 9 Million Workers.

Female entrepreneurs have contributed significantly to the labor market. Over 9 million people have been employed by female entrepreneurs, making up about 8% of private sector employment. Combined with their male counterparts’ contribution, it adds up to 14% of private sector employment. This shows that women are contributing significantly to employment.

27. Colored Skin Women Entrepreneurs Provide 2,230,600 Jobs.

Colored women entrepreneurs have been able to provide over 2 million jobs. Female entrepreneurs generated $386.6 billion in revenue from their business. Meanwhile, African and Hispanic American women run the fastest-growing companies in the United States.

28. 22% of Female Entrepreneurs Seek Financing to Expand and Engage New Workers.

Most women will rather seek funding when they need to start a new line of business or expand their existing business. This is, however, not the case with men, as they are more likely to seek funding to implement a business idea. Female entrepreneurs often use these finances to employ more workers, refinance loans, and purchase work equipment.

Conclusion

The adage that says men solely control the business world is gradually changing with the increased presence of women in business. Many women have been successful in business due to their tenacity and drive for success. Women in China, black America, Hispanics, India, and other parts of the world are rising above the challenges in the business world. They have helped many people find employment and are generating income for families. The future is bright as more women undertake the journey of entrepreneurship globally. 

FAQs

How many businesses do women entrepreneurs own?

What country has the highest number of successful female entrepreneurs?

What challenges do women entrepreneurs face?

Sources

The post Women Entrepreneurs Statistics 2023: The Rise of Sheconomy appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/women-entrepreneurs-statistics/feed/ 0
55+ DocuSign Statistics Showing Its Vital Role in Modern Business https://techreport.com/statistics/docusign-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/docusign-statistics/#respond Tue, 26 Dec 2023 15:34:33 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3530775 Key DocuSign Statistics and Facts

In recent times, advancements in the tech industry have brought about various digital solutions for users of all kinds. The latest innovative solutions include AI suggestions, GPT functionalities, and digital...

The post 55+ DocuSign Statistics Showing Its Vital Role in Modern Business appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key DocuSign Statistics and Facts

In recent times, advancements in the tech industry have brought about various digital solutions for users of all kinds. The latest innovative solutions include AI suggestions, GPT functionalities, and digital signing/e-signature systems. E-signature platforms and software programs enable users to inscribe their signatures on documents in the cloud. One such impressive iCloud e-signature platform is DocuSign. The company has over 1,400,000 paying customers and over a billion users worldwide.

DocuSign is an ideal way for companies to enhance their authorization processes via e-signature tech. But what are the primary DocuSign statistics you must know before investing in the service? Below are essential DocuSign statistics and facts about market share, users, competitors, and company revenue. Read on for more information.

Key DocuSign Statistics and Facts

Key DocuSign Statistics and Facts in 2023

  1. DocuSign was established in 2003 in San Fransisco, California.
  2. The company has about 3,700 employees. 
  3. The company is valued at $3 billion
  4. The co-founders of DocuSign are Court Lorenzini, Eric Ranft, and Tom Gonser. 
  5. DocuSign supports 43 different languages. 
  6. The company raised $500 million to help its launch. 
  7. 66% of clients believe that DocuSign reduces the number of files that become missing. 
  8. 92% of clients believe that DocuSign enhances the accuracy of scanning. 
  9. DocuSign operates from 21 unique locations
  10. DocuSign purchased Seal Software in February 2020 for exactly $188 million
  11. Clients can use APIs to DocuSign to database applications with ease. 
  12. In June 2022, Daniel Springer announced that he would resign as the company’s CEO. 
  13. Fast Company ranked sixth on the 2022 Most Innovative Enterprise Tech Business list. 
  14. DocuSign’s CEO is paid $82,000 annually, while their CFO is paid $692,000 annually. 
  15. The firm has developed over 350 pre-made integrations for its technology to link with widespread applications.

DocuSign Market Share Statistics 2023

DocuSign Market Share Statistics

16. By the End of 2026, the Virtual Signature Industry May Hit a Market Value of $14.1 Billion Globally.

Predictions hint that the worldwide market value could reach around $14.1 billion to $25.2 billion by 2026. Its annual growth rate ranges between 27% to 35% per annum. So, DocuSign stands as a dominant player in the e-signature market. Also, it owns about 75% of the market share when measured globally.

17. Slintel’s Report Shows that DocuSign’s Market Share is 46% High.

Many researches have emerged concerning DocuSign. Deloitte estimates that the company had a 75% market share. Also, Slintel estimates that DocuSign has a 46% share. Statista reports that DocuSign’s market share in 2022 reached 77%.

18. In 2019, the US Had the Largest E-signature Market. Its Worth Reached $440 Million.

Fortune Business Insights (FBI) reported North America had the most significant market worth $440 million in 2019. The United States ranked with the largest market share in the same year. It had $6,117.3 market value, according to records. After the US, Germany comes next. Its market share was around $2,091.8.

19. DocuSign has a Market Share of Precisely 75%.

Deloitte’s report revealed that the market share is dominated mainly by DocuSign, accounting for 75% of the market share.

DocuSign Usage Statistics 2023

DocuSign Usage Statistics

20. Over 775,000 Documents, Comprising 3.6 Million Pages, are Signed Virtually Every Single Day.

It is worth noting that since the inception of the digital signature market, it has been constantly growing and has done so rapidly in the past few years. Factors such as supportive laws for the online signature market, widespread online documentation processes, and an increasing demand for security contribute to the market’s rapid growth. 

21. 82% of Agreements are finished in 24 hours.

Recent studies show that e-signatures increase the speed of signing agreements. Within a day, 82% of the accords can be signed thanks to this technology. It is easy to access, comes with higher efficiency, and fosters enhanced productivity for those making online signatures.

22. It Took Just the First Hour to Process 51% of Documents Using DocuSign.

As we have in reports, DocuSign dominates the e-signature market with its advantages and share. Deloitte’s report shows its contribution to the market share is 77.64%. Furthermore, the report reveals that in 2022 the e-signature industry reached a $3.92 billion market share globally. By 2030, it should increase to $43.14 billion.

23. On Average, it Takes at Least a Day to Sign 1.5 Million Documents.

The number of signed documents that reports have differ by time and source. So, out of the 1.5 million signed documents on average, reports show that DocuSign accounts for the high numbers when attributed to sources with the most increased activities.

24. Every Signed Document Saves at Least $36 on Average.

Research shows that businesses save an average of $28 to $36 each time they sign their documents using digital signatures. By signing online, they cut shipping, storing, or printing expenses.

User Statistics of DocuSign in 2023

User Stats

25. 98% of DocuSign Users Claim They Make the Most of Their Experiences.

Reports show that 98% of DocuSign clients claim to have positive experiences with the app. Clients relish the security, speed, efficiency, and convenience of DocuSign and its ability to be integrated with other software programs

26. 11.12% of DocuSign Users Operate in the IT and Tech Industry.

Earlier, we mentioned that DocuSign is the leading player in the e-signature market, and many trusted studies have shown that, too. Interestingly, out of DocuSign’s massive number of active clients globally, 11.12% emerge from the IT and Tech space.

27. 11.94% of DocuSign Users Work in the Finance Industry.

DocuSign is famously used across a broad array of niches and countries. As mentioned earlier, 11.12% of the company’s global customers are in the IT and tech niches. Another stat reveals that 11.94% of its user base globally emerges from the finance sector.

28. 90% of Workers at the Fortune 500 Companies Have Used the DocuSign at Least Once.

Another essential user stat for DocuSign is that 90% of employees at Fortune 500 firms have used DocuSign at least once. Thanks to its ease of access, lightweight, and beginner-friendly nature, users of all kinds can capitalize on it and quickly sign on their documents. 

29. 8.85% of DocuSign Clients Function Within the Healthcare.

DocuSign is also popular in the healthcare sector, as 8.85% of its user base emerges from the industry. While this might appear as a small figure, it’s worth stating that the 8.85% erupting from DocuSign’s market is way more significant than the figure emerging from the platform’s competitors. 

30. 1,000 Credit Unions Use DocuSign.

In similar developments, DocuSign is also a popular e-signature choice among many credit unions. Notably, they use the software program to simplify the procedures for curating, signing, and managing agreements. The e-signature software solution can assist credit unions in conserving time and money. 

31. Only One Out of the 15 Leading Fortune 500 Tech Companies Doesn’t Use DocuSign.

A recent report by Thrivemyway found that only one of the leading 15 Fortune 500 healthcare companies doesn’t use DocuSign. This statistic indicates how popular DocuSign is among the top 500 Fortune brands. We can see other facts and stats attesting to the high influence of DocuSign across many brands globally. 

32. All The Top 15 Fortune 500 Fintech Companies Use DocuSign.

The study found that of all the top 15 Fortune 500 financial brands, every single one uses DocuSign occasionally. Impressively, over 1 million premium/paying clients and more than a billion global users use DocuSign

33. More Than 3,000 Government Agencies Globally Use DocuSign.

This statistic reveals that more than 3,000 local, state, and federal government agencies in all 50 states in the United States work remotely using DocuSign. The report found that these government agencies work remotely with electronic agreements, correspondence management, applications, and approval processes. Notably, DocuSign is approved at the FedRAMP Moderate Impact Level, and the United States DoD’s Defense Information System Agency has authorized the use of DocuSign at Impact Level 4. 

34. 1.05 Million Companies Use DocuSign Frequently.

Research reveals that over 1,05 million companies globally use DocuSign. This should not be surprising as the e-signature brand is used in all countries. Furthermore, the famous e-signature brand is used by over 9,000 law firms, including 50% of the 100 largest law firms in the world. 

35. Google, Netflix, LinkedIn, and Reddit are Some of the Most Visited Sites That Use DocuSign.

As mentioned earlier, DocuSign is popularly used by 1.05 million businesses globally. 13 of the top 15 Fortune 500 tech firms, including Google, Netflix, LinkedIn, and Reddit, also use it. Furthermore, it is a popular option for 14 of the top 15 Fortune 500 healthcare firms, and every one of the top 15 Fortune 500 finance companies uses the app. 

36. Over 50,000 New Clients Join the DocuSign Company Every Day.

DocuSign continues to grow in its users globally. Interestingly, of all the 180 countries worldwide, more than 50,000 new customers register with DocuSign daily. DocuSign enables users to sign documents digitally. 

37. 13 of the Leading 15 Fortune 500 Tech Companies Use DocuSign.

13 of the top 15 Fortune 500 tech firms use DocuSign at least once. These tech firms use DocuSign as it simplifies their activities while processing documents

38. The UK has the Second-largest Number of Users With 1,634.

The United Kingdom is the country with the second-largest number of DocuSign users. According to a recent report, the United States ranks with the most DocuSign customers, while the UK follows after. The UK accounts for about 1,634 customers. 

39. The US has the Highest Number of DocuSign Users, Accounting for 17,774 Companies Using the Software.

The US ranks as the country with the highest number of DocuSign customers, responsible for 17,774 firms that use the iCloud solution. The United States has a massive economy and is the world leader in most tech-related innovations

40. DocuSign has Clients in 180 Countries.

Earlier, we mentioned that DocuSign is the dominant player in the online signature market. Unlike its competitors, DocuSign is used across an extensive array of jurisdictions.

DocuSign vs. Adobe Sign Statistics

DocuSign vs. Adobe Sign Statistics

41. Adobe Sign Functions in 68 Countries, Considerably Less Than DocuSign’s 180 Distinct Countries.

Adobe Sign is used in a relatively minor array of countries worldwide compared to DocuSign. Research shows that it is actively used in 68 countries.  

42. Adobe Sign Ranks as the Second-largest E-signature App Provider in the Industry.

A recent report reveals that while DocuSign is the largest e-signature application provider in the industry, Adobe Sign ranks second. DocuSign is widely used in all countries on the planet, while Adobe Sign is used in 68 of these countries.

43. Adobe Sign Contributes 11.57% of the Market Share.

The research found that Adobe Sign, the second-largest e-signature app in the industry, accounts for 11.57% of the broader market share. This is considered significantly small compared to DocuSign, which contributes 77% of the market share.

DocuSign vs. HelloSign Statistics

DocuSign vs. HelloSign Statistics

44. HelloSign Contributes 4.82% of the Overall Market Share.

According to a recent report, HelloSign accounts for 4.82% of the online signature market share. The digital signature software provider is mainly used by firms with 10–50 employees, with $1 million to $10 million annual revenue.

45. HelloSign Operates in 50% of the Countries That DocuSign Operates in.

DocuSign is used in all 180 countries, ranking it the global leader in the online signature industry. The e-signature brand is used by over 1 million businesses globally. In contrast, a recent report shows that HelloSign operates in half of the countries in which DocuSign operates. This figure indicates the extent to which HelloSign spans, significantly smaller than the DocuSign brand. 

46. HelloSign has a Market Value of $70 Million and a Revenue of $7.2 Million.

HelloSign’s recent market value was $70 million, while its revenue was $7.2 million. This statistic reveals how far HelloSign must go before competing against DocuSign or AdobeSign.

DocuSign vs. PandaDoc Statistics

DocuSign vs. PandaDoc Statistics

47. PandaDoc Contributes Only 1.42% of the Overall E-signature Market Share.

PandaDoc is a relatively minor document workflow automation software provider that enables users to create, sign, and send digital documents. It is also a small-scale signature brand, much like HelloSign. A recent report showed PandaDoc is used mainly in companies with 10 to 50 employees, with revenues of $1 million to $10 million.

48. PandaDoc has a Total of 750 Employees.

PandaDoc has 750 employees overall, considerably less than DocuSign’s 7,336 employees. However, despite its small figures, PandaDoc has been recognized as one of the industry’s most rapidly growing e-signature firms since its inception. 

49. PandaDoc is Available in Just 35 Countries.

PandaDoc is still regarded as an up-and-coming e-signature software provider compared to DocuSign. A recent report found that while DocuSign is used in over 180 countries, PandaDoc is available in only 35 countries.

DocuSign Revenue Statistics

Revenue Stats

50. During the Financial Year Ending in 2016, DocuSign had a Total Revenue of $250 Million.

As per a recent report, DocuSign’s revenue for the 2016 financial year was recorded at $250 million. Notably, the company has experienced considerable revenue growth since then. DocuSign has also been recognized as one of the fastest-rising private businesses in the US, indicating a three-year revenue increase of 303%. 

51. DocuSign’s Revenue for the 2021 Financial Year Ending Was $1.453 Billion.

DocuSign’s 2021 revenue for the financial year was recorded to be $1.453 billion. This statistic reveals considerable growth from the 2016 financial year ending when the company had only $250 million. Notably, the company has seen impressive growth in the past years.

52. DocuSign’s Losses in the 2019 Financial Year Were Worth $426 Million.

It is worth noting that DocuSign has been on a steady rise since 2016. Moreover, the company experienced a loss of $426 million in 2019. Regardless, the company also experienced massive growth that same year.

53. DocuSign Occasionally Records a Loss. The Company Recorded a $69 Million Loss at the End of the 2022 Financial Year.

It is worth noting that every business worldwide has seen some losses since its inception. DocuSign is one such business that has recorded notable losses in the past year(s). Moreover, it’s worth noting that the company’s losses have been steadily decreasing, as it recorded a total loss of $69 million in 2022. 

54. The Company Recorded a $2.107 Billion Financial Year Revenue in 2022, Indicating a 45% Increase From the Year Before.

In a MarketSplash report, DocuSign’s financial year revenue in 2022 reached $2.107 billion. This data indicates a 45% growth from the past financial revenue year for the firm. In addition, this statistic shows the growing demand for e-signature brands in the market.

DocuSign Stock Price Stats

Stock Price Stats

55. DocuSign’s Year-low Stock Price for 2022 was $55.86.

Research shows that DocuSign’s year-low stock price for 2022 was $55.86. The firm’s shares declined to 24% in extended trading on June 9, last year. Regardless of the high volatility, the e-signature brand has continued to expand.

56. The Year-high Stock Price of the Company in 2022 Hit $314.

Based on stocks, DocuSign’s year-high stock price spiked in 2022. Nevertheless, it was highly volatile and recorded several fluctuations in the past years.

Conclusion

DocuSign poses a key player in the e-signature market. It is compatible with 180 countries across the globe and has many users. It is cost-effective, portable, and highly efficient. Thus, it’s the best option for those signing many documents in their workplace. Given the stats and data above, you know DocuSign’s impact, importance, and advantages. Use the tool and save your business a lot of money and time.

FAQs

How many people make use of DocuSign?

What is DocuSign used for?

How do I use DocuSign instructions?

How long is DocuSign free?

How much is DocuSign per person?

Sources

The post 55+ DocuSign Statistics Showing Its Vital Role in Modern Business appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/docusign-statistics/feed/ 0
65+ Inspiring Singtel Statistics and Facts in 2023 https://techreport.com/statistics/singtel-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/singtel-statistics/#respond Tue, 26 Dec 2023 15:13:44 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3530776 Key Singtel Facts and Statistics

Singtel has connected Singaporeans for over 140 years, evolving from the island’s first telephone exchange to a global telecom leader. As one of Singapore’s homegrown success stories, Singtel powers the...

The post 65+ Inspiring Singtel Statistics and Facts in 2023 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Singtel Facts and Statistics

Singtel has connected Singaporeans for over 140 years, evolving from the island’s first telephone exchange to a global telecom leader. As one of Singapore’s homegrown success stories, Singtel powers the digital lives of millions across Asia and Australia. The Singapore Telecom Company owns 32.15% of Bharti Airtel, the second-largest mobile operator in India. Singtel enables possibilities beyond mobile networks and broadband through technologies like AI, IoT, and more. Singtel’s innovation and passion drive the telecommunication giant today.

From pioneering nationwide 4G coverage to partnering with Singapore’s Smart Nation initiative, Singtel has made communication accessible and reliable for individuals and enterprises alike.

As communication advances to the next frontier, like 5G, one thing remains constant – Singtel’s commitment to enabling a brighter, more inclusive digital future. Singtel and the broader telecom landscape always have exciting developments. Join us as we explore fascinating Singtel statistics, facts, and trends shaping the world of tomorrow.

Singtel Statistics

Key Singtel Statistics and Facts for 2023

1. Singtel had a former name that people knew it for. That name was Telecommunications Equipment until 1995, when it changed.

2. After it emerged in 1879, it became Singapore’s leading national telecommunications company.

3. Singtel offers many other products and services besides the regular phone networks. They include Internet Service Provider (ISP) services and Internet Protocol Television (IPTV). 

4. Singtel TV was the section in charge of the IPTV services.

5. The price at which Singtel got Optus in March 2001 was nearly $8 billion.

6. The predominant owner of Singtel is Temasek Holdings. This connection shows the extensive investment arm of the Singapore government. Also, it projects a partly nationalized status.

7. Singtel sold sixty percent of its majority stake in Singapore Post (SingPost) in 2003. It took place via an IPO to redirect its focus towards telecommunications.

8. Telstra statistics show that Singtel owns 100% of Optus, even though it poses a rival.

9. The telecom company invested $321 million in the mobile ad company Amobee. This record dates back to March 2012.

10. In November 2011, Singtel introduced the first eBook provider in Singapore. This tool was Skoob and lasted only three years (2011 – 2013).

11. Singtel’s overseas operations rewarded it with a massive 70% profit in 2021.

12. The Singtel Group grew significantly in 2021, recording an operating revenue of $15.644 billion in the same year.

13. Singapore is reported to have a very high data usage, with an average of 71.38 petabytes used monthly, according to a report for quarter one of 2022.

Singtel 2023 Market Share Statistics

Singtel 2023 Market Share Statistics

14. Singtel owns a substantial stake (32.15%) in India’s second-largest mobile network carrier, Bharti Airtel.

15. Singtel has been pulling massive weight in Australia and Singapore, owning an 82% fixed-line market share and a 47% mobile market share. 

16. Singtel also completely owns Australia’s second-largest telecom operator, Optus.

17. Its market share in Singapore’s broadband services sector is 43%. 

18. On the Singapore Exchange, Singtel is the second-largest company by market capitalization

19. Singtel previously tried to expand into Pakistan by acquiring a 30% stake in Warid Telecom in 2008, but due to significant losses, they decided to sell their shares in 2013.

2023 Singtel Usage, Revenue, and Employment Statistics

Usage, Revenue, and Employment Stats

20. Singtel had 4.1 million subscribers as of 2017, and through its subsidiaries, the number of Singtel subscribers is over 744 million in 21 countries.

21. The company’s total 5G customer base reached over 760 thousand users in the financial year 2023.

22. On average, Singapore consumes 71.39 petabytes of data monthly, as recorded in Q1 of 2022.

23. Singtel’s mobile business is boosting its market share through superior 5G experience in quality and coverage and value-based differentiation of partnership.

24. The firm’s Revenue comes from quality acquisition and expanded 5G adoption and coverage.

25. Singtel increased its revenue by expanding service coverage and potential growth in broadband penetration and home pass rate.

26. Its Group Consumer is the highest earner, accounting for 61.3% of Singtel’s Revenue, and oversees mobile, broadband, voice data, paid TV, and more.

27. In 2021, it recorded an operating Revenue of $15.644 billion.

28. Singtel’s underlying net profit was up 7% to S$2.05 billion in the 2023 fiscal year.

29. The company’s prepaid numbers grew 2.7% to 1.4 million, and ARPU fell 1.5% to SGD13. Monthly data consumption rose 19.2% to 10GB.

30. Singtel’s post-paid subscribers increased by 2.5% to 2.9 million, with ARPU rising 12.6% to SGD33.

31. Its enterprise operating revenue rose 1.6% to SGD1.3 billion, with notable gains in cybersecurity offset and managed services by weakness in data, internet, and voice.

32. In 2022, Singtel had 22,000 employees, with about 12,000 working in Singapore, 7,200 in Australia, and a few hundred in various other international locations. 

33. The company’s workforce consists of an average of 33.5% women and the remaining 66.5% men, with women making up 32% of top executives and 28% of all executives within the Singtel Group.

Statistics of Singtel Net Profit in the 2023 Financial Year

Net Profit in the 2023 Financial Year

34. According to Singtel’s latest financial reports, the net profit for the full year of FY23 was $2.23 billion, up 14% from the previous year.

35. The net profit for the first half of FY23 was S$1.17 billion, a 23% increase from the previous year.

36. However, the net profit for the third quarter of FY23 dropped by 28% to S$532 million.

37. Despite this, Singtel maintains a robust financial standing, with net debt reducing from $10.1 billion in 2022 to S$8.3 billion. It uses the cash generated from capital recycling to reduce gearing.

38. Singtel is committed to increasing its capital to enable expansion through investments and maintain financial flexibility with investment-grade credit ratings.

Singtel Stock Statistics

Singtel Stock Statistics

39. Singtel is currently projected to have an average price target of S$2.97, with a high estimate of S$3.20 and a low estimate of S$2.68. 

40. In the fiscal year 2023, Singtel’s net profit increased by 14% to reach S$2.23 billion

41. During the fiscal year 2021, there were 16.5 billion shares outstanding for Singtel. 

42. Earnings per share for Singtel stock in 2021 stood at 10.59 Singaporean cents

43. Most Singtel shares, amounting to 51.8%, are owned by Temasek Holdings

44. The number of Singtel shareholders has remained relatively constant at around 338,610 from 2015 to 2021.

45. Regarding financial performance, Singtel demonstrated a return on assets (ROA) of 4.01% in 2022 and a return on equity (ROE) of 7.28% in the same year. 

46. Over the fiscal year spanning 2021-2022, Singtel’s stock prices reached a high of S$2.88 and a low of S$2.31. 

47. Singtel was first listed on the Singapore Exchange (SGX) on November 1, 1993, with the initial public offering (IPO) involving 11% of Singtel shares, while Temasek Holdings, the investment arm of the Singaporean government, held the remainder.

Important Facts You Should Know About Singtel

Important Facts You Should Know

48. Singtel offers various telecommunications services, including mobile networks, VoIP, ISP, and IPTV. It was established in 1879.

49. Singtel holds a 32.15% stake in India’s second-largest mobile network carrier, Bharti Airtel.

50. Singtel has a significant presence in Australia and Singapore. It controls approximately 82% of the fixed-line market in both countries.

51. The company has a subsidiary called Singtel Innov8, which invests in innovative companies worldwide. 

52. As of 2022, Singtel Innov8 had invested in 28 companies.

53. Singtel led a covert negative social media campaign against its two major competitors, M1 and Starhub.

54. The company owns a 100% stake in Optus, the second-largest telecommunications company in Australia. It has a 31% stake in Bharti Airtel, India’s largest telecom company. 

55. It has partnered with several Asian firms, including Telkomsel in Indonesia, Globe in the Philippines, AIS in Thailand, and Citycell in Bangladesh.

56. While Singtel had many successful offshore investors, it did not succeed in Pakistan. It recorded a massive loss when it acquired a 30% stake in Warid Telecom, Pakistan’s fourth-largest mobile operator, in 2008. But in 2013, Singtel exited the investment.

57. Most of Singtel’s profits are from its international operations. As of 2022, at least 70% of its revenue will be generated outside Singapore.

58. Singtel offers IT solutions through its Group Digital Life business unit, which offers video streaming, digital marketing, and data analytics.

59. Singtel has received several accolades, one being voted Best Mobile Operator. It also won the Best Provider of Mobile and Fibre Broadband Services.

60. Singtel has a long history dating back over 140 years. It played a significant role in the growth of Singapore’s telecommunications services. It celebrated the centennial of telephone services in Singapore in 1979.

Some Notable Singtel Acquisitions

Some Notable Singtel Acquisitions

61. Singtel went global in the 1990s and became a regional multinational corporation. Its growth was driven by the deregulation of the global telecom market in the 1980s.

62. Despite its many challenges, including various allegations and lawsuits, Singtel continues to record notable growth. The company has continuously recorded massive profits and aggressively expanded its international market presence.

63. Trustwave: In 2015, Singtel made a significant acquisition move. It acquired Trustwave, a US-based cybersecurity firm, for $810 million. This marked Singtel’s largest offshore investment outside the telecoms sector.

64. Hivint: In 2018, Singtel acquired the Australian cybersecurity consulting firm Hivint for $16.5 million, further strengthening its presence in the cybersecurity domain.

65. Amobee: In 2012, Singtel ventured into the mobile advertising sector by acquiring Amobee for $321 million, expanding its portfolio of services.

66. Optus: Optus, the second-largest telecommunications company in Australia, is 100% owned by Singtel. This acquisition has contributed substantially to Singtel’s international presence.

67. Singtel has a 31% ownership stake in Bharti Airtel, India’s largest telecommunications company. This marks one of its strategic investments in key global markets.

68. Its investments in other firms: Singtel has many investments in other companies, including Bank Fama and Mapped, and it has a joint venture with AIS and SK Telecom. These are part of the company’s broader strategy to engage with and support innovative companies.

69. Singtel Innov8: This company is a subsidiary of Singtel and is at the forefront of identifying and investing in innovative companies worldwide. 

70. This subsidiary focuses on identifying and supporting cutting-edge technologies and startups to enhance Singtel’s offerings and maintain a competitive edge in the market.

Conclusion

Singtel has maintained a steady growth since the onset. Despite the extreme global economic conditions, its stock price in 2023 has remained relatively stable. It has acquired a modest increase in net profit and maintains a significant ownership stake under Temasek Holdings.

Singtel offers many other products and services besides the regular phone networks. These include Internet Service Provider (ISP) and Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) services. Millions of data and statistics about Singtel are interesting to explore. However, the above statistics should give you a comprehensive insight into Singtel and its impact on Singapore’s economy.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is Singtel?

What services does Singtel offer?

Where was Singtel first listed on?

How long has Singtel been in business?

What is Singtel OnePass?

What percentage of people use Singtel?

What is Singtel’s presence in other countries?

Sources

The post 65+ Inspiring Singtel Statistics and Facts in 2023 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/singtel-statistics/feed/ 0
80+ Stunning Oracle Statistics and Facts in 2023 https://techreport.com/statistics/oracle-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/oracle-statistics/#respond Fri, 22 Dec 2023 14:30:03 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3530781 Oracle Corporation Key Statistics for 2023

Think fast – name a software company that shapes the technologies we use every day. Microsoft comes to mind first. But what about Oracle? Even if the name doesn’t autofill...

The post 80+ Stunning Oracle Statistics and Facts in 2023 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Oracle Corporation Key Statistics for 2023

Think fast – name a software company that shapes the technologies we use every day. Microsoft comes to mind first. But what about Oracle? Even if the name doesn’t autofill for you like Excel formulas, this database giant’s imprint touches countless cogs driving the tech revolution.

Did you know Oracle alone brings over $40 billion in yearly revenues? Or that they snag more than half of the entire database pie out there, hungry to gobble up more? Few can imagine impressive stats for a brand without that iconic red logo. But their reach stretches farther as they power everything from convenience store checkouts to major cloud infrastructure projects.

Intrigued yet? Well, buckle up for more mind-blowing Oracle facts as we unravel their story. Accessible explanations will show how and why this behind-the-scenes titan dominates. You’ll also see their big bets for 2023 as they continue evolving to subsist in the digital future they fuel.

Oracle Corporation Key Statistics for 2023

Oracle Corporation Key Statistics for 2023

  • In 2023, Oracle recorded $8.503 billion as its net income, with a fiscal year gross profit of $36.39 billion.
  • The Corporation recorded $1.3 million as value for its 2023 annual total assets and $1.36 million for the third quarter of 2023.
  • In 2023, the firm disbursed $8.746 billion for expenses on Research and Development.
  • On November 3, 2023, Oracle reported a market cap of $292.758 billion and ranked No. 28 in the NYSE stock market.
  • And in September 2023, their site hit 40.37 million visitors, which signifies a 54.24% bounce rate.

What You Ought to Know About Oracle; 2023 Facts and Stats

2023 Facts and Stats

1. Oracle Corporation is an establishment surfaced through these co-founders, Bob Miner, Ed Oates, and Larry Ellison, in Santa Clara, California, on June 16, 1977.

2. Its current headquarters is in Austin, Texas, United States.

3. The firm started as a Software Laboratories (SDL), but in 1979, it rebranded to Relational Software, Inc. (RSI). The innovators later changed the firm’s identity to Oracle Systems Corporation in 1983, and in 1995, it became Oracle Corporation.

4. 2014 experienced another dimension as Larry Ellison, former CEO, stepped down for Safra Catz.

5. Larry Ellison became the firm’s Chief tech officer (CTO) and Board Chairman.

6. 2002, 2005, and 2006 brought another novel phase as the firm acquired NetForce Inc., Siebel, and PeopleSoft. Then, it enlarged its coast by taking ownership of BEA Systems & Sun Microsystems in 2008 and 2010, respectively.

7. From all indications and global stats, 2018 marked the company’s highest publicity level, featuring 25,000 global partners!

Oracle Stock Price Statistics

Oracle Stock Price Statistics

8. One core fact is that Oracle took a good position in the NASDAQ stock listing and later kicked off on the NYSE stock exchange on July 15, 2013.

9. On November 03, 2023, this firm reported a $292.758 billion market cap with $10 million as its mean trade volume. This positioned it at No. 28 of the trusted firms worldwide.

10. Scholars working on the company’s stock price on November 3, 2023, marveled at seeing an alarming worth of $106.87.

11. Oracle Corporation has not rested as it has been incessantly recording market cap spikes precisely from 2012, 2013, and 2014. The figures were $157.74 billion, $172.07 billion, and $197.47 billion, respectively. 

12. Notably, on November 02, 2023, the rise brought the firm worth to $369.62 billion. According to Yahoo Finance, its profit margin was 18.40%, while its operating margin was 27.63%.

Oracle Corporation Market Share Statistics for 2023

Market Share Statistics

13. Between 1980 and 1987, Oracle observed 2 times in profit growth each year.

14. In 2018, the group had about 430,000 users and had a total number of 17,000 patents. In the same year, the company discovered that its customers come from 175 countries

15. Statistics show that Intel, IBM, Google, and Microsoft are the strong rival companies to Oracle Corporation.

16. In the second quarter of 2021, Oracle Corporation had a 3.6% market share of the entire global cloud computing industry.

Oracle Usage Statistics and Facts for 2023

Oracle Usage Statistics

17. One of Oracle’s cloud services, Supply Chain Management, is used by over 10,000 organizations.

18. It was observed that the company’s users surpassed 70 million.

19. Oracle Corporation has 100 cloud computing infrastructure services in 45 world regions. This is a noteworthy growth as it once had 80 cloud computing infrastructure services in 34 world regions.

20. It discovered that over 1000 of its customers are government organizations.

21. According to statistics, Oracle’s services are accessed using over 54,000 devices.

22. Researchers discovered that the number of students using Oracle Academy globally exceeded 8 million.

23. The company has recorded over 33 billion processed daily transactions.

24. In 2023, Oracle Corporation had 400 thousands of customers worldwide.

25. From the company’s record, it had obtained data worth over 700 petabytes.

26. The cloud computing software company discovered that it had up to 150 customers from the Utility Industry. Again, Oracle Corporation has about 1000 customers from the hospitality industry, and up to 2,500 customers come from the professional service industry. Moreover, it also noticed that it has about 200 customers from the Pharmaceutical industry.

27. In 2023, statistics reveal that up to 1.5 million developers used Oracle’s cloud-based services.

28. Oracle Corporation is ranked second among the most outstanding software companies.

Oracle Corporation Employees Statistics for 2023

Employees Statistics

29. As of 2021, Oracle had more than 132,000 employees, which will increase to 164,000 in 2023.

30. The company has 32% female and 68% male workers.

31. Out of the entire number of employees at Oracle Corporation, 51% are from the white race. Further, statistics show that 21% of employees at Oracle are Asians, and about 14% of the company’s workforce are Latino or Hispanic.

32. The corporation has 20% of its workers who studied computer sciences as a major in college or university.

33. Oracle Corporation found that 49% of its workforce is minorities, meaning that 51% are from the majority communities.

34. Researchers discovered that about 69% of Oracle’s employees have at least a Bachelor’s degree, which is the most common degree its employees have.

35. Statistics reveal that the corporation provided over 7,000 remote jobs globally.

36. Reports reveal that many employees working with Oracle are Democrats in the United States.

37. The average of employees working at the company receive $110,650 as salary in a year.

38. Data shows that Oracle’s employees work for an average of  5 years before planning to quit.

Oracle’s Product Statistics for 2023

Oracle’s Product Statistics

39. In 2021, the cloud product at Oracle Corporation doubled its former adoption level among enterprises.

40. The products Oracle Corporation offers its customers serve several sectors, including retail, communications, utilities, and healthcare.

41. The cloud computing infrastructure at Oracle Corporation can be used for machine learning, data science, blockchain, and MySQL programming.

42. Some of the company’s enterprise applications are Siebel, Ebusiness Suite, JD Edwards, and PeopleSoft.

43. In 2006, the American-based software corporation developed a free open-sourced operating system called “Oracle Linux.” 

Oracle Database Security Facts and Statistics for 2023

Database Security Facts

44. According to statistics, Oracle Corporation scored a 4.5/ 5 rating as the corporation with the highest cloud security for database systems.

45. The company developed its Autonomous Database Cloud System to feature a self-patching ability.

Oracle’s 2023 Facts and Statistics on Revenue and Expenses

Oracle’s 2023 Facts and Statistics on Revenue and Expenses 

46. In 2023, Oracle Corporation had a yearly revenue of $49.954 billion, 17.7% up from what it recorded in 2022.

47. Also, in 2022, it had an increase in its annual revenues by generating $42.44 billion, which represents a 4.874% growth from 2022. Moreover, in 2021, the corporation also grew 3.61% from what it recorded in 2020 as its yearly generated revenue. 

48. In the third quarter of 2023, the company realized that 51% of its revenue came from Oracle Cloud service.

49. Oracle’s 12-month year-over-year revenue, which ended in August 2023, was close to $12.6 billion, marking an 8.8% rise from 2022.

50. In 1989, 9 years after the company was established, the founders conducted an initial public offering (IPO) and raised $55 million.

51. In the past 10 years, the company’s fiscal year annual revenue has grown significantly from 22 billion to 49.95 billion in 2023.

52. However, in 2023, Oracle Corporation recorded $8.6 billion spent on Research and Development Units. This value is a slight increment from the $6.5 billion it spent in 2021 on the same course.

53. Notably, the corporation’s outstanding business units, the licensing, and the cloud services prompted Oracle to spend $8.746 billion on Research and development in 2023.

54. The company recorded more than $110 billion in total expenses on over 150 acquisitions since its inception.

55. According to reports, Oracle Corporation has spent over $72 billion on its Research and Development Unit since the 2012 fiscal year.

Oracle’s Net Income Statistics for 2023 

Net Income Stats for 2023 

56. In 2023, the American-based enterprise software company realized $8.503 billion in net income, marking a rise of 26.59% from the value in 2022.

57. The company’s yearly net income in 2022 was $6.717 billion. This was a drop of 51.13% from what it had in 2021.

58. In 2021, Oracle Corporation recorded $13.746 billion in annual net income. This was an increase of 35.63% from 2020. 

59. In August 2023, the company recorded $2.420 billion as its net income in its year-over-year quarter ending, marking a growth of 56.33% from 2022.

60. Still, in 2023, the enterprise cloud computing company had a net income of $9.375 billion for its 12-month year-over-year period. The value represented an increase of 61.42% above what it recorded in 2022.

Fiscal Year Gross Profit and Net Income Statistics on Oracle Corporation

Fiscal Year Gross Profit and Net Income Stats61. According to Stock Analysis, the company recorded $36.39 billion gross profit in the 2023 fiscal year, marking an 8% increase from 2022.

62. Moreover, Oracle Corporation also rose in its gross profit, recording $33.56 billion in 2022 against the value it realized in 2021.

63. Oracle Corporation had $8.5 billion net income for the 2023 fiscal year and $6.72 billion for the 2022 fiscal year. The net income for this current fiscal year is higher than that recorded in 2022 by 26.59%.

64. The company had a net income of $13.75 billion in 2021, above the $10.14 billion net income it recorded in the 2020 fiscal year. With this positive change in value, Oracle Corporation recorded a 35.63% growth in its net income for the 2021 fiscal year.

Oracle Annual and Quarterly Total Assets Statistics

Oracle Annual and Quarterly Total Assets

65. According to Macrotrends, Oracle has annual total assets worth $1.3 million in 2023 and $1.09 million in 2022.

66. In 2021, the company’s yearly total assets had a value of $1.31 million, surpassing the $1.15 million it had in 2020.

67. From Statistics, we noticed that the value of Oracle’s total assets reached $1 million for the first time in 2015.

68. Oracle has recorded growth in the value of its quarterly total assets from the fourth quarter of 2022 to the third quarter of 2023.

69. In the first quarter of 2023, the company’s total assets were worth $1.31 million, above the $1.28 million it had in the fourth quarter of 2022.

70. For the second quarter of 2023, Oracle’s total assets value was $1.34 million, resulting in a 2.3% increase above its worth in the first quarter.

71. Moreover, in the third quarter of 2023, the company had $1.36 million as the value of its total assets against the $1.34 million it recorded in the second quarter of 2023.

Oracle’s Website Facts and Statistics for 2023

Website Facts and Stats

72. Oracle’s website had a global ranking of No. 2,606 in September 2023.

73. The company’s website also ranked No. 1,357 among all websites in the U.S. in the same month.

74. According to Semrush, a web traffic analytical tool, Oracle’s website had 40.37 million visits in September 2023.

75. In the same period, the company’s website had an average of 16 minutes and 3 seconds visit duration, 54.24% bounce rate, and 2.83 pages viewed per visit.

76. Semrush also shows that total traffic to Oracle’s website for July and August 2023 was 43.37 million and 30.09 million, respectively.

77. As of September 2023, Oracle’s website got the highest traffic from the United States of America. Oracle’s web traffic from the U.S. amounted to 37.64% of that month’s web visitors. Again, 56.91% of the total web visits from the U.S. Oracle’s website came from desktop devices, and the remaining 43.09% came from smartphones.

78. Semrush said Oracle’s website received 14.82 million web visitors from organic search and 161.55 thousand from paid traffic in September 2023.

Additional Statistics and Facts on Oracle Corporation

Additional Stats and Facts

79. Oracle Corporation has 20,000 partners in most parts of the world.

80. The company’s employees working as customer service specialists and those working as customer support attendants amounted to 18,000. Remarkably, data showed that these workers speak up to 29 languages.

81. Oracle Corporation has 30,000 of its employees working as implementation consultants

82. Statistics show that Oracle incorporated grid computing into its systems in 2003.

83. Oracle Corporation almost failed, reaching bankruptcy due to lawsuits and its legal decision against Google in 2010.

Conclusion

Despite several challenges, Oracle Corporation has proven resilience in the computer software and cloud computing market. Remarkably, the company’s efforts helped it to occupy the second position in the global list of most outstanding companies. The company recorded gross profits and net income growth in the 2023 fiscal year. If Oracle Corporation continues to improve its services and products, it could attract more customers and investors in the coming year.

FAQs

What does being a programmer at Oracle Corporation take?

Does Oracle Corporation Have Courses?

Does Oracle give its Employees laptops?

Sources

The post 80+ Stunning Oracle Statistics and Facts in 2023 appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/oracle-statistics/feed/ 0
Xbox User Statistics – How Many People Use Xbox in 2023? https://techreport.com/statistics/xbox-user-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/xbox-user-statistics/#respond Fri, 22 Dec 2023 10:47:07 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3530701 Key Xbox User Statistics

Microsoft consoles, from its first designed game to its latest Xbox series X and S, have served as entertainment and solace for many game lovers. The backdrop ideology that consoles...

The post Xbox User Statistics – How Many People Use Xbox in 2023? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Key Xbox User Statistics

Microsoft consoles, from its first designed game to its latest Xbox series X and S, have served as entertainment and solace for many game lovers. The backdrop ideology that consoles are no longer used to does not apply to Xbox. During the period of December 2020 to December 2022, Xbox monthly active users increased from 100 million to 120 million. Xbox’s business is keeping people worldwide glued to a game while making money for the company. Spending more than two decades in the gaming industry surely paved the way to keep Xbox in millions of hearts.

Even though billions of people play games on their mobile phones these days, many people enjoy consoles. Exploring the journey of Xbox over the years will give you a deeper understanding of why it stands out in this age and time. Let’s dive right into the must-know Xbox user statistics.

Key Xbox User Statistics

Key Xbox User Statistics

  1. The idea of Xbox was first birthed in 1998.
  2. The Xbox 360 series made a good name in sales, with 85.8 million units in July 2022.
  3. Microsoft had all reasons to be thankful when Xbox raised $750 million in sales in its first release season.
  4. Halo 2 stands out as the best game sold by Xbox Microsoft.
  5. Grand Theft Auto V was designed so that it became the most loved game on the Xbox One.
  6. Xbox series X and S are selling faster than any created console Xbox version.
  7. Around 310,000 Xbox consoles in 2020 were bought by delighted users in the United Kingdom.
  8. Almost half of the families in 2020 who owned a gaming console went out to buy the PS4 and Xbox One gaming series.

General Statistics

General Statistics

1. The Idea of Xbox was First Birthed in 1998.

Microsoft, at first, wanted to build a direct X that would look just like a PC, but this did not see the light of day. Its operating system was also planned to be Windows 2000, but this again was swept out of the way. The logic behind PC technology was to allow programmers to enjoy a good ride while at work on the product.

2. The Xbox 360 Series Made a Good Name in Sales, With 85.8 Million Units Sold in July 2022.

North America’s market for the Xbox 360 game was very great, with 47.17 million total units. Europe secured second place with 25.08 million units, and Japan rode behind it with 1.66 million. Other countries had a fair share of its sales, totaling 11.9 million in 2020.

3. Microsoft had All Reasons to be Thankful When Xbox Raised $750 Million in Sales in its First Release Season.

All efforts were put into gear after Xbox was conceived. And in 20 months, it released its first-ever game console. Xbox sold 1.5 million game units at its early stage, which made Microsoft gain respect in the gaming world. It goes down in history that 3 games were sold for every box, bringing a revenue of $750 million in Xbox’s early period.

4. Halo 2 is the Best Game Sold by Microsoft’s Xbox.

There were high expectations before the release of the Halo 2 from video game lovers who couldn’t wait to see Microsoft’s latest invention. It was indeed like the highlight of watching a well-anticipated Hollywood movie. Video lovers were not disappointed by the turnout of the first-person 2004 shooter game. The result of Halo 2 can best be described as a commercial sales success. Its feat is the greatest achievement in video gaming of all time.

5. The Grand Theft Auto V was Designed to Become the Most Loved of the Xbox One Game.

Grand Theft Auto V was largely marketed, and most video game lovers were eager to see what it offered. It was released on Xbox One in November 2014 to the glee of video gamers. It made $800 million on the first official launch and $1 billion in three days. This feat made it desirable for the fastest video entertainment product in human history.

6. Xbox Series X and S Sell Faster Than Any Created Xbox Gaming Console.

A report released by Microsoft stated that the Xbox series X and S will go down in the company’s history as the fastest consoles that have ever been sold so far in the company. Sales skyrocketed much more than witnessed in the previous Xbox generations. It had 6.5 million shipments to the glee of Xbox in June 2021. These high sales positively affected the quarterly revenue of Microsoft’s gaming business in no small way over the period.

7. Around 310,000 Xbox Consoles in 2020 Were Bought by Delighted Users in the United Kingdom.

It was an interesting year for Xbox in the United Kingdom when it sold out 310,000 Xbox consoles series in 2020. Most console sales (71%) were from home service during the entire period.

8. Almost Half of the Families in 2020 Who Owned a Gaming Console Went Out to Acquire the PS4 and Xbox One Gaming Series.

Both gaming series released in 2013 brought in huge sales in 2021 and got all parties involved smiling. The PS4, or called PlayStation 4, sold about 106 million shortly after its release in 2021. It released a new series not to leave game lovers out in the open and made 58 million.

Users Statistics

Users Statistics

9. As Many as 2.8 Billion People Enjoy Video Games Across the Globe.

The number of gamers keeps increasing, and little or nothing can be done about it. Game companies like Xbox are at the receiving end of this. Who would imagine that as many as 2.8 billion people are gamers? But that’s the case. Xbox has come a long way and has its chunk of 100 million gamers in 2020. This information came as a shock to many who had thought Xbox had lost out on the game. Years have gone by, but many remain faithful to Xbox. The reason is not farfetched as giving quality is its secret for lasting in business.

10. Microsoft Saw the Need to Speed Up After Sales Hit 50 Million Units.

What an interesting time for Microsoft when its Xbox One raised 50 million sales in November 2020. This event opened a whole new world of sales for Xbox. Xbox has continued to have huge sakes in this era of mobile gaming. It wouldn’t be wrong to see Xbox as a gaming console with a timeless appeal.

11. It was a Great Feat for Microsoft Xbox When it Got 100 Million Users in 2020.

Worth stating was when, for the first time, Microsoft got a hundred million users from only gaming.

Growth Statistics

Growth Statistics

Xbox has grown in leaps and bounds, and this has happened with its 4 released gaming series.

12. Microsoft Announced its Entry into the Gaming Business With Xbox.

Microsoft planned its entry into the video gaming business well. The company did a great job on publicity and marketing of Grand Theft Auto. Sales started rolling in after its flag-off in November 2001. It made 24 million sales units in May 2006 after the rollout of the Xbox 360 series. Xbox profited in sales in the North American region, with 4.7 million sold-outs in 2020.

13. Plans Started Rolling in, and the Next Project, Xbox 360, Came to be in 2005.

Microsoft took its next giant step in November 2005 with the release of an upgraded Xbox. The upgraded version, named Xbox 360, quickly became popular. The growing desire of video players for motion games struck a chord in Microsoft’s heart to release its version. Xbox 360 was created as a direct competition to the Nintendo Wii video game. One good thing about the Xbox 360 is that users can play the motion-stirring game “Just Dance.” The backdrop means you do not need a controller like the Wii version. Xbox was able to grasp 86 million units at the close of October 2021 curtain.

14. Xbox One Made its Grand Entrance 8 Years After the Launch of Xbox 360.

Microsoft developed a new version named Xbox One after 8 years. To make its new version special, it gave users access to video games with a Game Pass at a monthly fee. This new creation came in Xbox One X and Xbox One S versions. Microsoft’s hard work paid off, with 51 million unit sales soon after the launch.

15. Microsoft Introduced the Xbox Series Soon After the Downhill Turn of Events of the Xbox One.

Microsoft set to invade the market left no stone unturned in November 2020. It stormed the market with two versions of its latest release, Xbox Series X and Xbox Series S. These new Microsoft Xbox babies fared well, with 15 million unit sales in June 2022.

Microsoft Gaming Revenue

Microsoft Gaming Revenue

The gaming revenue of Microsoft has not flopped out over the years. Sales were steady to a large extent until 2021.

16. The annual revenue hiked to reach $15 billion at the end of 2021.

17. An annual revenue of 9 billion from gaming flowed into Microsoft in 2017.

18. Gaming produced even with the competition 10.3 billion in 2018 end.

19. 2019 took off on a great note in sales and ended with 11.3 billion in revenue.

20. The year 2020 was not any different, as revenue further increased to 11.5 billion.

21. A remarkable year was when Microsoft made 15.3 billion from gaming revenue in 2021.

Xbox One Series Statistics

Xbox One Series Statistics

22. The year ended nicely for Xbox One in 2013 with 3.08 million units.

23. It was a smooth year for the Xbox One series, with 7.91 million sold units.

24. 2015 was another year of success, with 8.63 million sales units.

25. Sales weren’t fair in 2016 and ended with 8.37 million.

26. In 2018, the number of units sold fell backward to 7.64 million.

27. The Xbox One series could only boost sales by making 6.87 million units in 2019.

28. 2020 was not a great sales year, with only 3.14 million.

29. Sales decreased further in 2021 to 0.81 million units.

Xbox 360 Unit Sales Statistics

Xbox 360 Unit Sales

30. It wasn’t a bad year for Xbox when it ended with 3.08 million sales units in 2013.

31. 2006 ended on a good note, way over the past year, with 6.8 million units of Xbox 360.

32. Xbox 360 received in 2007 a fair share of the market by 7.88 million.

33. A successful year was when unit sales climbed to 10.91 million in 2008.

34. Xbox sales fell by 10.16 million at the end of 2009.

35. The video game series grew slightly to land at 13.25 million units in 2010.

36. Not put off by opponents, sales rose to 13.81 at the end of 2011.

37. It was a surprising year as sales sharply reduced to 10.68 million in 2012.

38. Sales of Xbox went downhill to 6.24 million in 2013.

39. It further reduced sales with no space for recovery to 2.6 million in 2014.

40. Xbox 360 sales pushed backward to 930,000 units in 2015.

Progression of Microsoft Xbox

Progression of Microsoft Xbox

41. The number of Xbox users stood at 49 million in 2016.

42. More increased in 2017, which took the users to 53 million at the end of 2017.

43. Xbox could boost its user base by having 57 million users when 2018 comes to a close.

44. The number of Xbox users climbed in 2019 to 65 million at the end of the year.

45. Xbox realized when the year curtain closed in 2020 that it had 100 million users.

Conclusion

Video game consoles are very much used, even with the rise of mobile games. Microsoft has rolled out quite a good number of gaming versions over the years to keep its users. Game lovers are kept happy from Xbox to Xbox 360, Xbox One, and finally, the latest release, the Xbox series. Its versions have taken it over the ranks to become one of the best in the gaming industry. Users have also come to realize the charm that comes with gaming consoles. Quality in entertainment has always been and continues to remain the mantra for Microsoft game versions.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the latest best among the Xbox versions?

How much has Microsoft made from gaming in 2023?

What version of the Xbox console is hard to find?

Sources

The post Xbox User Statistics – How Many People Use Xbox in 2023? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/xbox-user-statistics/feed/ 0
Video Conferencing Market Statistics https://techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics/#respond Wed, 20 Dec 2023 08:14:34 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3530675 People in business meeting with video conference

Video conferencing market statistics have become prevalent in the last few years thanks to the unprecedented use of the services during the pandemic and the major subsequent shift to hybrid...

The post Video Conferencing Market Statistics appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
People in business meeting with video conference
Global adoption of video conferencing marks a revolution in the workplace.

Video conferencing market statistics have become prevalent in the last few years thanks to the unprecedented use of the services during the pandemic and the major subsequent shift to hybrid work.

The level of growth of video conferencing services made them a cornerstone of contemporary collaboration.

The mass adoption is precisely the reason why we put together this guide to video conferencing market statistics, as we believe marketers should pay close attention to this trend in the collaboration industry.

In this guide, we’ll highlight the key video conferencing market players and their respective market shares and revenues, the trends and statistics across different regions, and consider some of the possible future video conferencing market trends.

Let’s dive in.

Key Video Conferencing Market Statistics

  1. By 2032, the value of the video conference market is expected to grow to reach $22.26 billion, with a CAGR of 12.30%.
  2. In 2022, the worldwide number of WhatsApp Business users (messenger and video) surpassed 1.26 billion users, with the APAC region having the highest number (808.17 million).
  3. In 2023, Zoom’s revenue increased by 6.9% from 2022, reaching $4.39 billion.
  4. In Q2 of 2020, Microsoft Teams had the highest number of downloads to date, namely 70.43 million.
  5. Cisco Webex had 650 million monthly participants in meetings in 2021, which, on average, amounts to 21.7 million daily participants in meetings.
  6. North America is the biggest region in the world in terms of video conferencing, taking up a 41% share of the entire global market in 2022.
  7. The APAC video conferencing market is  expected to reach $6.8 billion in 2026.

Video Conferencing Market Value & Share

First, we’d like to take a look at the overall value of the video conferencing market across the years and the market share of different providers.

Market Value

video conferencing market size 2022-2027
Source: Precedence Research

According to Precedence Research, the value of the video conferencing market was estimated to be $7.01 billion in 2022. By 2032, the figure is expected to grow to reach $22.26 billion, with a CAGR of 12.30%.

The market encompasses both hardware and software products and solutions, with 40% of the market being held by cloud companies and 60% by on-premises solutions, as of 2021

In the next section, we’ll look at the market shares of the key video conferencing market players.

Market Share

Pie charts showing video communications services market share from 2020 to 2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics

As you can see from the infographic above, the video conference market is home to several dominant players, namely Microsoft Teams, Zoom, and Cisco. Their individual popularity fluctuated through time, and we’ll dive into each of these vendors in the next section to learn more.

In terms of market penetration, statistics tell us that almost two-thirds of companies used at least one video conferencing tool in 2022, with Zoom being the most popular tool.

Biggest Video Conferencing Market Players

Graph showcasing the top business conferencing solutions worldwide by downloads in 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics

In this section, we’ll take a look at some of the most popular video conferencing solutions worldwide. As you can see above, WhatsApp Business, Zoom, Teams, and Google Meet were the most popular business conferencing tools in 2022.

WhatsApp Business

Given the ubiquity of Meta’s WhatsApp software among consumers, it’s no surprise that it’s also been widely adopted for business purposes, including customer discussions over text messages and video conferencing. We’ll now take a look at the software’s user and revenue statistics.

Downloads & Users

whatsapp business users
Source: Statista

In 2022, the worldwide number of WhatsApp Business users (messenger and video) surpassed 1.26 billion users, with the APAC region having the highest number (808.17 million). As of June 2023, the conferencing software has 200 million monthly active users (MAUs).

The number of downloads of WhatsApp Business reached 283.1 million that year, 73.5 million more than in 2021.

Revenue

Graph of WhatsApp regional revenue in 2022
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics

The total revenue of WhatsApp business in 2022 was $333.6 million. And, as you can see from the infographic above, APAC was the most lucrative region for WhatsApp Business, having made $127.1 million in 2022. 

However, Europe was the software’s most lucrative market in terms of the average revenue per user (ARPU), which in that region was $1.31 in 2022. APAC’s ARPU in the same year was just $0.16.

Zoom

Pie chart of conferencing software market share in 2023
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics

According to the research by Email Tester Tool, Zoom was the most popular video conferencing tool in 80 countries in 2022, twice as many as in 2021. These countries include all North American countries, the UK, the Nordics, and Australia, among others. Let’s take a look at its usage and revenue statistics.

Downloads & Users

Number of Zoom customers
Source: Statista

In the first months of the COVID-19 pandemic, Zoom had almost 300 million daily meeting participants. They have customers from across various industries and sectors, of all sizes.

Stats show that, in 2021, Zoom’s number of customers with over 10 employees grew by 385,000, reaching 467,100 customers. In 2022, this figure grew even more, reaching almost 510,000 enterprise clients.

Revenue

Graph of Zoom revenue worldwide from 2019 to 2023
Source: Statista

Understandably, the revenue of Zoom had increased significantly over the last three years, thanks to the unprecedented usage during the pandemic. In 2021, it jumped from $622.7 million to $2.65 billion, and then it almost doubled in 2022, reaching a total $4.1 billion.

The 2023 revenue figures tell us that it’s increased by 6.9%, reaching $4.39 billion. These figures suggest that Zoom’s video conferencing revenue is much higher than WhatsApp Business’.

Zoom investors’ report for the latest quarter suggests the revenue of almost $1.138 billion, up 3.2% YoY.

Microsoft Teams

The Microsoft Teams tool is another popular video conferencing and collaboration software. It’s part of the Microsoft Office 365 suite of collaboration tools, provided in most Microsoft packages.

According to Email Tool Tester, it was the biggest video conferencing tool in 41 countries in 2021, but in 2022, it only topped the charts in seven countries, including Poland and Jordan. Despite the Office suite being virtually indispensable to any modern business, people still prefer Zoom over Teams, on average.

Downloads & Users

Daily active users Microsoft Teams
Source: Statista

Just like Zoom and WhatsApp Business, the downloads of Microsoft Teams skyrocketed in the last few years. In Q2 of 2020, it saw the highest number of downloads to date, 70.43 million, to be precise. The EMEA region experienced the most downloads in that period (27.41 million).

However, the number of downloads started dropping every quarter after that, with only 26.44 million downloads in Q3 of 2023. In this quarter, the Americas were downloading Teams the most, with 9.87 million downloads coming from region.

It’s hard to estimate how many companies use Microsoft Teams alone. However, statistics tell us that Office 365, which is the family of SaaS Teams belongs to, has over 2.6 million corporate clients, as of 2023. The highest number of users is concentrated in the US, with 1.35 million.

In terms of daily active users, Microsoft Team had 270 million DAUs in 2022. That figure amounts to a 60% increase from the number of DAUs in 2021 (145 million).

Revenue

Pie chart showcasing the share of Microsoft's productivity segment
Like this infographic? Feel free to use it on your website or blog, but please remember to give us credit by linking back to techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics

Since Microsoft Teams is part of the company’s productivity and business processes segment, which includes Office 365, it’s hard to estimate its revenue in isolation from the segment’s entire earnings.

According to the company’s investor report, the total revenue of Microsoft in FY 2023 was $211 billion.

When it came to the productivity segment (which includes Microsoft Teams), the fiscal year’s revenue was $69.27 billion. Therefore, the segment makes up almost 25% of Microsoft’s overall FY 2023 revenue.

Google Meet

Google’s Google Meet tool (formerly known as Google Hangouts) is the most popular video conferencing tool in 28 countries, including Brazil, India, and Italy. The tool is part of the Google G Suite, which also includes Google Drive and Gmail.

Downloads & Users

It’s hard to say how many people use Google Meet, given that the G suite workspace has over 3 billion users worldwide, and they all have access to the app. However, statistics tell us that as of 2020, Google Hangouts had 6 million paying customers.

Revenue

Google Revenue Segment Results
Source: Google

In terms of revenue, Google Meet comes under the Google Cloud revenue segment of the Internet giant. As of September 2023, the Google Cloud revenue was $8.41 billion, making up 12.4% of the overall Google Revenue for that period ($67.99 billion).

The overall Google Cloud Revenue figure amounts to a YoY increase of 20.2%.

Cisco Webex

Leading online communication services used on a regular basis worldwide as of March 2021
Source: Statista

The last video conferencing tool on our list is Cisco Webex. As of March 2021, it was the fifth-most popular digital communication tool, used by 7% of the world.

Downloads & Users

Cisco data
Source: Mio Dispatch

According to the information from Webex, they’ve reached 10 million users worldwide in April 2023 – up from 6 million the year before. Compared to the number of users of other video conference SaaS tools on the list, Webex has the fewest users. 

However, reports also say that Webex had 650 million monthly participants in meetings in 2021, which on average amounts to 21.7 million daily participants in meetings. That’s about 7.2% of Zoom’s relevant figure of 300 million daily meeting participants

In terms of paying corporate clients, Webex had 36,000 enterprises paying for the video conferencing service in 2021, compared to Zoom’s 467,000, so less than a 10th.

Revenue

cisco revenue
Source: Cisco

Cisco Webex is part of the company’s Collaboration revenue stream. According to Cisco’s latest reports for FY 2023, that segment received $4.05 billion in revenue in the aforementioned period. That figure is similar to Zoom’s revenue, but it’s a drop of 9% from the revenue earned in the previous period.

Regional Video Conferencing Statistics

video market share regions
Source: Precedence Research

We looked at the top players in the video conferencing market around the world. In this section, we’re going to focus on the regional video conferencing market statistics, shedding some light on how this dynamic industry has been evolving around the world.

North America

North America is the biggest region in the world in terms of video conferencing, taking up a 41% share of the entire global market in 2022, up from 39% in 2021. Data Horizon research predicts that it’ll remain the biggest market in the next few years, growing steadily until 2032.

Interestingly, the fastest-growing video conferencing market in the region is Canada.

Europe

Europe is another significant market for video conferencing development. By 2030, the region’s value of the video conferencing market is forecast to reach $22.7 billion.

Germany is the largest player in the European market of video collaboration tools. The country’s video conferencing market is expected to be worth $96.4 million by 2027.

APAC

Video conferencing market value in Asia-Pacific in 2021 and 2026
Source: Statista

North America might be the largest video conferencing market, but the APAC market is  growing at an exponential rate, and is expected to reach $6.8 billion in 2026. Grand View Research predicts a CAGR of over 14% in 2023-2030 in this market, as adoption of remote work is boosting the development of digital infrastructure in APAC.

We’ve taken a close look at the positions of the key players of the video conferencing market and its development around the world.

And, whilst we don’t possess a crystal ball that allows us to predict the future state of this market, we can make some educated guesses as to the upcoming trends, based on our research.

Here are some of the key trends we identified that can shape the video conferencing market of the future.

Prevalence of Hybrid Work

More and more employers are realizing the value of implementing a hybrid workplace.

Video conferencing tools have been instrumental to hybrid working development during COVID-19.

We believe that, in the future, the video conferencing market will continue catering to the needs of hybrid work environments, offering productivity and collaboration features for both in-office and remote workers.

AI, Automation & Personalization

Video conferencing tools are increasingly supported by AI and automation add-ons, such as note-taking tools, background noise cancellation, and facial recognition, to name a few.
These productivity tools add serious value to video conferencing solutions and we expect to see more of them in the coming months.

Additionally, we believe that personalization of video collaboration services will be on the up, just like in other industries.

For instance, customizable and branded layouts for companies and specific events, bespoke branding tailored to thought leaders, and branded virtual meeting spaces would be excellent examples of how the video conferencing market will become more user-centric.

Security

With cyber threats evolving every day, it’s logical that the video conferencing industry will be adopting tougher cybersecurity solutions, tailored to the landscape of tomorrow.

The implementation of advanced encryption protocols, secure E2E communication, and enhanced authentication mechanisms are a few of the add-ons we believe will be essentials for workplace collaboration vendorsto implement to protect users from data breaches and unauthorized access.

Closing Thoughts

We looked at the overall state of the video conferencing market today, and explored the key players involved. Additionally, we considered some of the possible future trends in that market. 

To conclude our analysis, we’d like to point out once more that the video conferencing market has experienced unprecedented development in the last few years, largely as a result of digital transformation.

Going digital has been both a consequence of, and a driving force behind, the shift to remote and hybrid work. With the workplace changing so drastically, the video conferencing market is changing with it, and we believe that it’s not going to slow down any time soon.

Sources, click to expand and see the full list
  1. Zoom Video Communications, Inc. – statistics & facts (Statista)
  2. Which of the following has your organization invested in specifically to support your remote workforce during COVID-19? (Statista)
  3. Which of the following has your organization invested in specifically to support your remote workforce during COVID-19? (Statista)
  4. Number of daily active users (DAU) of Microsoft Teams worldwide as of 2022 (Statista)
  5. Global unified communications and collaboration market share from 2020 to 2023, by vendor and quarter (Statista)
  6. Zoom Video Communication’s revenue worldwide from fiscal year 2019 to 2023 (Statista)
  7. Zoom Video Communication’s revenue worldwide from fiscal year 2019 to 2023 (Statista)
  8. Market share of videoconferencing software worldwide in 2023, by program (Statista)
  9. Market share of major office productivity software worldwide in 2022 (Statista)
  10. Leading business apps worldwide in 2022, by downloads (Statista)
  11. Downloads of Zoom mobile app worldwide from 3rd quarter of 2019 to 2nd quarter 2023, by region (Statista)
  12. Cumulative installs of leading video conferencing apps Zoom, Microsoft Teams, and Google Meet worldwide from 1st quarter 2020 to 2nd quarter 2021 (Statista)
  13. Downloads of Microsoft Teams mobile app worldwide from 3rd quarter 2019 to 2nd quarter 2023, by region (Statista)
  14. Leading business apps in the United States in 2022, by downloads (Statista)
  15. Leading online communication services used on a regular basis worldwide as of March 2021 (Statista)
  16. Zoom’s number of customers with more than 10 employees worldwide from fiscal year 2019 to 2022 (Statista)
  17. Number of WhatsApp users worldwide interacting via WhatsApp Business in 2022, by region (Statista)
  18. Number of WhatsApp Business downloads worldwide from 2018 to 2022 (Statista)
  19. Number of WhatsApp Business monthly active users (MAU) worldwide in 2020 and 2023 (Statista)
  20. WhatsApp Business revenues generated worldwide in 2022, by region (Statista)
  21. WhatsApp Business average revenue per user (ARPU) in 2022, by region (Statista)
  22. Number of companies using Office 365 worldwide as of February 2023, by leading country (Statista)
  23. Video conferencing market value in Asia-Pacific in 2021 and 2026 (Statista)
  24. 100 Video Conferencing Statistics and Facts for the 2022 Market (Sonary)
  25. Video Conferencing Market (By Component: Hardware, Software, Services; By Deployment: On-premise, Cloud; By Application: Consumer, Enterprise; By Conference Type: Telepresence System, Integrated System, Desktop System, Service-based System; By Enterprises Size: Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs), Large Enterprises) – Global Industry Analysis, Size, Share, Growth, Trends, Regional Outlook, and Forecast 2023-2032 (Precedence Research)
  26. Video Conferencing Market Demands, Trends & Report to 2030 (Straits Research)
  27. Europe Video Conferencing Market (Straits Research)
  28. Video Conferencing Market Size, Share & Trends Analysis Report By Component (Hardware, Software), By Deployment (On-premise, Cloud), By Enterprise Size, By Application, By End-use, By Region, And Segment Forecasts, 2022 – 2030 (Grand View Research)
  29. Video Conferencing Market By Component , Application, Deployment Mode, Vertical, and Region – Global Forecast to 2027 (Markets and Markets) 
  30. Video Conferencing Market Size, Growth, Share, Statistics Report, by Component ,, Deployment, Enterprise Type, Conference Type, Industry, Region and Segment Forecasts, 2023-2032 (DHR)
  31. The Most Popular Video Call Conferencing Platforms Worldwide (Email Tool Tester)
  32. Zoom Annual Report Fiscal 2023 (Zoom)
  33. Zoom Video Communications Reports Financial Results for the Third Quarter of Fiscal Year 2024 (Zoom)
  34. A Year Later: Reflecting and Looking Ahead (Zoom)
  35. Annual Report 2023 (Microsoft)
  36. Alphabet Announces Third Quarter 2023 Results (Google)
  37. Cisco beats earnings and revenue estimates, boosts full-year guidance (CNBC)
  38. Delivering purposeful calling experiences to over 10 million users worldwide (Webex)
  39. The State Of Workplace Messaging 2023: Microsoft Teams, Webex, & More (Mio Dispatch)
  40. CISCO REPORTS FOURTH QUARTER AND FISCAL YEAR 2023 EARNINGS (Cisco)

The post Video Conferencing Market Statistics appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/video-conferencing-market-statistics/feed/ 0
Cocaine Use Statistics: How Many People Take Cocaine in 2023? https://techreport.com/statistics/cocaine-use-statistics/ https://techreport.com/statistics/cocaine-use-statistics/#respond Tue, 19 Dec 2023 13:15:41 +0000 https://techreport.com/?p=3530550 Cocaine User Statistics

The white powdered substance called cocaine is most often taken for relaxation (or many say so in surveys). Users who are addicted to cocaine claim to be more relaxed after...

The post Cocaine Use Statistics: How Many People Take Cocaine in 2023? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
Cocaine User Statistics

The white powdered substance called cocaine is most often taken for relaxation (or many say so in surveys). Users who are addicted to cocaine claim to be more relaxed after taking a sniff of it. It is an illegal drug that has refused to be pulled out from our society. Each year, more people add to the already large number of addicts. Globally, about 22 million people use cocaine, with the American continent having the highest number.

Sellers continue to push it to the market since it brings in lots of money at short notice. It may be surprising to some people why a drug with many health hazards still has a large number of users. The answer is not farfetched as we will look at relative issues on its widespread usage. This article covers everything you need to know. Keep reading to learn the most important cocaine statistics of 2023.

Cocaine User Statistics

Key Cocaine User Statistics 

  • Cocaine is a coca plant that is planted mostly in South American areas. 
  • As many as 41 million people consider cocaine as their lifeline.
  • Cocaine in 2021 came second place for drugs that were misused in the United States.
  • Adults who fall within the age bracket of 18 and 25 make up the largest number of cocaine addicts.
  • Columbia has remained an unbeaten leader in the trafficking of cocaine in Europe.
  • The deaths of about 24,486 people in 2021 can be tied to cocaine use

General Cocaine Statistics

General Cocaine Statistics

1. Cocaine is a Plant Planted Mostly in South American Areas.

Cocaine is highly addictive and causes much harm to the human body. It is sold either in a powder form or what is called crack cocaine. It is a narcotic drug that continues to draw to itself both males and females. The United States is one place that entertains and embraces the presence of both cocaine users and traffickers. Cocaine was not widely known until the beginning of the 1900s when its anesthetic use became known. It gained attention all of a sudden in the 1970s to become a sought-after drug.

The plant coca is planted mainly in Columbia, Bolivia, and Peru. People in South America are known for chewing the Erythroxylon coca to quash appetites, arouse happiness, and help solve digestion problems. The goodness of coca was abused and caused the death of Len Bias (a well-known undergraduate footballer) in 1986. His death made people conscious of the danger cocaine poses to us. Erythroxylon coca has been abused; some could call it a curse rather than a blessing. 

2. As Large as 41 Million People Consider Cocaine As Their Lifeline.

Substance Abuse established a fact from its findings in 2020 on the high use of cocaine. As contained in its report, more than 41 million people who are 18 years and above take cocaine as their lifeline. The death rate also moved up to 70,237 from an overdose of drugs in 2017. Cocaine had its share of 32.9% of deaths over that time. Substance Abuse findings summarize that cocaine has caused a hike in the number of deaths. 

3. Cocaine in 2021 Came Second Place for Drugs That Were Misused in the United States.

Users of cocaine still keep on taking it in, even with the publicity from health agencies. There were 40.9 million persons in the United States alone who had tasted cocaine in 2021. It will be incomplete, not to mention the increase in deaths from cocaine intake during the period. Within the days in 2021, about 24,488 deaths occurred from an overdose of cocaine. This high death rate from cocaine use brought it forward to second place. 

4. Adults Who Fall Within the Age Bracket of 18 and 25 Make Up the Largest Number of Cocaine Addicts.

Addicts of cocaine have been on the rise since 2013 in the United States. It is because the drug is available anywhere. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention reported that about 1.9% of teens who were 12 to 17 years old used cocaine in 2018. Those who are 18 years above have a share of 5.6% of drug abuse cases. In 2016 and 2017, people who were from 18 years to 25 years of age had the highest chunk of cocaine users. 

5. Columbia Still Takes the Lead in the Trafficking of Cocaine in Europe.

The planting of coca rose as high as 35% from 2020 to 2021. All fingers point to new markets in central and west Africa as a cause for this rise. It’s known from reports that North America and Europe are the biggest drivers of the cocaine market. Central America, South America, and the Caribbean region trail this.  

6. Cocaine Use is the Reason for the Deaths of About 24,486 People in 2021.

The death roll call of cocaine addicts is slowly but surely rising as many are yet to hand off from it. It grew from what it was (6,784) in 2015 to over twice at 15,883 in 2019.  The rate of increase didn’t stop there but rose to 24,486 deaths in 2021. Little surprise, one must add, as cocaine barons keep pushing it into the hands of the young ones. 

Cocaine User Statistics

Cocaine Usage Statistics

7. There Have Been 39.3 Million Cocaine Users Within 11 Years.

The number of people in 2009 taking cocaine kept on increasing yearly till it got to 39.7 million. Quite a large number, you may think. But that’s how large the number of cocaine users we had in the United States. This was shocking as there was an additional 3.4 million increase to the 36.7 million people in 2009.

8. About 2% of Americans Claim That they Took Cocaine in 2020.

Small, you might say, but that is a whole lot from a country’s population. It means that over 5 million people have, at some point in their lives, sniffed in cocaine in 2020.

9. About 24,500 Deaths Pointed Fingers to Cocaine in 2021.

The number of deaths that occurred in the United States alone in 2021 summed at 24,500. Most of the deaths during that period were males, or better stated, the number of men who died over the period was twice that of females.

10. About 41 Million Americans in 2021 Had Tasted Cocaine in 2021.

It seems by statistics that as the years go by, the number of addicts is barely reducing. In 2021, we had a record of around 41 million persons who knew the taste of cocaine in the United States. The figures are against the backdrop that more persons will retire from its use with awareness

11. Just 1.4% of Students in High School Owned Up to Having Taken a Bit of Cocaine.

Awareness campaigns are slowly making progress in the lives of high school students. As low as 1.4% of students in high school have had a taste of cocaine. Despite this feat of success, one shouldn’t fail to remember that 17% of high school students feel cocaine is as simple as a cake to get. 

Cocaine Users Demographics

Cocaine Users Demographics

12. Black Americans Partake More in Crack Trafficking, by 83%.

Cocaine affects the black community more than the white Americans. Even with the higher number of arrests made every day, we still have a large number of African Americans trafficking drugs. Persons who sell crack cocaine place themselves at a higher risk. Many still sell crack cocaine even with the higher sentence that it attracts. 

13. Strangely, About 1.9% of Teens Between 12 and 17 Years Old Use Cocaine.

The percentage of youngsters in a Center for Disease Control and Prevention 2016 study overwhelms the heart. In a bid to sell their merchandise, cocaine traffickers push it into the hands of the young ones. About 1.9% of teenagers in the research of 2018 had at some point laid fingers on cocaine

14. 3.8% of Young Adults Between 26 Years and 34 Took Cocaine in 2016.

Old habits die hard, and this is the case for many who have laid their fingers on cocaine at an early age. The research made by the CDC showed that 3.8% of adults between 26 and 34 years of age used cocaine in 2016. 

15. The Effects of Cocaine Use Show Faster in Females than Males.

Females are more sensitive to the composition and bodily harm that cocaine causes than males.

16. Of Every 5 Persons, Only 1 Becomes a Lover of Cocaine.

Only a few number of persons who take cocaine believe they cannot live without it. This is because cocaine prompts serotonin with dopamine in the human brain. Addiction can only happen when the level of dopamine is more than that of the serotonin in the body. We see with this analysis that not everyone can become addicted since our bodies react differently to drugs. 

Method of Taking Cocaine

Method of Taking Cocaine

It is not uncommon to hear many say that they do not know how to take cocaine. You will be learning in this section the various ways through which people take cocaine. Before going into details, you need to know that cocaine is the third most illegal drug in the United States

It stands as the second most illicit drug in use in other countries of the world. Four major attributes of this drug are that it gives users some mirage of confidence, bliss, and the feeling of being unstoppable. It is little wonder many become addicted to its use. These are some methods of how people take cocaine:

Smoking– The method appears more complex than others as it is taken in plain form or called crack. It gives users that tingling feeling of bliss. A feeling of being on cloud 9 comes up, and the person thinks he or herself is on top of the world. After the feeling disappears, one becomes nervous and seeks a repeat experience. 

Snorting –  This method is a popular choice for many users. This rush of excitement comes up within a person in secondsThe downside of this method is that it wears off soon after, and one wants a repeat. 

Injecting – Chronic users are the main users of this technique. It poses the highest health risk and can land a person in a mental home. 

Swallowing – The effect of taking cocaine by swallowing is not that effective as its flow to the bloodstream is very slow. Mostly people who traffic drugs to far distances use this method.

Treatment Methods

Treatment Methods

There is hope for treating cocaine addiction. Some of the known methods of treating cocaine addiction are:

  • Cognitive behavioral method.
  • Engaging in social programs.
  • Going all out in religious programs.
  • Attending social events.

Conclusion

Cocaine is a stimulant for many young ones who take it just to relax out with their friends. The word is spreading fast on the dangers of using cocaine, yet we still have our young ones using it. The young ones in our present-day partially listen to health talks from experts. A small percentage of young adults and teenagers are still taking cocaine.

Support groups and treatment centers have their doors open to welcome as many who need help out of their addiction. Awareness campaigns are gearing up in countries to see that drug trafficking and intake are conquered. 

FAQs

What is cocaine?

What are some of the effects of cocaine on the body?

What happens when one chooses to stop cocaine?

Sources

The post Cocaine Use Statistics: How Many People Take Cocaine in 2023? appeared first on The Tech Report.

]]>
https://techreport.com/statistics/cocaine-use-statistics/feed/ 0